MRA4-2 Manual

Manual Directional Feeder Protection
MRA4
Software-Version: 3.0.b
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Revision: C
English
MRA4 Functional Overview
MRA4 Functional Overview
MRA4 1(0)
27A
Metering, Statistics
and Demand
59A
79
Current and Volt:
59N unbalance, %THD and
THD, Fund. and RMS,
74 50 Max/Min/Avg, phasors
46 50P 51P Inrush LOP Q(U) UFLS 67P
TC BF and angles
3 Power:
50 51
CTS SOTF CLPU Fund. and RMS, P, Q,
Ns Ns S, PF
25
1 Fault recorder
67
LVRT 47 55 67N
Ns
Event recorder
3(4)
60 81 *
27 59 78V 81R 50N 51N 32 51V 51C Disturbance recorder
FL U/O *
IRIG-B00X Control Programmable Logic Trend recorder
SNTP Switchgear Wear Intertripping * = Via Adaptive Parameters
Option Standard
2 MRA4 DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Order Code
Order Code
Directional Feeder Protection

(Version 2 with USB, enhanced MRA4 -2
communication options and new front plate)
Digital Binary Large
Housing
Inputs output relays display
8 7 B2 - A
16 13 B2 - D
Hardware variant 2
Phase Current 5A/1A, Ground Current 5 A/1 A 0
Phase Current 5A/1A, Sensitive Ground Current 5 A/1 A 1
Housing and mounting
Door mounting A
Door mounting 19” (flush mounting) B
Communication protocol
Without protocol A
Modbus RTU, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 RTU | RS485/terminals B*
Modbus TCP, DNP3.0 TCP/UDP | Ethernet 100 MB/RJ45 C*
Profibus-DP | optic fiber/ST-connector D*
Profibus-DP | RS485/D-SUB E*
Modbus RTU, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 RTU | optic fiber/ST-connector F*
Modbus RTU, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 RTU | RS485/D-SUB G*
IEC61850, Modbus TCP, DNP3.0 TCP/UDP | Ethernet 100MB/RJ45 H*
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3.0 RTU | RS485/terminals
I*
Modbus TCP, DNP3.0 TCP/UDP | Ethernet 100 MB/RJ45
IEC61850, Modbus TCP, DNP3.0 TCP/UDP | Optical Ethernet 100MB/LC duplex connector K*
Modbus TCP, DNP3.0 TCP/UDP | Optical Ethernet 100MB/LC duplex connector L*
Harsh Environment Option
None A
Conformal Coating B
Available menu languages
Standard English/German/Spanish/Russian/Polish/Portuguese/French
* Within every communication option only one communication protocol is usable.

Smart view can be used in parallel via the Ethernet interface (RJ45).
The parameterizing- and disturbance analyzing software Smart view is included in the delivery of HighPROTEC
devices.
Order Code
All devices are equipped with an IRIG-B interface for Time Synchronization.
ANSI: 50, 51, 67, 51C, 51V, 50N, 51N, 67N, 46, 49, 27, 59, 59N, 81U/O, 60FL, 79, 86, 50BF,
74TC, 81R, 78, 47, 60FL, 60L, 32F, 37F, 32Q, 37Q, 37QR, 32S, 37S, 37R, 55, 51C, LVRT
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
MRA4 Functional Overview............................................................................................................................... 2
Order Code........................................................................................................................................................ 3
Table of Contents.............................................................................................................................................. 5
Comments on the Manual................................................................................................................................ 10
Information Concerning Liability and Warranty ..................................................................................................... 10
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................................ 11
Scope of Delivery ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Storage.................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Important Information ............................................................................................................................................ 16
Symbols................................................................................................................................................................. 17
General Conventions............................................................................................................................................. 19
Load Reference Arrow System.............................................................................................................................. 24
Device............................................................................................................................................................. 25
Device Planning..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Device Planning Parameters of the Device............................................................................................................ 26
Installation and Connection ............................................................................................................................. 28
Three-Side-View - 19”........................................................................................................................................... 28
Three-Side-View - 8-Pushbutton Version.............................................................................................................. 29
Installation Diagram 8-Pushbutton Version............................................................................................................ 30
Assembly Groups.................................................................................................................................................. 31
Grounding.............................................................................................................................................................. 31
Legend for Wiring Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 32
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs...................................................................................................... 34
Slot X2: Relay Output Card................................................................................................................................... 38
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs.................................................................................................... 41
Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs.................................................................................................... 52
Slot X5: Relay Output Card................................................................................................................................... 62
Slot X6: Digital Inputs............................................................................................................................................ 63
Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................................................... 64
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface................................................................................................................................. 66
Slot X103: Data Communication............................................................................................................................ 68
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact.................................................................................................... 76
Navigation - Operation .................................................................................................................................... 79
Basic Menu Control .............................................................................................................................................. 84
Input, Output and LED Settings....................................................................................................................... 85
Configuration of the Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................... 85
Output Relays Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 93
OR-6 X.................................................................................................................................................................. 97
LED configuration................................................................................................................................................ 135
Smart View.................................................................................................................................................... 139
Measuring Values.......................................................................................................................................... 140
Read out Measured Values................................................................................................................................. 140
Power - Measured Values................................................................................................................................... 149
Energy Counter.............................................................................................................................................. 151
Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module.............................................................................................. 151
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module .............................................................................................. 151
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)............................................................................152
Statistics........................................................................................................................................................ 153
Configuration of the Minimum and Maximum Values........................................................................................... 153
Configuration of the Average Value Calculation................................................................................................... 154
Table of Contents
Direct Commands................................................................................................................................................ 156

Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module........................................................................................ 156
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module........................................................................................................ 160
Signals of the Statistics Module........................................................................................................................... 161
Counters of the Module Statistics........................................................................................................................ 161
System Alarms............................................................................................................................................... 171
Demand Management......................................................................................................................................... 171
Peak Values........................................................................................................................................................ 174
Min. and Max. Values.......................................................................................................................................... 174
THD Protection.................................................................................................................................................... 175
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management.................................................................................175
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)..............................................................................175
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management..................................................................................176
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management................................................................................................ 178
Acknowledgments.......................................................................................................................................... 179
Manual Acknowledgment..................................................................................................................................... 180
External Acknowledgments................................................................................................................................. 181
Manual Resets .................................................................................................................................................... 182
Reset to Factory Defaults.................................................................................................................................... 182
Status Display ............................................................................................................................................... 183
Operating Panel (HMI)................................................................................................................................... 184
Special Parameters of the Panel......................................................................................................................... 184
Direct Commands of the Panel............................................................................................................................ 184
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel.......................................................................................................... 184
Recorders...................................................................................................................................................... 185
Disturbance Recorder ......................................................................................................................................... 185
Fault Recorder .................................................................................................................................................... 193
Event Recorder ................................................................................................................................................... 200
Trend Recorder................................................................................................................................................... 201
Communication Protocols.............................................................................................................................. 207
SCADA Interface................................................................................................................................................. 207
TCP/IP Parameter............................................................................................................................................... 208
Modbus®............................................................................................................................................................. 209
Profibus............................................................................................................................................................... 230
IEC60870-5-103.................................................................................................................................................. 243
IEC61850............................................................................................................................................................. 247
DNP3................................................................................................................................................................... 260
Time Synchronisation.................................................................................................................................... 301
SNTP................................................................................................................................................................... 306
IRIG-B00X........................................................................................................................................................... 313
Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 318
Parameter Definitions.......................................................................................................................................... 318
Access Authorizations (access areas)................................................................................................................. 337
Passwords – Areas.............................................................................................................................................. 337
How to find out what access areas/levels are unlocked?.....................................................................................339
Unlocking Access Areas...................................................................................................................................... 340
Changing Passwords........................................................................................................................................... 340
Password Entry at the Panel............................................................................................................................... 341
Password Forgotten ........................................................................................................................................... 341
Parameter Setting at the HMI.............................................................................................................................. 342
Setting Groups..................................................................................................................................................... 346
Setting Lock......................................................................................................................................................... 356
Device Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 357
Table of Contents
Date and Time..................................................................................................................................................... 357

Version................................................................................................................................................................ 357
Display of ANSI-Codes........................................................................................................................................ 357
TCP/IP Settings................................................................................................................................................... 357
Direct Commands of the System Module............................................................................................................. 358
Global Protection Parameters of the System....................................................................................................... 359
System Module Input States................................................................................................................................ 361
System Module Signals....................................................................................................................................... 362
Special Values of the System Module.................................................................................................................. 363
Field Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 364
General Field Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 364
Field Parameters – Current Related.................................................................................................................... 365
Field Parameters – Voltage Related.................................................................................................................... 366
Blockings....................................................................................................................................................... 369
Permanent Blocking............................................................................................................................................. 369
Temporary Blocking............................................................................................................................................. 369
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module...........................................................371
Activate, Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions.........................................................372
Module: Protection (Prot)............................................................................................................................... 376
Blocking all Protective Elements enduringly........................................................................................................ 376
Blocking all Protective Elements temporarily....................................................................................................... 376
Blocking all Trip Commands enduringly............................................................................................................... 377
Blocking all Trip Commands temporarily.............................................................................................................. 377
General Alarms and General Trips...................................................................................................................... 379
Direct Commands of the Protection Module........................................................................................................ 384
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module .....................................................................................384
Protection Module Input States............................................................................................................................ 385
Protection Module Signals (Output States).......................................................................................................... 385
Protection Module Values.................................................................................................................................... 386
Switchgear/Breaker – Manager...................................................................................................................... 387
Single Line Diagram............................................................................................................................................ 387
Switchgear Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 387
Switchgear Wear................................................................................................................................................. 398
Control Parameters............................................................................................................................................. 405
Controlled Circuit Breaker.................................................................................................................................... 416
Control - Example: Switching of a Circuit Breaker............................................................................................... 430
Protective Elements....................................................................................................................................... 433
Interconnection.................................................................................................................................................... 433
I - Overcurrent Protection [50, 51,51Q, 51V, 67].................................................................................................. 434
IH2 - Inrush.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
Directional Features for Measured Ground Fault Elements 50N/51N..................................................................472
Directional Features for Calculated (IG calc) Ground Fault 50N/51N..................................................................474
IG - Ground Fault [50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]........................................................................................................... 477
I2> and %I2/I1> - Unbalanced Load [46]............................................................................................................. 502
ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [49]..................................................................................................... 510
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault.................................................................................................................................... 517
CLPU - Cold Load Pickup.................................................................................................................................... 523
AR - Automatic Reclosure [79]............................................................................................................................ 531
V - Voltage Protection [27,59].............................................................................................................................. 565
VG, VX - Voltage Supervision [27A, 27TN/59N, 59A].......................................................................................... 574
f - Frequency [81O/U, 78, 81R]............................................................................................................................ 583
V 012 – Voltage Asymmetry [47].......................................................................................................................... 607
Sync - Synchrocheck [25].................................................................................................................................... 613
Table of Contents
Q->&V< Reactive-Power/Undervoltage Protection.............................................................................................. 637

Reconnection Module.......................................................................................................................................... 648
UFLS Under Frequency Load Shedding.............................................................................................................. 672
LVRT – Low Voltage Ride Through [27(t)]........................................................................................................... 689
Intertripping (Remote).......................................................................................................................................... 703
PQS - Power [32, 37]........................................................................................................................................... 709
PF - Power Factor [55]........................................................................................................................................ 729
ExP - External Protection..................................................................................................................................... 736
Supervision.................................................................................................................................................... 742
CBF- Circuit Breaker Failure [50BF*/62BF]......................................................................................................... 742
TCS - Trip Circuit Supervision [74TC].................................................................................................................. 764
CTS - Current Transformer Supervision [60L]..................................................................................................... 771
LOP - Loss of Potential........................................................................................................................................ 777
Self Supervision................................................................................................................................................... 788
Programmable Logic...................................................................................................................................... 793
General Description............................................................................................................................................. 793
Programmable Logic at the Panel........................................................................................................................ 797
Commissioning ............................................................................................................................................. 800
Commissioning/Protection Test .......................................................................................................................... 801
Putting out of Operation – Plug out the Relay...................................................................................................... 802
Service and Commissioning Support............................................................................................................. 803
General................................................................................................................................................................ 803
Forcing the Relay Output Contacts...................................................................................................................... 804
Forcing RTDs*..................................................................................................................................................... 806
Forcing Analog Outputs*...................................................................................................................................... 807
Forcing Analog Inputs*........................................................................................................................................ 808
Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*............................................................................................................................ 809
Technical Data .............................................................................................................................................. 823
Climatic Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................... 823
Degree of Protection EN 60529........................................................................................................................... 823
Routine Test........................................................................................................................................................ 823
Housing............................................................................................................................................................... 824
Current and Earth Current Measurement............................................................................................................ 825
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement....................................................................................................... 826
Frequency Measurement .................................................................................................................................... 826
Voltage Supply.................................................................................................................................................... 827
Power Consumption............................................................................................................................................ 827
Display................................................................................................................................................................. 828
Front Interface RS232......................................................................................................................................... 828
Real Time Clock.................................................................................................................................................. 828
Digital Inputs........................................................................................................................................................ 829
Binary Output Relays........................................................................................................................................... 830
Supervision Contact (SC).................................................................................................................................... 830
Time Synchronization IRIG.................................................................................................................................. 831
RS485*................................................................................................................................................................ 831
Fibre Optic*.......................................................................................................................................................... 831
Optical Fast Ethernet*.......................................................................................................................................... 831
URTD-Interface*.................................................................................................................................................. 831
Boot phase.......................................................................................................................................................... 831
Servicing and Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 832
Standards...................................................................................................................................................... 834
Approvals............................................................................................................................................................ 834
Design Standards................................................................................................................................................ 834
Table of Contents
High Voltage Tests ............................................................................................................................................. 835

EMC Immunity Tests........................................................................................................................................... 836
EMC Emission Tests........................................................................................................................................... 837
Environmental Tests............................................................................................................................................ 838
Environmental Tests............................................................................................................................................ 839
Mechanical Tests................................................................................................................................................. 840
General Lists................................................................................................................................................. 841
Assignment List .................................................................................................................................................. 841
List of the Digital Inputs....................................................................................................................................... 899
Signals of the Digital Inputs and Logic................................................................................................................. 900
Abbreviations, and Acronyms........................................................................................................................ 910
List of ANSI Codes........................................................................................................................................ 915
md5_1
md5_2
RMS Handoff: 0
File: generated\DOK-HB-MRA4-2E_C.odt
This manual applies to devices (version):
Version 3.0.b
Build: 27776
Comments on the Manual
Comments on the Manual

This manual explains in general the tasks of device planning, parameter setting, installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the HighPROTEC devices.
The manual serves as working basis for:
Engineers in the protection field,

commissioning engineers,
people dealing with setting, testing and maintenance of protection and control devices,
as well as trained personnel for electrical installations and power stations.
All functions concerning the type code will be defined. Should there be a description of any functions, parameters or
inputs/outputs which do not apply to the device in use, please ignore that information.
All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experience and
observations.
This manual describes the (optionally) full featured versions of the devices.
All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued.
We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without changing this
manual and without previous notice. Hence no claim can be brought based on the information and descriptions this
manual includes.
Text, graphic and formulae do not always apply to the actual delivery scope. The drawings and graphics are not
true to scale. We do not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by operating errors or
disregarding the directions of this manual.
No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form, unless Woodward Kempen
GmbH have approved in writing.
This user manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device. In case the device is passed on (sold) to
a third party, the manual has to be handed over as well.
Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel who need to be well aware
especially of the local safety regulations and have the necessary experience for working on electronic protection
devices and power installations (provided by evidence).
Information Concerning Liability and Warranty
Woodward does not accept any liability for damage resulting from conversions or changes carried out on the
device or planning (projecting) work, parameter setting or adjustment changes done by the customer.
The warranty expires after a device has been opened by others than Woodward specialists.
Warranty and liability conditions stated in Woodward General Terms and Conditions are not supplemented by the
above mentioned explanations.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
The signal definitions shown below serve the safety of life and limb as well as for the appropriate operating life of
the device.
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.
CAUTION, used with the safety alert symbol, indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury.
CAUTION, without the safety alert symbol, is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be
performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all
plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow instructions can
cause personal injury and/or property damage.
PROPER USE
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its

specified mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause
personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (1) constitute "misuse"
and/or "negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty thereby
excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage, and (2) invalidate
product certifications or listings.
The programmable devices subject to this manual are designed for

protection and also control of power installations and operational devices
that are fed by voltage sources with a fixed frequency, i.e. fixed at 50 or 60
Hertz. They are not intended for use with Variable Frequency Drives. The
devices are further designed for installation in low-voltage (LV)
compartments of medium voltage (MV) switchgear panels or in de-
centralized protection panels. The programming and parameterization has
to meet all requirements of the protection concept (of the equipment that is
to be protected). You must ensure that the device will properly recognize
and manage (e.g. switch off the circuit breaker) on the basis of your
programming and parameterization all operational conditions (failures). The
proper use requires a backup protection by an additional protective device.
Before starting any operation and after any modification of the
programming (parameterization) test make a documentary proof that your
programming and parameterization meets the requirements of your
protection concept.
The self-supervision contact has to be wired with the master

communication system (SCADA) in order to supervise and monitor the
state of health of the programmable protective device.
Typical applications for this product family/device line are for instance:
Feeder protection
Mains protection
Machine protection
Transformer Differential Protection
Any usage beyond these applications the devices are not designed for. This
applies also to the use as a partly completed machinery. The manufacturer
cannot be held liable for any resulting damage, the user alone bears the
risk for this. As to the appropriate use of the device: The technical data and
tolerances specified by Woodward have to be met.
OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was
produced. To verify that you have the latest revision, please visit the download
section of our website:
www.woodward.com
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service

representative to get the latest copy.
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness
All electronic equipment is electro static-sensitive, some components more

than others. To protect these components from electro static damage, you
must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic
discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the

static electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a
grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing
clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend
materials as much as possible because these do not store static
electric charges as much as synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or
Styrofoam cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane
wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays)
away from the control, the modules, and the work area as much as
possible.
4. Do not remove any printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the
control cabinet, follow these precautions:
Verify the safe isolation from supply. All connectors have to be
unplugged.
Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.
When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it.
Immediately after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet,
place it in the antistatic protective bag.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper

handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715,
Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit
Boards, and Modules.
Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by
Woodward is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Woodward unless
otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Woodward 2015 All Rights Reserved
Scope of Delivery
1 5 6 4
2 3
The delivery scope includes:
1
The transportation box
2
The protective device
3
The mounting nuts
4
The test report
5
The product CD that includes the manuals
6
The parameter and evaluation software Smart view
Please check the consignment for completeness on arrival (delivery note).
Please ascertain whether the type plate, connection diagram, type code and description of the device tally.
If you have any doubts please contact our Service Department (contact address to be found on the reverse of the
manual).
Storage
The devices must not be stored outdoors. The storing facilities have to be sufficiently ventilated and must be dry
(see Technical Data).
Important Information
In line with the customer’s requirement the devices are combined in a modular
way (in compliance with the order code). The terminal assignment of the device
can be found on the top of the device (wiring diagram).
17
Symbols
Setting value: Option/features to be realised in the future CB.Latched

<name>.I
inactive
active
Adaptive Parameter
Device planning: <name>

Parameter of a Module-Input with a
SelectionList/DropDown. An (1..n)
signal/output from the list or a pre-
<name>
defined value can be selected.
Direct Command
Signal: 1..n, Assignment List
Prot.I dir fwd
<name>
internal message <name>.*int Alm L1

Selection List
Measured Values: IG
Parameter of a Module-Input (with <name>

special values): An (1..n) output from the
Functional description: If the setting list will be assigned to the input no assignm ent 1
value "IE Dir n poss-> Nondir Trip" is
MRA4
"<name>.identifier". If the parameter is
set to "inactive" the output 1 is active set to "ItemNull", an "inactive"-signal will 1..n,
1..n,
Assignment
VeEnableList
IG.Dir n poss-
and output 2 is inactive. If the setting >Nondir Trip be given out. no assignment,1..n
value "IE Dir n poss-> Nondir Trip" is inactive 1
set to "active" the output 2 is active and
2
the output 1 is inactive. active
Limit value monitoring with three I/ In

analogue input values. Compares 3
analogue values with the set limit; IL1
output values are three different
binary values as a result of the
IL2
comparision. If the analogue signal
exceeds the limit I/In the
corresponding output signal becomes IL3
"φ "=Elements with complex functions "1".
A R.t-DP
"gray-box".
φ
t-DP 0 Limit value monitoring (Compared to V
<20%Vn
a fixed value). Compares a value with
the fixed set limit; output value is
binary as a result of the comparision.
If the signal exceeds the limit the
corresponding output signal becomes
"1".
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
18
& RS flip-flop a S 1 c
abcd b R1 1 d
And
0 0 Unchanged
0101
1010
>1 1101
Or
Time stage: A "1" at the Delay Timer Delay Timer
Exclusive-OR =1 t1 t1 t2
input starts the stage. If the
time <name>.t is expired t2
Negated input the output becomes "1" too. t1: Switch On Delay
The time stage will be reset t2: Switch Off Delay
Negated output by "0" at the input. Thus the

t1
output will be set to "0" at
t2
Band-pass (filter) the same time.
IH1
IH1
MRA4
Band-pass (filter)
IH2
IH2
Edge triggered counter
+ Counter increments with every rising
+ increment
edge. Output will be set as long as
R Reset R n<N. +
n<N
Quotient of analogue values R
IH2
IH1 + increment
R Reset
Time stage minimum pulse
width: The pulse width CB.t-TripCmd
<name>.t will be started if a 1
"1" is feed to the input. By t
starting <name>.t the output
Analog values becomes "1". If the time is
expired, the output becomes
"0" independent from the
input signal.
Analogue values
comparator
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
General Conventions
»Parameters are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and written in italic .«
»SIGNALS are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and small caps .«
[Paths are indicated by brackets.]
Software and Device names are written in italic.
Module and Instance (Element) names are displayed italic and underlined.
»Pushbuttons, Modes and Menu entries are indicated by right and left double arrow heads .«
1 2 3 Image References (Squares)
20
Output Signal 2
2 Input Signal
Please Refer To Diagram: Prot

Prot.available 1 name.TripCmd 15a
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings will lead to a general trip.
name.active 2 name.Trip L1 16
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings will lead to a general trip.

name.Blo TripCmd 3 name.Trip L1 16a

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings** will lead to a general trip.
name.active 4 name.Trip L1 16b
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2 will lead to a general trip.
IH2.Blo L1 5 name.Trip L2 17
IH2.Blo L2 6 name.Trip L2 17a
IH2.Blo L3 7 name.Trip L2 17b

MRA4
IH2.Blo IG 8 name.Trip L3 18
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
phase overcurrent will lead to a general trip.
name. Fault in projected direction 9 name.Trip L3 18a
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
Earth fault will lead to a general trip.
name. Fault in projected direction 10 name.Trip L3 18b

Please Refer To Diagram: CB will lead to a general trip.
CB.Trip CB 11 name.TripCmd 19
Please Refer To Diagram: VTS will lead to a general trip.
VTS.Alarm 12a name.TripCmd 19a

VTS.VTS.Ex FF VT 12b name.TripCmd 19b

VTS.VTS.Ex FF EVT 12c name.TripCmd 19c
Each alarm of a module (except from
supervision modules but including CBF) will Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
lead to a general alarm (collective alarm). will lead to a general trip.
name.Alarm 14 name.TripCmd 19d
Each trip of an active, trip authorized
protection module will lead to a general trip.
name.Trip 15
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
21
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
will lead to a general trip.
selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Trip L1 20 name.Alarm 27a
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VX
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
will lead to a general trip. selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Trip L2 21 name.Alarm 27b
name.Trip L3 22 name.Alarm 27c
name.Trip 23 name.Alarm 27d

Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VX Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general alarm (collective alarm). selective general alarm (collective alarm).
name.Alarm L1 24 name.Alarm L1 28
name.Alarm L1 24a name.Alarm L2 29
name.Alarm L1 24b name.Alarm L3 30
name.Alarm L2 25 name.Alarm 31
selective general alarm (collective alarm).
Prot.Blo TripCmd
MRA4
name.Alarm L2 25a 32
selective general alarm (collective alarm). Please Refer To Diagram: CB.CB Manager
name.Alarm L2 25b CB.Pos 33
name.Alarm L3 CB.Pos ON 34
26
name.Alarm L3 26a CB.Pos OFF 35
name.Alarm L3 26b CB.Pos Indeterm 36
name.Alarm 27 CB.Pos Disturb 37
Please Refer To Diagram: LOP.LOP Blo
LOP.LOP Blo 38a
Please Refer To Diagram: LOP.Ex FF VT

LOP.Ex FF VT 38b
Please Refer To Diagram: LOP.Ex FF EVT

LOP.Ex FF EVT 38c
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
22
Please Refer To Diagram: Q->&V<.Decoupling Distributed
Generator
Q->&V<.Decoupling Distributed Generator 39
Please Refer To Diagram: CTS.Alarm
CTS.Alarm 40
Please Refer To Diagram: SG.Prot ON
41
Please Refer To Diagram: SG.ON Cmd

SG.ON Cmd 42
Please Refer To Diagram: Analog values
AnIn[1].Value 43
AnIn[2].Value 44
AnIn[n].Value 45
MRA4
Trip Incomplete (Motor) Start Sequence 46
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Access Level
(Please refer to chapter [Parameter\Access Level])
Read Only-Lv0 Parameters can only be read within this level.
Prot-Lv1 This level enables execution of Resets and Acknowledgements
Prot-Lv2 This level enables modification of protection settings
Control-Lv1 This level enables control functions
Control-Lv2 This level enables modification of switchgear settings
Supervisor-Lv3 This level provides full access (not limited) to all settings
Load Reference Arrow System
Within the HighPROTEC the “Load Reference Arrow System” is used in principal. Generator protection relays are
working based on the “Generator Reference System”.
Device
Device
MRA4
Device Planning
Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be fulfilled,
i.e. the device shows only those functions you really need. If you, for example, deactivate the voltage protection
function, all parameter branches related to this function do not appear in the parameter tree any more. All
corresponding events, signals etc. will be deactivated too. By this the parameter trees become very transparent.
Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data (frequency etc.).
But it has to be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance, protective
functions, you also change the functionality of the device. If you cancel the
directional feature of the overcurrent protections then the device no longer trips
in a directional way but merely in a non-directional way.
The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage
as a result of wrong planning.
A planning service is also offered by Woodward Kempen GmbH.
Beware of inadvertent deactivating protective functions/modules
If you are deactivating modules within the device planning all parameters of
those modules will be set on default.
If you are activating one of these modules again all parameters of those
reactivated modules will be set on default.
Device
Device Planning Parameters of the Device
Parameter Description Options Default Menu path

Hardware Variant Optional Hardware Extension »A« 8 digital inputs | 7 8 digital inputs | 7 [MRA4]
1 binary output relays, binary output
relays
»D« 16 digital inputs |
13 binary output relays
Hardware Variant Optional Hardware Extension »0« Phase Current Phase Current [MRA4]
2 5A/1A, Ground Current 5A/1A, Ground
5A/1A, Current 5A/1A
»1« Phase Current
5A/1A, Sensitive
Ground Current 5A/1A
Housing Mounting form »A« Flush mounting, Flush mounting [MRA4]
»B« 19 inch mounting
(semi-flush),
»H« Customized
Version 1,
»K« Customized
Version 2
Device

Communication Communication »A« Without, »A« Without [MRA4]
»B« RS 485: Modbus
RTU | IEC 60870-5-103
| DNP RTU,
»C« Ethernet: Modbus
TCP | DNP UDP, TCP,
»D« Fiber Optics:
Profibus-DP,
»E« D-SUB: Profibus-
DP,
»F« Fiber Optics:
Modbus RTU | IEC
60870-5-103 | DNP
RTU,
»G« RS 485/D-SUB:
Modbus RTU | IEC
60870-5-103 | DNP
RTU,
»H« Ethernet:
IEC61850 | Modbus
TCP | DNP UDP, TCP,
»I« RS 485 and
Ethernet: Modbus TCP,
RTU | DNP UDP, TCP,
RTU,
»K« Ethernet/Fiber
Optics: IEC61850 |
Modbus TCP | DNP
UDP, TCP,
»L« Ethernet/Fiber
Optics: Modbus TCP |
DNP UDP, TCP,
»T« RS 485 and
Ethernet:
Communication Test
Printed Circuit Printed Circuit Board »A« Standard, »A« Standard [MRA4]
Board
»B« conformal coating
Installation and Connection

Three-Side-View - 19”
Dependent on the connection method of the SCADA system used the needed
space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to be added
to the depth dimension.
The three-side-view shown in this section is exclusively valid for

19” devices.
3-Side-View B2 Housing (19” Devices)
The housing must be carefully earthed. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6 mm 2

/ AWG 12-10) / 1,7 Nm [15 lb∙in]) to the housing, using the screw, which is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (2.5 mm2 /
AWG 14) at terminal X1 (0.56-0.79 Nm [5-7 lb∙in]).
Three-Side-View - 8-Pushbutton Version
Dependent on the connection method of the SCADA system used the needed
space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to be added
to the depth dimension.
The installation diagram shown in this section is exclusively valid for devices
with 8 pushbuttons at the front side of the HMI.
(INFO-, C-, OK-, CTRL-Pushbutton and 4 Softkeys (Pushbuttons)).
3-Side-View B2 Housing (Devices with 8 Softkeys)

Installation Diagram 8-Pushbutton Version
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched-off, unsafe voltages might remain
at the device connections.
The installation diagram shown in this section is exclusively valid for devices
with 8 pushbuttons at the front side of the HMI.
(INFO-, C-, OK-, CTRL-Pushbutton and 4 Softkeys (Pushbuttons)).
B2 Housing Door Cut-out (8-Pushbutton Version)

Be careful. Do not overtighten the mountings nuts of the relay

(M4 metric 4 mm). Check the torque by means of a torque wrench (1,7 Nm [15
lb∙in]). Overtightening the mounting nuts could due to personal injury or
damage the relay.
Assembly Groups
In line with the customer’s requirement the devices are combined in a

modular way (in compliance with the order code). In each of the slots an
assembly-group may be integrated. In the following the terminal
assignment of the individual assembly-groups are shown. The exact
installation place of the individual modules can be learned from the
connection diagram fixed at the top of your device.
Middle Housing B2
slot1 slot2 slot3 slot4 slot5 slot6
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
Rear view of B2 housing
Grounding
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (4 to 6

mm2 / AWG 12-10) / 1,7 Nm [15 lb∙in]) to the housing, using the screw,
which is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The devices are very sensitive to electro-static discharges.
Legend for Wiring Diagrams
In this legend designations of various device types are listed, e. g. transformer protection, motor protection,
generator protection, etc. Therefor it can occur that you will not find each designation on the wiring diagram of your
device.
Designation Meaning
FE Connection of functional earth
Power Supply Connection for auxiliary power supply
I L1 Phase current input L1
IG Earth current input IG
I L1 W1 Phase current input L1, winding side 1
I G W1 Earth current input IG, winding side 1
I G W2 Earth current input IG, winding side 2
V L1 Phase voltage L1
V 12 Phase to phase voltage V 12
VX Forth voltage measuring input for measuring residual
voltage or for Synchro-check
BO Contact output, change over contact
NO Contact output, normally open
DI Digital input
COM Common connection of digital inputs
Out+ Analog output + (0/4...20 mA or 0...10 V)
IN- Analog input + (0/4...20 mA or 0...10 V)
N.C. Not connected
DO NOT USE Do not use
SC Self supervision contact
GND Ground
Designation Meaning
HF SHIELD Connection cable shield
Fibre Connection Fibre optic connection
Only for use with external galvanic decoupled CTs. See Only for use with external galvanic decoupled CTs. See
chapter Current Transformers of the manual. chapter Current Transformers of the manual.
Caution Sensitive Current Inputs Caution Sensitive Current Inputs
Connection Diagram see specification Connection Diagram see specification
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
Rear side of the device (Slots)
The type of power supply card and the number of digital inputs on it used in this slot is dependent on the ordered
device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
(DI8-X1): This assembly group comprises a wide-range power supply unit;

and two non-grouped digital inputs and six (6) digital inputs (grouped).
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
DI8-X Power Supply and Digital Inputs
Ensure the correct tightening torques.
This assembly group comprises:
a wide-range power supply unit

6 digital inputs, grouped
2 digital inputs, non-grouped
Auxiliary voltage supply
The aux. voltage inputs (wide-range power supply unit) are non-polarized. The device could be provided with
AC or DC voltage.
Digital inputs
For each digital input group the related voltage input range has to be
parameterized. Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions/wrong
signal transfer times.
The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (can be parameterized) (two AC and five DC input
ranges). For the six grouped (connected to common potential) inputs and the two non-grouped inputs the following
switching levels can be defined:
24V DC
48V DC / 60V DC
110 V AC/DC
230 V AC/DC
If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(physically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects physically “0”.
When using DC supply, the negative potential has to be connected to the

common terminal (COM1, COM2, COM3 - please see the terminal marking).
Terminals
X?.
1
2 L+ Power Supply
3 L-
4 n.c.
5 COM1
6 DI1
7 COM2
8 DI2
9 COM3
10 COM
11 DI3
12 DI4
13 DI5
14 DI6
15 DI7
16 DI8
17 do not use
18 do not use
Electro-mechanical assignment
DI-8P X
1
L+
2
Power Supply
L-
3
n.c.
4
COM1
5
DI1
6
COM2
7
DI2
8
COM3
9
COM3
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
do not use
do not use
Slot X2: Relay Output Card
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different scope of
functions.
(RO-6 X2): Assembly Group with 6 Relay Outputs.
Binary Output Relays
The number of the binary output relay contacts is related to the type of the device or type code. The binary output
relays are potential-free change-over contacts. In chapter [Assignment/binary outputs] the assignment of the binary
output relays is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the »assignment list« which can be found in the
appendix.
Please duly consider the current carrying capacity of the binary output relays.
Please refer to the Technical Data.
Terminals
X? .
1
2 BO1
3
4
5 BO2
6
7
8 BO3
9
10
11 BO4
12
13
14 BO5
15
16
17 BO6
18
BO-6 X
BO1 n.c.
1
BO1 C
2
BO1 n.o.
3
BO2 n.c.
4
BO2 C
5
BO2 n.o.
6
BO3 n.c.
7
BO3 C
8
BO3 n.o.
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
BO4 n.c.
BO4 C
BO4 n.o.
BO5 n.c.
BO5 C
BO5 n.o.
BO6 n.c.
BO6 C
BO6 n.o.
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This slot contains the current transformer measuring inputs. Depending on the order code, this might be a standard
current measuring card or a sensitive ground current measuring card.
(TI-4 X3): Standard ground current measuring card.
(TIS-4 X3): Sensitive Ground current measuring card. The Technical data of the sensitive ground measuring
input deviate are different to the Technical Data of the phase current measuring inputs. Please refer to the
Technical Data.
TI X- Standard Phase and Ground Current Measuring Input Card
This measuring card is provided with 4 current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase currents and one
for measuring of the earth current. Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A.
The input for earth current measuring either can be connected to a cable-type current transformer or alternatively it
is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input (Holmgreen
connection).
Current transformers have to be earthed on their secondary side.
Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes hazardous

voltages.
The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited

before the current circuit to the device is opened.
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current

measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
Do not interchange the inputs (1 A/5 A)
Make sure the transformation ratios and the power of the CTs are
correctly rated. If the rating of the CTs is not right (overrated), then the
normal operational conditions may not be recognized. The pickup value
of the measuring unit amounts approx. 3% of the rated current of the
device. Also the CTs need a current greater than approx 3% of the
rated current to ensure sufficient accuracy. Example: For a 600 A CT
(primary current) any currents below 18 A cannot be detected any more.
Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or faulty

signals. Overloading means that in case of a short-circuit the current-
carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be exceeded.
Terminals
X? .
1A
1
5A
2 IL1
N
3
1A
4
5A
5 IL2
N
6
1A
7
5A
8 IL3
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IL1-1A 1
3 IL1-N
IL1-5A 2
IL2-1A 4
6 IL2-N
IL2-5A 5
IL3-1A 7
9 IL3-N
IL3-5A 8
IG-1A 10
12 IG-N
IG-5A 11
Current Transformers (CT)
Check the installation direction.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be

grounded.
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current

measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
CT secondary circuits must always to be low burdened or short-circuited during

operation.
For current and voltage sensing function external wired and appropriate current
and voltage transformer shall be used, based on the required input
measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation
functionality.
All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal. Make

sure that the wiring is correct.
Sensitive Ground Current Measurement
The proper use of sensitive current measuring inputs is the measurement of small currents like they could occur in
isolated and high resistance grounded networks.
Due to the sensitiveness of these measuring inputs don´t use them for the measurement of ground short circuit
currents like they occur in solidly earthed networks.
If a sensitive measuring input should be used for the measurement of ground short circuit currents, it has to be
ensured, that the measuring currents are transformed by a matching transformer according to the technical data of
the protective device.
Current Transformer Connection Examples
L1 L2 L3
X?.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
3 N
1A
4
IL2' 5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IL3
IG calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = IG
Three phase current measurement; In secondary = 5 A.
L1 L2 L3
X?.
1 1A
IL1'
2 5A
IL1
3 N
4 1A
IL2'
5 5A
IL2
IL1
6 N
7 1A
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 1A
10
IG' 5A
11 IG
12 N
IL3
Ring Core Type Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current . (Sum of the three
phase currents ). Can be used for
measuring the earth current in
isolated and compensated
networks. The shield is to be
returned through the ring core
current transformer .
IG calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
IG meas = IG
Three phase current measurement ; In secondary = 1 A.

Earth-current measuring via cable-type current transformer ; IGnom secondary = 1 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable -type current
transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side .
L1 L2 L3
X?.
1A
1
5A
2 IL1
IL1' N
3
1A
4
IL1' 5A
5 IL2
IL2' N
6
IL1 1A
7
IL2' 5A
8 IL3
IL3' N
9
1A
10
IL2 IL3' 5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'
IL3

Earth-current measuring via Holmgreen-connection; IGnom secondary = 5 A.
L1 L2 L3
X?.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL2' 5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
IL2' 1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 IL3' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'
IL3

L1 L2 L3
X?.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
3 N
IL1' 1A
4
5A
5 IL2
IL1 N
6
IL2' 1A
7
IL3' 5A
8 IL3
9 N
IL2 IL3' 1A
10
IG' 5A
11 IG
12 N
IL3
Ring Core Type Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current . (Sum of the
three phase currents ). Can
be used for measuring the
earth current in isolated and
compensated networks . The
shield is to be returned
through the ring core current IG calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
transformer.
IG meas = IG
Two phase current measurement (Open Delta); In secondary = 5 A.

Earth-current measuring via cable-type current transformer ; IGnom secondary = 5 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the cable -type current
transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side .
L1 L3 L2
X?.
1A
1
IL1' 5A
2 IL1
N
3
IL1' 1A
4
IL3' 5A
5 IL3
IL1 N
6
IL3' 1A
7
IL2' 5A
8 IL2
9 N
IL3 IL2' 1A
10
5A
11 IG
12 N
IG'
IL2

Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This slot contains the voltage transformer measuring inputs.
Voltage Measuring Inputs
The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase-to-phase voltages ( »V12«,
»V23« , »V31«) or phase-to-neutral voltages (»VL1«, »VL2«, »VL3«) and one for the measuring of the residual
voltage »VE«. With the field parameters the correct connection of the voltage measuring inputs has to be set:
phase-to-neutral (star)
phase-to-phase (Open Delta respectively V-Connection)
The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to account.
Make sure that the transformer is wired correctly.
For the V-connection the parameter »VT con« has to be set to »phase-to-
phase«.
Please refer to the Technical Data.
Terminals
X?.
1 VL1/
2 VL12
3 VL2/
4 VL23
5 VL3/
6 VL31
7
VX
8
VL1.1
1
VL1.2
2
VL2.1
3
VL2.2
4
VL3.1
5
6
VL3.2
VX1.1
7
8
VX1.2
Voltage Transformers
Check the installation direction of the VTs.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be

grounded.
For current and voltage sensing function external wired and appropriate current
and voltage transformer shall be used, based on the required input
measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation
functionality.
Check of the Voltage Measuring Values
Connect a three-phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay.
Take connection of the measuring transformers (star connection/open delta

connection) duly into account.
Now adjust voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequency which are not
likely to cause overvoltage- or undervoltage trips.
Compare the values shown in the device display with the readings of the measuring instruments. The deviation
must be according to the technical data.
When r.m.s. value measuring instruments are used, higher deviations can arise
if the fed voltage has a very high harmonic content. Since the device is
provided with a filter for the harmonics, only the fundamental oscillation is
evaluated (exception: thermal protection functions). If, however, a r.m.s. value
forming measuring instrument is used, the harmonics are also measured.
Wiring Examples of the Voltage Transformers
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31'
2 VL12
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12 N
6 VL31
VL23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
7
VL31 VX
8
VL1
VL2
VL3
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs : "star-connection"
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31' VL12
2
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12 N VL31
6
VL23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
e 7 VX
VL31
n 8
VX'
VL1
VL2
VL3
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs : "star-connection"

Measurement of the residual voltage VG via auxilliary windings (e-n) "broken delta"
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31'
2 VL12
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12
6 VL31
VL23
7
VL31 VX
8
VL1
VL2
VL3
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs : "delta-connection"
Notice!
Calculation of the residual voltage VG is not possible
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31'
2 VL12
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12 N
6 VL31
VL23 VL1' VL2' VL3'
7
VL31 V Sync* VX
8
VL1
VL2
VL3
*=* Availability dependent on

device type
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs : "star-connection".

Fourth measuring input for measuring a synchronisation voltage .
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31' VL12
2
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12 VL31
6
VL23 e
7 VX
VL31
n 8
VX'
VL1
VL2
VL3
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs : "delta-connection"

Measurement of the residual voltage VG via auxilliary windings (e-n) "broken delta"
L1 L2 L3
X?.
L1
1 VL1/
VL31' VL12
2
VL12' L2
3 VL2/
4 VL23
VL23' L3
5 VL3/
VL12 VL31
6
VL23
7 VX
VL31
8
Two-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measuring inputs: "Open

Delta"
Slot X5: Relay Output Card
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
functions.
(RO-6 X5): Assembly Group with 6 Relay Outputs. The Relay Output Card is identical with the one on Slot X2.
Slot X6: Digital Inputs
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
functions.
(DI-8 X6): Assembly Group with 8 Digital Inputs.
Digital Inputs
This module is provided with 8 grouped digital inputs.

In chapter [Device parameter/Digital Inputs] the assignment of the digital inputs is specified.
When using DC supply, the negative potential has to be connected to the

common terminal (COM1, COM2, COM3 - please see the terminal marking).
For each digital input group the related voltage input range has to be
parameterized. Wrong switching thresholds can result in
malfunctions/wrong signal transfer times.
Via the »assignment list« the states of the digital inputs are assigned to the
module inputs (e.g. I[1]).
The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (can be parameterized) (two AC and five DC input
ranges). For each group the following switching thresholds can be defined:
24V DC
48V DC / 60V DC
110 V AC/DC
230 V AC/DC
If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(physically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects physically “0”.
Terminal Marking
X? .
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 DI7
8 DI8
9 COM1
10 n.c.
11 n.c.
12 n.c.
13 n.c.
14 n.c.
15 n.c.
16 n.c.
17 n.c.
18 n.c.
DI-8 X
1
DI1
2
DI2
3
DI3
4
DI4
5
DI5
6
DI6
7
DI7
DI8
8
COM1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
An Ethernet interface may be available depending on the device type ordered.
Ethernet - RJ45
Terminals
RxD +
RxD –
TxD +
TxD –
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
1 8
Slot X103: Data Communication
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The data communication interface in the X103 slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The scope of functions
is dependent on the type of data communication interface.
RS485 Terminals for Modbus, DNP and IEC

Fiber Optics Interface for Modbus, DNP and IEC
Fiber Optics Interface for Profibus
D-SUB Interface for Modbus, DNP and IEC
D-SUB Interface for Profibus
Fiber Optics Interface for Ethernet
Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via RS485
There are two different versions of the RS485 interface. By means of the
wiring diagram on the top of your device, you have to find out which
version is built in your device (Type1 or Type2).
RS485 – Type 1 (see wiring diagram)
Protective Relay
+5V GND
560 Ω 560Ω
120Ω
P*
N*
N
P
X103
1
2
3
4
5
6
Electro-mechanical assignment Type 1 (see wiring diagram)
Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND

R2 = 120 Ω R1
R1
R2
P*
N*
N
P
1 2 3 4 5 6
The Modbus® / IEC 60870-5-103 connection cable must be shielded. The

shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground symbol
at the rear side of the device.
The communication is Halfduplex.
Type 1 Wiring example, Device in the Middle of the BUS
Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND
R2 = 120 Ω R1
R1
R2
1 2 3 4 5 6
P P*
N N*
Type 1 Wiring example, Device at the End of the BUS (using the integrated Terminal Resistor)
Protective Relay
+5V R1 = 560 Ω GND

R2 = 120 Ω R1
R1
R2
1 2 3 4 5 6
There are two different versions of the RS485 interface. By means of the
wiring diagram on the top of your device, you have to find out which
version is built in your device (Type1 or Type2).
RS485 – Type 2 (see wiring diagram)
Protective Relay
+5V GND HF Shield
560 Ω
560Ω
120Ω
N
P
X103
1
2
3
4
5
6
Electro-mechanical assignment Type 2 (see wiring diagram)
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
R1 R1
R1 = 560 Ω R2
R2 = 120 Ω
N
P
1 2 3 4 5 6
The Modbus® / IEC 60870-5-103 connection cable must be shielded. The

shielding has to be fixed at the screw which is marked with the ground symbol
at the rear side of the device.
The communication is Halfduplex.
Type 2 Wiring example, Device in the Middle of the BUS
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω R1 R1
R2
R2 = 120 Ω
1 2 3 4 5 6
P
P*
N*
Type 2 Wiring example, Device at the End of the BUS (using the integrated Terminal Resistor)
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω R1 R1
R2
R2 = 120 Ω
1 2 3 4 5 6
Type 2 Shielding Options (2-wire + Shield)
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
Common
Common
Common
Common
2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF
TR-N
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
internal (internal) (internal) (internal)
P
N
N
P
P
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination
resistors used resistors used resistors not used resistors not used
Type 2 Shielding Options (3-wire + Shield)

HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
Common
Common
Common
Common
2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF

TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
internal internal internal internal

P
N
N
P
P
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination
resistors used resistors used resistors not used resistors not used
Profibus DP/ Modbus ® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via fibre optic
Fibre Optic
Modbus® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via D-SUB
D-SUB
6 9
1 5
D-SUB assignment - bushing

1 Earthing/shielding
3 RxD TxD - P: High-Level
4 RTS-signal
5 DGND: Ground, neg. Potential of aux voltage supply
6 VP: pos. Potential of the aux voltage supply
8 RxD TxD - N: Low-Level
The connection cable must be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the
screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the back side of the device.
Profibus DP via D-SUB
D-SUB
6 9
1 5
D-SUB assignment - bushing

1 Earthing/shielding
3 RxD TxD - P: High-Level
4 RTS-signal
5 DGND: Ground, neg. Potential of aux voltage supply
6 VP: pos. Potential of the aux voltage supply
8 RxD TxD - N: Low-Level
The connection cable must be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the
screw which is marked with the ground symbol at the back side of the device.
Profibus DP/ Modbus ® RTU / IEC 60870-5-103 via fibre optic
Fibre Optic
Ethernet / TCP/IP via Fiber Optics
Fiber Optics - FO
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This comprises the IRIG-B00X and the System contact (Supervision Contact).
System Contact and IRIG-B00X
Terminal
SK
IRIG-B+
IRIG-B-
X104
1
2
3
4
5
X104
1 2 3 4 5
IRIG -B-
IRIG -B+
SC C
S C n.c.
SC n.o.
The System-OK contact (SC relay) cannot be configured. The system contact is a changeover contact that picks
up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) remains
dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started (and protection is active), the System Contact
picks up and the assigned LED is activated accordingly (please refer to the Self Supervision chapter).
PC Interface - X120
• USB (Mini-B)
B1, B2 und B3 Housing
USB-Interface for
Parameter Setting and
Evaluation Software -
X120
Navigation - Operation
The following illustration applies to protective devices with a small display:
1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10
The following illustration applies to protective devices with a large display:
1 2 3 4
8 6 7 9 10
1 LEDs group A Messages inform you about

(left) operational conditions, system
data or other device particulars.
They additionally provide you
with information regarding
failures and functioning of the
device as well as other states of
the device and the equipment.
Alarm signals can be freely

allocated to LEDs out of the
»assignment list«.
An overview about all alarm

signals available in the device
can be obtained from the
»ASSIGNMENT LIST« which can be
found in the appendix.
LED »System Should LED »System OK« flash

OK« red during operation, contact the
Service Dept. immediately.
3 Display Via the display you can read-out

operational data and edit
parameters.
4 LEDs group B Messages inform you about

(right) operational conditions, system
data or other device particulars.
They additionally provide you
with information regarding
failures and functioning of the
device as well as other states of
the device and the equipment.
Alarm signals can be freely

allocated to LEDs out of the
»assignment list« .
An overview about all alarm

signals available in the device
can be obtained from the
»assignment list« which can be
found in the appendix.
5 Softkeys The function of the

»SOFTKEYS« are contextual.
On the bottom line of the display
the present function is
displayed/symbolized.
Possible functions are:
Navigation
Parameter
decrement/increment.
Scrolling up/down a menu

page
Moving to a digit
Change into the parameter

setting mode »wrench
symbol«.
6 INFO Key Looking through the present

(Signals/Messa LED assignment. The direct
ges) select key can be actuated at
any time.
If the INFO key is actuated

once, the »LEFT LED SIGNALS« are
inserted, if the INFO key is
actuated again, the »RIGHT LED
SIGNALS « are inserted. If the INFO
key is actuated again you will
leave the LED menu.
Here only the first assignments

of the LEDs will be shown. Every
three seconds the »SOFTKEYs«
will be shown (flashing).
Displaying the multiple

Assignments
If the INFO-Button is pressed

only the first assignments of any
LED is shown. Every three
seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will
be shown (flashing).
If there is more than one signal

assigned to a LED (indicated by
three dots) you can check the
state of the multiple
assignments if you proceed as
follows.
In order to show all (multiple)

assignments select a LED by
means of the »SOFTKEYs«
»up« and »down«
Via the »Softkey« »right« call up

a Submenu of this LED that
gives you detailed information
on the state of all signals
assigned to this LED. An arrow

symbol points to the LED whose
assignments are currently
displayed.
Via the »SOFTKEYs« »up« and

»down« you can call up the
next / previous LED.
In order to leave the LED menu

press the »SOFTKEY« »left«
multiple times.
7 »C Key« To abort changes and to ac-

knowledge messages.
In order to reset please press

the Softkey »wrench« and enter
the password.
The reset menu can be left by

pressing the Softkey »Arrow-
left«
8 RS232 Interface Connection to software Smart

(Smart view view is done via the RS232
Connection) interface.
9 »OK Key« When using the »OK« key

parameter changes are
temporarily stored. If the »OK«
key is pressed again, those
changes are stored definitely.
10 »CTRL Key«* Direct Access to the Control

Menu.
*=Not for all devices available.
Basic Menu Control
The graphic user interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree. For access to the individual
submenus the »SOFTKEYS«/Navigation Keys are used. The function of the »SOFTKEYS« can be found as symbol
in the footer of the display.
Softkey Description
Via »SOFTKEY« »up« you will come to the prior menu point/one parameter up by scrolling
upwards.
Via »SOFTKEY« »left« you will go one step back.
Via »SOFTKEY« »down« you will change to the next menu point/one parameter down by
scrolling downwards.
Via »SOFTKEY« »right« you will come to a submenu.
Via »SOFTKEY« »Top of list« you will jump directly to the top of a list.
Via »SOFTKEY« »Bottom of list« you will jump directly to the end of a list.
Via »SOFTKEY« »+«the related digit will be incremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast).
Via »SOFTKEY« »-«the related digit will be decremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast)
Via »SOFTKEY« »left« you will go one digit to the left.
Via »SOFTKEY« »right« you will go one digit to the right.
Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter setting« you will call up the parameter setting mode.
Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter setting« you will call up the parameter setting mode. Password
authorization required.
Via »SOFTKEY« »delete« data will be deleted.
Fast forward scrolling is possible via »SOFTKEY« »Fast forward«
Fast backward scrolling is possible via »SOFTKEY« »Fast backward«
In order to return to the main menu, just keep pressing the Softkey »Arrow-Left« until you arrive at the »main
menu».
Input, Output and LED Settings

Configuration of the Digital Inputs
Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs:
»Nominal voltage«
»Debouncing time«: A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time has
expired.
»Inverting« (where necessary)
Inverting
inactive
Inverting active =1 DI Slot X.DI x
State of the digital input

Nom voltage Debouncing time
Input Signal t 0
The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal
alternates.
In addition to the debouncing time that can be set via software, there is always
a hardware debouncing time (approx 12 ms) that cannot be turned of.
Assignment of Digital Inputs
There are two options available in order to determine where a Digital Input should be assigned to.
Option Option
1 2
Input
Device Para/digital input

Protection Module 1
Input
Protection Module 2
Option 1 - Assigning a Digital Input onto one or mutliple modules.
Adding an assignment:
Within menu [Device Parameter\Digital Inputs] Digital Inputs can be assigned onto one or multiple targets.
Call up the Digital Input (Arrow right on the DI). Click on the Softkey »Parameter Setting/Wrench« . Click on
»Add« and assign a target. Assign where required additional targets.
Deleting an assignment:
Select as described above a Digital Input that should be edited at the HMI.
Call up the assignments of the Digital Input (Arrow-right on the DI) and select the assignment that should be
removed/deleted (Please note, this has to marked with the cursor). The assignment can now be deleted at
the HMI by means of the Softkey »Parameter setting« and selection of »remove«. Confirm the parameter
setting update.
Option 2 – Connecting a Module Input with a Digital Input
Call a module. Within this module assign a Digital Input onto a module input. Example: A protection module
should be blocked depending on the state of a Digital Input.. For this assign onto the blocking input within the
Global Parameters the Digital Input (e.g. Ex Blo 1).
Checking the Assignments of a Digital Input
In order to check the targets that a Digital Input is assigned to please proceed as follows:
Call up menu [Device Parameter\Digital Inputs].
Navigate to the Digital Input that should be checked.
At the HMI:
A multiple assignment, that means if a Digital Input is used more than once (if it is assigned to multiple targets), this
will be indicated by an ”...” behind a Digital Input. Call up this Digital Input by Softkey »Arrow right« in order to see
the list of targets of this Digital Input.
DI-8P X
DI Slot X1
Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8P X
Parameter Description Setting range Default Menu path

Nom voltage Nominal voltage of the digital inputs 24 V DC, 24 V DC [Device Para
48 V DC, /Digital Inputs
60 V DC, /DI Slot X1
110 V DC, /Group 1]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
Inverting 1 Inverting the input signals. inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /Digital Inputs
/DI Slot X1
/Group 1]
Debouncing time 1 A change of the state of a digital input will only be no debouncing no debouncing [Device Para
recognized after the debouncing time has expired time, time
/Digital Inputs
(become effective). Thus, transient signals will not be
20 ms,
misinterpreted. /DI Slot X1
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms

110 V DC, /Group 2]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
/DI Slot X1
/Group 2]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 2]
100 ms
110 V DC, /Group 3]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]

/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
/DI Slot X1
/Group 3]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
misinterpreted. 8 /DI Slot X1
50 ms,
/Group 3]
100 ms
Signals of the Digital Inputs on DI-8P X
Signal Description
DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI-8 X
DI Slot X6
Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8 X

110 V DC, /Group 1]
230 V DC,
110 V AC,
230 V AC
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]

/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms

/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
/DI Slot X6
/Group 1]
/Digital Inputs
20 ms,
misinterpreted. 8 /DI Slot X6
50 ms,
/Group 1]
100 ms
Signals of the Digital Inputs on DI-8 X
Signal Description
Output Relays Settings

The conditions of module outputs and signals/protective functions (such as reverse interlocking) can be passed by
means of alarm relays. The alarm relays are potential-free contacts (which can be used as opening or closing
contact). Each alarm relay can be assigned up to 7 functions out of the »assignment list«.
Set the following parameters for each of the binary output relays:
• Up to 7 signals from the »assignment list« (OR-connected)
• Each of the assigned signals can be inverted.
• The (collective) state of the binary output relay can be inverted (open or closed circuit current principle)
• By the Operating Mode it can be determined whether the relay output works in working current or closed-
circuit principle.
• »Latched« active or inactive
»Latched = inactive«:
If the latching function is »inactive«, the alarm relay respectively the alarm contact will adopt the
state of those alarms that were assigned.
»Latched = active«
If the »latching function« is »active«, the state of the alarm relay respectively alarm contact that was
set by the alarms will be stored.
The alarm relay can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had
initiated setting of the relay and after expiry of the minimum retention time.
• »Hold time«: At signal changes, the minimal latching time ensures that the relay will be maintained picked-
up or released for at least this period.
If binary outputs are parameterized »Latched=active«, they will keep (return

into) their position even if there is a break within the power supply.
If binary output relays are parameterized »Latched=active«, The binary output

will also retain, if the binary output is reprogrammed in another way. This
applies also if »Latched is set to ina ctive«. Resetting a binary output that has
latched a signal will always require an acknowledgement.
The »System OK Relay« (watchdog) cannot be configured.
Acknowledgment options
Binary output relays can be acknowledged:
Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel.
Each binary output relay can be acknowledged by a signal of the »assignment list« (If »Latched is active«).
Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« all binary output relays can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for
external acknowledgement that was selected from the »assignment list« becomes true. (e.g the state of a digital
input).
Via SCADA, all output relays can be acknowledged at once.
Relay output contacts can be set by force or disarmed (for commisioning support,
please refer to the „Service/Disarming the Output Relay Contacts“ and
„Service/Forcing the Output Relay Contacts“ sections).
95
hold time
Inverting =1
>1 1
t-hold >1
Assignment 1 =1
Inverting 1
Switch Off Delay

Assignment 2 =1
0 t-Off Delay State of the binary
Inverting 2 =1 output relay
>1
Assignment 3 =1 & S1 1
Operating Mode
Inverting 3 R 1
Working current principle
Closed-circuit principle
Assignment 4 =1
Inverting 4
Assignment 5 =1
MRA4
Inverting 5
Assignment 6 =1
Inverting 6
Assignment 7 =1
Inverting 7
Lat ched
inactive
active
Acknowledge -HMI >1

Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge-Scada
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
System Contact
The System OK alarm relay (SC) is the devices »LIFE CONTACT«. Its installation location depends on the housing type.
Please refer to the wiring diagram of the device (WDC-contact).
The System-OK relay (SC) cannot be parameterized. The system contact is an operating current contact that picks-
up, when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) remains
dropped-off. As soon as the system was duly started up, the relay picks up and the assigned LED is activated
accordingly (please refer to chapter Self Supervision).
OR-6 X
BO Slot X2 ,BO Slot X5
Direct Commands of OR-6 X

DISARMED This is the second step, after the "DISARMED Ctrl" has inactive, inactive [Service
been activated, that is required to DISARM the relay
active /Test (Prot inhibit)
outputs. This will DISARM those output relays that are
currently not latched and that are not on “hold” by a /DISARMED
pending minimum hold time. CAUTION! RELAYS
/BO Slot X2]
DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance
while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-
line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact
cannot be disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the
relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance.
Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = active

Force all Outs By means of this function the normal Output Relay Normal, Normal [Service
State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set
De-Energized, /Test (Prot inhibit)
from normal operation (relay works according to the
assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force de- Energized /Force OR
energized" state. Forcing all outputs relays of an entire
/BO Slot X2]
assembly group is superior to forcing a single output
relay.
Force OR1 By means of this function the normal Output Relay Normal, Normal [Service
energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]
energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]
energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]

energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]
energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]
energized" state.
/BO Slot X2]
Device Parameters of the Binary Output Relays on OR-6 X

Operating Mode Operating Mode Working current Working current [Device Para
principle, principle
/Binary Outputs
Closed-circuit prin-
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 1]
t-hold To clearly identify the state transition of a binary output 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Device Para
relay, the "new state" is being hold, at least for the
/Binary Outputs
duration of the hold time.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when inactive, inactive [Device Para
it picks up.
active /Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]

Acknowledgement Acknowledgement Signal - An acknowledgement signal 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
(that acknowledges the corresponding binary output List
/Binary Outputs
relay) can be assigned to each output relay. The
acknowledgement-signal is only effective if the /BO Slot X2
parameter "Latched" is set to active.
/BO 1]
Only available if: Latched = active
Inverting Inverting of the Binary Output Relay. inactive, inactive [Device Para
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment BO Slot X2: [Device Para
List SG[1].TripCmd
/Binary Outputs
BO Slot X5: -.-
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. inactive, inactive [Device Para
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]

/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
it picks up.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List Prot.Alarm
/Binary Outputs
BO Slot X5: -.-
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]


/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
it picks up.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List SG[1].ON Cmd
/Binary Outputs
BO Slot X5: -.-
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]


/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]


List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
it picks up.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List SG[1].OFF Cmd
/Binary Outputs
BO Slot X5: -.-
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]


/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]


List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
it picks up.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 5]


/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]


List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
ciple
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]


it picks up.
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]


List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
List
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
DISARMED Ctrl Enables and disables the disarming of the relay inactive, inactive [Service
outputs. This is the first step of a two step process, to
inhibit the operation or the relay outputs. Please refer to
"DISARMED" for the second step. /DISARMED
/BO Slot X2]


Disarm Mode CAUTION!RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely permanent, permanent [Service
perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking
timeout /Test (Prot inhibit)
an entire process off-line. (Note: The Supervision
Contact cannot be disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE /DISARMED
that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance.
/BO Slot X2]
t-Timeout DISARM The relays will be armed again after expiring of this 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Service
time.
/Test (Prot inhibit)
Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM /DISARMED
/BO Slot X2]
Force Mode By means of this function the normal Output Relay permanent, permanent [Service
States can be overwritten (forced) in case that the
timeout /Test (Prot inhibit)
Relay is not in a disarmed state. The relays can be set
from normal operation (relay works according to the /Force OR
assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force de-
/BO Slot X2]
energized" state.
t-Timeout Force The Output State will be set by force for the duration of 0.00 - 300.00s 0.03s [Service
this time. That means for the duration of this time the
Output Relay does not show the state of the signals
that are assigned on it. /Force OR
/BO Slot X2]
Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM

Input States of the Binary Output Relays on OR-6 X
Name Description Assignment via

BO1.1 Module input state: Assignment [Device Para
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
Ack signal BO 1 Module input state: Acknowledgement signal for the binary [Device Para
output relay. If latching is set to active, the binary output relay
/Binary Outputs
can only be acknowledged if those signals that initiated the
setting are fallen back and the hold time is expired. /BO Slot X2
/BO 1]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 2]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 3]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 4]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 5]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]


/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO Slot X2
/BO 6]
/Binary Outputs
/BO 6]
Signals of the Binary Output Relays on OR-6 X
Signal Description
BO 1 Signal: Binary Output Relay
DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: The Self Supervision Contact
cannot be disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance
Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the
state of at least one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned
signals.

Global Protection Parameters of the LED Module
LEDs group A ,LEDs group B

Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks inactive, inactive [Device Para
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Ack signal Acknowledgement signal for the LED. If latching is set 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
to active the LED can only be acknowledged if those List
/LEDs
signals that initiated the setting are no longer present.
/LEDs group A
Dependency Only available if: Latched = active
/LED 1]
LED active color The LED lights up in this color if the state of the OR- green, LEDs group A: [Device Para
assignment of the signals is true. green
red, /LEDs
LEDs group B:
red flash, /LEDs group A
red
green flash, /LED 1]
-
LED inactive color The LED lights up in this color if the state of the OR- green, - [Device Para
assignment of the signals is untrue.
red, /LEDs
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment LEDs group A: [Device Para
List Prot.active
/LEDs
LEDs group B: -.-
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]


List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks inactive, LEDs group A: [Device Para
up. active
active /LEDs
LEDs group B:
/LEDs group A
inactive
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED active color The LED lights up in this color if the state of the OR- green, red [Device Para
assignment of the signals is true.
red, /LEDs
-


red, /LEDs
-
List SG[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B: -.-
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]


List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED active color The LED lights up in this color if the state of the OR- green, LEDs group A: [Device Para
assignment of the signals is true. red flash
red, /LEDs
LEDs group B:
red
-
red, /LEDs
-
List Prot.Alarm
/LEDs
LEDs group B: -.-
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]


active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]


red, /LEDs
-
red, /LEDs
-
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]


active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
red, /LEDs
-
red, /LEDs
-
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]


List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]


/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
red, /LEDs
-
red, /LEDs
-
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]


List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
up.
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
red, /LEDs
-
red, /LEDs
-
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]


active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
List
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

LED Module Input States

LED1.1 Module input state: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Acknow Sig 1 Module input state: Acknowledgement Signal (only for automatic [Device Para
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]


/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]


/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]


/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]


/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
acknowledgement)
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]

LED configuration
The LEDs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/LEDs/Group X]
Attention must be paid that there are no overlapping functions due to double or
multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes.
If LEDs are parameterized »Latched=active«, they will keep (return into) their
blink code/color even if there is a break within the power supply.
If LEDs are parameterized »Latched=active«, The LED blink code will also
retain, if the LED is reprogrammed in another way. This applies also if »Latched
is set to inactive«. Resetting a LED that has latched a signal will always require
an acknowledgement.
This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left hand
of the display (group A).
If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand of the display
(group B), the information in this chapter is valid analog. The only difference is
“group A” and “group B” within the menu paths.
Via push button »INFO« it is always possible to display the current alarms/alarm texts that are assigned to an LED.
Please refer to chapter Navigation (description of the »INFO-key«).
Set the following parameters for each LED:
»Latching/self holding function«: If »Latching« is set to »active«, the state that is set by the alarms will be
stored. If latching »Latching« is set to »inactive«, the LED always adopts the state of those alarms that were
assigned.
»Acknowledgment« (signal from the »assignment list«)
»LED active color«, LED lights up in this color in case that at least one of the allocated functions is valid (red,
red flashing, green, green flashing, off).
»LED inactive color«, LED lights up in this color in case that none of the allocated functions is valid (red, red
flashing, green, green flashing, off).
Apart from the LED for System OK, each LED can be assigned up to five functions/alarms out of the
»assignment list«.
»Inverting« (of the signals), if necessary.

Acknowledgment options
LEDs can be acknowledged by:
Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel.
Each LED can be acknowledged by a signal of the »assignment list« (If »Latched = active«).
Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« all LEDs can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for external
acknowledgment that was selected from the »assignment list« becomes true (e.g. the state of a digital
input).
Via SCADA, all LEDs can be acknowledged at once.
The Product-CD that is delivered with the device contains a PDF-Template in

order to create and print out self adhesive films for LED assignment texts (front
foil) by means of a laser printer. Recommendation: (AVERY Zweckform
Art.Nr.3482)

137
Assignment 1 =1
Inverting 1
Assignment 2 =1
Inverting 2
>1
Assignment 3 =1
>1 LED active color
Inverting 3
Assignment 4 =1
LED inactive color
1
Inverting 4
MRA4
Assignment 5 =1
Inverting 5
& S1 1
R 1
L a tched
inactive
active
Acknowledge -HMI >1

Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge-Scada
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
The »System OK« LED
This LED flashes green while the device is booting. After completed booting, the LED for System OK lights up in
green thus signalizing that the protection (function) is »activated«. Please refer to chapter ”Self-Supervision” and to
the external document ”Troulbe Shooting Guide" to find out further information on blink codes of the System OK
LED
LED System OK cannot be parameterized.

Smart View
Smart View
Smart view is a parameter setting and evaluation software.
Menu-controlled parameter setting incl. validity checks

Offline configuration of all relay types
Reading and evaluating of statistical data and measuring values
Setting into operation assistance
Display of the device status
Fault analysis via event- and fault recorder

Measuring Values
Measuring Values
Read out Measured Values
In menu »Operation/Measured Values« both measured and calculated values can be viewed. The measured values
are ordered by »Standard values« and »special values« (depending on the type of device).
Measurement Display
Menu [Device Para\Measurem Display] offers options to change the display of measured values.
Scaling of Measured values
By means of the parameter »Scaling« the user can determine how measured values are to be displayed within the
HMI and Smart view:
Primary quantities
Secondary quantities
Per Unit quantities
Power Units (applies only for devices with power measurement)
By means of the parameter »Power Units« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed within
the HMI and Smart view:
Power Auto Scaling

kW, kVAr or kVA
MW, MVAr or MVA
GW, GVAr or GVA

Measuring Values
Energy Units (applies only for devices with energy measurement)
By means of the parameter »Energy Units« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed
within the HMI and Smart view:
Energy Auto Scaling

kWh, kVArh or kVAh
MWh, MVArh or MVAh
GWh, GVArh or GVAh
In case of an overflow of the counter, the counter will start counting again at zero. A corresponding signal will
indicate the counter overflow.
Counter overflow at:

Energy Auto Scaling Depends on the settings for the current and voltage transformers
kWh, kVArh or kVAh 999,999.99
MWh, MVArh or MVAh 999,999.99
GWh, GVArh or GVAh 999,999.99
Temperature Unit (applies only for devices with temperature measurement)
By means of the parameter »Temperatur Unit« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed
within the HMI and Smart view:
° Celsius
° Fahrenheit
Cutoff level
In order to suppress noise within measured values that are close to zero the user has the option to set cutoff levels.
By means of the cutoff levels, measuring quantities that are close to zero will be displayed as zero. These
parameters have no impact on recorded values.

Measuring Values
Current - Measured Values
Verfügbare Elemente:
[StW Sternp, StW Netz]
CT
If the device is not equipped with an voltage measuring card the first measuring input on the first current measuring
card (slot with the lowest number) will be used as the reference angle (» IL1«).
Value Description Menu path

IL1 Measured value: Phase current (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
/Measured Values
/Current ]
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IG meas Measured value (measured): IG (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IG calc Measured value (calculated): IG (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
I0 Measured value (calculated): Zero current (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
I1 Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current [Operation
(fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Current ]
I2 Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current [Operation

(fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IL1 H2 Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st harmonic of IL1 [Operation

/Measured Values
/Current ]

Measuring Values

/Measured Values
/Current ]
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IG H2 meas Measured value: 2nd harmonic/1st harmonic of IG (measured) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IG H2 calc Measured value (calculated): 2nd harmonic/1st harmonic of IG [Operation
(calculated)
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi IL1 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Phasor IL1 [Operation

/Measured Values
/Current ]
/Measured Values
/Current ]
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi IG meas Measured value (calculated): Angle of Phasor IG meas [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi IG calc Measured value (calculated): Angle of Phasor IG calc [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi I0 Measured value (calculated): Angle Zero Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi I1 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Positive Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
phi I2 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Negative Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current ]
IL1 RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]

Measuring Values

/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IG meas RMS Measured value (measured): IG (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IG calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IG (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IL1 THD Measured value (calculated): IL1 Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IL1 THD Measured value (calculated): IL1 Total Harmonic Current [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%(I2/I1) Measured value (calculated): I2/I1, phase sequence will be taken [Operation
into account automatically.
/Measured Values
/Current ]

Measuring Values
Voltage - Measured Values
VT
The first measuring input on the first measuring card (slot with the lowest number) is used as the reference angle.
E.g. »VL1« respectively »VL12«.

f Measured value: Frequency [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
VL12 Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
VL1 Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
VX meas Measured value (measured): VX measured (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
VG calc Measured value (calculated): VG (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
V0 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero [Operation
voltage(fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
V1 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive [Operation

phase sequence voltage(fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]

Measuring Values

V2 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative [Operation
phase sequence voltage(fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
VL12 RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) [Operation

/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VL1 RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VX measured (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VG calc RMS Measured value (calculated): VG (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
phi VL12 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Phasor VL12 [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]

Measuring Values

/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
phi VX meas Measured value: Angle of Phasor VX meas [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
phi VG calc Measured value (calculated): Angle of Phasor VG calc [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
phi V0 Measured value (calculated): Angle Zero Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
phi V1 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Positive Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
phi V2 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Negative Sequence System [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
%(V2/V1) Measured value (calculated): V2/V1, phase sequence will be taken [Operation
into account automatically.
/Measured Values
/Voltage ]
%VL12 THD Measured value (calculated): V12 Total Harmonic Distortion / [Operation
Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
%VL1 THD Measured value (calculated): VL1 Total Harmonic Distortion / [Operation
Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]

Measuring Values

Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
Ground wave
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VL12 THD Measured value (calculated): V12 Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VL1 THD Measured value (calculated): VL1 Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]

Measuring Values
Power - Measured Values

S Measured Value (Calculated): Apparent power (fundamental) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
P Measured value (calculated): Active power (P- = Fed Active Power, [Operation
P+ = Consumpted Active Power) (fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Power]
Q Measured value (calculated): Reactive power (Q- = Fed Reactive [Operation

Power, Q+ = Consumpted Reactive Power) (fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Power]
cos phi Measured value (calculated): Power factor: Sign Convention: [Operation
sign(PF) = sign(P )
/Measured Values
/Power]
Wp+ Positive Active Power is consumed active energy [Operation

/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wp- Negative Active Power (Fed Energy) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wq+ Positive Reactive Power is consumed Reactive Energy [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wq- Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Ws Net Absolute Apparent Power Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wp Net Absolute Active Power Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wq Net Absolute Reactive Power Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Start Date/Time Energy counters run since... (Date and time of last reset) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]

Measuring Values

S RMS Measured Value (Calculated): Apparent power (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Power RMS]
P RMS Measured value (calculated): Active power (P- = Fed Active Power, [Operation
P+ = Consumpted Active Power) (RMS)
/Measured Values
/Power RMS]
cos phi RMS Measured value (calculated): Power factor: Sign Convention: [Operation
sign(PF) = sign(P )
/Measured Values
/Power RMS]
P1 Measured value (calculated): Active power in positive sequence [Operation

system (P- = Fed Active Power, P+ = Consumpted Active Power)
/Measured Values
/Power]
Q1 Measured value (calculated): Reactive power in positive sequence [Operation

system (Q- = Fed Reactive Power, Q+ = Consumpted Reactive
/Measured Values
Power)
/Power]

Energy Counter
Energy Counter
PQSCr
Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module

S, P, Q Cutoff Level The Active/Reactive/Apparent Power shown in the 0.0 - 0.100Sn 0.005Sn [Device Para
Display or within the PC Software will be displayed as
/Measurem Display
zero, if the absolute value of the corresponding Power
falls below this Cutoff Level. This parameter has no /Power]
impact on recorders.
Power Units Power Units Power Auto Sca- Power Auto [Device Para
ling, Scaling
/Measurem Display
kW/kVAr/kVA,
/General settings]
MW/MVAr/MVA,
GW/GVAr/GVA
Energy Units Energy Units Energy Auto Sca- MWh/MVArh/MV [Device Para
ling, Ah
/Measurem Display
kWh/kVArh/kVAh,
/General settings]
MWh/MVArh/MVAh
,
GWh/GVArh/GVAh
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module

Res all Energy Cr Reset of all Energy Counters inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Energy Counter
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)
Signal Description
Cr Oflw Ws Net Signal: Counter Overflow Ws Net
Cr Oflw Wp Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wp Net
Cr Oflw Wp+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wp+
Cr Oflw Wp- Signal: Counter Overflow Wp-
Cr Oflw Wq Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wq Net
Cr Oflw Wq+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wq+
Cr Oflw Wq- Signal: Counter Overflow Wq-
Ws Net Res Cr Signal: Ws Net Reset Counter
Wp Net Res Cr Signal: Wp Net Reset Counter
Wp+ Res Cr Signal: Wp+ Reset Counter
Wp- Res Cr Signal: Wp- Reset Counter
Wq Net Res Cr Signal: Wq Net Reset Counter
Wq+ Res Cr Signal: Wq+ Reset Counter
Wq- Res Cr Signal: Wq- Reset Counter
Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
Cr OflwW Ws Net Signal: Counter Ws Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wp Net Signal: Counter Wp Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wp+ Signal: Counter Wp+ will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wp- Signal: Counter Wp- will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wq Net Signal: Counter Wq Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wq+ Signal: Counter Wq+ will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wq- Signal: Counter Wq- will overflow soon

Statistics
Statistics
Statistics
In menu »Operation/Statistics« the min., max. and mean values of the measured and calculated measured
quantities can be found.
Configuration of the Minimum and Maximum Values
The calculation of the minimum and maximum values will be started:
When a Reset signal becomes active (Min/Max)

When the device is restarted
After configuration
Minimum and Maximum Values (Peak Values/Pointers)
Time interval for the calculation of

Reset
the minimum and maximum values
Configuration Options The minimum and maximum values will Res Min
be reset with the rising edge of the
Where to configure? Res Max
Within menu [Device Para\ corresponding reset signal.
Statistics\ (e.g. via digital Inputs). These signals will reset
Min/Max] the minimum and maximum pointers.
Display of Minimum Values

Where? Within menu [Operation\Statistics\Min]
Display of Maximum Values

Where? Within menu [Operation\Statistics\Max]

Statistics
Configuration of the Average Value Calculation
Configuration of the Current Based Average Value Calculation*
*=Availability depends on the ordered device code.
Current based Average Values and Peak Values

Time period for the
calculation of the Reset of the average and
Start options
average and peak peak values
values
Configuration Options sliding: duration: Res Fc
(sliding: average calculation (fixed or sliding period)
Where to configure? (e.g. via Digital Input in order to
based on sliding period)
In [Device Para\ reset the average values in
Statistics\ advance (before the next rising
Start Fct:
Demand\ edge of the start signal). This
fixed: (The average values are
Current Demand] applies to option „Start FC“ only.
(fixed: Average calculation is calculated based on the time
reset by the end of the period, period between two rising edges
that means with the next ot this signal)
starting period)
Trip (command) option to limit

the average current demand: Please refert to chapter „System Alarms“
Yes
View average values and peak
values Where? Within menu [Operation\Statistics\Demand]
Configuration of the Voltage Based Average Value Calculation*
Voltage based Average Values

Time period for the
Reset of the average and
calculation of the Start options
average values peak values

Where to configure? based on sliding period) (e.g. via Digital Input in order to
Statistics\ Start Fct: advance (before the next rising
Umit] fixed: (The average values are edge of the start signal). This
(fixed: Average calculation is calculated based on the time applies to option „Start FC“ only.
starting period)
View average values

Where? Within menu [Operation\Statistics\Vavg]

Statistics
Configuration of the Power Based Average Value Calculation*
Power based Average Values (Demand) and Peak Values

Time period for the
calculation of the Reset of the average and
Start options
average and peak peak values
values
Where to configure? based on sliding period) (e.g. via Digital Input in order to
Statistics\ Start Fct: advance (before the next rising
Bezugsmanagm\ fixed: (The average values are edge of the start signal). This
Power Demand] (fixed: Average calculation is calculated based on the time applies to option „Start FC“ only.
starting period)
Trip (command) option to limit

the average power demand: Please refert to chapter „System Alarms“
Yes
View average values and peak
values Where? Within menu [Operation\Statistics\Demand]

Statistics
Direct Commands

ResFc all Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, inactive, inactive [Operation
Power Demand, Min, Max)
active /Reset]
ResFc Vavg Resetting of the sliding average calculation. inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
ResFc I Demand Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak inactive, inactive [Operation
avg)
active /Reset]
ResFc P Demand Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]
ResFc Max Resetting of all Maximum values inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module

ResFc Max Resetting of all Maximum values 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
Start Vavg via: Start sliding average supervision by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
StartFct /Statistics
/Vavg]
Start Vavg Fc Start of the calculation, if the assigned signal becomes 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
true. List
/Statistics
Only available if: Start P Demand via: = StartFct /Vavg]

Statistics

ResFc Vavg Resetting of the sliding average calculation. 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Statistics
/Vavg]
Duration Vavg Recording time 2 s, 10 min [Device Para

5 s, /Statistics
10 s, /Vavg]
15 s,
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window Vavg Window configuration sliding, sliding [Device Para
fixed /Statistics
/Vavg]
Start I Demand via: Start Current demand by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start I Demand Fc Start of the calculation, if the assigned signal becomes 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
true. List
/Statistics
Only available if: Start I Demand via: = StartFct /Demand
/Current Demand]
ResFc I Demand Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
avg) List
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]

Statistics

Duration I Demand Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para
5 s, /Statistics
Only available if: Start I Demand via: = Duration
10 s, /Demand
15 s, /Current Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window I Demand Window configuration sliding, sliding [Device Para
fixed /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start P Demand Start Active Power demand by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
via:
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Start P Demand Fc Start of the calculation, if the assigned signal becomes 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
true. List
/Statistics
Only available if: Start P Demand via: = StartFct /Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc P Demand Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]

Statistics

Duration P Demand Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para
5 s, /Statistics
Only available if: Start P Demand via: = Duration
10 s, /Demand
15 s, /Power Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window P Demand Window configuration sliding, sliding [Device Para
fixed /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]

Statistics
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module

StartFc Vavg-I State of the module input: (StartFunc3_h) [Device Para
/Statistics
/Vavg]
StartFc I Demand-I State of the module input: Start of the Statistics of the Current [Device Para
Demand
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
StartFc P Demand-I State of the module input: Start of the Statistics of the Active [Device Para
Power Demand
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc Vavg-I State of the module input: Resetting of the sliding average [Device Para
calculation.
/Statistics
/Vavg]
ResFc I Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of Statistics - Current [Device Para
Demand (avg, peak avg)
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
ResFc P Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of Statistics - Power [Device Para
Demand (avg, peak avg)
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc Max-I State of the module input: Resetting of all Maximum values [Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min-I State of the module input: Resetting of all Minimum values [Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]

Statistics
Signals of the Statistics Module
Signal Description
ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max)
ResFc Vavg Signal: Resetting of the sliding average calculation.
ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values
Counters of the Module Statistics

Res Cr Vavg Number of resets since last booting. The timestamp shows date [Operation
and time of the last reset.
/Statistics
/Vavg]
Res Cr I Demand Number of resets since last booting. The timestamp shows date [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Res Cr P Demand Number of resets since last booting. The timestamp shows date [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Res Cr Min values Number of resets since last booting. The timestamp shows date [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Res Cr Max values Number of resets since last booting. The timestamp shows date [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]

Statistics
Current - Statistic Values

I1 max Maximum value positive phase sequence current (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
I1 min Minimum value positive phase sequence current (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
I2 max Maximum value unbalanced load (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
I2 min Minimum value unbalanced load current (fundamental) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IL1 H2 max Maximum ratio of 2nd harmonic over fundamental of IL1 [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IL1 H2 min Minimum ratio of 2nd harmonic over fundamental of IL1 [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IL2 H2 min Minimum ratio of 2nd harmonic over fundamental of IL2 [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]

Statistics

IL3 H2 min Minimum ratio of 2nd harmonic/1st harmonic minimum value of IL3 [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IG H2 meas max Measured value: Maximum ratio of 2nd harmonic over fundamental [Operation
of IG (measured)
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IG H2 meas min Measured value: Minimum ratio of 2nd harmonic over fundamental [Operation
of IG (measured)
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IG H2 calc max Measured value (calculated): Maximum ratio of 2nd harmonic over [Operation
fundamental of IG (calculated)
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IG H2 calc min IG H2 calc min [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IL1 max RMS IL1 maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IL1 avg RMS IL1 average value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IL1 min RMS IL1 minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]

Statistics

/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IG meas max RMS Measured value: IG maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IG meas min RMS Measured value: IG minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IG calc max RMS Measured value (calculated):IG maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IG calc min RMS Measured value (calculated):IG minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]

Statistics

%(I2/I1) max Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 maximum value, phase [Operation
sequence will be taken into account automatically
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
%(I2/I1) min Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 minimum value, phase sequence [Operation
will be taken into account automatically
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IL1 Peak demand IL1 Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]

Statistics
Voltage - Statistic Values

f max Max. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
f min Min. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
V1 max Maximum value: Symmetrical components positive phase [Operation
sequence voltage(fundamental)
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
V1 min Minimum value: Symmetrical components positive phase sequence [Operation
voltage(fundamental)
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
V2 max Maximum value: Symmetrical components negative phase [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
V2 min Minimum value: Symmetrical components negative phase [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VL12 max RMS VL12 maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VL12 avg RMS VL12 average value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Vavg]
VL12 min RMS VL12 minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]

Statistics

/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Vavg]
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Vavg]
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Vavg]
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]

Statistics

/Statistics
/Vavg]
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
/Statistics
/Vavg]
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VX meas max RMS Measured value: VX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VX meas min RMS Measured value: VX minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VG calc max RMS Measured value (calculated):VX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VG calc min RMS Measured value (calculated):VX minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
%(V2/V1) max Measured value (calculated):V2/V1 maximum value, phase [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]

Statistics

%(V2/V1) min Measured value (calculated):V2/V1 minimum value , phase [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
Power - Statistic Values

cos phi max Maximum value of the power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = [Operation
sign(P )
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
cos phi min Minimum value of the power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = [Operation
sign(P )
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
S max Maximum value of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
S avg Average of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
S min Minimum value of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
P max Maximum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
P avg Average of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]

Statistics

P min Minimum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Q max Maximum value of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Q avg Average of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Q min Minimum value of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
cos phi max RMS Maximum value of the power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = [Operation
sign(P )
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
cos phi min RMS Minimum value of the power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = [Operation
sign(P )
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
VA Peak demand VA Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Watt Peak demand WATTS Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
VAr Peak demand VARs Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]

System Alarms
System Alarms
Available Elements:
SysA
Please note that Power Protection and (Active/Reactive/Apparent) Power Demand is

only available within Protective Devices that offer current and voltage measurement.
Within the System Alarms menu [SysA] the User can configure:
General Settings (activate/inactivate the Demand Management, optional assign a signal, that will block the
Demand Management);
Power Protection (Peak values);
Demand Management (Power and Current); and
THD Protection.
Please note, that all thresholds are to be set as primary values.
Demand Management
Demand is the average of system current or power over a time interval (window). Demand management supports
the User to keep energy demand below target values bound by contract (with the energy supplier). If the
contractual target values are exceeded, extra charges are to be paid to the energy supplier.
Therefore, demand management helps the User detect and avoid averaged peak loads that are taken into account
for the billing. In order to reduce the demand charge respective to demand rate, peak loads, if possible, should be
diversified. That means, if possible, avoiding large loads at the same time. In order to assist the User in analyzing
the demand, demand management might inform the User by an alarm. The User might also use demand alarms
and assign them on relays in order to perform load shedding (where applicable).
Demand management comprises:
Power Demand
Watt Demand (Active Power);
VAr Demand (Reactive Power);
VA Demand (Apparent Power); and
Current Demand.

System Alarms
Configuring the Demand
Configuring the demand is a two step procedure. Proceed as follows.
Step1: Configure the general settings within the [Device Para/Statistics/Demand] menu:
Set the trigger source to »Duration«.

Select a time base for the »window«.
Determine if the window is »fixed« or »sliding«.
If applicable assign a reset signal.
The interval time (window) can be set to fixed or sliding.
Example for a fixed window: If the range is set for 15 minutes, the protective device calculates the
average current or power over the past 15 minutes and updates the value every 15 minutes.
Example for a sliding window: If the sliding window is selected and the interval is set to 15 minutes,
the protective device calculates and updates the average current or power continuously, for the past
15 minutes (the newest measuring value replaces the oldest measuring value continuously).

System Alarms
Window configuration = sliding
Duration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
t-Delay
Average Calculation Alarm
0
sliding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
t-Delay
Average Calculation Alarm
0
sliding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Average Calculation t-Delay

Alarm
0
Window configuration = fixed
Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation
Duration Duration Duration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation
Average Calculation t-Delay

Alarm
0

System Alarms
Step 2:
In addition, the Demand specific settings have to be configured in the [SysA/Demand] menu.
Determine if the demand should generate an alarm or if it should run in the silent mode.
(Alarm active/inactive).
Set the threshold.
Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm.
Peak Values
The protective device also saves the peak demand values for current and power. The quantities represent the
largest demand value since the demand values were last reset. Peak demands for current and system power are
date and time stamped.
Within the [Operation/Statistics] menu, the current Demand and Peak demand values can be seen.
Configuring the Peak Value Supervision
The supervision for the peak values can be configurated within menu [SysA/Power] in order to monitor:
Active Power (Watt),

Reactive Power (VAr)
Apparent Powr (VA)
The specific settings are to be set within menu [SysA/Power].
Determine if the peak value supervision should generate an alarm or if it should run in the silent mode.
(Alarm active/inactive).
Set the threshold.
Min. and Max. Values.

Within [Operation/Statistics] menu the minimum (min.) and maximum (max.) values can be seen.
Minimum values since last reset: The minimum values are continuously compared to the last minimum value for
that measuring value. If the new value is less than the last minimum, the value is updated. Within the [Device
Para/Statistics/"Min / Max"] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.
Maximum values since last reset: The maximum values are continuously compared to the last maximum value
for that measuring value. If the new value is greater than the last maximum, the value is updated. Within the
[Device Para/Statistics/"Min / Max"] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.

System Alarms
THD Protection
In order to supervise power quality, the protective device can monitor the voltage (phase-to-phase) and current
THDs.
Within the [SysA/THD] menu:
Determine if an alarm is to be issued or not (Alarm active/inactive);

Set the threshold; and
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management

Mode Mode do not use, do not use [Device planning]
use
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)
Signal Description
active Signal: active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm permitted Active Power exceeded
Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm permitted Reactive Power exceeded
Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm permitted Apparent Power exceeded
Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Active Power exceeded
Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Reactive Power exceeded
Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Apparent Power exceeded
Alm Current Demd Signal: Alarm averaged demand current
Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip permitted Active Power exceeded
Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip permitted Reactive Power exceeded
Trip VA Power Signal: Trip permitted Apparent Power exceeded
Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip averaged Active Power exceeded
Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip averaged Reactive Power exceeded
Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip averaged Apparent Power exceeded
Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip averaged demand current
Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage

System Alarms
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, inactive [SysA
active /General settings]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking of the 1..n, Assignment -.- [SysA
module/stage. This parameter is only effective if a List
/General settings]
signal is assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those
modules/stages are blocked that are parameterized
"ExBlo Fc=active".
Alarm Alarm inactive, inactive [SysA

active /Power
/Watt]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kW 10000kW [SysA

/Power
/Watt]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 - 60min 0min [SysA

/Power
/Watt]

active /Power
/VAr]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kVAr 10000kVAr [SysA

/Power
/VAr]

/Power
/VAr]

active /Power
/VA]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kVA 10000kVA [SysA

/Power
/VA]

System Alarms

/Power
/VA]

active /Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kW 10000kW [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
active /Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kVAr 20000kVAr [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
active /Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 40000000kVA 20000kVA [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]

System Alarms

active /Demand
/Current Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 10 - 500000A 500A [SysA

/Demand
/Current Demand]

/Demand
/Current Demand]

active /THD
/I THD]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 500000A 500A [SysA

/THD
/I THD]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 - 3600s 0s [SysA

/THD
/I THD]

active /THD
/V THD]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 - 500000V 10000V [SysA

/THD
/V THD]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 - 3600s 0s [SysA

/THD
/V THD]
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management

ExBlo-I Module input state: External blocking [SysA
/General settings]

Acknowledgments
Acknowledgments
Collective Acknowledgments for latched signals:
Collective Acknowledgments
LEDs Binary Output SCADA Pending LEDs+

Relays Trip Command
Binary Output
Relays+
SCADA+
Pending
Trip Command
Via Smart view All LEDs at once: All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip All at once:
or at the panel Relays at once: signals at once: commands at
Where? Where?
once:
all... [Operation\ Where? Where? [Operation\
can be Acknowledge] [Operation\ [Operation\ Where? Acknowledge]
acknowledged. Acknowledge] Acknowledge] [Operation\
Acknowledge]
At the panel, the

menu [Operation\
Acknowledge]
can directly be
accessed via the
»C« key
External All LEDs at once: All Binary Output All SCADA All pending trip
Acknowledgment Relays at once: signals at once: commands at
*: once:
Where? Within
Via a signal from
the menu Where? Within Where? Within
the assignment
Ex Acknowledge the menu the menu Where? Within
list (e.g. a digital
Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge the menu
Input) all... can
Ex Acknowledge
be
acknowledged.
*The External Acknowledgement might be disabled if parameter »Ex Ack «is set to »inactive« within menu [Device
Para/Ex Acknowledge]. This blocks also the acknowlegement via Communication (e.g. Modbus).

Acknowledgments
Options for individual acknowledgments for latched signals:
Individual Acknowledgment
LEDs Binary Output Relays Pending

Trip Command
Via a signal from the Single LED: Binary Output Relay: Pending Trip Command.
assignment list (e.g.:a Where?
digital Input) a single... can Within the module
be acknowledged. Where? Where? TripControl
Within the configuration Within the configuration
menu of this single LED. menu of this single Binary
Output Relay.
As long as you are within the parameter setting mode, you cannot
acknowledge.
In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel, you must
first leave the parameter mode by pressing either push-button »C« or »OK«
before you may access to menu »Acknowledgments« via push-button.
Manual Acknowledgment
Press the C-Button at the panel.

Select the item to be acknowledged via the Softkeys:
Binary output relays,

LEDs,
SCADA,
a pending trip command or
all (above) mentioned items at once.
Press the Softkey with the »Wrench-Symbol«.

Enter your password.

Acknowledgments
External Acknowledgments
Within the menu [Ex Acknowledge] you can assign a signal (e.g. the state of a digital input) from the assignment list
that:
acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) LEDs at once;

acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) binary outputs at once:
acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) SCADA-signals at once.
Ack LED
Ex Acknowledge.Ack LED
1..n, Assignment List
Ack BO
Ex Acknowledge.Ack BO
Ack Scada
Ex Acknowledge.Ack Scada
Within the menu [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\TripControl] you can assign a signal that:
acknowledges a pending trip command.
For details, please refer to chapter »TripControl«.

Acknowledgments
Manual Resets
In menu »Operation/Reset« you can:
reset counters,
delete records (e.g. disturbance records) and
reset special things (like statistics, thermal replica...).
The description of the reset commands can be found within the corresponding
modules.
Reset to Factory Defaults
This Function will reset the device to the factory defaults.

All records will be deleted and and the measured values and counters will be
reset. The operation hours counter will be kept.
This Function is available at the HMI only.
• Press the »C-key« during a cold start, in order to access the »Reset« menu.
• Select »Reset to factory default«.
• Confirm »Reset device to factory defaults and reboot« with »Yes« in order to execute the reset to factory
defaults.«

Status Display
Status Display
In the status display within the »Operation« menu, the present state of all signals can be viewed. This means the
User is able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment. The User can see all signals
sorted by protective elements/modules.
State of the module input/signal is... Is shown at the panel as...
false / »0«
true / »1«

Operating Panel (HMI)
Operating Panel (HMI)

HMI
Special Parameters of the Panel
This menu »Device Parameter/HMI« is used to define the contrast of the display, the maximum admissible edit time
and the menu language (after expiry of which, all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected).
Direct Commands of the Panel

Contrast Contrast 0 - 100% 50% [Device Para
/HMI]
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel

t-max Edit/Access If no other key(s) is pressed at the panel, after 20 - 3600s 180s [Device Para
expiration of this time, all cached (changed) parameters
/HMI]
are canceled. The device access will be locked by
falling back into Read-only level Lv0.
Display Off The display back light will be turned off when this timer 20 - 3600s 180s [Device Para
has expired.
/HMI]
Menu language Selection of the language English, English [Device Para

German, /HMI]
Russian,
Polish,
French,
Portuguese,
Spanish
Display ANSI Display ANSI Device Numbers inactive, active [Device Para
Device Numbers
active /HMI]

Recorders
Recorders
Disturbance Recorder
Available elements:
Disturb rec
The disturbance recorder works with 32 samples per cycle. The disturbance recorder can be started by one of eight
start events (selection from the »assignment list«/OR-Logic).The disturbance record contains the measuring values
inclusively pre-trigger-time. By means of Smart view/Datavisualizer (option) the oscillographic curves of the
analogue (current, voltage) and digital channels/traces can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form. The
disturbance recorder has a storage capacity of 120s. The disturbance recorder is able to record up to 10 s
(adjustable) per record. The amount of records depends on the file size of each record.
The disturbance recorder can be parameterized in the menu »Device Parameter/Recorder/Disturb rec«.
Determine the max. recording time to register a disturbance event. The max. total length of a recording is 10s
(inclusive pre-trigger and post-trigger time).
To trigger the disturbance recorder, up to 8 signals can be selected from the »assignment list«. The trigger events
are OR-linked. If a disturbance record is written, a new disturbance record cannot be triggered until all trigger
signals, which have triggered the previous disturbance record, are gone. Recording is only done for the time the
assigned event exists (event controlled), plus the time for the pre- and post-trigger, but not longer than 10s. The
time for forward run and tracking of the disturbance recorder is shown in percent of the total recording length.
The post-trigger time will be up to "Post-trigger time" depending on the duration of the
trigger signal. The post-trigger will be the remaining time of the "Max file size" but at
maximum "Post-trigger time"

Recorders
Start: 1
>1
Trigger
Start: 2
Trigger
Start: 3
Trigger
Start: 4
Trigger
>1
Recording
Start: 5
Trigger
Start: 6
Trigger
Start: 7
Trigger
Start: 8
Trigger
Man Trigger
Example
The disturbance recorder is started by the general activation facility. After the fault has been cancelled
(+ follow-up time), the recording process is stopped (but after 10s at the latest).
The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device shall react if there is no saving place available. In case »Auto
Delete« is »active«, the first recorded disturbance will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the
parameter is set to »inactive«, recording of the disturbance events will be stopped until the storage location is
released manually.

Recorders
Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart I
Start 1 = Prot.Trip
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
t-rec < Max file size
Auto overwriting = active
Post-trigger time = 25%
Start 1 Pre-trigger time = 15%
200 ms Max file size = 2s
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
0
t
Post-trigger time
500 ms
1
0
0
t
t-rec
1000 ms
1
0
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
0
t

Recorders
Example Disturbance Recorder Timing Chart II
Start 1 = Prot.Alarm
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
Auto overwriting = active
t-rec = Max file size Post-trigger time = 25%
Pre-trigger time = 15%

Max file size = 2s
Start 1
1200 ms
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
0
t
Post-trigger time
500 ms
1
0
0
t
t-rec
2000 ms
1
0
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
0 t

Recorders
Read Out Disturbance Records
Within the Menu Operation/Disturb rec you can
Detect accumulated Disturbance Records.
Within the Menu »Operation/Recorders/Man Trigger« you can trigger the

disturbance recorder manually.
Deleting Disturbance Records
Within the Menu Operation/Disturb rec you can
Delete Disturbance Records.
Choose via »SOFTKEY« »up« and »SOFTKEY« »down« the disturbance record that is to be deleted.
Call up the detailed view of the disturbance record via »SOFTKEY« »right«.
Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »delete«
Enter your password followed by pressing the key »OK«
Choose whether only the current of whether all disturbance records should be deleted.
Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »OK«

Recorders
Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder

Man Trigger Manual Trigger False, False [Operation
True /Recorders
/Man Trigger]
Res all rec Reset all records inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder

Start: 1 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment Prot.Alarm [Device Para
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 2 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]

Recorders

List
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Auto overwriting If there is no more free memory capacity left, the oldest inactive, active [Device Para
file will be overwritten.
active /Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Post-trigger time The post trigger time is settable up to a maximum of 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para
50% of the Maximum file size setting. The post-trigger
/Recorders
will be the remaining time of the "Max file size" but at
maximum "Post-trigger time" /Disturb rec]
Pre-trigger time The pre trigger time is settable up to a maximum of 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para
50% of the Maximum file size setting.
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Max file size The maximum storage capacity per record is 10 0.1 - 10.0s 2s [Device Para
seconds, including pre-trigger and post-trigger time.
/Recorders
The disturbance recorder has a total storage capacity
of 120 seconds. /Disturb rec]

Recorders
Disturbance Recorder Input States

Start1-I State of the module input:: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Disturbance Recorder Signals
Signal Description
recording Signal: Recording
memory full Signal: Memory full
Clear fail Signal: Clear failure in memory
Res all records Signal: All records deleted
Res rec Signal: Delete record
Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger

Recorders
Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder
Value Description Default Size Menu path

Rec state Recording state Ready Ready, [Operation
Recording, /Status Display
Writing file, /Recorders
Trigger Blo /Disturb rec]
Error code Error code OK OK, [Operation
Write err, /Status Display
Clear fail, /Recorders
Calculation err, /Disturb rec]
File not found,
Auto overwriting
off
Fault Recorder
Fault rec
Purpose of the Fault recorder

The Fault Recorder provides compressed information about faults (e.g. Trip Causes). The compressed information
can be read out also at the HMI. This might be helpful for fast fault analysis already at the HMI. After a fault, a
popup window will be sent onto the display in order to draw the users attention to the fault. The Fault Recorder will
provide information on the causes of the fault. A detailed fault analysis (in oscillographic form) can be done means
of the Disturbance Recorder. The reference between the Fault Records and the corresponding Disturbance
Records are the »Fault Number« and the »Grid Fault Number«.

Recorders
Definitions
Time to Trip: Time between First Alarm (Prot.Pickup) and First Trip (Prot.Trip) decision
Fault Duration: Time period from the rising edge of the General Pickup (»PROT.PICKUP«) signal up to the falling
edge of the General Pickup Signal. Please note that General Pickup is an or-connection
(disjunction) of all Pickup signals. General Trip is an OR-connection of all Trips.
Popup pops up on the display.
Prot.Alarm
Signal: General Alarm
Fault duration
1
0
0
t
Prot.Trip
Signal: General Trip
Time to trip
1
0
0
t
Analog values (recording) t-meas-delay=0

t-meas-delay>0
0
0
Capture Data
t
Capture Data

Recorders
Behaviour of the Fault Recorder
Who triggers the Fault Recorder?

The Fault Recorder will be triggered by the rising edge of the »PROT.PICKUP« (General Pickup) signal. Please note
that »PROT.PICKUP« (General Pickup) is an or-connection of all Pickup signals. The first Pickup will trigger the Fault
recorder.
At which point of time will the fault measurements be captured?

The fault measurements will be captured (written) when the trip decision is taken. The point in time, when the
measurements are captured (after a trip) can be delayed optionally by the parameter »t-meas-delay«. This might be
reasonable in order to achieve more reliable measuring values (e.g. in order to avoid measuring disturbances
caused by significant DC-components).
Modes
In case of a fault record should be written even if an general alarm has not lead to a trip, the parameter » Record-
Mode« is to be set to »Alarms and Trips« .
Set parameter »Record-Mode« to »Trips only«, if an Alarm that is not followed by a trip decision should not lead to a
trip.
When does the overlay (popup) appears on the display of the HMI?
A popup will appear on the HMI display, when the General Pickup (Prot.Pickup) disappears.
No time to trip will be shown if the pickup signal that triggers the fault recorder is
issued by another protection module than the trip signal. This might happen if
more than one protection module is involved into a fault.
Please note: The parameter settings (thresholds etc.) that are shown in a fault record
are not part of the fault record itself. They are always read out from the current device
setting. If parameters settings that are shown in a fault record could have been
updated, they will be indicated with an asterisk symbol within the fault record.
To prevent this please proceed as follows:
Save any fault record that should be archived to your local network/hard disk before
doing any parameter change. Delete all the fault records in your fault recorder
afterwards.

Recorders
Memory
The last stored fault record is saved (fail-safe) within the Fault Recorder (the others are saved within a memory that
depends on the auxiliary power of the protective relay). If there is no more memory free, the oldest record will be
overwritten (FIFO). Up to 20 records can be stored.
How to close the overlay/popup?

By using Softkey »OK«.
How to find out fast, if a fault has lead to a trip or not?

Faults that lead to a trip will be indicated by a flash icon (right side) within the overview menu of the fault
recorder.
Which fault record pops up?

The newest fault.

Recorders
Content of a Fault Record

A fault record comprises information about:
Date/Time Date and Time of the Fault

FaultNr The number of the fault will be incremented with each fault (General Alarm or
»PROT.PICKUP«)
Grid Fault No. This counter will be incremented by each General Pickup (Exception AR: this applies
only to devices that offer auto reclosing).
Active Set The active parameter set
Time to trip The time between pickup and trip. Please note: No time to trip will be shown if the first
pickup and the first trip are issued by different protection modules.
Alarm Name of the module that picked up first.
Trip Name of the module that tripped first.
The information that will be displayed depends on which protection module has tripped.
That means e.g. that the thresholds are shown. In case that the trip was initiated by the
MotorStart (applies to motor protection relays) protection module, additional information
will be displayed.
Adaptive Set In case that adaptive sets are used, the number of the active set will be displayed.
Fault type In case of overcurrent trips, the fault type will be evaluated based on the energized
phases.
Alarm Phase A Alarm Phase B Alarm Phase C Fault Type

x L1G
x L2G
x L3G
x x L1B
x x L2L3
x x L1L3
x x x L1L2L3
Direction In case that a direction has been detected, the evaluated direction will be displayed
(this applies to directional phase and ground overcurrent relays only).
Measured Values Various measuring values at the time of tripping (or delayed depending on parameter
setting) will be displayed.

Recorders
How to set up the Fault Recorder
The »Record-Mode« will determine if trips only cause a fault record or if also Alarms without a consecutively trip
should cause a fault record. This parameter is to be set within menu [Device Para\Recorders\Fault rec]
How to navigate within the Fault Recorder
Navigation within the Softkey

Fault recorder
Back to overview.
Next (upper) item within this

fault record.
Previous fault record.
Next (lower) item within this

fault record.
How to read Out the Fault Recorder
In order to read out a fault record there are two options available:
• Option 1: A Fault has popped up on the HMI (because an trip or pickup has occurred).
• Option 2: Call up manually the Fault recorder menu.
Option 1 (in case a fault record pops up on the display (overlay):
Analyze the fault record by using Softkeys Arrow Up and Arrow Down.
Or close the Popup by using Softkey OK
Option 2 :
Call up the main menu;
Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Fault rec.«;
Select a fault record; and
Analyze the fault record by using Softkeys Arrow Up and Arrow Down.

Recorders
Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder

active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder

Record-Mode Recorder Mode (Set the behaviour of the recorder) Alarms and Trips, Trips only [Device Para
Trips only /Recorders
/Fault rec]
t-meas-delay After the Trip, the measurement will be delayed tor this 0 - 60ms 0ms [Device Para
time.
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Fault Recorder Signals
Signal Description
Res rec Signal: Delete record

Recorders
Event Recorder
Event rec
The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last (minimum) 50 saved events are recorded fail-safe.
The following information is provided for any of the events:
Events are logged as follows:
Record No. Fault No. No of grid faults Date of Record Module.Name State
Sequential Number of the A grid fault No. can Time stamp What has Changed Value
Number ongoing fault have several Fault changed?
No.
This counter will

be incremented This counter will be
by each General incremented by each
Alarm General Alarm
(Prot.Alarm)
(Exception AR: this
applies only to
devices that offer
auto reclosing)
There are three different classes of events:
Alternation of binary states are shown as:

0->1 if the signal changes physically from »0« to »1«.
1->0 if the signal changes physically from »1« to »0«.
Counters increment is shown as:

Old Counter state -> New Counter state (e.g. 3->4)
Alternation of multiple states are shown as:

Old state -> New state (e.g. 0->2)

Recorders
Read Out the Event Recorder
Call up the »main menu«.
Call up the submenu »Operation/Recorders/Event rec«.
Select an event.
Direct Commands of the Event Recorder

active /Reset]
Event Recorder Signals
Signal Description
Res all records Signal: All records deleted
Trend Recorder
Available Elements:
Trend rec
Configuring the Trend Recorder
The Trend Recorder is to be configured within [Device Para/Recorders/Trend Recorder] menu.
The User has to set the time interval. This defines the distance between two measuring points.
The User can select up to ten values that will be recorded.

202
Recorders
Trend rec
Resolution
60 min
30 min
15 min
10 min
5 min
MRA4
Trend1
Trend2 Trend rec
...
Trend10
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Recorders
Global Protection Parameters of the Trend Recorder

Resolution Resolution (recording frequency) 60 min, 15 min [Device Para
30 min, /Recorders
15 min, /Trend rec]
10 min,
5 min
Trend1 Observed Value1 1..n, TrendRecList CT.IL1 RMS [Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]

/Recorders
/Trend rec]

/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend4 Observed Value4 1..n, TrendRecList CT.IG meas [Device Para

RMS
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend5 Observed Value5 1..n, TrendRecList VT.VL1 RMS [Device Para

/Recorders
/Trend rec]

/Recorders
/Trend rec]

/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend8 Observed Value8 1..n, TrendRecList VT.VX meas [Device Para

RMS
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend9 Observed Value9 1..n, TrendRecList -.- [Device Para

/Recorders
/Trend rec]

Recorders

Trend10 Observed Value10 1..n, TrendRecList -.- [Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend Recorder Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Hand Reset Hand Reset
Direct Commands of the Trend Recorder

Reset Delete all entries inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Genearal Values of the Trend Recorder

Max avail Entries Maximum available entries in the current 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
configuration
/Count and RevData
/Trend rec]
Global Values of the Trend Recorder
The »TrendRecList« below summarizes all signals that the User can assign.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
VT.VL1 Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (fundamental)
VT.VX meas Measured value (measured): VX measured (fundamental)
VT.VG calc Measured value (calculated): VG (fundamental)
VT.VL12 Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (fundamental)

Recorders
Name Description
VT.VL1 RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VT.VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VX measured (RMS)
VT.VG calc RMS Measured value (calculated): VG (RMS)
VT.VL12 RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
VT.V0 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero voltage(fundamental)
VT.V1 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage(fundamental)
VT.V2 Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage(fundamental)
VT.%(V2/V1) Measured value (calculated): V2/V1, phase sequence will be taken into account automatically.
VT.VL1 avg RMS VL1 average value (RMS)
VT.f Measured value: Frequency
VT.VL1 THD Measured value (calculated): VL1 Total Harmonic Distortion
VT.VL12 THD Measured value (calculated): V12 Total Harmonic Distortion
CT.IL1 Measured value: Phase current (fundamental)
CT.IG meas Measured value (measured): IG (fundamental)
CT.IG calc Measured value (calculated): IG (fundamental)
CT.IL1 RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
CT.IG meas RMS Measured value (measured): IG (RMS)
CT.IG calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IG (RMS)
CT.I0 Measured value (calculated): Zero current (fundamental)
CT.I1 Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current (fundamental)
CT.I2 Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current (fundamental)
CT.%(I2/I1) Measured value (calculated): I2/I1, phase sequence will be taken into account automatically.

Recorders
Name Description
CT.IL1 avg RMS IL1 average value (RMS)
CT.IL1 THD Measured value (calculated): IL1 Total Harmonic Current
ThR.Thermal Cap Used Measured value: Thermal Capacity Used
PQSCr.S Measured Value (Calculated): Apparent power (fundamental)
PQSCr.P Measured value (calculated): Active power (P- = Fed Active Power, P+ = Consumpted Active Power)
(fundamental)
PQSCr.Q Measured value (calculated): Reactive power (Q- = Fed Reactive Power, Q+ = Consumpted Reactive
Power) (fundamental)
PQSCr.P 1 Measured value (calculated): Active power in positive sequence system (P- = Fed Active Power, P+ =
Consumpted Active Power)
PQSCr.Q 1 Measured value (calculated): Reactive power in positive sequence system (Q- = Fed Reactive Power, Q+
= Consumpted Reactive Power)
PQSCr.S RMS Measured Value (Calculated): Apparent power (RMS)
PQSCr.P RMS Measured value (calculated): Active power (P- = Fed Active Power, P+ = Consumpted Active Power)
(RMS)
PQSCr.cos phi Measured value (calculated): Power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = sign(P )
PQSCr.cos phi RMS Measured value (calculated): Power factor: Sign Convention: sign(PF) = sign(P )
PQSCr.Ws Net Absolute Apparent Power Hours
PQSCr.Wp Net Absolute Active Power Hours
PQSCr.Wq Net Absolute Reactive Power Hours
PQSCr.Wp+ Positive Active Power is consumed active energy
PQSCr.Wp- Negative Active Power (Fed Energy)
PQSCr.Wq+ Positive Reactive Power is consumed Reactive Energy
PQSCr.Wq- Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy)

Communication Protocols
SCADA Interface
Scada
Device Planning Parameters of the Serial Scada Interface

Protocol Select used SCADA protocol do not use, do not use [Device planning]
Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP,
DNP3 RTU,
DNP3 TCP,
DNP3 UDP,
IEC60870-5-103,
IEC61850,
Profibus
Signals (Output States) of the SCADA Interface
Signal Description
SCADA connected At least one SCADA System is connected to the device.
SCADA not connected No SCADA System is connected to the device

TCP/IP Parameter
TcpIp
Global TCP/IP Parameters

Keep Alive Time Keep Alive Time is the duration between two keep alive 1 - 7200s 720s [Device Para
transmissions in idle condition
/TCP/IP
/Advanced
Settings]
Keep Alive Interval Keep Alive Interval is the duration between two 1 - 60s 15s [Device Para
successive keep alive retransmissions, if the
/TCP/IP
acknowledgement to the previous keepalive
transmission was not received. /Advanced
Settings]
Keep Alive Retry Keep alive retry is the number of retransmissions to be 3 - 3 3 [Device Para
carried out before declaring that the remote end is not
/TCP/IP
available.
/Advanced
Settings]

Modbus®
Modbus
Modbus® Protocol Configuration
The time-controlled Modbus® protocol is based on the Master-Slave working principle. This means that the
substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address) which
will then be answered or carried out accordingly. If the enquiry/instruction cannot be answered/carried out (e.g.
because of an invalid slave address), a failure message is returned to the master.
The Master (substation control and protection system) can query information from the device, such as:
Type of unit version

Measuring values/Statistical measured values
Switch operating position
State of device
Time and date
State of the device’s digital inputs
Protection-/State alarms
The Master (control system) can give commands/instructions to the device, such as:
Control of switchgear (where applicable, i.e. each acc. to the applied device version)
Change-over of parameter set
Reset and acknowledgement of alarms/signals
Adjustment of date and time
Control of alarm relays
For detailed information on data point lists and error handling, please refer to the Modbus ® documentation.
To allow configuration of the devices for Modbus® connection, some default values of the control system must be
available.

Modbus RTU
Part 1: Configuration of the Devices
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters there:
Slave-address, to allow clear identification of the device.
Baud-Rate
Also, select below indicated RS485 interface-related parameters from there, such as:
Number of data bits
One of the following supported communication variants: Number of data bits, even, odd, parity or no parity,
number of stop bits.
»t-timeout«: communication errors are only identified after expiry of a supervision time »t-timeout«.
Response time (defining the period within which an enquiry from the master has to be answered).
Part 2: Hardware Connection
For hardware connection to the control system, there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device
(RS485, fiber optic or terminals).
Connect bus and device (wiring).
Error Handling - Hardware Errors
Information on physical communication errors, such as:
Baudrate Error
Parity Error ...
can be obtained from the event recorder.
Error Handling – Errors on protocol level
If, for example, an invalid memory address is enquired, error codes will be returned by the device that need to be
interpreted.

Modbus TCP
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your

device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Part 1: Setting the TCP/IP Parameters
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
TCP/IP address
Subnetmask
Gateway
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters:
Setting a Unit Identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network.
If a different port than the default port 502 should be used please proceed as follows:
Choose “Private” within the TCP-Port-Configuration.
Set the port-number.
Set the maximum accepted time of “no communication”. If this time has expired – without any comunication,
the device concludes a failure within the master system.
Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands.
There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control system.
Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable.
Direct Commands of the Modbus ®

Res Diagn Cr All Modbus Diagnosis Counters will be reset. inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus ®

Slave ID Device address (Slave ID) within the bus system. Each 1 - 247 1 [Device Para
device address has to be unique within a bus system.
/Modbus
/Communication]
Unit ID The Unit Identifier is used for routing. This parameter is 1 - 255 255 [Device Para
to be set, if a Modbus RTU and a Modbus TCP network
/Modbus
should be coupled.
/Communication]
TCP Port Config TCP Port Configuration. This parameter is to be set Default, Default [Device Para
only if the default Modubs TCP Port should not be
Private /Modbus
used.
/Communication]
Port Port number 502 - 65535 502 [Device Para

/Modbus
And Only available if: TCP Port Config = Private
/Communication]
t-timeout Within this time the answer has to be received by the 0.01 - 10.00s 1s [Device Para
SCADA system, otherwise the request will be
/Modbus
disregarded. In that case the Scada system detects a
communication failure and the Scada System has to /Communication]
send a new request.
Baud rate Baud rate 1200, 19200 [Device Para

2400, /Modbus
4800, /Communication]
9600,
19200,
38400
Physical Settings Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even parity, O=odd 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
parity, N=no parity. Digit 3: Number of stop bits. More
8O1, /Modbus
information on the parity: It is possible that the last data
bit is followed by a parity bit which is used for 8N1, /Communication]
recognition of communication errors. The parity bit
8N2
ensures that with even parity ("EVEN") always an even
number of bits with valence "1" or with odd parity
("ODD") an odd number of "1" valence bits are
transmitted. But it is also possible to transmit no parity
bits (here the setting is "Parity = None"). More
information on the stop-bits: The end of a data byte is
terminated by the stop-bits.


t-call If there is no request telegram sent from Scada to the 1 - 3600s 10s [Device Para
device after expiry of this time - the device concludes a
/Modbus
communication failure within the Scada system.
/Communication]
Scada CmdBlo Activating (allowing)/ Deactivating (disallowing) the inactive, inactive [Device Para
blocking of the Scada Commands
active /Modbus
/Communication]
Disable Latching Disable Latching: If this parameter is active (true), none inactive, inactive [Device Para
of the Modbus states will be latched. That means that
active /Modbus
trip signals wont be latched by Modbus.
/Communication]
AllowGap If this parameter is active (True), the user can request inactive, inactive [Device Para
a set of modbus register without getting an exception,
active /Modbus
because of invalid address in the requested array. The
invalid addresses have a special value 0xFAFA, but the /Communication]
user is responsible for ignoring invalid addresses.
Attention: This special value can be valid, if address is
valid.
Optical rest position Optical rest position Light off, Light on [Device Para
Light on /Modbus
/Communication]
Config Bin Inp1 Configurable Binary Input 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Latched Config Bin Latched Configurable Binary Input inactive, inactive [Device Para
Inp1
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp2
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp3
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp4
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp5
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp6
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


Inp7
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp8
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp9
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp10
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp11
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp12
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp13
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp14
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp15
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


Inp16
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp17
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp18
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp19
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp20
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp21
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp22
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp23
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp24
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


Inp25
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp26
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp27
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp28
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp29
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp30
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp31
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
List
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Inp32
active /Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Mapped Meas 1 Mapped Measured Values. They can be used to 1..n, TrendRecList -.- [Device Para
provide measured values to the Modbus Master.
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/Measured Values]
States of the Module Inputs of the MODBUS ® Protocol

Config Bin Inp1-I State of the module input: Config Bin Inp [Device Para
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]


/Modbus
/Configb Registers
/States]
Values of the MODBUS® Protocol

Mapped Meas 1 Mapped Measured Values. They can be used to provide measured [Operation
values to the Modbus Master.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]


/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]

Counters of the MODBUS® Protocol
Parameter Description
Device Type Device Type: Device type code for relationship between devcie name and its Modbus code:
Woodward:
MRI4 - 1000
MRU4 - 1001
MRA4 - 1002
MCA4 - 1003
MRDT4 - 1005
MCDTV4 - 1006
MCDGV4 - 1007
MRM4 - 1009
MRMV4 - 1010
Comm Version Modbus Communication version. This version number changes if something becomes
incompatible between different Modbus releases.
Modbus® Signals (Output States)
Some signals (that are for a short time active only) have to be acknowledged
separately (e.g. Trip signals) by the Communication System.
Signal Description
Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command

Modbus® Values

NoOfRequestsTotal Total number of requests. Includes requests for 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
other slaves.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfRequestsForMe Total Number of requests for this slave. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfResponse Total number of requests having been responded. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfResponsTimeO Total number of requests with exceeded response 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
verruns time. Physically corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfOverrunErros Total Number of Overrun Failures. Physically 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfParityErrors Total number of parity errors. Physically corrupted 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. Physically 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfBreaks Number of detected communication aborts 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfQueryInvalid Total number of Request errors. Request could 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
not be interpreted
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfInternalError Total Number of Internal errors while interpreting 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

the request.
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]

Profibus
Profibus
Call up »Device parameter/Profibus« and set the following communication parameter:
Slave-address, to allow clear identification of the device.
In addition to that the Master has to be provided with the GSD-file. The GSD-file can be taken from the Product-CD.
For hardware connection to the control system, there is optional an D-SUB interface at the rear side of the
device.
Connect bus and device (wiring).
Up to 123 slaves can be connected.
Terminate the Bus by means of an Terminate Resistor.
Error Handling
Information on physical communication errors, such as:
Baudrate Error
can be obtained from the event recorder or the status display.
Error Handling – Status LED at the rear side
The Profibus D-SUB interface at the rear side of the device is equipped with an status LED.
Baud Search -> red flashing

Baud Found -> green flashing
Data Exchange -> green
No Profibus/Unplugged, not connected -> red

Direct Commands of the Profibus

Reset Comds All Profibus Commands will be reset. inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Profibus

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
Latched 1 Defines whether the Input is latched. inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]


List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]


active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]


List
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]


active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]


List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

List
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]


active /Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Bus parameters]
Inputs of the Profibus

Assignment 1-I Module input state: Scada Assignment [Device Para
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]


/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 1-16]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]


/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]
/Profibus
/Assignment 17-32]

Profibus Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Data OK Data within the Input field are OK (Yes=1)
SubModul Err Assignable Signal, Failure in Sub-Module, Communication Failure.
Connection active Connection active

Profibus Values

Fr Sync Err Frames, that were sent from the Master to the 1 1 - 99999999 [Operation
Slave are faulty.
/Count and RevData
/Profibus]
crcErrors Number of CRC errors that the ss manager has 1 1 - 99999999 [Operation
recognized in received response frames from ss
/Count and RevData
(each error caused a subsystem reset)
/Profibus]
frLossErrors Number of frame loss errors that the ss manager 1 1 - 99999999 [Operation
recognized in received response frames from ss
/Count and RevData
(each error caused a subsystem reset)
/Profibus]
ssCrcErrors Number of CRC errors that the subsystem has 1 1 - 99999999 [Operation
recognized in received trigger frames from host
/Count and RevData
/Profibus]
ssResets Number of subsystem resets/restarts from ss 1 1 - 99999999 [Operation

manager
/Count and RevData
/Profibus]
Master ID Device address (Master ID) within the bus 1 1 - 125 [Operation
system. Each device address has to be unique
/Status Display
within a bus system.
/Profibus
/State]
HO Id PSub Handoff Id of PbSub 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Status Display
/Profibus
/State]
t-WatchDog The Profibus Chip detects a communication issue 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
if this timer is expired without any communication
/Status Display
(Parameterising telegram).
/Profibus
/State]


Slave State Communication State between Slave and Master. Baud Search Baud Search, [Operation
Baud Found, /Status Display
PRM OK, /Profibus
PRM REQ, /State]
PRM Fault,
CFG Fault,
Clear Data,
Data exchange
Baud rate The baud rate that has been detected lastly, will -.- 12 Mb/s, [Operation
still be shown after a connection issue.
6 Mb/s, /Status Display
3 Mb/s, /Profibus
1.5 Mb/s, /State]
0.5 Mb/s,
187500 baud,
93750 baud,
45450 baud,
19200 baud,
9600 baud,
-.-
PNO Id PNO Identification Number. GSD Identification 0C50h 0C50h [Operation
Number.
/Status Display
/Profibus
/State]

IEC60870-5-103
IEC 103
IEC60870-5-103 Protocol Configuration
In order to use the IEC60870-5-103 protocol it has to be assigned to the X103 Interface within the Device Planning.
The device will reboot after setting this parameter.
The parameter X103 is only available if the device is at the rear side equipped
with an interface like RS485 or Fiber Optic.
If the device is equipped with an Fiber Optic Interface, the Optical Rest Position
has to be set within the Device Parameters .
The time-controlled IEC60870-5-103 protocol is based on the Master-Slave working principle. This means that the
substation control and protection system sends an enquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address) which
will then be answered or carried out accordingly.
The device meets the compatibility mode 2. Compatibility mode 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103-functions will be supported:
Initialization (Reset)
Time Synchronization
Reading out of time stamped, instantaneous signals
General Queries
Cyclic Signals
General Commands
Transmission of Disturbance Data
Initialization
The communication has to be reset by a Reset Command each time that the device is turned on or that
communication parameters have been changed. The “Reset CU” Command resets. The relay acts on both Reset
Commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB).
The relay acts on the reset command by an identification signal ASDU 5 (Application Service Data Unit), as a
reason (Cause Of Transmission, COT) for the transmission of the answer either a “Reset CU” or a “Reset FCB” will
be sent depending on the type of the reset command. This information can be part of the data section of the ASDU-
signal.
Name of the Manufacturer

The section for the identification of the software contains three digits of the device code for the identification of the
device type. Beside the upper mentioned identification number the device generates a communication start event.

Time Synchronization
Time and date of the relay can be set by means of the time synchronization function of the IEC60870-5-103
protocol. If the time synchronization signal is send out with a confirmation request, the device will answer with a
confirmation signal.
Spontaneous Events
The events that are generated by the device will be forwarded to the master with numbers for standard function
types / standard information. The data point list comprises all events that can be generated by the device.
Cyclic Measurement
The device generates on a cyclic base measured values by means of ASDU 9. They can be read out via a class 2
query. Please take into account that the measured values will be send out as multiples (1.2 or 2.4 times the rated
value). How to set 1.2 or 2.4 as multiplier for a value can be taken from the data point list.
The parameter “Transm priv meas val” defines if additional measurement values should be transmitted in the private
part. Public and private measured values are transmitted by ASDU9. That means that either a “private” or a “public”
ASDU9 will be transmitted. If this parameter is set, the ASDU9 will contain additional measured values that are an
enhancement of the standard. The “private” ASDU9 is send with a fixed function type and information number that
does not depend the type of device. Please refer to the data point list.
Commands
The data point list comprises a list of the supported commands. Any command will be responded by the device with
a positive or negative confirmation. If the command is executable, the execution with the corresponding reason for
the transmission (COT) will be lead in at first, and subsequently the execution will be confirmed with COT1 within a
ASDU9.
Disturbance Recording
The disturbances recorded by the device can be read out by means described in standard IEC60870-5-103. The
device is in compliance with the VDEW-Control System by transmission of an ASDU 23 without disturbance records
at the beginning of an GI-Cycle.
A disturbance record contains the following information:

Analog Measured Values, IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VEN;
Binary States, transmitted as marks, e.g. Alarms and Trips.
The Transmission ratio will not be supported. The transmission ratio is included in the “Multiplier”.
Blocking the Transmission Direction

The relay does not support functions to block the transmission in a certain direction (supervision direction).

Global Protection Parameters of the IEC60870-5-103

/IEC 103]
t-call If there is no request telegram sent from Scada to the 1 - 3600s 60s [Device Para
device after expiry of this time - the device concludes a
/IEC 103]
communication failure within the Scada system.
Transm priv meas Transmit additional (private) measuring values inactive, inactive [Device Para
val
active /IEC 103]
Transfer Disturb Activates the transmission of disturbance records inactive, inactive [Device Para
Rec
active /IEC 103]
Baud rate Baud rate 1200, 19200 [Device Para

2400, /IEC 103]
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600
Physical Settings Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even parity, O=odd 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
parity, N=no parity. Digit 3: Number of stop bits. More
8O1, /IEC 103]
information on the parity: It is possible that the last data
bit is followed by a parity bit which is used for 8N1,
recognition of communication errors. The parity bit
8N2
ensures that with even parity ("EVEN") always an even
number of bits with valence "1" or with odd parity
("ODD") an odd number of "1" valence bits are
transmitted. But it is also possible to transmit no parity
bits (here the setting is "Parity = None"). More
information on the stop-bits: The end of a data byte is
terminated by the stop-bits.
Light on /IEC 103]

IEC60870-5-103 Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Failure Event lost Failure event lost
IEC60870-5-103 Values

NReceived Total Number of received Messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NSent Total Number of sent Messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadFramings Number of bad Messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadParities Number of Parity Errors 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBreakSignals Number of Communication Interrupts 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NInternalError Number of Internal Errors 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]
NBadCharChecksum Number of Checksum Errors 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/IEC 103]

IEC61850
IEC61850
Introduction
To understand the functioning and mode of operation of a substation in an IEC61850 automation environment, it is
useful to compare the commissioning steps with those of a conventional substation in a Modbus TCP environment.
In a conventional substation the individual IEDs (Intelligent Electronic Devices) communicate in vertically direction
with the higher level control center via SCADA. The horizontal communication is exclusively realized by wiring
output relays (OR) and digital inputs (DI) among each other.
In an IEC61850 environment communication between the IEDs takes place digitally (via Ethernet) by a service
called GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event). By means of this service information about events is
submitted between each IED. Therefore each IED has to know about the functional capability of all other connected
IEDs.
Each IEC61850 capable device includes a description of it's own functionality and communications skills (IED
Capability Description, *.ICD).
By means of a Substation Configuration Tool to describe the structure of the substation, assignment of the devices
to the primary technique, etc. a virtual wiring of the IEDs among each other and with other switch gear of the
substation can be done. A description of the substation configuration will be generated in form of a *.SCD file. At
last this file has to be submitted to each device. Now the IEDs are able to communicate closed among each other,
react to interlockings and operate switch gear.
Modbus-TCP IEC61850
Master Master
ModbusTCP
IEC61850
Ethernet Ethernet
Scada
Scada
IED1 IED2 IED3 IED1 IED2 IED3
DI BO DI BO DI BO
Conventional hard wiring GOOSE IEC61850 soft wiring
Commissioning steps for a conventional substation with Commissioning steps for a substation with IEC61850
modbus TCP environment: environment:
• Parameter setting of the IEDs 1. Parameter setting of the IEDs

• Ethernet installation Ethernet installation
• TCP/IP settings for the IEDs TCP/IP settings for the IEDs
• Wiring according to wiring scheme
2. IEC61850 configuration (software wiring)
a) Exporting an ICD file from each device
b) Configuration of the substation
(generating a SCD file)
c) Transmit SCD file to each device

Generation/Export of a device specific ICD file

Please refer to chapter ”IEC61850“ of the Smart view Manual.
Generation/Export of a SCD file

Substation configuration,
Generation of .SCD file (Station Configuration Description)
The substation configuration, i. e. connection of all logical nodes of protection and control devices, as well as switch
gear usually is done with a „Substation Configuration Tool“. Therefore the ICD files of all connected IEDs in the
IEC61850 environment have to be available. The result of the station wide “software wiring” can be exported in the
form of a SCD file (Station Configuration Description).
Suitable Substation Configuration Tools (SCT) are available by the following Companies:
H&S, Hard- & Software Technologie GmbH & Co. KG, Dortmund (Germany) (www.hstech.de).
Applied Systems Engineering Inc. (www.ase-systems.com)
Kalki Communication Technologies Limited (www.kalkitech.com)
Import of the .SCD file into the device

IEC 61850 Virtual Outputs
Additionally to the standardized logical node status information up to 32 free configurable status information can be
assigned to 32 Virtual Outputs. This can be done in the menu [Device Para/IEC61850].

Direct Commands of the IEC 61850

ResetStatistic Reset of all IEC61850 diagnostic counters inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Global Parameters of the IEC 61850

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /IEC61850]
Deadb integr time Deadband integration time. 0 - 300 0 [Device Para

/IEC61850]
Global Parameters of the IEC 61850

VirtualOutput1 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned or 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the List
/IEC61850]
IEC61850 substation.
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]


/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]


/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]


/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]

States of the Inputs of the IEC 61850

VirtOut1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]


/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]

IEC 61850 Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
MMS Client connected At least one MMS client is connected to the device
All Goose Subscriber active All Goose subscriber in the device are working
VirtInp1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
Quality of GGIO In1 Self-Supervision of the GGIO Input

Signal Description
SPCSO1 Status bit that can be set by clients like e.g. SCADA (Single Point Controllable Status Output).

Signal Description

IEC 61850 Module Values

NoOfGooseRxAll Total number of received GOOSE messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
including messages for other devices (subscribed
/Count and RevData
and not subscribed messages).
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxSubscr Total Number of subscribed GOOSE messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

ibed including messages with incorrect content.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxCorrec Total Number of subscribed and correctly 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

t received GOOSE messages.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxNew Number of subscribed and correctly received 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

GOOSE messages with new content.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseTxAll Total Number of GOOSE messages that have 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

been published by this device.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseTxNew Total Number of new GOOSE messages 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

(modified content) that have been published by
/Count and RevData
this device.
/IEC61850]
NoOfServerRequests Total number of MMS Server requests including 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

All incorrect requests.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadAll Total Number of values read from this device 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
including incorrect requests.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadCorre Total Number of correctly read values from this 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
ct device.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataWrittenAll Total Number of values written by this device 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

including incorrect ones.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]


NoOfDataWrittenCorr Total Number of correctly written values by this 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
ect device.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataChangeNot Number of detected changes within the datasets 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

ification that are published with GOOSE messages.
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
No of Client Number of active MMS client connections 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

Connections
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
Values of the IEC 61850

GoosePublisherState State of the GOOSE Publisher (on or off) Off Off, [Operation
On, /Status Display
Error /IEC61850
/State]
GooseSubscriberStat State of the GOOSE Subscriber (on or off) Off Off, [Operation
e
On, /Status Display
Error /IEC61850
/State]
MmsServerState State of MMS Server (on or off) Off Off, [Operation
On, /Status Display
Error /IEC61850
/State]

DNP3
DNP3
DNP (Distributed Network Protocol) is for data and information exchange between SCADA (Master) and IEDs
(Intelligent Electronic Devices). The DNP protocol has been developed in first releases for serial communication.
Due to further development of the DNP protocol, it offers now also TCP and UDP communication options via
Ethernet.
DNP Device Planning
Depending on the hardware of the proctective device up to three DNP communication options are available within
the Device Planning.
Call up the device planning menu.
Select (depending on device code) the appropriate SCADA Protocol.
• DNP3 RTU (via serial Port)

• DNP3 TCP (via Ethernet)
• DNP3 UDP (via Ethernet)
DNP Protocol General Settings
Please note that unsolicited reporting is not available for serial communication,
if more than one slave is connected to the serial communication (collisions). Do
not use in these cases unsolicited reporting for DNP RTU.
Unsolicited reporting is available also for serial communication, if each slave

is connected via a separated connection to the Master-System. That means,
the master is equipped with a separate serial interface for each slave (multi
serial cards).
Call up menu [Device Para/DNP3/Communication].
The Communication (General Settings) Settings have to be set according to the needs of the SCADA (Master) –
System.
Self Addressing is available for DNP-TCP. That means that the Master and Slave id are auto-detected.

Point Mapping
Please take into account that the designations of inputs and outputs are set from the
Masters perspective. This way of choosing the designations is due to a definition in the
DNP standard. That means for example that Binary Inputs that can be set within the
Device Parameters of the DNP protocol are the “Binary Inputs” of the Master.
Call up menu [Device Para/DNP3/Point Map]. Once the general settings of the DNP protocol are done, the point
mapping is to be done as a next step.
• Binary Inputs (States to be send to the master)

• Double Bit Inputs (Breaker states to be send to the master)
• Counters (Counters to be send to the master)
• Analog Inputs (e.g. measured values to be send to the master). Please take into account that floating
values have to be transmitted as integers. That means they have to be scaled (multiplied) with a scaling
factor in order to bring them into the integer format.
Use Binary outputs in order to control e.g. LEDs or Relays within the protective device (via Logic).
Point Mapping
Binary Inputs
Double Bit Inputs

Pulse Signal
Counters DNP Master
Analog Inputs
Binary Outputs
Protective Relay

Please try to avoid gaps that will slow down the performance of the DNP communication. That means do not leave
unused inputs / outputs in between used inputs / outputs (e.g. Do not use Binary Output 1 and 3 when 2 is
unused).
Application Example Setting a Relay:
Binary Output signals of the DNP cannot directly be used in order to switch relays because the DNP Binary Outputs
are pulse signals (by DNP definition, not steady state). Steady states can be created by means of Logic functions.
The Logic Functions can be assigned onto the Relay Inputs.
Please note: You can use a Set/Reset element (Flip Flop) from Logics.
Logics Assign Logic Functions onto Relay Inputs
Pulse Signal
>1
Signal Set Relay BO
>1
Signal Reset Relay
Pulse Signal

Direct Commands of the DNP

Res all Diag Cr Reset all diagnosis counters inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Slave Id SlaveId defines the DNP3 address of this device 0 - 65519 1 [Device Para
(Outstation)
/DNP3
/Communication]
Master Id MasterId defines the DNP3 address of master 0 - 65519 65500 [Device Para
(SCADA)
/DNP3
/Communication]
Global Protection Parameters of the DNP

active /DNP3
/Communication]
IP Port Number Port Number of the IP address 0 - 65535 20000 [Device Para
/DNP3
/Communication]
Baud rate Baud rate for communication 1200, 19200 [Device Para
2400, /DNP3
4800, /Communication]
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200
Frame Layout Frame Layout 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
8O1, /DNP3
8N1, /Communication]
8N2
Light on /DNP3
/Communication]


SelfAddress Support of self (automatic) addresses inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /DNP3
/Communication]
DataLink confirm Enables or disables the data layer confirmation (ack). Never, Never [Device Para
Always, /DNP3
On_Large /Communication]
t-DataLink confirm Data layer confirmation timeout 0.1 - 10.0s 1s [Device Para
/DNP3
/Communication]
DataLink num Number of repetition of data link packet sending after 0 - 255 3 [Device Para
retries failing
/DNP3
/Communication]
Direction Bit Enables Direction Bit functionality. The Direction Bit is 0 inactive, inactive [Device Para
for SlaveStation and 1 for MasterStation
active /DNP3
/Communication]
Max Frame Size This value is used to limit the net Frame Size 64 - 255 255 [Device Para
/DNP3
/Communication]
Test Link Period This value specifies the time period when to send a 0.0 - 120.0s 0s [Device Para
Test Link-Frame
/DNP3
/Communication]
AppLink confirm Determines if the device will request that the Never, Always [Device Para
Application Layer response be confirmed or not
Always, /DNP3
Event /Communication]
t-AppLink confirm Application layer response timeout 0.1 - 10.0s 5s [Device Para
/DNP3
/Communication]
AppLink num The number of times the device will retransmit an 0 - 255 0 [Device Para
retries Application Layer fragment
/DNP3
/Communication]
Unsol Reporting Enables supports unsolicited reporting. This is only for inactive, inactive [Device Para
Network connections available. For serial connection
active /DNP3
this setting is fix set to inactive
/Communication]


Unsol Reporting Set the amount of time that the outstation will wait for 1.0 - 60.0s 10s [Device Para
Timeout an Application Layer confirmation back from the master
/DNP3
indicating that the master received the unsolicited
response message. /Communication]
Unsol Reporting Set the number of retries that an outstation transmits in 0 - 255 2 [Device Para
Retry each unsolicited response series if it does not receive
/DNP3
confirmation back from the master.
/Communication]
TestSeqNo Test if sequence number of request is incremented. If it inactive, inactive [Device Para
is not correctly incremented the request will be ignored.
active /DNP3
It is recommended to have it inactive but some older
DNP implementations need it activated. /Communication]
TestSBO It enables a stricter comparing of SBO and operate inactive, active [Device Para
command. For older DNP versions it is recommanded
active /DNP3
to deactivated it.
/Communication]
Timeout SBO DNP Outputs can be controlled in a two stage 1.0 - 60.0s 30s [Device Para
procedure (SBO: Select Before Operate). These
/DNP3
outputs are to be selected first by a select command.
After this the bit is reserved for this operate request. /Communication]
When this timer is expired, the bit will be released.
ColdRestart Enables support for Cold Restart function. inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /DNP3
/Communication]
Deadb integr time Deadband integration time. 0 - 300 1 [Device Para

/DNP3
/Communication]
BinaryInput 0 Virtual Digital Input (DNP). This corresponds to a virtual 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
binary output of the protective device. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
DoubleBitInput 0 Double Bit Digital Input (DNP). This corresponds to a 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
double bit binary output of the protective device. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
BinaryCounter 0 Counter can be used to report counter values to the 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]


DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
DNP master. List
/DNP3
/Point map
/BinaryCounter]
Analog value 0 Analog value can be used to report values to the 1..n, TrendRecList -.- [Device Para
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
Scale Factor 0 The scale factor is used to convert the measured value 0.001, 1 [Device Para
in an integer format
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
Dead Band 0 If a change of measured value is greater than the 0.01 - 100.00% 1% [Device Para
deadband value it will be reported to the master.
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
master (DNP)
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]


0.01, /DNP3
0.1, /Point map
1, /Analog Input]
10,
100,
1000,
10000,
100000,
1000000
/DNP3
/Point map
/Analog Input]
Inputs of the DNP

BinaryInput0-I Virtual Digital Input (DNP). This corresponds to a virtual binary [Device Para
output of the protective device.
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Binary Inputs]
DoubleBitInput0-I Double Bit Digital Input (DNP). This corresponds to a double bit [Device Para
binary output of the protective device.
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]


/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
/DNP3
/Point map
/Double Bit Inputs]
Options of the DNP
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.FaultNo Disturbance No
Prot.No of grid faults Number of grid faults: A grid fault, e.g. a short circuit, might cause several faults with trip and
autoreclosing, each fault being identified by an increased fault number. In this case, the grid fault number
remains the same.
SG[1].TripCmd Cr Counter: Total number of trips of the switchgear (circuit breaker, load break switch…). Resettable with
Total or All.
LVRT[1].NumOf Vdips in t- Number of Voltage dips during t-LVRT
LVRT
LVRT[1].Cr Tot Numb of Vdips Counter Total number of voltage dips.
LVRT[1].Cr Tot Numb of Vdips Counter Total number of voltage dips that caused a Trip.
to Trip
LVRT[2].NumOf Vdips in t- Number of Voltage dips during t-LVRT
LVRT
LVRT[2].Cr Tot Numb of Vdips Counter Total number of voltage dips.
LVRT[2].Cr Tot Numb of Vdips Counter Total number of voltage dips that caused a Trip.
to Trip
AR.AR Shot No. Counter - Auto Reclosure Attempts
AR.Total number Cr Total number of all executed Automatic Reclosures Attempts
AR.Cr successfl Total number of successfully executed Automatic Reclosures
AR.Cr failed Total number of unsuccessfully executed automatic reclosure attempts
AR.Cr Service Alarm1 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 1
AR.Cr Service Alarm2 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 2
AR.Max Shots / h Cr Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour.
PQSCr.Wp+ Positive Active Power is consumed active energy
PQSCr.Wp- Negative Active Power (Fed Energy)
PQSCr.Wq+ Positive Reactive Power is consumed Reactive Energy
PQSCr.Wq- Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy)
Sys.Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter of the protective device

Selectable Switchgears of the DNP
Name Description
-.- No assignment
SG[1].Pos Signal: Circuit Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = Disturbed)
DNP Signals (Output States)
Some signals (that are for a short time active only) have to be acknowledged
separately (e.g. Trip signals) by the Communication System.
Signal Description
busy This message is set if the protocol is started. It will be reset if the protocol is shut down.
ready The message will be set if the protocol is successfully started and ready for data exchange.
active The communication with the Master (Scada) is active.
BinaryOutput0 Virtual Digital Output (DNP). This corresponds to a virtual binary input of the protective device.

Signal Description
DNP Values

NReceived Diagnostic counter: Number of received 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
characters
/Count and RevData
/DNP3]
NSent Diagnostic counter: Number of sent characters 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
/DNP3]
NBadFramings Diagnostic counter: Number of bad framings. A 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
large number indicates a disturbed serial
/Count and RevData
connection.
/DNP3]
NBadParities Diagnostic counter: Number of parity errrors. A 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
connection.
/DNP3]
NBreakSignals Diagnostic counter: Number of break signals. A 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

/Count and RevData
connection.
/DNP3]
NBadChecksum Diagnostic counter: Number of frames received 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation

with bad checksum.
/Count and RevData
/DNP3]

Time Synchronisation
TimeZones
The user has the possibility to synchronise the device with a central time generator. This offers the following
advantages:
The time does not drift off from the reference time. A continuously accumulating deviation from the reference
time thereby will be balanced. Also refer to the chapter Specifications (Tolerances Real Time Clock).
All time synchronised devices operate with the same time. Thus logged events of the individual devices can be
compared exactly and be evaluated in conjunction (single events of the event recorder, disturbance records).
The device's time can be synchronised via the following protocols:

IRIG-B
SNTP
Communications-Protocol Modbus (RTU or TCP)
Communications-Protocol IEC60870-5-103
The provided protocols use different hardware interfaces and differ also in their achieved time accuracy. Further
information can be found in the chapter Specifications.
Used Protocol Hardware-Interface Recommended Application

Without time --- Not recommended
synchronisation
IRIG-B IRIG-B Terminal Recommended, if interface available
SNTP RJ45 (Ethernet) Recommended alternative to IRIG-B, especially when using
IEC 61850 or Modbus TCP
Modbus RTU RS485, D-SUB or Recommended when using Modbus RTU communication protocol
Fibre Optic and when no IRIG-B code generator is available
Modbus TCP RJ45 (Ethernet) Limited recommendation when Modbus TCP communication
protocol is used and no IRIG-B code generator or SNTP-Server is
available
IEC 60870-5-103 RS485, D-SUB or Recommended when using IEC 10870-5-103 communication
Fibre Optic protocol and no IRIG-B code generator is available

Accuracy of Time Synchronisation
The accuracy of the device's synchronised system time depends on several factors:
accuracy of the connected time generator
used synchronisation protocol
when using Modbus TCP or SNTP: Network load and data package transmission times
Please consider the accuracy of the used time generator. Fluctuations of the
time generator's time will cause the same fluctuations of the protection relay's
system time.
Selection of Timezone and Synchronisation Protocol
The protection relay masters both UTC and local time. This means that the device can be synchronised with UTC
time while using local time for user display.
Time Synchronisation with UTC time (recommended):

Time synchronisation is usually done using UTC time. This means for example that an IRIG-B time generator is
sending UTC time information to the protection relay. This is the recommended use case, since here a continuous
time synchronisation can be ensured. There are no “leaps in time” through change of summer- and wintertime.
To achieve that the device shows the current local time, the timezone and the change between summer- and
wintertime can be configured.
Please carry out the following parameterization steps under [Device Para/ Time]:
1.Select your local timezone in the timezone menu.
2.There also configure the switching of daylight saving time.
3.Select the used time synchronisation protocol in the TimeSync menu (e.g. “IRIG-B”).
4.Set the parameters of the synchronisation protocol (refer to the according chapter).
Time Synchronisation with local time:

Should the time synchronisation however be done using local time, then please leave the timezone to » UTC+0
London« and do not use switching of daylight saving time.
The synchronisation of the relay´s system time is exclusively done by the

synchronisation protocol selected in the menu [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync/
Used Protocol].
Without Time Synchronisation:

To achieve that the device shows the current local time, the timezone and the change between summer- and
wintertime can be configured.
Please carry out the following parameterization steps under [Device Para/ Time]:
1. Select your local timezone in the timezone menu.
2. There also configure the switching of daylight saving time.
3. Select »manual« as your used protocol in the TimeSync menu.
4. Set date and time.

Global Protection Parameters of the Time Synchronization

DST offset Difference to wintertime -180 - 180min 60min [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]
DST manual Manual setting of the Daylight Saving Time inactive, active [Device Para
active /Time
/Timezone]
Summertime Daylight Saving Time inactive, inactive [Device Para

active /Time
Only available if: DST manual = active
/Timezone]
Summertime m Month of clock change summertime January, March [Device Para

February, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = inactive
March, /Timezone]
April,
May,
June,
July,
August,
September,
October,
November,
December
Summertime d Day of clock change summertime Sunday, Sunday [Device Para
Monday, /Time
Tuesday, /Timezone]
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday,
General day
Summertime w Place of selected day in month (for clock change First, Last [Device Para
summertime)
Second, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = inactive Third, /Timezone]
Fourth,
Last


Summertime h Hour of clock change summertime 0 - 23h 2h [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]
Summertime min Minute of clock change summertime 0 - 59min 0min [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]
Wintertime m Month of clock change wintertime January, October [Device Para

February, /Time
March, /Timezone]
April,
May,
June,
July,
August,
September,
October,
November,
December
Wintertime d Day of clock change wintertime Sunday, Sunday [Device Para
Monday, /Time
Tuesday, /Timezone]
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday,
General day
Wintertime w Place of selected day in month (for clock change First, Last [Device Para
wintertime)
Second, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = inactive Third, /Timezone]
Fourth,
Last
Wintertime h Hour of clock change wintertime 0 - 23h 3h [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]
Wintertime min Minute of clock change wintertime 0 - 59min 0min [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]


Time Zones Time Zones UTC+14 Kiritimati, UTC+0 London [Device Para
UTC+13 Rawaki, /Time
UTC+12.75 Chat- /Timezone]
ham Island,
UTC+12 Welling-
ton,
UTC+11.5 Kings-
ton,
UTC+11 Port Vila,
UTC+10.5 Lord
Howe Island,
UTC+10 Sydney,
UTC+9.5 Adelaide,
UTC+9 Tokyo,
UTC+8 Hong Kong,
UTC+7 Bangkok,
UTC+6.5 Rangoon,
UTC+6 Colombo,
UTC+5.75 Kath-
mandu,
UTC+5.5 New Del-
hi,
UTC+5 Islamabad,
UTC+4.5 Kabul,
UTC+4 Abu Dhabi,
UTC+3.5 Tehran,
UTC+3 Moscow,
UTC+2 Athens,
UTC+1 Berlin,
UTC+0 London,
UTC-1 Azores,
UTC-2 Fern. d. No-
ronha,
UTC-3 Buenos Ai-
res,
UTC-3.5 St. John’s,
UTC-4 Santiago,
UTC-5 New York,
UTC-6 Chicago,
UTC-7 Salt Lake
City,
UTC-8 Los Ange-
les,


TimeSync Time synchronisation -, - [Device Para
IRIG-B, /Time
SNTP, /TimeSync
Modbus, /TimeSync]
IEC60870-5-103,
DNP3
SNTP
SNTP
Important pre-condition: The protective relay needs to have access to a SNTP

server via the connected network. This server preferably should be installed
locally.
Principle – General Use
SNTP is a standard protocol for time synchronisation via a network. For this at least one SNTP server has to be
available within the network. The device can be configured for one or two SNTP servers.
The protection relay's system time will be synchronised with the connected SNTP server 1-4 times per minute. In
turn the SNTP server synchronises its time via NTP with other NTP servers. This is the normal case. Alternatively it
can synchronise its time via GPS, radio controlled clock or the like.
GPS Satellite Signal (optional )
GPS Connection (optional )
TCP/IP
NTP-Server SNTP-Server
NTP-Protocol TCP/IP
(option) Protective Relay
SNTP-Protocol

Accuracy
The accuracy of the used SNTP server and the excellence of its reference clock influences the accuracy of the
protection relay's clock.
For further information about accuracy refer to chapter Specifications.
With each transmitted time information, the SNTP server also sends information about its accuracy:
Stratum: The stratum indicates over how many interacting NTP-Servers the used SNTP server is connected to
an atomic or radio controlled clock.
Precision: This indicates the accuracy of the system time provided by the SNTP server.
Additionally the performance of the connected network (traffic and data package transmission times) has an
influence on the accuracy of the time synchronisation.
Recommended is a locally installed SNTP server with an accuracy of ≤200 µsec. If this cannot be realised, the
connected server's excellence can be checked in the menu [Operation/Status Display/TimeSync]:
The server quality gives information about the accuracy of the used server. The quality should be GOOD or
SUFFICIENT. A server with BAD quality should not be used, because this could cause fluctuations in time
synchronisation.
The network quality gives information about the network's load and data package transmission time. The quality
should be GOOD or SUFFICIENT. A network with BAD quality should not be used, because this could cause
fluctuations in time synchronisation.
Using two SNTP Servers
When configuring two SNTP servers, the device selects the server with the lower stratum value, because this
generally provides a more precise time synchronisation. If the servers have the same stratum value, the device
selects the server with the better precision. It does not matter, which of the servers is configured as server 1 or
server 2.
When the last used server fails, the device automatically switches to the other server. Should the first server
recover after some time, the device switches back to this (better) server automatically.
SNTP Commissioning
Activate the SNTP time synchronisation by means of the menu [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync]:
Select »SNTP« in the time synchronisation menu.

Set the IP address of the first server in the SNTP menu.
Set the IP address of the second server, if available.
Set all configured servers to “active”.

Fault Analysis
If there is no SNTP signal for more than 120 sec, the SNTP status changes from “active” to “inactive” and an entry
in the Event Recorder will be created.
The SNTP functionality can be checked in the menu [Operation/Status Display/TimeSync/Sntp]:

If the SNTP status is not indicated as being “active”, please proceed as follows:
Check if the wiring is correct (Ethernet-cable connected).

Check if a valid IP address is set in the device (Device Para/TCP/IP).
Check if the Ethernet connection is active (Device Para/TCP/IP/Link = Up?).
Check if both the SNTP server and the protection device answer to a Ping.
Check if the SNTP server is up and working.
Device Planning Parameters of the SNTP

use
Direct Commands of the SNTP

Res Counter Reset all Counters. inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]

Global Protection Parameters of the SNTP

Server1 Server 1 inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
IP Byte1 IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4 0 - 255 0 [Device Para
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
Server2 Server 2 inactive, inactive [Device Para
active /Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]


/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
Signals of the SNTP
Signal Description
SNTP active Signal: If there is no valid SNTP signal for 120 sec, SNTP is regarded as inactive.
SNTP Counters

NoOfSyncs Total Number of Synchronizations. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfConnectLost Total Number of lost SNTP Connections (no sync 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
for 120 sec).
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfSmallSyncs Service counter: Total Number of very small Time 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Corrections.
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfNormSyncs Service counter: Total Number of normal Time 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Corrections
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfBigSyncs Service counter: Total Number of big Time 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Corrections
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfFiltSyncs Service counter: Total Number of filtered Time 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Corrections
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]


NoOfSlowTrans Service counter: Total Number of slow Transfers. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfHighOffs Service counter: Total Number of high Offsets. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfIntTimeouts Service counter: Total Number of internal 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
timeouts.
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
StratumServer1 Stratum of Server 1 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Status Display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
StratumServer2 Stratum of Server 2 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Status Display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]

SNTP Values

Used Server Which Server is used for SNTP synchronization. None Server1, [Operation
Server2, /Status Display
None /TimeSync
/SNTP]
PrecServer1 Precision of Server 1 0ms 0- [Operation
1000.00000ms
/Status Display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
PrecServer2 Precision of Server 2 0ms 0- [Operation
1000.00000ms
/Status Display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
ServerQlty Quality of Server used for Synchronization - GOOD, [Operation
(GOOD, SUFFICIENT, BAD)
SUFFICIENT, /Status Display
BAD, /TimeSync
- /SNTP]
NetConn Quality of Network Connection (GOOD, - GOOD, [Operation
SUFFICIENT, BAD).
SUFFICIENT, /Status Display
BAD, /TimeSync
- /SNTP]

IRIG-B00X
IRIG-B
Requirement: An IRIG-B00X time code generator is needed. IRIG-B004 and

higher will support/transmit the “year information”.
If you are using an IRIG time code that does not support the “year information”
(IRIG-B000, IRIG-B001, IRIG-B002, IRIG-B003), you have to set the “year”
manually within the device. In these cases the correct year information is a
precondition for a properly working IRIG-B.
Principle - General Use
The IRIG-B standard is the most used standard to synchronize the time of protection devices in medium voltage
applications.
The protection device supports IRIG-B according to the IRIG STANDARD 200-04.
This means that all time synchronization formats IRIG-B00X (IRIG-B000 / B001 / B002 / B003 / B004 / B005 /
B006 / B007) are supported. It is recommended to use IRIG-B004 and higher which also transmits the “year
information”.
The system time of the protection device is being synchronized with the connected IRIG-B code generator once a
second. The accuracy of the used IRIG-B code generator can be increased by connecting a GPS-receiver to it.
GPS Satellite Signal (optional)
GPS Connection (optional )
IRIG-B
Time Code Generator
Protective Relay
- +
Twisted Pair Cable
To Other Devices
The location of the IRIG-B interface depends to the device type. Please refer to the wiring diagram supplied with the
protective device.

IRIG-B Commissioning
Activate the IRIG-B synchronization within menu [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync]:
Select »IRIG-B« in the time synchronisation menu.

Set the time synchronization in the IRIG-B menu to »Active«.
Select the IRIG-B type (choose B000 through B007).
Fault Analysis
If the device does not receive any IRIG-B time code for more than 60 s, the IRIG-B status switches from » active« to
»inactive« and there is created an entry within the Event Recorder.
Check the IRIG-B functionality through the menu [Operation/ Status display/ TimeSync/ IRIG-B]:
Should the IRIG-B status not be reported as being »active«, please proceed as follows:
To begin with check the IRIG-B wiring.

Check, if the correct IRIG-B00X type is configured.
IRIG-B Control Commands
In addition to the date and time information, the IRIG-B code offers the option to transmit up to 18 control
commands that can be processed by the protective device. They have to be set and issued by the IRIG-B code
generator.
The protective device offers up to 18 IRIG-B assignment options for those control commands in order to carry out
the assigned action. If there is a control command assigned to an action, this action is being triggered as soon as
the control command is transmitted as being true. As an example there can be triggered the start of statistics or the
street lighting can be switched on through a relay.

Device Planning Parameters of the IRIG-B00X

use
Direct Commands of the IRIG-B00X

Res IRIG-B Cr Resetting of the Diagnosis Counters: IRIG-B inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the IRIG-B00X

active /Time
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
IRIG-B00X Determination of the Type: IRIG-B00X. IRIG-B types IRIGB-000, IRIGB-000 [Device Para
differ in types of included “Coded Expressions” (year,
IRIGB-001, /Time
control-functions, straight-binary-seconds).
IRIGB-002, /TimeSync
IRIGB-003, /IRIG-B]
IRIGB-004,
IRIGB-005,
IRIGB-006,
IRIGB-007

Signals of the IRIG-B00X (Output States)
Signal Description
IRIG-B active Signal: If there is no valid IRIG-B signal for 60 sec, IRIG-B is regarded as inactive.
High-Low Invert Signal: The High and Low signals of the IRIG-B are inverted. This does NOT mean that the
wiring is faulty. If the wiring is faulty no IRIG-B signal will be detected.
Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal. The external IRIG-B generator can set these signals. They can
be used for further control procedures inside the device (e.g. logic funtions).

IRIG-B00X Values

NoOfFramesOK Total Number valid Frames. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. Physically 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
corrupted Frame.
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
Edges Edges: Total number of rising and falling edges. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
This signal indicates if a signal is available at the
/Count and RevData
IRIG-B input.
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]

Parameters
Parameters
Parameter setting and planning can be done:
directly at the device or
by way of the Smart view software.
Parameter Definitions
Device Parameters
Device Parameters are part of the Parameter Tree. By means of them you can (depending on the type of device):
• Set cutoff levels,

• Configure Digital Inputs,
• Configure Output Relays,
• Assign LEDs,
• Assign Acknowledgment Signals,
• Configure Statistics,
• Configure Protocol Parameters,
• Adapt HMI Settings,
• Configure Recorders (reports),
• Set Date and Time,
• Change Passwords,
• Check the version (build) of the device.
Field Parameters
Field Parameters are part of the Parameter Tree. Field Parameters comprise the essential, basic settings of your
switchboard such as rated frequency, transformer ratios.
Protection Parameters
Protection Parameters are part of the Parameter Tree. This tree comprises:
• Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: All settings and assignments that are
done within the Global Parameter Tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups. They have to be set
once only. In addition to that they comprise the CB Management.
• The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters: You can either direct switch onto a
certain parameter setting group or you can determine the conditions for switching onto another parameter
setting group.
• Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: By means of the Parameter Setting
Group Parameters you can individually adapt your protective device to the current conditions or grid
conditions. They can be individually set in each Setting group.

Parameters
Device Planning Parameters
Device Planning Parameters are part of the Parameter Tree.
• Improving the Usability (clearness): All protection modules that are currently not needed can be
• de-protected (switched to invisible) by means of Device Planning. In Menu Device Planning you can adapt
the scope of functionality of the protective device exactly to your needs. You can improve the usability by
de-projecting all modules that are currently not needed.
• Adapting the device to your application: For those modules that you need, determine how they should
work (e.g. directional, non-directional, <, >...).
Direct Commands
Direct Commands are part of the Device Parameter Tree but they are NOT part of the parameter file. They will be
executed directly (e.g. Resetting of a Counter).
State of the Module Inputs
Module Inputs are part of the Parameter Tree. The State of the Module Input is context-dependent.
By means of the Module Inputs influence can be taken on the Modules. You can assign Signals onto Module
Inputs. The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be taken from the Status Display. Module Inputs
can be identified by an „-I“ at the end of the name.
Signals
Signals are part of the Parameter Tree. The state of the signal is context-dependent.
• Signals represent the state of your installation/equipment (e.g. Position Indicators of the Circuit Breaker).
• Signals are assessments of the state of the grid and the equipment (System OK, Transformer failure
detected...).
• Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device (e.g. Trip command) based on your parameter
settings.

320
Parameters
Adaptive Parameter Sets
Protection Para/Global Prot Para / I-Prot / I[1]...[n] / AdaptSet...

AdaptSet 4
&
AdaptSet 3
1..n, Assignment List &

et
tS
AdaptSet 2 ap
Ad
1..n, Assignment List &
Protection Para
AdaptSet 1
PSet-Switch
&
AdaptSet 4
MRA4
AdaptSet 3
PSet-Switch.Mode AdaptSet 2
AdaptSet 1
PS1
Standard [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PS2
[0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
PS3
PS4
PSS via Inp fct
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
PSS via Scada
Function ExBlo Fc Ex rev Interl Fc Blo TripCmd ExBlo TripCmd Fc I> Char t t-char Reset Mode t-reset IH2 Blo nondir Trip at V=0
Parameter Set 1 active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive active/inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] active/inactive active/inactive
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Parameters
Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Parameter Tree.

By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets you can modify temporarily single parameters within the parameter setting
groups.
Adaptive Parameters fall back automatically, if the acknowledged signal, that

has activated them, has fallen back. Please take into account that Adaptive Set
1 is dominant to Adaptive Set 2. Adaptive Set 2 is dominant to Adaptive Set 3.
Adaptive Set 3 is dominant to Adaptive Set 4.
In order to increase the usability (clearness) Adaptive Parameter Sets become

visible if an corresponding activation signals has been assigned (Smart view
2.0 and higher).
Example: In order to use Adaptive Parameters within Protective Element I[1]

please proceed as follows:
Assign within the Global Parameter tree within Protective Element I[1] an
activation signal for AdaptiveParameterSet 1.
AdaptiveParameterSet 1 becomes now visible within the Protection Parameter

Sets for element I[1].
By means of additional activation signals further Adaptive Parameter Sets can

be used.
The functionality of the IED (relay) can be enhanced / adapted by means of Adaptive Parameters in order to meet
the requirements of modified states of the grid or the power supply system respectively to manage unpredictable
events.
Moreover, the adaptive parameter can also be used to realize various special protective functions or to expand the
existing function modules in a simple way without to redesign the existing hardware or software platform costly.
The Adaptive Parameter feature allows, besides a standard parameter set, one of the four parameter sets labeled
from 1 to 4, to be used for example in a time overcurrent element under the control of the configurable Set Control
Logics. The dynamical switch-over of the adaptive parameter set is only active for a particular element when its
adaptive set control logic is configured and only as long as the activation signal is true.
For some protection elements such as time overcurrent and instantaneous overcurrent ( 50P, 51P, 50G, 51G…),
besides the “default” setting there exist another 4 “alternative” settings for pickup value, curve type, time dial, reset
mode set values which can be switched-over dynamically by means of the configurable adaptive setting control
logics in the single set parameter.

Parameters
If the Adaptive Parameter feature is not used, the adaptive set control logics will not be selected (assigned). The
protective elements work in this case just like a normal protection using the “Default” settings. If one of the
Adaptive Set Control logics” is assigned to a logic function, the protective element will be “switched-over” to the
corresponding adaptive settings if the assigned logic function is asserted and will fall back to the “Default” Setting if
the assigned signal that has been activated the Adaptive Set has fallen back.
Application Example
During a Switch-OnTo-Fault condition, it is usually requested to make the embedded protective function tripping the
faulted line faster, instantaneously or sometimes non-directionally.
Such a Switch-OnTo-Fault application can easily be realized using the Adaptive Parameter features above
mentioned: The standard time overcurrent protection element (e.g. 51P) normally works with an inverse curve type
(e.g. ANSI Type A), while in case of SOTF condition, it should trip instantaneously. If the SOTF logic function
»SOTF ENABLED« is detecting a manual circuit breaker close condition the relay switches to AdaptiveSet1 if the
signal »SOTF.ENABLED« is assigned to AdaptiveSet1. The corresponding AdaptiveSet1 will become active and that
means e.g. »curve type = DEFT« and »t = 0« sec.

Parameters
The screenshot above shows the adaptive setting configurations following applications based on only one simple
overcurrent protection element:
1. Standard Set: Default settings

2. Adaptive Set 1: SOTF application (Switch-Onto-Fault)
3. Adaptive Set 2: CLPU application (Cold Load Pickup)
4. Adaptive Set 3: Voltage-Controlled time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
5. Adaptive Set 4: Negative- Phase- Sequence- Voltage-Controlled time overcurrent protection

Parameters
Application Examples
• The output signal of the Switch Onto Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that
sensibilizes the overcurrent protection.
• The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that
desensitizes the overcurrent protection.
• By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized. After a reclosure
attempt the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted.
• Depending on undervoltage the overcurrent protection can be modified (Voltage Controlled).
• The earth overcurrent protection can be modified by the residual voltage.
• Matching the ground current protective settings dynamically and automatically according to the single-
phase load diversity (Adaptive relay Setting – Normal Setting/Alternative Setting)
Adaptive Parameter Sets are only available for devices with current protection
modules.

Parameters
Adaptive Parameter Set Activation Signals
Name Description
-.- No assignment
IH2.Blo L1 Signal: Blocked L1
IH2.Blo IG meas Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (measured ground current)
IH2.Blo IG calc Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (calculated ground current)
IH2.3-ph Blo Signal: Inrush was detected in at least one phase - trip command blocked.
V[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
Intertripping.Alarm Signal: Alarm
LVRT[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
LVRT[1].t-LVRT is running Signal: t-LVRT is running
VG[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
V012[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
UFLS.Alarm Signal: Alarm P->&f<
UFLS.Trip Signal: Signal: Trip
AR.running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control
AR.Shot 1 Shot Control
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled

Parameters
Name Description
ExP[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm
CTS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
LOP.Alarm Signal: Alarm Loss of Potential
DI Slot X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
Modbus.Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
IEC61850.VirtInp1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)

Parameters
Name Description
IEC61850.SPCSO1 Status bit that can be set by clients like e.g. SCADA (Single Point Controllable Status Output).

Parameters
Name Description
IEC 103.Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
Profibus.Scada Cmd 1 Scada Command
Logics.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logics.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output
Logics.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logics.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Access Authorizations (access areas)
Passwords – Areas
The following table shows the access areas and the authorization passwords that they require in order to access
them.
Area Symbol Authorization Password Access to:

Read Only-Lv0 Level 0 provides Read Only access to all
settings and parameters of the device.
The device will fall back into this level
automatically after a longer period or
inactivity
Prot-Lv1 This password provides access to the

reset- and acknowledge options. In
addition to that, it permits the execution of
manual trigger signals.
Prot-Lv2 This password provides access to the

reset and acknowledge options. In
addition to that it permits changing of
protection settings and the configuration
of the trip manager.
Control-Lv1 This password grants permission for

switching operations (switching
switchgears)
Control-Lv2 This password grants permission for

switching operations (switching
switchgears). In addition to that it gives
access to the switchgear settings
(switching authority, interlockings, general
settings of switchgears, Breaker wear...).
Supervisor-Lv3 This password grants non-restricted
access to all parameters and settings of
the device (device configuration). This
includes also the devices planning,
device parameters (e.g. Date and Time),
Field Parameters, Service Parameters
and Logic Parameters.
If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer time
(can be set between 20 – 3600 seconds) it changes into »Read Only-Lv0«
mode automatically. This parameter (t-max-Edit) can be modified within menu
[Device Para\HMI].

Parameters
Access Areas (Password Level):
Supervisor-Lv3
Prot-Lv2 Control-Lv2
Prot-Lv1 Control-Lv1
You have to ensure, that the access authorizations are protected by secure
passwords. These passwords have to be kept as a secret and to be known only
by the authorized persons.
A lock symbol indicates in the upper right corner of the display if there are any
access authorizations active at the moment . That means, within the mode
"Read Only Lv0" a closed (locked) lock symbol will be shown in the upper right
corner of the display. As soon as there are any access authorizations active
(above the "Read Only-Lv0" level), the upper right corner of the display will
show an unlocked (open) lock symbol.
During setting parameters the C-Button will be used for the cancelling of
parameter changes. Because of that it is not possible, to acknowledge (LEDs,
Output Relays...) as long as there are non saved (cached only) parameters.
Acknowledgement can only be executed, when the upper right corner of the
display shows this symbol:
The passwords are part of the device (fixed assignments). That means,
passwords will not be overwritten, if a parameter file is transmitted into a
device.
Existing passwords are persistent (assigned to a device). If an offline created
parameter file is transmitted into a device, or if a parameter file is transmitted
from one device to another, this will have no impact on existing passwords
within the device.

Parameters
Available Levels/Access Authorizations

The access authorizations are designed in form of two hierachic strings.
The supervisor (administrator) password provides access to all parameters and settings.
Access Level for Protection Settings Access Level for Control Settings
Supervisor-Lv3
Device Configuration
Access Rights for Parameters
Access Rights for Parameters

Prot-Lv2 Control- Lv2
Protection Settings Control Settings
Prot-Lv1 Control- Lv1

Reset/Ack Control
Read Only-Lv0
Read Only
Legend : Lv = Level
Parameters are read only
Parameters can be modified
How to find out what access areas/levels are unlocked?
The menu [Device para\Access levels] provides the information, which access areas (authorizations) are currently
unlocked.
As soon as there is an unlocked access area (authorization) above »Read Only-Lv0«, this will be indicated by an
unlocked lock symbol within the upper right corner of the device display.

Parameters
Unlocking Access Areas
Within the menu [Device Para\Access level] access areas can be unlocked or locked (at the HMI).
Changing Passwords
Passwords can be changed at the device in menu [Device Para/Passwords] or by means of the Smart view
software.
A password must be a user-defined combination of the numerics

1, 2, 3 and 4.
All other characters and keys won´t be accepted.
When you want to change a password, the existing one has to be entered firstly. The new password (up to 8 digits)
is then to be confirmed twice. Please proceed as follows:
In order to change the password please enter your old password by means of the Softkeys followed by pressing
the »OK«-key.
Enter the new password by means of the Softkeys and press the »OK«-key.
Afterwards enter the new password once again by means of the Softkeys and press the »OK«-key.
Deactivating Passwords during Commissioning
It is possible optionally to deactivate passwords during commissioning. It is not allowed to use this feature for other
purposes than commissioning. In order to deactivate the password protection replace the existing password with an
empty one for the corresponding access areas. All access authorizations (access areas) that are protected by an
empty password are unlocked permanent. That means, that all parameters and settings within those areas can be
modified without any further access authorization. It is no longer possible to change into the » Read Only-Lv0« level
(the protective device will also not fall back into this mode if the maximum edit time is expired (t-max-Edit).
You have to ensure that all passwords are activated again after the
commissioning. That means, that all access areas have to be protected by a
password that consists of 4 digits as minimum.
Woodward will not overtake any liability for any personal injuries or damages
that are caused by deactivated password protection.

Parameters
Password Entry at the Panel
Passwords can be entered by way of the Softkeys.
1 2 3 4
Example: For password (3244) press successively:
Softkey 3
Softkey 2
Softkey 4
Softkey 4
Password Forgotten
By pressing the »C« key during cold booting a reset menu will be called up. By selecting »Reset All Passwords?«
and confirming with »Yes« all passwords will be reset to the defaults »1234«.

Parameters
Parameter Setting at the HMI
Every parameter belongs to an access area. Editing and changing of a parameter requires a sufficient access
authorization.
The User can obtain the required access authorizations by unlocking access areas in advance of parameter
changes or context-dependent. In the following sections both options will be explained.
Option 1: Direct Authorization for an Access Area
Call up menu [Device Para\Access level].
Select the required access level respectively navigate to the required access authorization (level). Enter the
required password. If the correct password has been entered, the required access authorization will be
obtained. In order to do the parameter changes please proceed as follows:
Move to the parameter you want to change by using the Softkeys. If the parameter is selected, the lower
right corner of the display should show a »Wrench« symbol.
This symbol indicates, that the parameter is unlocked and can be edited, because the required access
authorization is available. Confirm the Softkey »Wrench«, in order to edit the parameter. Change the
parameter.
Now you can:
save the change you made and have them adopted by the system or:
change additional parameters and save finally all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the
system.
To save parameter changes immediately,
press the »OK« key for saving changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device.
Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« Softkey or dismiss by pressing »No«.
To change additional parameters and save afterwards,
move to other parameters and change them

Parameters
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the

modifications have only been saved temporarily, they are not yet finally stored
and adopted by the device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter
changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level the
intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace).
This makes it possible to control or follow up from the main menu level at any
time where parameter changes have been made and have not been saved
finally.
In addition to the star trace to the temporary saved parameter changes, a
general parameter changing symbol is faded-in at the left corner of the display,
and so it is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are
parameter changes still not adopted by the device.
Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by
pressing the »Yes« softkey or dismiss by pressing Softkey »No«.
If the display shows a Key Symbol instead of a Wrench-Symbol, this will

indicate, that the required access authorization is not available.
In order to edit this parameter, a password is required, that provides the

required authorization.
Plausibility check: In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the device

monitors constantly all temporary saved parameter changes. If the device
detects an implausibility, this is indicated by a question mark in front of the
respective parameter.
In order to make things easier to follow up, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level,
above the temporarily saved parameters an invalidity is indicated by the
question mark (plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or follow
from the main menu level at any time where implausibilities are intended to be
saved.
In addition to the question mark trace to the temporary saved implausible

parameter changes a general implausibility symbol/question mark is faded-in at
the left corner of the display, and so it is possible to see from each point of the
menu tree that implausibilities have been detected by the device.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/implausibility symbol.
If a device detects an implausibility, it rejects saving and adopting of the

parameters.

Parameters
Option 2: Context-dependent Access Authorization
Navigate to the parameter, that is to be changed. If the parameter is selected, the lower right corner of the
display shows a »Key«-Symbol.
This symbol indicates, that the device is still within the »Read Only Lv0«-Level, or that the current level does
not provide sufficient access rights to allow editing of this parameter.
Press this Softkey and enter the password1) that provides access to this parameter.
Please change the parameter settings.
1)
This page provides also information, which password/access authorization is required to do changes on this parameter.
Now you can:
save the change you made and have them adopted by the system or:
change additional parameters and save finally all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the
system.
To save parameter changes immediately,
press the »OK« key for saving changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device.
Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« Softkey or dismiss by pressing »No«.
To change additional parameters and save afterwards,
move to other parameters and change them
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the

modifications have only been saved temporary, they are not yet finally stored
and adopted by the device.
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level
the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star
trace). This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at
any time where parameter changes have been made and have not been saved
finally.
In addition to the star trace to the temporary saved parameter changes, a
general parameter changing symbol is faded-in at the left corner of the display,
and so it is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are
parameter changes still not adopted by the device.
Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by
pressing the »Yes« Softkey or dismiss by pressing Softkey »No«.

Parameters
Plausibility check: In order to prevent obvious wrong settings the device

monitors constantly all temporary saved parameter changes. If the device
detects an implausibility, this is indicated by a question mark in front of the
respective parameter.
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level,
above the temporary saved parameters an invalidity is indicated by the
question mark (plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or follow
from the main menu level at any time where implausibilities are intended to be
saved.
In addition to the question mark trace to the temporary saved implausible

parameter changes a general implausibility symbol/question mark is faded-in at
the left corner of the display, and so it is possible to see from each point of the
menu tree that implausibilities have been detected by the device.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/implausibility symbol.
If a device detects an implausibility, it rejects saving and adopting of the

parameters.

Parameters
Setting Groups
Setting Group Switch
Within the menu »Protection Para/P-Set Switch« you have the following possibilities:
To set one of the four setting groups active manually.

To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active.
Scada switches the setting groups.
Option Setting Group Switch

Manual Selection Switch over, if another setting group is chosen manually within the menu
»Protection Para/P-Set Switch«
Via Input Function Switch over not until the request is clear.
(e.g. Digital Input)
That means, if there is more or less than one request signal active, no switch
over will be executed.
Example::
DI3 is assigned onto Parameter set 1. DI3 is active „1“.
DI4 is assigned onto Parameter set 2. DI4 is inactive „0“.
Now the device should switch from parameter set 1 to parameter set 2. Therefore
at first DI3 has to become inactive “0”. Than DI4 has to be active “1”.
If DI4 becomes again inactive „0“, parameter set 2 will remain active “1” as long
as there is no clear request (e.g. DI3 becomes active “1”, all the other
assignments are inactive “0”)
Via Scada Switch over if there is a clear SCADA request.

Otherwise no switch over will be executed.
The description of the parameters can be found within chapter System

Parameters.

Parameters
Signals that can be used for PSS
Name Description
-.- No assignment

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Name Description

Parameters
Setting Lock
By means of the Setting Lock, parameter settings can be locked against any changes as long as the assigned
signal is true (active). The Setting Lock can be activated within menu
[Field Para/General Settings/Lock Settings].
Bypass of the Setting Lock
The setting lock can be overwritten (temporarily) in case that the status of the signal that activates the setting lock
cannot be modified or should not be modified (spare key).
The Setting Lock can be bypassed by means of the Direct Control Parameter »Setting Lock Bypass«
[Field Para/General Settings/Setting Lock Bypass]. The protective device will fall back into the Setting Lock either:
Directly after a parameter change has been saved, else
10 minutes after the bypass has been activated.

Device Parameters
Device Parameters
Sys
Date and Time
In menu »Device parameters/Date/Time« you can set date and time.
Version
Within this menu »Device parameters/Version« you can obtain information on the soft- and hardware version.
Display of ANSI-Codes
The display of ANSI codes can be activated within menu »Device parameters/HMI//Display ANSI device numbers«
TCP/IP Settings
Within menu »Device Para / TCP/IP/TCP/IP Config« the TCP/IP settings have to be set.
The first-time setting of the TCP/IP Parameters can be done at the panel (HMI) only.
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your

device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Set the TCP/IP Parameters
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
TCP/IP address
Subnetmask
Gateway

Device Parameters
Direct Commands of the System Module

Ack BO LED Scd Reset the binary output relays, LEDs, SCADA and the inactive, inactive [Operation
TCmd Trip Command.
active /Acknowledge]
Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs will be acknowledged. inactive, inactive [Operation
Ack BO All acknowledgeable binary output relays will be inactive, inactive [Operation
acknowledged.
Ack Scada SCADA will be acknowledged. inactive, inactive [Operation

Reboot Rebooting the device. no, no [Service

yes /General]
Setting Lock Short-period unlock of the Setting Lock inactive, inactive [Field Para
Bypass
CAUTION, rebooting the device manually will release the Supervision Contact.

Device Parameters
Global Protection Parameters of the System

PSet-Switch Switching Parameter Set PS1, PS1 [Protection Para
PS2, /PSet-Switch]
PS3,
PS4,
PSS via Inp fct,
PSS via Scada
PS1: activated by This Setting Group will be the active one if: The 1..n, PSS -.- [Protection Para
Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to "Switch via
/PSet-Switch]
Input" and the other three input functions are inactive at
the same time. In case that there is more than one
input function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input functions are
inactive, the device will keep working with the Setting
Group that was activated lastly.
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via Inp fct

/PSet-Switch]

/PSet-Switch]

/PSet-Switch]

Device Parameters

Remote Reset Enables or disables the option to acknowledge from inactive, active [Device Para
external/remote via signals (assignments) and SCADA.
active /Ex Acknowledge]
Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs will be acknowledged if the 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
state of the assigned signal becomes true. List
/Ex Acknowledge]
Only available if: Remote Reset = active
Ack BO All acknowledgeable binary output relays will be 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
acknowledged if the state of the assigned signal List
/Ex Acknowledge]
becomes true.

Ack Scada SCADA will be acknowledged if the state of the 1..n, Assignment -.- [Device Para
assigned signal becomes true. List
/Ex Acknowledge]
Scaling Display of the measured values as primary, secondary Per unit values, Per unit values [Device Para
or per unit values
Primary values, /Measurem Display
Secondary values /General settings]
Lock Settings No parameters can be changed as long as this input is 1..n, Assignment -.- [Field Para
true. The parameter settings are locked. List
/General settings]

Device Parameters
System Module Input States

Ack LED-I Module input state: LEDs acknowledgement by digital input [Device Para
/Ex Acknowledge]
Ack BO-I Module input state: Acknowledgement of the binary Output [Device Para
Relays
/Ex Acknowledge]
Ack Scada-I Module input state: Acknowledge Scada via digital input. The [Device Para
replica that SCADA has got from the device is to be reset.
/Ex Acknowledge]
PS1-I State of the module input respectively of the signal, that should [Protection Para
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
Lock Settings-I State of the module input: No parameters can be changed as [Field Para
long as this input is true. The parameter settings are locked.
/General settings]

Device Parameters
System Module Signals
Signal Description
Reboot Signal: Rebooting the device: 1=Normal Start-up; 2=Reboot by the Operator; 3=Reboot by
means of Super Reset; 4=outdated; 5=outdated; 6=Unknown Error Source; 7=Forced Reboot
(initiated by the main processor); 8=Exceeded Time Limit of the Protection Cycle; 9= Forced
Reboot (initiated by the digital signal processor); 10=Exceeded Time Limit of the Measured
Value Processing; 11=Sags of the Supply Voltage; 12=Illegal Memory Access.
Act Set Signal: Active Parameter Set
PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
PSS manual Signal: Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set
PSS via Scada Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Scada. Write into this output byte the integer of the
parameter set that should become acitve (e.g. 4 => Switch onto parameter set 4).
PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via input function
min 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Setting Lock Bypass Signal: Short-period unlock of the Setting Lock
Param to be saved Number of parameters to be saved. 0 means that all parameter changes are overtaken.
Ack LED Signal: LEDs acknowledgement
Ack BO Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs
Ack Counter Signal: Reset of all Counters
Ack Scada Signal: Acknowledge Scada
Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs acknowledgement :HMI
Ack BO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs :HMI
Ack Counter-HMI Signal: Reset of all Counters :HMI
Ack Scada-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Scada :HMI
Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Ack LED-Sca Signal: LEDs acknowledgement :SCADA
Ack BO-Sca Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs :SCADA
Ack Counter-Sca Signal: Reset of all Counters :SCADA
Ack Scada-Sca Signal: Acknowledge Scada :SCADA
Ack TripCmd-Sca Signal: Reset Trip Command :SCADA
Res OperationsCr Signal:: Res OperationsCr
Res AlarmCr Signal:: Res AlarmCr
Res TripCmdCr Signal:: Res TripCmdCr
Res TotalCr Signal:: Res TotalCr

Device Parameters
Special Values of the System Module

Build Build [Device Para
/Version]
Version Version [Device Para

/Version]
Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter of the protective device [Operation

/Count and RevData
/Sys]

Field Parameters
Field Parameters
Field Para
Within the field parameters you can set all parameters, that are relevant for the primary side and the mains
operational method like frequency, primary and secondary values...
General Field Parameters

Phase Sequence Phase Sequence direction ABC, ABC [Field Para
ACB /General settings]
f Nominal frequency 50Hz, 50Hz [Field Para

60Hz /General settings]

Field Parameters
Field Parameters – Current Related

CT pri Nominal current of the primary side of the current 1 - 50000A 1000A [Field Para
transformers.
/CT]
CT sec Nominal current of the secondary side of the current 1A, 1A [Field Para
transformers.
5A /CT]
CT dir Protection functions with directional feature can only 0°, 0° [Field Para
work properly if the connection of the current
180° /CT]
transformers is free of wiring errors. If all current
transformers are connected to the device with an
incorrect polarity, the wiring error can be compensated
by this parameter. This parameter turns the current
vectors by 180 degrees.
ECT pri This parameter defines the primary nominal current of 1 - 50000A 1000A [Field Para
the connected earth current transformer. If the earth
/CT]
current is measured via the Holmgreen connection, the
primary value of the phase current transformer must be
entered here.
ECT sec This parameter defines the secondary nominal current 1A, 1A [Field Para
of the connected earth current transformer. If the earth
5A /CT]
current is done via the Holmgreen connection, the
primary value of the phase current transformer must be
entered here.
ECT dir Earth fault protection with directional feature depends 0°, 0° [Field Para
also on the correct wiring of the earth current
180° /CT]
transformer. An incorrect polarity/wiring can be
corrected by means of the settings "0°" or "180°". The
operator has the possibility of turning the current vector
by 180 degrees (change of sign) without modification of
the wiring. This means, that – in terms of figures - the
determined current indicator was turned by 180° by the
device.
IL1, IL2, IL3 Cutoff The Current shown in the Display or within the PC 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
Level Software will be displayed as zero, if the Current falls
/Measurem Display
below this Cutoff Level. This parameter has no impact
on recorders. /Current]

Field Parameters

IG meas Cutoff The measured Earth Current shown in the Display or 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
Level within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if the
/Measurem Display
measured Earth Current falls below this Cutoff Level.
This parameter has no impact on recorders. /Current]
IG calc Cutoff Level The calculated Earth Current shown in the Display or 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if the
/Measurem Display
calculated Earth Current falls below this Cutoff Level.
I012 Cutoff Level The Symmetrical Component shown in the Display or 0.0 - 0.100In 0.005In [Device Para
within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if the
/Measurem Display
Symmetrical Component falls below this Cutoff Level.
Field Parameters – Voltage Related

VT pri Nominal voltage of the Voltage Transformers at the 60 - 500000V 10000V [Field Para
primary side. The phase to phase voltage is to be
/VT]
entered even if the load is in delta connection.
VT sec Nominal voltage of the Voltage Transformers at the 60.00 - 520.00V 100V [Field Para
secondary side. The phase to phase voltage is to be
/VT]
entered even if the load is in delta connection.
VT con This parameter has to be set in order to ensure the Phase to Phase, Phase to Ground [Field Para
correct assignment of the voltage measurement
Phase to Ground /VT]
channels in the device.
EVT pri Primary nominal voltage of the e-n winding of the 60 - 500000V 10000V [Field Para
voltage transformers, which is only taken into account
/VT]
in the direct measurement of the residual voltage (GVT
con=measured/broken delta).
EVT sec Secondary nominal voltage of the e-n winding of the 35.00 - 520.00V 100V [Field Para
voltage transformers, which is only taken into account
/VT]
in the direct measurement of the residual voltage.

Field Parameters

V Block f Threshold for the release of the frequency stages 0.15 - 1.00Vn 0.5Vn [Field Para
/General settings]
V Sync The fourth measuring input of the voltage measuring L1, L12 [Field Para
card measures the voltage that is to be synchronized.
L2, /VT]
L3,
L12,
L23,
L31
delta phi - Mode The delta phi element (vector surge) trips, if the one phase, two phases [Field Para
permissable voltage angle shift (delta phi) of the three
two phases, /VT]
measured voltages (phase-ground or phase-phase) in:
one phase, two phases or within all phases is three phases
exceeded.
Phase MTA Maximum Torque Angle: Angle between phase current 0 - 360° 45° [Field Para
and reference voltage in case of a short circuit. This
/Direction]
angle is needed to determine the fault direction in case
of short circuits.
IG calc dir ctrl Options for direction detection. IGcalc is used as IG calc 3V0, IG calc 3V0 [Field Para
operating quantity.
IG calc IPol (IG /Direction]
meas),
Dual,
I2,V2
IG meas dir ctrl Options for direction detection. IGmeas is used as IG meas 3V0, IG meas 3V0 [Field Para
operating quantity.
I2,V2, /Direction]
Dual
3V0 Source Earth overcurrent protection elements take into account measured, measured [Field Para
this parameter for direction decisions. You have to
calculated /Direction]
ensure, that this parameter is set to "Measured" only if
the residual voltage is fed to the fourth measuring input
of the voltage measuring card.

Field Parameters

Ground MTA Ground Maximum Torque Angle: Angle between 0 - 360° 110° [Field Para
chosen operating quantity and chosen reference
/Direction]
quantity in case of a ground fault. This angle is needed
to determine the ground fault direction in case of a
short circuit. Depending on the selected ground
direction option, different MTA values are used: IGcalc
3V0, IGmeas 3V0 : Ground MTA; IGcalc Neg, IGmeas
Neg : 90° + Phase MTA; IGcalc IPol : 0°; IGcalc Dual :
0° (if I2 and V2 available) or Ground MTA; IGmeas
Dual : 90° + Phase MTA (if I2 and V2 available) or
Ground MTA.
ECT Angle Cor Fine adjustment of the measuring angle of the earth -45 - 45° 0° [Field Para
current transformers. By means of the Angle
/Direction]
Correction, faults of the earth voltage transformers can
be taken into account.
V Cutoff Level The Phase Voltage shown in the Display or within the 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
PC Software will be displayed as zero, if the Phase
/Measurem Display
Voltage falls below this Cutoff Level. This parameter
has no impact on recorders. This parameter is related /Voltage]
to the voltage that is connected to the device (phase-to-
phase or phase-to-earth).
VG meas Cutoff The measured Residual Voltage shown in the Display 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Level or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if
/Measurem Display
the measured Residual Voltage falls below this Cutoff
Level. This parameter has no impact on recorders. /Voltage]
VG calc Cutoff The calculated Residual Voltage shown in the Display 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Level or within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if
/Measurem Display
the calculated Residual Voltage falls below this Cutoff
Level. This parameter has no impact on recorders. /Voltage]
V012 Comp Cutoff The Symmetrical Component shown in the Display or 0.0 - 0.100Vn 0.005Vn [Device Para
Level within the PC Software will be displayed as zero, if the
/Measurem Display
Symmetrical Component falls below this Cutoff Level.
This parameter has no impact on recorders. /Voltage]

Blockings
Blockings
The device provides a function for temporary and permanent blocking of the complete protection functionality or of
single protection stages.
Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life-threatening blockings are

allocated.
Make sure that you do not carelessly deactivate protection functions which
have to be available according to the protection concept.
Permanent Blocking
Switching ON or OFF the complete protection functionality
In module »Protection« the complete protection of the device can be switched on or off. Set the parameter Function
to »active« or »inactive« in module »Prot«.
Only if in module »Prot« the parameter »Function« is = »active«, the protection

is activated; i.e. with »Function« = »inactive«, no protection function is
operating. Then the device cannot protect any components.
Switching modules ON or OFF

Each of the modules can be switched on or off (permanently). This is achieved when the parameter »Function« is
set to »active« or »inactive« in the respective module.
Activating or deactivating the tripping command of a protection stage permanently

In each of the protection stages the tripping command to the CB can be permanently blocked. For this purpose the
parameter »TripCmd Blo« has to be set to »active«.
Temporary Blocking
To block the complete protection of the device temporarily by a signal
In module »Prot« the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal. On condition that a
module-external blocking is permitted »ExBlo Fc=active«. In addition to this, a related blocking signal from the
»assignment list« must have been assigned. For the time the allocated blocking signal is active, the module is
blocked.
If the module »Prot« is blocked, the complete protection function does not work.
As long as the blocking signal is active, the device cannot protect any
components.
To block a complete protection module temporarily by an active assignment
In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module, the parameter »ExBlo Fc« of the module
has to be set to »active«. This gives the permission: »This module can be blocked«.
Within the general protection parameters a signal has to be additionally chosen from the »ASSIGNMENT LIST«.
The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active.

Blockings
To block the tripping command of a protection stage temporarily by an active assignment.

The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from external. In this case, external does
not only mean from outside the device, but also from outside the module. Not only real external signals are
permitted to be used as blocking signals, as for example, the state of a digital input, but you can also choose any
other signal from the »assignment list«.
In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection stage, the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc« of the
module has to be set to »active«. This gives the permission: »The tripping command of this stage can be
blocked«.
Within the general protection parameters, a signal has to be chosen additionally and assigned to the
parameter »ExBlo« from the »assignment list«. If the selected signal is activated, the temporary blockage
becomes effective.

371
Blockings
Trip blockings
name = all modules that are blockable
Prot.Blo TripCmd
inactive
active >1 Prot.Blo TripCmd
name.Blo TripCmd
inactive
active
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd Fc
MRA4
inactive
active Prot.ExBlo TripCmd

32
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd-I
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd
& >1
name.Blo TripCmd
name.ExBlo TripCmd Fc
3
inactive
active &
name.ExBlo TripCmd
name.ExBlo TripCmd
name.ExBlo TripCmd-I
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
372
Blockings
protection elements.
Blockings
name =all modules that are blockable

Frequency is within the nominal frequency range.(*)(**)

Prot. active
1 (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)
name.Function
inactive name.active
& 2
active
name.ExBlo Fc
MRA4
inactive
active
& name.ExBlo
name.ExBlo 1
name.ExBlo1-I
>1
name.ExBlo 2
name.ExBlo2-I
*
All protective elements will be blocked that are using fundamental or harmonics measured values, if the frequency leaves the nominal frequency range. Protective elements that are using RMS values will remain active. See chapter "Wide frequency range".
**
This applies to devices that offer wide frequency range measurement only.
Activate, Deactivate Respectively Block Temporarily Protection Functions
The following diagram applies to all protective elements except: Phase current, Earth current and Q->&V<
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
373
Blockings
Prot - active
At the moment no parameter is being changed (except parameter set

parameters)
&
Prot.available
Measured Values: OK
name.Meas Circuit
Superv
inacti ve
active
&
12a 12b >1
38a 38b
The following diagram is applies to the Q->&V< Protection:
MRA4
Prot.Function
&
inactive Prot.active
active
1
Prot.ExBlo Fc
inactive
active &
Prot.ExBlo
Prot.ExBlo 1
Prot.ExBlo1-I
>1
Prot.ExBlo 2
Prot.ExBlo2-I
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
374
Blockings
Blockings **
name = I[1]...[n]
Frequency is within the nominal frequency range.(*)(**)

Prot. active
name.VRestraint
inactive
active
>1 &
12a 12b
38a 38b
name.Meas Circuit
Superv
ina ctive
name.Function &
active
inactive name.active
active
4
The following diagram applies phase current elements:
name.ExBlo Fc
inactive
MRA4
active
name.ExBlo
&
name.ExBlo 1
name.ExBlo1-I
>1
name.ExBlo 2
blocking signal from the »assignment list«, but also by »reverse Interlocking«.
name.ExBlo2-I
name.Ex rev Interl Fc
inactive
active
name.Ex rev Interl
&
name.Ex rev Interl

name.Ex rev Interl-I
* All protective elements will be blocked that are using fundamental or harmonics measured values, if the frequency leaves the nominal frequency range. Protective elements that are using RMS values will remain active. See chapter "Wide frequency range".
**
This applies to devices that offer wide frequency range measurement only.
Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»function = inactive«) or temporarily by any
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
375
Blockings
Blockings **
name = IG[1]...[n] Frequency is within the nominal frequency range.( *) (**)
name.VX Blo
ina ctive
name.VX Source
active
mea su red
name.Meas Circuit
Superv
calculated
inactive
active
&
12a 12b >1
38a 38b & name.active

4
Prot. active
name.Function
&
inactive
active
The following diagram applies to earth current elements:
MRA4
name.ExBlo Fc
inactive name.ExBlo
&
active
name.ExBlo1-I
name.ExBlo 1
1..n, Assignment List >1
name.ExBlo 2
blocking signal from the »assignment list«, but also by »reverse Interlocking«.
name.ExBlo2-I
name.Ex rev Interl Fc
inactive
active
name.Ex rev Interl
&
name.Ex rev Interl

name.Ex rev Interl-I
* All protective elements will be blocked that are using fundamental or harmonics measured values, if the frequency leaves the nominal frequency range. Protective elements that are using RMS values will remain active. See chapter "Wide frequency range".
**This applies to devices that offer wide frequency range measurement only.
Earth current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»function = inactive«) or temporarily by any
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Module: Protection (Prot)

Prot
The module »Protection« serves as outer frame for all other protection modules, i.e. they are all enclosed by the
module »Protection«.
If in module »Protection« the parameter »Function« is set on »inactive« or in

case the module is blocked, then the complete protective function of the device
does not work anymore.
Protection inactive
If the master module »Protection« was permanently deactivated or if a temporary blockage of this module has
occurred and the allocated blocking signal is still active, then the complete functionality (protection) of the device is
zero. In such a case the protective function is »inactive«.
Protection active
If the master module »Protection« was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively the
assigned blocking signal is inactive at that moment, then the »Protection« is »active«.
Blocking all Protective Elements enduringly
In order to allow (the principle use) of blocking the entire protection call up the menu [Protection/Para/Global Prot
Para/Prot]:
Set the parameter »Function = inactive«.
Blocking all Protective Elements temporarily
Para/Prot]:
Set the parameter »ExBlo Fc = active«;
Choose an assignment for »ExBlo1«; and
Optionally choose an assignment for »ExBlo2«.
If one of the signals becomes true, then the entire protection will be blocked as long as one of these signals are
true.

Blocking all Trip Commands enduringly
Para/Prot]:
Set the parameter »Blo TripCmd = inactive«.
Blocking all Trip Commands temporarily
In order to allow (the principle use) of blocking the entire protection, call up the menu [Protection/Para/Global Prot
Para/Prot]:
Set the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc= active«.
Choose an assignment for »ExBlo TripCmd«. All Trip commands will be blocked temporarily if this assginment
becomes true.

378
Prot - active
At the moment no parameter is being changed (except parameter set

parameters)
&
Prot.available
Measured Values: OK
Prot.Function
inactive
active
MRA4
&
Prot.active
1
Prot.ExBlo Fc
inactive
active &
Prot.ExBlo
Prot.ExBlo 1
Prot.ExBlo1-I
>1
Prot.ExBlo 2
Prot.ExBlo2-I
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
General Alarms and General Trips
Each protective element generates it´s own alarm and trip signals. All alarms and trip decision are passed on to the
master module »Prot«.
If a protective element picks up, respectively has decided about a trip, two signals will be issued:
1. The module or the protection stage issues an alarm e.g. »I[1].ALARM« or »I[1].TRIP«.
2. The master module »Prot« collects/summarizes the signals and issues an alarm or a trip signal »PROT.ALARM«
»PROT.TRIP«.
Further examples: »PROT.ALARM L1« is a collective signal (OR-connected) for all alarms issued by any of the
protective elements concerning Phase L1.
»PROT.TRIP L1« is a collective signal (OR-connected) for all trips issued by any of the protective elements concerning
Phase L1.
»PROT.ALARM« is the collective alarm signal OR-ed from all protection elements.»PROT.TRIP« is the collective alarm
signal OR-ed from all protection elements.
The trip commands of a the protective elements have to be assigned within the Circuit Breaker Manager CB
Manager. Only those trip decisions that are assigned within the CB Manager are isssued to the Circuit Breaker.
Caution: Trip commands that are not assigned within the Circuit Breaker
Manager (CB Manager) are not issued to a circuit breaker.
The CB Manager issues the trip commands to a circuit breaker.
Assign within the Circuit Breaker Manager all trip commands that have to
switch a circuit breaker.

380
Prot.Trip
name = Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.
MRA4
>1
name.Trip
15
name.Trip
15 Prot.Trip
...
name[n].Trip
15
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
381
Prot.Alarm
name = Each alarm of a module (except from supervision modules but including CBF) will lead to a general alarm (collective alarm).
MRA4
>1
name.Alarm
14
name.Alarm
14 Prot.Alarm
...
name.Alarm
14
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
382
Prot.Trip
Each phase selective trip of a trip authorized module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general trip.
I[1].Trip L1 >1
16
...
I[n].Trip L1
16
Prot.Trip L1
V[1].Trip L1
20
...
V[n].Trip L1
20
I[1].Trip L2 >1
17
...
I[n].Trip L2
17
Prot.Trip L2
MRA4
V[1].Trip L2
21
...
V[n].Trip L2
21
I[1].Trip L3 >1
18
...
I[n].Trip L3
18
Prot.Trip L3
V[1].Trip L3
22
...
V[n].Trip L3
22
IG[1].Trip
19 >1
IG[n].Trip
...
Prot.Trip G
19
VG[n].TripCmd
23
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
383
Prot.Alarm
Each phase selective alarm of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the

device type) will lead to a phase selective general alarm (collective
alarm).
I[1].Alarm L1 >1
24
...
I[n].Alarm L1
24
Prot.Alarm L1
V[1].Alarm L1
28
...
V[n].Alarm L1
28
I[1].Alarm L2 >1
25
...
I[n].Alarm L2
25
Prot.Alarm L2
MRA4
V[1].Alarm L2
29
...
V[n].Alarm L2
29
I[1].Alarm L3 >1
26
...
I[n].Alarm L3
26
Prot.Alarm L3
V[1].Alarm L3
30
...
V[n].Alarm L3
30
IG[1].Alarm
27 >1
IG[n].Alarm
... Prot.Alarm G
27
VG[n].Alarm
31
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Direct Commands of the Protection Module

Res Fault a Mains Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults. inactive, inactive [Operation
No
active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, active [Protection Para
active /Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) the external blocking of the global inactive, inactive [Protection Para
protection functionality of the device.
/Prot]
ExBlo1 If external blocking of this module is activated 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
(allowed), the global protection functionality of the List
/Global Prot Para
device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal
becomes true. /Prot]
ExBlo2 If external blocking of this module is activated 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
(allowed), the global protection functionality of the List
/Global Prot Para
device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal
becomes true. /Prot]
Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the entire inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Protection.
/Prot]
ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) the external blocking of the trip inactive, inactive [Protection Para
command of the entire device.
/Prot]
ExBlo TripCmd If external blocking of the tripping command is activated 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
(allowed), the tripping command of the entire device will List
/Global Prot Para
be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes
true. /Prot]

Protection Module Input States

ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1 [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
available Signal: Protection is available
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm L1 Signal: General-Alarm L1
Alarm G Signal: General-Alarm - Earth fault
Alarm Signal: General Alarm
Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Trip G Signal: General Trip Ground fault
Trip Signal: General Trip
Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
IG calc dir fwd Signal: Ground fault (calculated) forward
IG calc rev dir Signal: Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
IG calc dir n poss Signal: Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
IG meas dir fwd Signal: Ground fault (measured) forward
IG meas rev dir Signal: Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
IG meas dir n poss Signal: Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible

Protection Module Values
FaultNo Disturbance No
No of grid faults Number of grid faults: A grid fault, e.g. a short circuit, might cause several faults with trip and
autoreclosing, each fault being identified by an increased fault number. In this case, the grid
fault number remains the same.
Trip First trip cause which is the same as listed in fault record: See SCADA doc for code (section
Cause of Trip). See manual (section Fault Recorder) for more information.

Switchgear/Breaker – Manager
WARNING Misconfiguration of the switchgear can result in death or serious

injury.
Beside protection functions, protective relays more and more will take care about controlling switchgear, like circuit
breakers, load break switches, disconnectors and ground connectors.
The Switchgear/Breaker-Manager of this protective device is designed to manage one switchgear.
The correct configuration is an indispensable precondition for the proper functioning of the protective device. This
also is the case, when the switchgear is not controlled, but supervised only.
Single Line Diagram
The single line diagram includes the graphically description of the switchgear and its designation (name) as well as
its features (short circuit proof or not ...). For displaying in the devices software, the switchgear' designations (e. g.
QA1, QA2, instead of SG[x]) will be taken from the single line diagram (configuration file).
The configuration file includes the single line diagram and the switchgear properties. Switchgear properties and
single line diagram are coupled via the configuration file.
Switchgear Configuration
Wiring
At first the switchgears' positioning indicators have to be connected to the digital inputs of the protection device.
One of the position indicators (either the »Aux ON« or the »Aux OFF«) contact has to be connected necessarily. It
is recommended to connect both contacts.
Thereafter the command outputs (relay outputs) have to be connected with the switchgear.
Please observe the following option: In the general settings of a circuit breaker, the
ON/OFF commands of a protection element can be issued to the same output relays,
where the other control commands are issued.
If the commands are issued to different relays output relays the amount of wiring
increases.

Assignment of Position Indications
The position indication is needed by the device to get (evaluate) the information about the current status /position of
the breaker. The switchgears' position is shown in the devices display. Each position change results in a change of
the switchgear symbol.
For the detection of a switchgear's position always two separate Aux contacts are
recommended! If only one Aux contact is used, no intermediate or disturbed positions
can be detected.
A reduced transition supervision (time between issue of the command and position
feedback indication of the switchgear) is also possible by one Aux contact.
In the menu [Control/Bkr/Pos Indicators wiring] the assignments for the position indications have to be set.
Detection of switchgear position with two Aux contacts – Aux ON and Aux OFF (recommended!)
For detection of position the switchgear is provided with Aux contacts (Aux ON and Aux OFF). It is recommended to
use both contacts to detect intermediate and disturbed positions too.
The protection device continuously supervises the status of the inputs »Aux ON-I« and »Aux OFF-I«.
These signals are validated based on the supervision timers »t-Move ON« and »t-Move OFF« validation functions.
As a result, the switchgear position will be detected by the following signals:
Pos ON
Pos OFF
Pos Indeterm
Pos Disturb.
Pos (State=0,1,.2 or 3)

Supervision of the ON command

When an ON command is initiated, the »t-Move ON« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the »POS
INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and properly fed back from the switchgear before the
timer has run down, »POS ON« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has expired »POS DISTURB« will become
true.
Supervision of the OFF command

When an OFF command is initiated, the »t-Move OFF« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the »POS
INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and properly fed back before the timer has run down,
»POS OFF« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has expired »POS DISTURB« will become true.
The following table shows how switchgear positions are validated:
States of the Digital Inputs Validated Switchgear Positions

Aux ON-I Aux OFF-I POS ON POS OFF POS POS Disturb POS
Indeterm State
0 0 0 0 1 0 0
(while a Moving (while a Moving Intermediate
timer is running) timer is running)
1 1 0 0 1 0 0
(while a Moving (while a Moving Intermediate
timer is running) timer is running)
0 1 0 1 0 0 1
OFF
1 0 1 0 0 0 2
ON
0 0 0 0 0 1 3
(Moving timer (Moving timer Disturbed
elapsed) elapsed)
1 1 0 0 0 1 3
(Moving timer (Moving timer Disturbed
elapsed) elapsed)

Single Position Indication Aux ON or Aux OFF
If the single pole indication is used, the »SI SINGLECONTACTIND« will become true.
The moving time supervision works only in one direction. If the Aux OFF signal is connected to the device, only the
“OFF command” can be supervised and if the Aux ON signal is connected to the device, only the “ON command”
can be supervised.
Single Position Indication – Aux ON
If only the Aux ON signal is used for the Status Indication of an “ON command”, the switch command will also start
the moving time, the position indication indicates an INTERMEDIATE position during this time interval. When the
switchgear reaches the end position indicated by the signals »POS ON« and »CES SUCCESF« before the moving time
has elapsed the signal Pos Indeterm disappears.
If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the end position, the switching operation was not
successful and the Position Indication will change to POS Disturb and the signal Pos Indeterm disappears.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on Aux ON:
States of the Digital Input Validated Switchgear Positions

Indeterm State
0 Not wired 0 0 1 0 0
(while t-Move (while t-Move Intermediate
ON is running) ON is running)
0 Not wired 0 1 0 0 1
OFF
1 Not wired 1 0 0 0 2
ON
If there is no digital input assigned to the »Aux On« contact, the position indication will have the value 3 (disturbed).

Single Position Indication – Aux OFF
If only the Aux OFF signal is used for the monitoring of the “OFF command”, the switch command will start the
moving timer. The Position Indication will indicate an INTERMEDIATE position. When the the switchgear reaches its
end position before the moving timer elapses, and »CES succesf« will be indicated. At the same time the signal
»Pos Indeterm« disappears.
If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the OFF position, the switching operation was not
successful and the Position Indication will change to »Pos Disturb« and the signal »Pos Indeterm« disappears.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on Aux OFF:
States of the Digital Input Validated Switchgear Positions

Indeterm State
Not wired 0 0 0 1 0 0
(while t-Move (while t-Move Intermediate
OFF is running) OFF is running)
Not wired 1 0 1 0 0 1
OFF
Not wired 0 1 0 0 0 2
ON
If there is no digital input assigned to the »Aux OFF« contact, the position indication will have the value 3
(disturbed).
Setting of Supervision Times
In the menu [Control/Bkr/General Settings] the supervision times of the individual switchgear have to be set.
Dependent on the type of switchgear it can be necessary to set further parameters.
Interlockings
To avoid faulty operations, interlockings have to be provided. This can be realised mechanically, or electrically
within the menu [Control/Bkr/General Settings] .
For a controllable switchgear up to three interlockings can be assigned in both switching directions (ON/OFF).
These interlockings prevent switching in the corresponding direction.
The protection OFF command and the reclosing command of the AR* module are always executed without
interlockings. For the case, that a protection OFF command must not be issued, this must be blocked separately.
Further interlockings can be realised by means of the Logic module.
*=availability depends on ordered device.

392
50P TripCmd
Trips of Protective
Elements
Trip Manager
(t-Min Hold Time, Latched)
OFF incl TripCmd"
&
*
inactive
active
Release by synchronizing
unit OFF incl TripCmd
*
& Prot ON
Auto reclosure issues the
following commands:
41
(Automatic Switch
Command)
MRA4
HMI issues the following ON Cmd manual
commands: >1 OFF Cmd
(Manual Switch OFF Cmd manual 42
Command)
ON Cmd manual ON incl Prot ON

Communication issues the
following commands: inactive &
(Manual Switch OFF Cmd manual
Command) active
Interlockings
>1 ON Cmd
ON Cmd manual
Switch command request
via Digital Input:
(Manual Switch OFF Cmd manual
ON incl Prot ON
Command)
* Availability dependent on device type
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Trip Manager – Assignment of commands
The trip commands of the protection elements have to be assigned within menu [Control/Bkr/Trip Manager] to the
switchgear (presumed, that the switchgear is make/break capable) .
In the Trip Manger all tripping commands are combined by an “OR” logic. The actual tripping command to the
switchgear is exclusively given by the Trip Manager. This means, that only tripping commands which are assigned
in the Trip Manager lead to an operation of the switchgear. In addition to that, the User can set the minimum hold
time of the tripping command within this module and define whether the tripping command is latched or not.
Aux ON-I OFF Cmd
Aux OFF-I ON Cmd
Ready-I TripCmd
SG[x]
SG[x].OFF Cmd1 Prot ON
SG[x].OFF Cmd2
SG[x].OFF Cmd3
HMI
I[1].TripCmd Scada
I Protection Module
I[2].TripCmd *
Autoreclosure CLOSE
Command
I[3].TripCmd
* Availability dependent on
device type
* Availability dependent on device type
V[1].TripCmd
V Protection Module
V[2].TripCmd
V[3].TripCmd

394
The exact name of the Switchgear is defined in the
Single Line file.
SG[x].Trip CB
name =Module name of the assigned trip command
name.TripCmd
15a >1
name.TripCmd
15a
name.TripCmd
15a
. SG[x].t-TripCmd
. >1 1
. t >1
. SG[x].Trip CB
name.TripCmd
11
15a
name.TripCmd
15a
MRA4
&
SG[x].Latched
S 1
active
R 1
inactive
Acknowledge -HMI
>1
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List >1
Acknowledge-Scada (Manual Switch Command)
SG[x].Number of
+ Operations
SG.Res TripCmd Cr
R
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Ex ON/OFF
If the switchgear should be opened or closed by an external signal, the User can assign one signal that will trigger
the ON and one signal that will trigger the OFF command (e.g. digital inputs or output signals of the Logics) within
menu [Control/Bkr/Ex ON/OFF Cmd] . An OFF command has priority. ON commands are slope oriented, OFF
commands are level oriented
Synchronised Switching*
*=availability depends on ordered device type
Before a switchgear may connect two mains sections, synchronism of these sections must be assured.
In the submenu [Synchronous Switching] the parameter »Synchronism« defines which signal indicates
synchronism.
If the synchronism condition shall be evaluated by the internal Synch-Check module the signal »Sync. Ready to
Close« (release by synch-check module) has to be assigned. Alternatively a digital input or a logic output can be
assigned.
In the synchronisation mode “Generator-to-System” additionally the synchronism request has to be assigned to the
Sync-check function in the menu [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\Sync].
If a synchronism signal is assigned, the switching command will only be executed, when the synchronism signal will
become true within the maximum supervision time »t-MaxSyncSuperv«. This supervision time will be started with
the issued ON command. If no synchronism signal has been assigned, the synchronism release is permanently.

Aux ON-I OFF Cmd
Aux OFF-I ON Cmd
Ready-I TripCmd
SG
Prot ON
Sync ON request
Sys-in-Sync-I
Condition for Generator2System

HMI
Signal Ready to Close
Scada
Autoreclosure CLOSE *
Command
*
synchro check
Ready to Close
CBCloseInitiate-I
*= * Availability dependent on device type
**=* Availability dependent on device type
Switching Authority
For the Switching Authority [Control\General Settings], the following general settings are possible:
NONE: No control function;

LOCAL: Control only via push buttons at the panel;
REMOTE: Control only via SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals; and
LOCAL&REMOTE: Control via push buttons, SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals.

Non interlocked Switching
For test purposes, during commissioning and temporarily operations, interlockings can be disabled.
WARNING: Non interlocked Switching can lead to serious injuries or death!
For non interlocked switching the menü [Control\General Settings] provides the following options:
Non interlocked switching for one single command

Permanent
Non interlocked switching for a certain time
Non interlocked switching, activated by an assigned signal
The set time for non interlocked switching applies also for the „single Operation“ mode.
Manual Manipulation of the Switchgear Position
In case of faulty position indication contacts (Aux contacts) or broken wires, the position indication resulted from the
assigned signals can be manipulated (overwritten) manually, to keep the ability to switch the affected switchgear. A
manipulated switchgearposition will be indicated on the display by an exclamation mark “!” beside the switchgear
symbol.
WARNING: Manipulation of the Switchgear Position can lead to serious injuries or death!
Double Operation Locking
All control commands to any switchgear in a bay have to be processed sequentially. During a running control
command no other command will be handled.
Switch Direction Control
Switching command are validated before execution. When the switchgear is already in the desired position, the
switch command will not be issued again. An opened circuit breaker cannot be opened again. This also applies for
switching command at the HMI or via SCADA.
Anti Pumping
By pressing the ON command softkey only a single switching ON impulse will be issued independent, how low the
softkey is actuated. The switchgear will close only once per close command.

Counters of the Command Excecution Supervision
CES SAuthority Command Execution Supervision: Number of rejected Commands because of missing
switching authority.
CES DoubleOperating Command Execution Supervision: Number of rejected Commands because a second switch
command is in conflict with a pending one.
CES No. of rej. Com Command Execution Supervision: Number of rejected Commands because Locked by
ParaSystem
Switchgear Wear
NOTICE: Current related functions of the swichtgear wear element (e.g. breaker wear
curve) are available in devices only, that offer minimum one current measurement (card).
Switchgear Wear Features
The sum of the accumulated interrupted currents.
A »SGwear Slow Switchgear« might indicate malfunction at an early stage.
The protective relay will calculate the »SG OPEN Capacity« continuously. 100% means, that switchgear
maintenance is mandatory now.
The protective relay will make a alarm decision based on the curve that the user provides.
The relay will monitor the frequency of ON/OFF cycles. The User can set thresholds for the maximum allowed sum
of interrupt currents and the maximum allowed sum of interrupt currents per hour. By means of this alarm,
excessive switchgear operations can be detected at an early stage.
Slow Switchgear Alarm
An increase of the close or opening time of the switchgear is an indication for the maintenance need. If the
measured time exceeds the time »t-Move OFF« or »t-Move ON«, the signal »SGwear Slow Switchgear« will be
activated.

Switchgear Wear Curve
In order to keep the switchgear in good working condition, the switchgear needs to be monitored. The switchgear
health (operation life) depends above all on:
The number of CLOSE/OPEN cycles.

The amplitudes of the interrupting currents.
The frequency that the switchgear operates (Operations per hour).
The User has to maintain the switchgear accordingly to the maintenance schedule that is to be provided by the
manufacturer (switchgear operation statistics). By means of up to ten points that the user can replicate the
switchgear wear curve within menu [Control/SG/SG[x]/SGW] . Each point has two settings: the interrupt current in
kilo amperes and the allowed operation counts. No matter how many points are used, the operation counts the last
point as zero. The protective relay will interpolate the allowed operations based on the switchgear wear curve.
When the interrupted current is greater than the interrupt current at the last point, the protective relay will assume
zero operation counts.
Breaker Maintenance Curve for a typical 25kV Breaker
4
1× 10
0.0 1.2
10000 10000
3
1× 10
Number of Operations
8.0
150
100
20.0
10 12
20.0
1 0
0.1 1 10 100
Interrupted Current in kA per operation

Global Protection Parameters of the Breaker Wear Module

Operations Alarm Service Alarm, too many Operations 1 - 100000 9999 [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
Isum Intr Alarm Alarm, the Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been 0.00 - 2000.00kA 100.00kA [Control
exceeded.
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
Isum Intr ph Alm Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents 0.00 - 2000.00kA 100.00kA [Control
has been exceeded.
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
SGwear Curve Fc The Circuit Breaker (load-break switch) Wear Curve inactive, inactive [Control
defines the maximum allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles
active /SG
depending on the brake currents. If the circuit breaker
maintenance curve is exceeded, an alarm will be /SG[1]
issued. The breaker maintenance curve is to be taken
/SG Wear]
from the technical data sheet of the breaker
manufactor. By means of the available points this curve
is to be replicated.
WearLevel Alarm Threshold for the Alarm 0.00 - 100.00% 80.00% [Control
/SG
Only available if:SGwear Curve Fc = active
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
WearLevel Lockout Threshold for the Lockout Level 0.00 - 100.00% 95.00% [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
Current1 Interrupted Current Level #1 0.00 - 2000.00kA 0.00kA [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
Count1 Open Counts Allowed #1 1 - 32000 10000 [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]


/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]


/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]
/SG
/SG[1]
/SG Wear]

Breaker Wear Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
Isum Intr trip: IL1 Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IL1
Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded in at
least one phase.
Res TripCmd Cr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands
Res Sum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
WearLevel Alarm Signal: Threshold for the Alarm
WearLevel Lockout Signal: Threshold for the Lockout Level
Res SGwear Curve Signal: Reset of the Circuit Breaker (load-break switch) Wear maintenance curve.
Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been exceeded.
Res Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Reset of the Alarm, "the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been
exceeded".
Breaker Wear Counter Values

TripCmd Cr Counter: Total number of trips of the switchgear 0 0 - 200000 [Operation
(circuit breaker, load break switch…). Resettable
/Count and RevData
with Total or All.
/Control
/SG[1]]

Sum trip IL1 Summation of the tripping currents phase 0.00A 0.00 - 1000.00A [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Control
/SG[1]]
/Count and RevData
/Control
/SG[1]]


/Count and RevData
/Control
/SG[1]]
Isum Intr per hour Sum per hour of interrupting currents. 0.00kA 0.00 - 1000.00kA [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Control
/SG[1]]
SG OPEN capacity Used capacity. 100% means, that the switchgear 0.0% 0.0 - 100.0% [Operation
is to be maintenanced.
/Count and RevData
/Control
/SG[1]]
Direct Commands of the Breaker Wear Module

Res TripCmd Cr Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip inactive, inactive [Operation
commands
active /Reset]
Res Sum trip Reset summation of the tripping currents inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Res Isum Intr per Reset of the Sum per hour of interrupting currents. inactive, inactive [Operation
hour
active /Reset]
Res CB OPEN Resetting of the CB OPEN capacity. 100% means, that inactive, inactive [Operation
capacity the circuit breaker is to be maintenanced.
active /Reset]

Control Parameters
Ctrl
Direct Commands of the Control Module

Switching Authority Switching Authority None, Local [Control
Local, /General settings]
Remote,
Local and Remote
NonInterl DC for Non-Interlocking inactive, inactive [Control
Global Protection Parameters of the Control Module

Res NonIL Resetmode Non-Interlocking single Operation, single Operation [Control
timeout, /General settings]
permanent
Timeout NonIL Timeout Non-Interlocking 2 - 3600s 60s [Control

/General settings]
Only available if: Res NonIL<>permanent
NonIL Assign Assignment Non-Interlocking 1..n, Assignment -.- [Control

List
/General settings]
Control Moduel Input States

NonInterl-I Non-Interlocking [Control
/General settings]

Signals of the Control Module
Signal Description
Local Switching Authority: Local
Remote Switching Authority: Remote
NonInterl Non-Interlocking is active
SG Indeterm Minimum one Switchgear is moving (Position cannot be determined).
SG Disturb Minimum one Switchgear is disturbed.
Synchronization inputs
-.- No assignment
Sync.Ready to Close Signal: Ready to Close
















Assignable Trip Commands (Trip Manager)
Name Description
-.- No assignment
I[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
IG[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

Name Description
ThR.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
I2>[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
df/dt.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
delta phi.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Intertripping.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
P.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Q.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
LVRT[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
VG[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
V012[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
f[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PQS[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command

Name Description
Controlled Circuit Breaker

SG[1]
Direct Commands of a Controlled Circuit Breaker

Manipulate Position WARNING! Fake Position - Manual Position inactive, inactive [Control
Manipulation
Pos OFF, /SG
Pos ON /SG[1]
/General settings]
Res SGwear Sl SG Resetting the slow Switchgear Alarm inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Ack TripCmd Acknowledge Trip Command inactive, inactive [Operation


Global Protection Parameters of a Controlled Circuit Breaker

Aux ON The CB is in ON-position if the state of the assigned 1..n, DI-LogicList DI Slot X1.DI 1 [Control
signal is true (52a).
/SG
/SG[1]
/Pos Indicatrs
Wirng]
Aux OFF The CB is in OFF-position if the state of the assigned 1..n, DI-LogicList DI Slot X1.DI 2 [Control
signal is true (52b).
/SG
/SG[1]
/Pos Indicatrs
Wirng]
Ready Circuit breaker is ready for operation if the state of the 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
assigned signal is true. This digital input can be used
/SG
by some protective elements (if they are available
within the device) like Auto Reclosure (AR), e.g. as a /SG[1]
trigger signal.
/Pos Indicatrs
Wirng]
Removed The withdrawable circuit breaker is Removed 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
/SG
Dependency
/SG[1]
/Pos Indicatrs
Wirng]
Interl ON1 Interlocking of the ON command 1..n, Assignment -.- [Control
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
Interl OFF1 Interlocking of the OFF command 1..n, Assignment -.- [Control
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]


List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
SCmd ON Switching ON Command, e.g. the state of the Logics or 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
the state of the digital input
/SG
/SG[1]
/Ex ON/OFF Cmd]
SCmd OFF Switching OFF Command, e.g. the state of the Logics 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
or the state of the digital input
/SG
/SG[1]
/Ex ON/OFF Cmd]
t-TripCmd Minimum hold time of the OFF-command (circuit 0 - 300.00s 0.2s [Control
breaker, load break switch)
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Latched Defines whether the Binary Output Relay will be inactive, inactive [Control
Latched when it picks up.
active /SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Ack TripCmd Ack TripCmd 1..n, Assignment -.- [Control
List
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd1 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds I[1].TripCmd [Control
assigned signal becomes true.
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd2 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds V[1].TripCmd [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


Off Cmd3 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds V[2].TripCmd [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd4 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds f[1].TripCmd [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd5 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds f[2].TripCmd [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd6 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds PQS[1].TripCmd [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Off Cmd7 Off Command to the Circuit Breaker if the state of the 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]


/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Synchronism Synchronism 1..n, In-SyncList -.- [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Synchron Switchg]


t-MaxSyncSuperv Synchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0 - 3000.00s 0.2s [Control
synchronizing process after a close initiate. Only used
/SG
for GENERATOR2SYSTEM working mode.
/SG[1]
/Synchron Switchg]
ON incl Prot ON The ON Command includes the ON Command issued inactive, active [Control
by the Protection module.
active /SG
/SG[1]
/General settings]
OFF incl TripCmd The OFF Command includes the OFF Command inactive, active [Control
issued by the Protection module.
active /SG
/SG[1]
/General settings]
t-Move ON Time to move to the ON Position 0.01 - 100.00s 0.1s [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/General settings]
t-Move OFF Time to move to the OFF Position 0.01 - 100.00s 0.1s [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/General settings]
t-Dwell Dwell time 0 - 100.00s 0s [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/General settings]

Controlled Circuit Breaker Input States

Aux ON-I Module Input State: Position indicator/check-back signal of the [Control
CB (52a)
/SG
/SG[1]
/Pos Indicatrs Wirng]
Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position indicator/check-back signal of the [Control
CB (52b)
/SG
/SG[1]
Ready-I Module input state: CB ready [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has to become true within [Control
the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful.
/SG
/SG[1]
/Synchron Switchg]
Removed-I State of the module input: The withdrawable circuit breaker is [Control
Removed
/SG
/SG[1]
Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgement Signal (only for [Control
automatic acknowledgement) Module input signal
/SG
/SG[1]
/Trip Manager]
Interl ON1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the ON command [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]


Interl OFF1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OFF command [Control
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
/SG
/SG[1]
/Interlockings]
SCmd ON-I State of the module input: Switching ON Command, e.g. the [Control
state of the Logics or the state of the digital input
/SG
/SG[1]
/Ex ON/OFF Cmd]
SCmd OFF-I State of the module input: Switching OFF Command, e.g. the [Control
state of the Logics or the state of the digital input
/SG
/SG[1]
/Ex ON/OFF Cmd]

Signals of a Controlled Circuit Breaker
Signal Description
SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary contact (pole) only. Thus
indeterminate and disturbed Positions cannot be detected.
Pos not ON Signal: Pos not ON
Pos ON Signal: Circuit Breaker is in ON-Position
Pos OFF Signal: Circuit Breaker is in OFF-Position
Pos Indeterm Signal: Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Pos Disturb Signal: Circuit Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The Position Indicators
contradict themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
Pos Signal: Circuit Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = Disturbed)
Ready Signal: Circuit breaker is ready for operation.
t-Dwell Signal: Dwell time
Removed Signal: The withdrawable circuit breaker is Removed
Interl ON Signal: One or more IL_On inputs are active.
Interl OFF Signal: One or more IL_Off inputs are active.
CES succesf Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed successfully.
CES Disturbed Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful. Switchgear in
disturbed position.
CES Fail TripCmd Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Command execution failed because trip command is
pending.
CES SwitchDir Signal: Command Execution Supervision respectively Switching Direction Control: This signal
becomes true, if a switch command is issued even though the switchgear is already in the
requested position. Example: A switchgear that is already OFF should be switched OFF again
(doubly). The same applies to CLOSE commands.
CES ON d OFF Signal: Command Execution Supervision: On Command during a pending OFF Command.
CES SG not ready Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
CES Fiel Interl Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of field
interlocking.
CES SyncTimeout Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed. No
Synchronization signal while t-sync was running.
CES SG removed Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful, Switchgear
removed.
Prot ON Signal: ON Command issued by the Prot module
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
ON incl Prot ON Signal: The ON Command includes the ON Command issued by the Protection module.
OFF incl TripCmd Signal: The OFF Command includes the OFF Command issued by the Protection module.
Position Ind manipul Signal: Position Indicators faked
SGwear Slow SG Signal: Alarm, the circuit breaker (load-break switch) becomes slower
Res SGwear Sl SG Signal: Resetting the slow Switchgear Alarm
ON Cmd Signal: ON Command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may
include the ON command of the Prot module.

Signal Description
OFF Cmd Signal: OFF Command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may
include the OFF command of the Prot module.
ON Cmd manual Signal: ON Cmd manual
OFF Cmd manual Signal: OFF Cmd manual
Sync ON request Signal: Synchronous ON request

Control - Example: Switching of a Circuit Breaker
The following example shows how to switch a circuit breaker via the HMI at the device.
Change into the menu »Control« or alternatively push the »CTRL« button at the
device front.
Change to the control page by pushing the »right arrow« softkey.
Information only: On the control page the current switchgear positions is displayed.
By means of the softkey »Mode« it can be switched to the menu »General
Settings«. In this menu switching authority and interlockings can be set.
By means of the softkey »SG« it can be switched to the menu »SG«. In this menu
specific settings for the switch gear can be done.
To execute a switching operation, change into the switching menu by pushing the
right arrow softkey button.
Executing a switching command via the devices HMI is only possible when the
switching authority is set to »Local«. If no switching authority is given, this has to be
set first to »Local« or »Local and Remote«.
With the softkey »OK« it can be switched back to the single line diagram page.
Pushing the softkey »Mode« leads to the menu »General Settings«.

In this menu the switching authority can be changed.
Select between »Local« or »Local and Remote«.
Now it is possible to execute switching commands at the HMI.
Push the »right arrow« softkey to get to the control page.
The circuit breaker is opened, therefore it can be closed only.

After pushing the softkey »CLOSE« a confirmation window appears.
When you are sure to proceed with the switching operation, press the softkey
»YES«.
The switching command will be given to the circuit breaker. The display shows the
intermediate position of the switchgear.

It will be shown on the display when the switchgear reaches the new end position.
Further possible switching operations (OPEN) will be displayed by softkeys.
Notice: For the case, the switchgear does not reach the new end position within the
set supervision time the following Warning appears on the display.

Protective Elements
Protective Elements
Interconnection
Various state-of-the-art protective elements have been developed for the HighPROTEC. Due to the increasing role
of distributed energy resources interconnection protection becomes more and more important. A new, sophisticated
protection function package covers all protective elements for interconnection applications. This package can be
found within menu [Interconnection].
These protective elements can be used flexible. They can be adapted easily by parameter settings to various
international and local grid codes.
In the following an overview is given on this menu. Please refer for details on these protective elements to the
corresponding chapters.
The Interconnection menu comprises:
A submenu with mains-decoupling elements. Depending on the grid codes that are to be taken into account
various mains decoupling elements are mandatory (or forbidden). Within this menu, you have access to the
following mains decoupling elements:
ROCOF (df/dt) (please refer to chapter freqeuncy protection). This element is consistent with a
Frequency Protection element, that is set to „df/dt“ within the Device Planning.
Vector shift (delta phi) (please refer to chapter freqeuncy protection). This element is consistent with
a Frequency Protection element, that is set to „delta phi“ within the Device Planning.
Pr (please refer to chapter power protection). This element is consistent with a Power Protection
element, that is set to „Pr>“ within the Device Planning.
Qr (please refer to chapter power protection). This element is consistent with a Power Protection
element, that is set to „Qr>“ within the Device Planning.
Intertripping (please refer to chapter intertripping).
A submenu for Low Voltage Ride Through (please refer to the LVRT chapter).
A submenu for Q->&V<-Protection (please refer to the Q->&V< chapter).
A submenu for synchronization (please refer to the synchronization chapter).
The device offers also among other things for low voltage systems a
voltage quality supervision based on the ten minutes sliding mean square
measurement. (please refer to chapter Voltage Protection).

Protective Elements
I - Overcurrent Protection [50, 51,51Q, 51V, 67]
Available stages:
I[1] ,I[2] ,I[3] ,I[4] ,I[5] ,I[6]
If you are using inrush blockings the tripping delay of the current protection
functions must be at least 30ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings.
In order to ensure correct functioning of the directional detection after single-

phase short-circuits, the following reference voltage is used: For phase current
I1 it is the line-to-line voltage U23, for phase current I2 the line-to-line voltage
U31 and for phase current I3 the line-to-line voltage U12.
In case the fault happens to be near the measuring location and there is no
reference voltage for directional recognition available any more (neither
measured or from history (voltage memory)), then the module will - depending
on the parameter setting - either trip non-directional or it will be blocked.
All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.
This module offers Adaptive Parameter Sets.

Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of
Adaptive Parameter Sets.
Please refer to chapter Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets.

Protective Elements
The following table shows the application options of the Overcurrent Protection element
Applications of the I-Protection Module Setting in Option
ANSI 50 – Overcurrent protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:

directional Fundamental/TrueRMS/negative
phase sequence current (I2)
ANSI 51 – Short circuit protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:
directional Fundamental/TrueRMS/negative
ANSI 67 – Overcurrent/ Short circuit Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:
protection, directional Fundamental/TrueRMS/negative
ANSI 51V – Voltage restraint overcurrent Parameter Set: Measuring Mode:
protection VRestraint = active Fundamental/TrueRMS/negative
Measuring Channel:
Phase to Phase/Phase to Neutral
ANSI 51Q Negative Phase Sequence Parameter Set:
Overcurrent Protection Measuring Method =I2
(Negative Sequence
Current)
51C Voltage controlled overcurrent Adaptive Parameters Measuring Mode:
protection Fundamental/TrueRMS/negative
(Please refer to the chapter
Measuring Channel:
Parameter/Adaptive Parameter)
(in voltage protection module)
Phase to Phase/Phase to Neutral

Protective Elements
Measuring Mode
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the » Fundamental«
or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
Alternatively the »Measuring Mode« can be set to »I2«. In this case the negative phase sequence current will be
measured. This is to detect unbalanced faults.
Voltage restraint overcurrent protection 51V

When the Parameter »VRestraint« is set to active the overcurrent protection element works voltage restraint. That
means, the overcurrent pickup threshold will be lowered during voltage drops. This results in a more sensitive
overcurrent protection. For the voltage threshold »VRestraint max« additionally the »Measuring Channel« can be
determined.
Measuring Channel
With the parameter »Measuring Channel« it can be determined, whether the »Phase to Phase« voltage or the
»Phase to Neutral« voltage is measured.
All overcurrent protective elements can be planned as non-directional or optionally as directional elements. This
means, all 6 elements can be planned user defined in forward/reverse or non directional.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
DEFT (UMZ)
NINV (IEC/AMZ)
VINV (IEC/AMZ)
LINV (IEC/AMZ)
EINV (IEC/AMZ)
MINV (ANSI/AMZ)
VINV (ANSI/AMZ)
EINV (ANSI/AMZ)
Thermal Flat
IT
I2T
I4T
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-char = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor . The setting range depends

on the selected tripping curve .
I = Fault current
I> = If the pickup value is exceeded , the module/element starts to time out to trip .
By using the projecting parameters each of the overcurrent protective elements can be defined as »forward«,
»reverse« or »non-directional«. The forward or reverse direction is based on the characteristic angle for the phase
direction specified by the field parameter »I MTA«. No directional information will be taken into account if the current
protective element is planned as »non-directional«

Protective Elements
DEFT
100
I
I>
0.0 1 40
10
t [s]
3 00 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1 10
I
I>

Protective Elements
IEC NINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available . Resetting via characteristic, delayed and
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
0.14 0.14
t= 2 *t-char [s] t= 0.02 *t-char [s]
I I
( I> ) -1 ( I> ) -1
t [s] t-char
x * I> (multiples of pickup)

Protective Elements
IEC VINV
Notice!
Various reset modes are available . Resetting via characteristic , delayed and
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
13.5 13.5
t= *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I 2 I
( I> )-1 ( I> )-1
t [s]
t-char

Protective Elements
IEC LINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
120 120
I 2 I
( I> )-1 ( I> )-1
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
IEC EINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
80 80
t= 2
*t-char [s] t= 2
*t-char [s]
I I
( I> ) -1 ( I> ) -1
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI MINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
( I
I>
4.85
2
) -1
*t-char [s] t=
(
(
0.0515
I
I>
0.02
) -1
+ 0.1140
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI VINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
(
21.6
I
)
I> -1
2 *t-char [s] t=
( ( I
19.61
I>
2
) -1
+ 0.491
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI EINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
(
29.1
I 2
I> )-1
*t-char [s] t=
(( I
I>
28.2
2
) -1
+ 0.1217
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
Therm Flat
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 2
5*3 5*1
t= *t-char [s] t= 0
*t-char [s]
I 0
I
( In ) ( In )
t = 45 *t-char [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
1.0
10
t [s] 0.5 t-char
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
x * In (multiples of the nominal current)

Protective Elements
IT
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 1
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= *t-char [s]
I 1
( In ) ( I
)
In
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
TM[s]=
t [s] t-char
10 10
5
2
1
1.0
0.5
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Protective Elements
I2T
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 2
5*3 5*3
t= 0
*t-char [s] t= 2 *t-char [s]
I I
( In ) ( In )
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] t-char
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Protective Elements
I4T
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 4
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-char [s] t= 4 *t-char [s]
I I
( In ) ( In )
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] t-char
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1
2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
x * In (multiples of the nominal current )

449
Protective Elements
Prot - phase failure direction detection
Prot.I Phase MTA
VL1
MRA4
φ
VL2
VL3 Voltage memory &
IL1 Prot.I dir fwd
(forward)
IL2
IL3 VL1
VL12
I1
Phase MTA
&
Prot.I dir rev
(reverse)
VL23
Prot.Phase Sequence
VL31
VL2
&
VL3 Prot.I dir n poss
VL23
(not possible)
reverse forward
Prot.Alarm
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
450
Protective Elements
direction decision phase overcurrent
name = I[1]...[n]
Device planning
name.Mode
non dir ectiona l
fo rwa rd
MRA4
reverse
& >1
name. Fault in projected direction
Prot.I dir fwd 9
(forward)
&
Prot.I dir rev

(reverse)
name.nondir Trip at V=0
inactive
active
&
Prot.I dir n poss

(not possible)
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
I[1]...[n]
name = I[1]...[n]
***=Applies only to devices that offer Directional Feature.
name .IH2 Blo*

Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings
4 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals )
name.Alarm L1
24b
name.Alarm L2
Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision phase overcurrent*** 25b
9 name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in projected direction name .Alarm L3
26b
& name.Alarm
name.IH2 Blo
14
inactive
& name.Trip L1
active
& 16b
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2*
5 IH2.Blo L1 name .Trip L2
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
&
17b
&
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2*
6 IH2.Blo L2
name.Char
name.Trip L3
&
name.t-char 18b
& &
name.t-reset
7 Please Refer To Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo L3
name.Reset Mode
name.Measuring φ
method INV
>1
& >1
name .Trip
Fundamental 51V Pickup = 15
%Pickup * 51P
True RMS I>
IL1
IL2 &
name .TripCmd
IL3 &
Based on above parameters , 15a
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device .
ILx max ILx max
name.Meas Circuit
Superv
inactive
active &
φ
38a 38b 38c
name.Measuring Mode
Phase to Ground
Phase to Phase φ
Pickup%
VL1
100%
VL2
%Pickup
VL3
25%
V
25%
VRestraint max
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings

3 (Tripping command deactivated or blocked . )

Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the I Module

Mode Mode do not use, I[1]: non [Device planning]
directional
non directional,
I[2]: do not use
forward,
I[3]: do not use
reverse
I[4]: do not use
I[5]: do not use
I[6]: do not use
Global Protection Parameters of the I Module

ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking is activated 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
(allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the List
/Global Prot Para
assigned signal is true.
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
module/the stage, if blocking is activated (allowed) List
/Global Prot Para
within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned
signal is true. /I-Prot
/I[1]]
Ex rev Interl External blocking of the module by external reverse 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
interlocking, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a List
/Global Prot Para
parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is
true. /I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

Protective Elements

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the I Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, I[1]: active [Protection Para
active I[2]: inactive /<1..4>
I[3]: inactive /I-Prot
I[4]: inactive /I[1]]
I[5]: inactive
I[6]: inactive
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
module/stage. This parameter is only effective if a
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /I-Prot
/I[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
Ex rev Interl Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
modules/stages are blocked that are parameterized "Ex
/I[1]]
rev Interl Fc = active".
Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

Protective Elements

ExBlo TripCmd Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking of the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
/I[1]]
"ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active".
Measuring method Measuring method: fundamental or rms or 3rd Fundamental, Fundamental [Protection Para
harmonic (only generator protection relays)
True RMS, /<1..4>
I2 /I-Prot
/I[1]]
I> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element 0.02 - 40.00In 1.00In [Protection Para
starts to time out to trip.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT Or /I-Prot
Characteristic = INV Minimum of the setting range If:
/I[1]]
VRestraint = active Minimum of the setting range If:
VRestraint = inactive
Char Characteristic DEFT, DEFT [Protection Para

IEC NINV, /<1..4>
IEC VINV, /I-Prot
IEC EINV, /I[1]]
IEC LINV,
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
t-char Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. The setting 0.02 - 20.00 1 [Protection Para
range depends on the selected tripping curve.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = INV Or Characteristic /I-Prot
= Therm Flat Or Characteristic = IT Or Characteristic =
/I[1]]
I2T Or Characteristic = I4T

Protective Elements

Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous, instantaneous [Protection Para
t-delay, /<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = INV Or Characteristic
= Therm Flat Or Characteristic = IT Or Characteristic = calculated /I-Prot
I2T Or Characteristic = I4T
/I[1]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV 0.00 - 60.00s 0s [Protection Para
characteristics only)
/<1..4>
Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /I-Prot
/I[1]]
IH2 Blo Blocking the trip command, if an inrush is detected. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
nondir Trip at V=0 Only relevant for current protection modules/stages inactive, inactive [Protection Para
with directional feature! The device will trip non
active /<1..4>
directional if this parameter is set to active and no
direction could be determined because no reference /I-Prot
voltage (V=0) could be measured any more (e.g. if
/I[1]]
there is a three-phase short circuit close to the device).
If this parameter is set to inactive, the protection stage
will be blocked in case of V=0.
Only available if: Device planning: I.Mode = directional

VRestraint Voltage Restraint Protection inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
Measuring Mode Measuring Mode Phase to Neutral, Phase to Neutral [Protection Para
Phase to Phase /<1..4>
Only available if: VRestraint = active
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
VRestraint max Maximum voltage restraint level. Definition of Vn: Vn is 0.04 - 1.50Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
dependent on the System Parameter setting of "VT
/<1..4>
con". When the System Parameters "VT con" is set to
"phase-to-phase" , "Vn = VT sec ". When the System /I-Prot
Parameters "VT con" is set to "phase-to-ground", "Vn =
/I[1]]
VT sec/SQRT(3)".

Protective Elements

Meas Circuit Activates the use of the measuring circuit supervision. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Superv In this case the module will be blocked if a measuring
active /<1..4>
circuit supervision module (e.g. LOP, VTS) signals a
disturbed measuring circuit (e.g. caused by a fuse /I-Prot
failure).
/I[1]]

Protective Elements
I Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1 [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I[1]]

Protective Elements
I Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
Alarm Signal: Alarm
Trip L1 Signal: General Trip Phase L1
Trip Signal: Trip
Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, non-directional [50, 51]

Object to be tested
Signals to be measured for each current protection element, the threshold values, total tripping time
(recommended), or alternatively tripping delays and the fallback ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x
three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can easily happen, and

these are then detected safely. Measuring the total tripping time can ensure
that the secondary wiring is o.k. (from the terminal on, up to the trip coil of the
CB).
It is recommended to measure the total tripping time instead of the tripping

delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total tripping
time is measured at the position signalling contact of the CB (not at the relay
output!).
Total tripping time = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection stages) + CB operating time (about 50 ms)
Please take the CB operating times from the technical data specified in the
relevant documentation provided by the CB manufacturer.
Necessary means
Current source
May be: ampere meters
Timer
Procedure
Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the
threshold values.
Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB (CB tripping).
Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.
Testing the fallback ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the fallback ratio.
Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and fallback ratios correspond with
those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, directional [67]
Object to be tested
For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or alternatively
tripping delays and the fallback ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and

these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can be
ensured that the secondary wiring is o.k. (from the terminal on, up to the trip
coil of the CB ).

time. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total tripping
time is measured at the position signaling contacts of the CBs (not at the relay
output!).
Total tripping time: = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
Please take the CB switching times from the technical data, specified in the
relevant documentation, provided by the CB manufacturer.
Necessary means
Synchronizable current and voltage sources
May be: ampere meters
Timer
Procedure
Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be
tested by the angle between current and voltage.

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Check then the
threshold values.

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the CB (CB tripping).
Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the fallback ratio.


Protective Elements
51V - Voltage Restraint Overcurrent
For activating this function, the parameter »VRestraint« has to be set to active in the parameter set of the
corresponding overcurrent element I[x].
The 51V protection function restrains operation which reduces pickup levels. This allows the User to lower the
pickup value of the 51V protection function with the corresponding phase input voltage (phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground, depending on the setting of »Measuring Channel« within the current protection module). When the
minimum fault phase current is close to the load current, it may make the phase time overcurrent protection
coordination difficult. In this case, an undervoltage function may be used to alleviate this situation. When the
voltage is low, the phase time overcurrent pickup threshold may be set low accordingly, so that the phase time
overcurrent protection may achieve adequate sensitivity and better coordination. The device uses a simple linear
model to determine the effective pickup by characterizing the relationship between the voltage and the phase time
overcurrent pickup threshold.
Once the voltage restraint protection function is activated, the effective phase time overcurrent pickup threshold will
be the calculated Pickup% times the phase time overcurrent pickup setting. The effective pickup threshold must be
within the setting range allowed and, if it is less, the minimum pickup value will be used.
Pickup%
100%
25%
25% VRestraint max VRestraint max

V
That means:
Vmin = 0.25*Vmax;
•Pickup%min = 25%;
•Pickup% = 25%, if V <= Vmin;
•Pickup% = 1/Vmax*(V - Vmin) + 25%, if Vmin < V < Vmax;
•Pickup% = 100%, if V >= Vmax;
The tripping curves (characteristic) will not be influenced by the voltage restraint function.
If the voltage transformer supervision is activated, the voltage restraint overcurrent protection element is blocked in
case of m.c.b. trip to avoid false trippings.

Protective Elements
Definition of Vn:
Vn is dependent on the »Measuring Channel« setting in the current protection modules.
In case that this parameter is set to "Phase to Phase":
Vn=Main VT sec
In case that this parameter is set to "Phase to Neutral":

MainVT sec
Vn=
3
If the parameter »VT con« within the field parameters is set to »Phase to Phase« the setting
»Phase to Neutral« in the current modules is effectless.

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, Non-directional [ANSI 51V]

Object to be tested:
Signals to be measured for Voltage Restraint protection function: the threshold values, total tripping time
(recommended), or alternatively tripping delays and the dropout ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-
phase.

time is measured at the position signaling contacts of the CBs (not at the relay
output!).
Necessary means:
Current source;
Voltage Source;
Current and Voltage meters; and
Timer.
Procedure:

Feed %Pickup voltage. For each test performed, feed a current that is about 3-5% above the threshold value for
activation/tripping. Then check if the pickup values are %Pickup of the value according to the standard overcurrent
protection.

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the breakers (breaker tripping).
Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output contact)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output contact.
Testing the dropout ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical
Data.

Protective Elements
I2> - Negative-Sequence Overcurrent [51Q]
For activating this function, the parameter »Measuring Mode« has to be set to »I2« in the parameter set of the
corresponding overcurrent element I[x].
The negative-sequence overcurrent protection function (I2>) is to be seen as an equivalent to the phase overcurrent
protection with the exception that it uses negative-sequence current (I2>) as measured quantities instead of the
three phase currents used by phase overcurrent protection function. The negative-sequence current used by I2> is
derived from the following well-known symmetrical component transformation:
1
I 2=  I L1 a 2 I L2 a I L3 
3
The pickup set value of a I2> protection function should be set in accordance of the negative-sequence current
occurrence in the protected object.
Besides that, the negative-sequence overcurrent protection function (I2>) uses the same setting parameters as the
phase overcurrent protection function, like trip and reset characteristics from both IEC/ANSI standards, time
multiplier, etc.
The negative-sequence overcurrent protection function (I2>) can be used for line, generator, transformer and motor
protection to protect the system from unbalanced faults. Because the I2> protection function operates on the
negative-sequence current component which is normally absent during load conditions, the I2> can, therefore, be
set more sensitive than the phase overcurrent protection functions. On the other hand, coordination of negative-
sequence overcurrent protection function in a radial system does not mean automatically very long fault clearing
time for the furthest upstream protection devices, because the tripping time of concerned negative-sequence
overcurrent protection function needs only be coordinate with the next downstream device with the negative-
sequence overcurrent protection function. This makes the I2> in many cases as an advantageous protection
concept in addition to the phase overcurrent protection function.
If you are using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection
functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings.
At the moment of breaker closure, negative-sequence current might be the

result of transients.

465
I[1]...[n]: Measuring method = (I2>)
Protective Elements
name = I[1]...[n]
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings**

4 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
name.IH2 Blo
name.Alarm
14
name.IH2 Blo
inactive
active
& &
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
7 6 5 IH2.IH2 Blo
name.Char
name.t-char
MRA4
name.t-reset
name.Reset Mode
name.Measuring
method
φ
Fundamental DEFT / INV
True RMS 0
t
I2"
&
name.Trip
name.IG> 15
I2 φ
& name.TripCmd
Based on above parameters, tripping
15a
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.

3 (Tripping command deactivated or blocked. )
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Commissioning: Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Object to be tested
Signals to be measured for each current protection function: the threshold values, total tripping time
(recommended), or alternatively tripping delays and the dropout ratios.

time is measured at the position signalling contacts of the CBs (not at the relay
output!).
Necessary means:
Current source
Current meters
Timer
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
In order to get a negative-sequence current, please change the phase sequence at the terminals of the current
source (in case of ABC sequence to ACB – in case of a ACB sequence to ABC).
For each test performed, feed a current that is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then
check the threshold values.

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the breakers (breaker tripping).
Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output contact)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output contact.
Testing the dropout ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical
Data.

Protective Elements
Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection [51C]
When a sort circuit is near the generator, the voltage might drop down. By means of Adaptive Parameters (Please
refer to chapter Parameter) the tripping times or tripping characteristics can be modified by the output signal of a
voltage element (depending on a threshold). The device might change a load curve to a fault curve (taking
influence on tripping time, trip curves and reset modes).
Please proceed as follows:
Read and understand the section „Adaptive Parameters“ within the chapter Parameter.
Do the device planning and set all required parameters for the Undervoltage element.
Do the device planning and set all required parameters for the Overcurrent element.
Set the Adaptive Parameters within the Overcurrent element in the relevant parameter sets (e.g. Curve
multiplier, curve type...).
Assign the Undervoltage alarm (pickup) within the Global Parameters as an activation signal for the
corresponding Adaptive Parameter set of the overcurrent element that should be modified.
Check the functionality by a commissioning test.

Protective Elements
IH2 - Inrush
Available elements:
IH2
The inrush module can prevent false trips caused by switching actions of saturated inductive loads. The ratio of the
2nd harmonic to the 1st harmonic is taken into account.
IH2.3-ph Blo
8
IH2.Blo L1
IH2.Blo L2
IH2.Blo L3
IH2.Blo IG
>1
>1
>1
&>1
Inrush.block mode
1-ph Blo
3-ph Blo
&
&
&
&
Inrush. IH2 / IH1
IGH2
IGH1
IH2
IH1
IH2
IH1
IH2
IH1
IGH1
IGH2
IH2
IH1
IH2
IH1
IH2
IH1
Inrush.active
4
IH2
IL2
IL1
IL3
IG

Protective Elements
Do not use the Inrush element in combination with undelayed/instantaneous overcurrent

protection (in order to prevent faulty tripping).
Device Planning Parameters of the Inrush Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Inrush module

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Inrush Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IH2]
active /<1..4>
/IH2]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
IH2 / IH1 Maximum permissible percentage of the 2nd harmonic 10 - 40% 15% [Protection Para
of the 1st harmonic.
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IH2]
block mode 1-ph Blo: If an inrush is detected in one phase, the 1-ph Blo, 1-ph Blo [Protection Para
corresponding phase of those modules will be blocked,
3-ph Blo /<1..4>
where inrush blocking is set to active./3-ph Blo: If an
inrush is detected in at least one phase, all three /I-Prot
phases of those modules where inrush blocking is set
/IH2]
to active will be blocked (cross blocking).
Inrush Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IH2]

Protective Elements
Inrush Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Blo L1 Signal: Blocked L1
Blo IG meas Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (measured ground current)
Blo IG calc Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (calculated ground current)
3-ph Blo Signal: Inrush was detected in at least one phase - trip command blocked.
Commissioning: Inrush
Dependent on the parameterized inrush-blocking-mode (»1-ph Blo or 3-ph

Blo«), the test procedure is different.
For mode »1-ph-Blo« the test has to be carried out first for each individual
phase and then for all three phases together.
For mode »3-ph-Blo« the test is a three-phase one.
Object to be tested
Test of inrush blocking.
Necessary means
three-phase current source with adjustable frequency
three-phase current source (for the first harmonic)
Procedure (dependent on the parameterized blocking mode)
Feed the current to the secondary side with nominal frequency.

Feed abruptly current to the secondary side with double nominal frequency. The amplitude must exceed the
preset ratio/threshold »IH2/IN«.
Ascertain that the signal »INRUSH ALARM« is generated now.
Successful test results

The signal »INRUSH ALARM« is generated and the event recorder indicates the blocking of the current protection stage.

Protective Elements
Directional Features for Measured Ground Fault Elements 50N/51N
All ground fault elements can be selected as »non-directional/forward/reverse« operated. This has to be done in
the »Device Planning« menu.
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be selected
by the parameter »IG meas dir ctrl« in the [Field Para/Direction] menu as follows:
»IG meas 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be used
as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault element is to use
neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be either »measured« or
»calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« in the
[Field Para/Direction] menu.
»I2,V2«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current (Polarizing:
V2/Operating: I2) will be used to detect direction. The monitored current is still the
measured residual current IG meas.
»Dual«: For this method, the negative phase sequence voltage »V2« will be used as
polarizing quantity if »V2« and »I2« are available, otherwise 3V0 will be used. The
operating quantity is either I2 if »V2« and »I2« are available, else IG meas.
The following table gives the User a quick overview of all possible directional settings.
50N/51N Direction Decision [Field Para/ [Field [Field
by Angle Between: Direction] Para/Direction]: Para/Direction]:
IG meas dir ctrl = 3V0 Source =

The Following Angle
Has to Be Set:
Measured ground current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IG meas 3V0 measured
IG meas, 3V0 (measured)
Measured ground current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IG meas 3V0 calculated
IG meas, 3V0 (calculated)
Negative sequence voltage and current 90° + Phase MTA I2,V2 not used
I2, V2
Negative phase sequence current and If V2 and I2 are Dual measured
voltage (preferred), measured ground current available:
90° + Phase MTA
and neutral voltage (alternatively):
I2, V2 (if available) else:
or else:
Ground MTA
IG meas, 3V0 (measured)
Negative phase sequence current and If V2 and I2 are Dual calculated
voltage (preferred), measured ground current available:
90° + Phase MTA
and neutral voltage (alternatively):
I2, V2 (if available) else:
or else:
IG meas, 3V0 (calculated) Ground MTA

473
Prot - 50G/51G - direction detection
Protective Elements
Field Para
3V0 Source
measured
calculated Field Para
VG calc IG meas dir ctrl
3V0
IG meas 3V0
VX meas V2
I2,V2
V2*
Dual
3V0 50G/51G - direction detection
*=Priority if available.
Prot.IG meas dir fwd
MRA4
(forward)
10b
polarizing
forward
IG = IG meas Prot.IG meas rev dir
I2 g (reverse)
10b
tin
era
operating op polarizing
If V2 and I2 are available, I2 is the operating quantity, else IG meas is the operating quantity
Prot.IG meas dir n poss
reverse (not possible)
10b
MTA
Field Para
Ground MTA
90° + Phase MTA
If V2 and I2 are available, MTA = 90° +

Phase MTA, otherwise MTA = Ground
MTA
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Directional Features for Calculated (IG calc) Ground Fault 50N/51N
All ground fault elements can be selected as »non-directional/forward/reverse« operated. This has to be done in
the »Device Planning« menu.
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be selected
by the parameter »IG calc dir ctrl« in the [Field Para/Direction] menu as follows:
»IG calc 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be used
as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault element is to use
neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be either »measured« or
»calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« in the [Field
Para/Direction] menu.
»IG calc Ipol (IG meas)«: The measured neutral current (usually = IG meas) will be used
as polarizing quantity.
»Dual«: For this method, the measured neutral current Ipol=IG meas will be used as
polarizing quantity, if available, otherwise 3V0 will be used.
»I2,V2«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current will be used
to detect the direction. The monitored current is still the calculated residual current IG
calc.
Operating Quantity: For the directional IG calc elements, the operating quantity is in general the calculated neutral
current IG calc (except from »I2,V2« mode, where »I2« is the operating quantity).
The ground maximum torque angles (MTA) can be adjusted from 0° to 360°, except, if » IG calc Ipol (IG meas)« is
selected. In this case it is set to 0° (fixed).
The MTA will also be set internally to 0° in case that Ipol=IG meas is available within the Dual-Mode

Protective Elements
The following table gives the User a quick overview of all possible directional settings.
50N/51N Direction Decision [Field Para/ [Field [Field
by Angle Between: Direction] Para/Direction]: Para/Direction]:
IG calc dir ctrl = 3V0 Source =

The Following Angle
Has to Be Set:
Residual current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IG calc 3V0 measured
IG calc, 3V0 (measured)
Residual current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IG calc 3V0 calculated
IG calc, 3V0 (calculated)
Residual current and neutral/ground current 0° (fixed) IG calc Ipol (IG meas) not used
IG calc, IG meas
Residual current and neutral/ground current If Ipol (=IG meas) is Dual measured
(preferred), residual current and neutral available, MTA = 0°
(fixed); else
voltage (alternatively): MTA=Ground MTA
IG calc, IG meas (if available)
or else:
IG calc, 3V0 (measured)
Residual current and neutral/ground current If Ipol (=IG meas) is Dual calculated
(preferred), residual current and neutral available, MTA = 0°
(fixed); else
voltage (alternatively): MTA=Ground MTA
IG calc, IG meas (if available)
or else:
IG calc, 3V0 (calculated)
Negative sequence voltage and current 90° + Phase MTA I2,V2 not used
I2, V2

476
Prot - 50N/51N - direction detection
Protective Elements
Field Para
3V0 Source
measured
calculated Field Para
VG calc IG calc dir ctrl
3V0
IG calc 3V0
VX meas
IG meas
IG calc IPol (IG meas)
IG meas*
Dual
3V0
50N/51N - direction detection
V2
I2,V2
*=Priority if available.
MRA4
polarizing
Prot.IG calc dir fwd
forward 10a
(forward)
I0 = IG calc
g
tin
era Prot.IG calc rev dir
operating op polarizing 10a
(reverse)
I2
reverse Prot.IG calc dir n poss

(not possible)
10a
MTA
Prot.IG meas Neg calc dir fwd

Field Para 10a
(forward)
Ground MTA
Prot.IG Neg calc rev dir
(reverse)
10a
0° (fixed)
Prot.IG Neg calc dir n poss
(not possible)
10a
If IPol is available, MTA = 0°; else
MTA=Ground MTA
90° + Phase MTA
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
IG - Ground Fault [50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]
Available elements:
IG[1] ,IG[2] ,IG[3] ,IG[4]
If you are using inrush blockings the tripping delay of the earth current
protection functions must be at least 30ms or more in order to prevent faulty
trippings.
All earth current elements are identically structured.
This module offers Adaptive Parameter Sets.

Parameters can be modified within parameter sets dynamically by means of
Adaptive Parameter Sets.
Please refer to chapter Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IE-Protection Module Setting in Option

ANSI 50N/G – Earth overcurrent protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:
non directional Setting: non directional Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 51N/G – Earth short circuit protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:
non directional Setting: non directional Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 67N/G – Earth overcurrent/Earth short Device Planning menu Measuring Mode:
circuit protection, directional Setting: directional Fundamental/TrueRMS
Field parameter menu IG Source: measured/calculated
3V0 Source:
VG Source: measured/calculated
measured/calculated
3I0 Source:
measured/calculated
Measuring Mode
IG Source/VG Source
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
Direction detection (3V0 Source und 3I0 Source)

In the field parameter menu it can be determined, if the earth current directional detection should be based on
measured or calculated values of currents and voltages. This setting takes effect on all earth current elements.

Protective Elements
• Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible, when phase to neutral

voltage is applied to the voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e. Residual voltage

and the measured earth current have to be applied to the corresponding 4 th
measuring input.
All earth current protective elements can be planned user defined as non-directional or as directional stages. This
means, for instance, all 4 elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For each element the following
characteristics are available:
DEFT
NINV (IEC)
VINV (IEC)
LINV (IEC)
EINV (IEC)
MINV (ANSI)
VINV (ANSI)
EINV (ANSI)
RXIDG
Thermal Flat
IT
I2T
I4T
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-char = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor . The setting range depends

on the selected tripping curve.
IG = Fault current
IG> = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip .
The earth current can be measured either directly via a cable-type transformer or detected by a Holmgreen
connection. The earth current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible if the
phase currents are not ascertained by a V-connection.
The device can optionally be procured with a sensitive earth current measuring input.

Protective Elements
DEFT
100
IG
IG>
I/I>
0.0 1 20
40
10
t [s]
3 00 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1 10
IG
IG>

Protective Elements
IEC NINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
0.14 0.14
IG 2 IG 0.02
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1
t [s] t-char
x * IG> (multiples of pickup)

Protective Elements
IEC VINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
13.5 13.5
IG 2 IG
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1
t [s]
t-char

Protective Elements
IEC LINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
120 120
IG 2 IG
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
IEC EINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
80 80
IG 2 IG 2
( IG> )
-1 ( IG> )
-1
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI MINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
(
4.85
IG
I>
2
) -1
*t-char [s] t=
(
(
0.0515
IG
IG> )
0.02
-1
+ 0.1140
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI VINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
(
21.6
IG 2
IG> )-1
*t-char [s] t=
(
(
19.61
IG 2
IG> )
-1
+ 0.491
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
ANSI EINV
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
t=
(
29.1
IG 2
IG> )-1
*t-char [s] t=
((
28.2
IG
IG> )
2
-1
+ 0.1217
) *t-char [s]
t [s] t-char

Protective Elements
RXIDG
Trip
t = 5.8 - 1.35 * ln
( IG
t-char * IG> ) [s]
10
t [s]
0.1
t-char
1.0
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
0.8
0.9
0.01
1 10 100

100

Protective Elements
Therm Flat
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2
5*1 5
t= *t-char [s] t= 0 *t-char [s]
IG 0 IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)
t = 5 *t-char [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
t [s] 1.0 t-char

10
0.5
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Protective Elements
IT
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
5*12 5*1
1
IG 1
(IGnom) IG
(IGnom)
1× 104
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10 TM[s]= t-char

5
10
5 2
1
2
1.0
0.1 0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Protective Elements
I2T
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 2
5*1 5*1
t= 0
*t-char [s] t= 2 *t-char [s]
IG IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10 t-char
TM[s]=
1
10
0.1 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
x * In (multiples of the nominal current )

Protective Elements
I4T
Notice!
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
2 4
5*1 5*1
IG IG
4
(IGnom) (IGnom)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10 t-char
TM[s]=
1 10
5
2
0.1
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

492
Protective Elements
Prot - Earth fault - direction detection
Prot.IG MTA + Prot.ECT Angle Cor
Field Para φ
Field Para
.3I0 Source
measured sin (-90°) cos (180°)

VX VX
reverse forward
calculated &
MRA4
reverse Prot.IG dir fwd
IG
IW (forward)
φ
IC
IG IG
forward &
Field Para Prot.IG rev dir
(reverse)
Field Para SOLI-RESI

.3V0 Source VX
&
measured Prot.IG dir n poss
IG MTA (not possible)
calculated
VX
IG
φ
forward reverse
Prot.Alarm
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
493
Protective Elements
direction decision Earth fault
name = IG[1]...[n]
Device planning
name.Mode
non dir ectiona l
forward
reverse
Field Para
Field Para Field Para
MRA4
.3I0 Source .3V0 Source
measured measured
& >1
calculated calculated name. Fault in projected direction
Prot.IG dir fwd
IG 10
φ φ
VX Prot.IG rev dir
&
name.Dir n poss-
>Nondir Trip
inactive
active &
Prot.IG dir n poss
(not possible)
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
494
IG[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name = IG[1]...[n]
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings**

Please Refer To Diagram: direction decision Earth fault

10 name.IGH2 Blo
name.* Fault in projected direction
name.Alarm
14 27
name.IH2 Blo
inactive &
active &
Please Refer To Diagram: IH2
8 IH2..Blo IG
name.Char
name.VX Blo name.t-char
MRA4
name.Source inactive
name.t-reset
active >1
calculated
name.t
measured & φ
name.VX>
DEFT / INV
0
VX φ t
&
name.Trip
15
name.Measuring
name.IG Source
method
measured Fundamental
&
name.TripCmd
calculated True RMS name.IG> 15a 19
IG
Based on above parameters,
φ φ tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

non directional,
forward,
reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
true. /I-Prot
/IG[1]]

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

Protective Elements

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Ground Fault Protection

active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
active /<1..4>
/IG[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
active /<1..4>
/IG[1]]
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
active /<1..4>
/IG[1]]
IG Source Selection if measured or calculated ground current sensitive measure- calculated [Protection Para
should be used. ment,
/<1..4>
measured,
/I-Prot
calculated
/IG[1]]

Protective Elements

True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
VX Source Selection if VG is measured or calculated (neutral measured, measured [Protection Para
voltage or residual voltage)
calculated /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
active /<1..4>
disturbed measuring circuit (e.g. caused by a fuse /I-Prot
failure).
/IG[1]]
Only available if "VX Source" ist set to "calculated".
IG> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/stage will 0.02 - 20.00In 0.02In [Protection Para
be started.
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
IGs> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/stage will 0.002 - 2.000In 0.02In [Protection Para
be started.
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

IEC NINV, /<1..4>
IEC VINV, /I-Prot
IEC EINV, /IG[1]]
IEC LINV,
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T,
RXIDG

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
t-char Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. The setting 0.02 - 20.00 1 [Protection Para
range depends on the selected tripping curve.
/<1..4>
/IG[1]]
I2T Or Characteristic = I4TOr Characteristic = RXIDG
Reset Mode Reset Mode instantaneous, instantaneous [Protection Para

t-delay, /<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = INV Or Characteristic
= Therm Flat Or Characteristic = IT Or Characteristic = calculated /I-Prot
/IG[1]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV 0.00 - 60.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
characteristics only)
/<1..4>
/IG[1]]
Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay
IH2 Blo Blocking the trip command, if an inrush is detected. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
Dir n poss->Nondir Only relevant for current protection elements with inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Trip directional feature! The device will trip non directional if
active /<1..4>
this parameter is set to active and no direction could be
determined. Direction detection is impossible e.g. if the /I-Prot
required quantities for the direction detection cannot be
/IG[1]]
measured or validated. Direction detection is also
impossible if the frequency deviates significantly from
the nominal frequency. Caution: If this parameter is set
to inactive, the protective element will trip only if the
direction can be detected.
Only available if: Device planning: Earth current

protection - Stage.Mode = directional

Protective Elements

VX Blo VX Blo = active means that the IG-stage will only excite inactive, inactive [Protection Para
if a residual voltage higher than the pickup value is
active /<1..4>
measured at the same time. VX Blo = inactive means
that the excitation of the IG stage does not depend on /I-Prot
any residual voltage stage.
/IG[1]]
VX> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/stage will 0.01 - 1.50Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
be started.
/<1..4>
Only available if: VX Blo = active /I-Prot
/IG[1]]

Protective Elements
Ground Fault Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/IG[1]]

Protective Elements
Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm IG
Trip Signal: Trip
IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – non-directional [50N/G, 51N/G]
Please test the non-directional earth overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – directional [50N/G, 51N/G, 67N/G]

Please test the directional earth overcurrent analog to the directional phase overcurrent protection.

Protective Elements
I2> and %I2/I1> - Unbalanced Load [46]
Elements:
I2>[1] ,I2>[2]
The I2> Current Unbalance element works similar to the V 012 Voltage Unbalance element. The positive and
negative sequence currents are calculated from the 3-phase currents. The Threshold setting defines a minimum
operating current magnitude of I2 for the 46 function to operate, which insures that the relay has a solid basis for
initiating a current unbalance trip. The »%(I2/I1)« (option) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by
the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current »%(I2/I1)«.
This function requires negative sequence current magnitude above the threshold setting and the percentage current
unbalance above the »%(I2/I1)« setting before allowing a current unbalance trip. Therefore, both the threshold and
percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates a trip for current
unbalance.
All elements are identically structured.
Rating value I2> is the permitted continuous unbalanced load current. For both steps trip characteristics are
provided, namely a definite time characteristic (DEFT) and an inverse characteristic (INV).
The characteristic of the inverse curve is as follows:
2
K * In
t [s] <
I22 - I2>2
Legend:
In [A] = Nominal current
t [s] = Tripping delay
K [s] = Indicates the thermal load capability of the engine while running with 100% unbalanced
load current.
I2> [A] = The Threshold setting defines a minimum operating current magnitude
of I2 for the 46 function to operate , which ensures that the relay has a solid basis
for initiating a current unbalance trip . This is a supervisory function and not a trip
level.
I2 [A] = Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current
In the equation shown above the heating-up process is assumed by integration of the counter system current I2.
When I2> is undershoot, the built-up heat amount will be reduced in line with the adjusted cooling-down constant
“tau-cool”.
t
- τ-cool
Theta(t) = Theta0 * e

Protective Elements
Legend:
t = Tripping delay
τ-cool = Cooling time constant
Theta(t) = Momentary heat (thermal) energy
Theta 0 = Heat (thermal) energy before the cooling down has started
If the heat amount is not reduced when the permitted unbalanced load current is overshoot again, the remaining
heat amount will cause an earlier tripping.

504
46[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name = 46[1]...[n]
name.Alarm
14
name.Char
t-char
name.t
name.K
name.
τ-cool
MRA4
name.I2> & name.Trip
t 0
15
I2
K
IL1
IL2 PPS &

τ-cool
NPS & name.TripCmd
IL3 filter 15a
name.%(I2/I1)
%(I2/I1)

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I2>[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
active /<1..4>
/I2>[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]

Protective Elements

active /<1..4>
/I2>[1]]
I2> The Threshold setting defines a minimum operating 0.01 - 4.00In 0.01In [Protection Para
current magnitude of I2 for the 46 function to operate,
/<1..4>
which ensures that the relay has a solid basis for
initiating a current unbalance trip. This is a supervisory /I-Prot
function and not a trip level.
/I2>[1]]
Only available if: Device planning: I2>.Mode = 46
%(I2/I1) The %(I2/I1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to
active /<1..4>
positive sequence current (% Unbalance=I2/I1). Phase
sequence will be taken into account automatically. /I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
%(I2/I1) The %(I2/I1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. 2 - 40% 20% [Protection Para
It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to
/<1..4>
positive sequence current (% Unbalance=I2/I1). Phase
sequence will be taken into account automatically. /I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
Only available if: %(I2/I1) = use
INV /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
K This setting is the negative sequence capability 1.00 - 200.00s 10.0s [Protection Para
constant. This value is normally provided by the
/<1..4>
generator manufacturer.
/I-Prot
Only available if: Characteristic = INV
/I2>[1]]
τ-cool If the unbalanced load current falls below the pickup 0.0 - 60000.0s 0.0s [Protection Para
value, the cooling-off time is taken into account. If the
/<1..4>
unbalanced load exceeds the pickup value again, than
the saved heat within the electrical equipment will lead /I-Prot
to an accelerated trip.
/I2>[1]]
Only available if: Characteristic = INV

Protective Elements
Current Unbalance Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/I2>[1]]
Current Unbalance Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
Trip Signal: Trip

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Current Unbalance Module
Test of the unbalanced load protection function.
Necessary means:
Three-phase current source with adjustable current unbalance; and
Timer.
Procedure:
Check the phase sequence:
Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the field parameters.
Feed-in a three-phase nominal current.
Change to the »Measuring Values« menu.
Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current »I2«. The measuring value displayed for »I2« should be
zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).
If the displayed magnitude for I2 is the same as that for the symmetrical
nominal currents fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the
currents seen by the relay is reversed.
Now turn-off phase L1.
Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2« in the »Measuring Values« menu.
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should now be 33%.
Turn-on phase L1, but turn-off phase L2.
Once again check the measuring value of the asymmetrical current I2 in the »Measuring Values« menu.
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should be again 33%.
Turn-on phase L2, but turn-off phase L3.
Again check the measuring value of asymmetrical current »I2« in the »Measuring Values« menu.
The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2« should still be 33%.
Testing the trip delay:
Apply a symmetrical three-phase current system (nominal currents).
Switch off IL1 (the threshold value »Threshold« for »I2« must be below 33%).
Measure the tripping time.
The present current unbalance »I2« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase current displayed.

Protective Elements
Configure minimum »%I2/I1« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (I2).
For testing the threshold value, a current has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the adjusted
threshold value »Threshold« (I2).
Feeding only phase A results in »%I2/I1 = 100%«, so the first condition »%I2/I1 >= 2%« is always fulfilled.
Now increase the phase L1 current until the relay is activated.
Testing the dropout ratio of the threshold values
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The dropout ratio must not be
higher than 0.97 times the threshold value.
Testing %I2/I1
Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (I2) (0.01 x In) and set »%I2/I1« greater or equal to 10%.
Apply a symmetrical three-phase current system (nominal currents). The measuring value of »%I2/I1« should be
0%.
Now increase the phase L1 current. With this configuration, the threshold value » Threshold« (I2) should be
reached before the value »%I2/I1« reaches the set »%I2/I1« ratio threshold.
Continue increasing the phase 1 current until the relay is activated.
Testing the dropout ratio of %I2/I1
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase L1 current. The dropout of » %I2/I1« has to be
1% below the »%I2/I1«setting.
Successful test result:
The measured trip delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.

Protective Elements
ThR-Protection Module: Thermal Replica [49]

ThR
The maximal permissible thermal loading capacity, and consequently the tripping delay of a component, depends
on the amount of the flowing current at a specific time, the »previously existing load (current)« as well as on a
constant specified by the component.
The thermal overload protection is in compliance with IEC255-8 (VDE 435 T301). A complete thermal replica
function is implemented in the device as Homogeneous-Body Replica of the equipment to be protected and by
taking the previously existing load into account. The protection function is of one step design, provided with a
warning limit.
For this the device calculates the thermal load of the equipment by using the existing measured values and the
parameter settings. When knowing the thermal constants, the temperature of the equipment can be established
(simulated).
The general tripping times of the overload protection can be gathered from the following equation according to IEC
255-8:
I2 - Ip2
t = τ-warm ln( )
I2 - (K*Ib)2 .
Legend:
t = Tripping delay
τ-warm = Warming-up time constant

Ib = Base current: Maximum permissible thermal continuous current.
K = Overload Factor: The maximum thermal limit is defined as k *IB, the product of the overload factor and the base current .
I = measured current (x In)
Ip = Preload Current

511
Protective Elements
ThR
name = ThR

&
ThR.Alarm
14
IL1 IL1 τ-warm

τ-cool
RMS
MRA4
k*Ib
ThR.Trip
Alarm Theta
IL2 IL2
15
MAX
RMS {ILxRMS}
IL3 IL3
RMS &
100%
& ThR.TripCmd
15a

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Direct Commands of the Thermal Overload Module

Reset Reset the Thermal Replica inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
/Global Prot Para
/ThR]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Thermal Overload Module

active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
active /<1..4>
/ThR]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
active /<1..4>
/ThR]
Ib Base current: Maximum permissible thermal continuous 0.01 - 4.00In 1.00In [Protection Para
current.
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
K Overload Factor: The maximum thermal limit is defined 0.80 - 1.20 1.00 [Protection Para
as k*IB, the product of the overload factor and the base
/<1..4>
current.
/I-Prot
/ThR]
Alarm Theta Pickup value 50 - 100% 80% [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
τ-warm Warming-up time constant 1 - 60000s 10s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]

Protective Elements

τ-cool Cooling time constant 1 - 60000s 10s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/I-Prot
/ThR]
Thermal Overload Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/ThR]
Signals of the Thermal Overload Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Thermal Overload
Trip Signal: Trip
Res Thermal Cap Signal: Resetting Thermal Replica

Protective Elements
Thermal Overload Module Values

Thermal Cap Used Measured value: Thermal Capacity Used [Operation
/Measured Values
/ThR]
Time To Trip Measured value (calculated/measured): Remaining time until the [Operation
thermal overload module will trip
/Measured Values
/ThR]
Thermal Overload Module Statistics

Thermal Cap max Thermal Capacity maximum value [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/ThR]

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Thermal Replica
Object to be tested
Protective function ThR
Necessary means
Three-phase current source
Timer
Procedure
Calculate the tripping time for the current to be constantly impressed by using the formula for the thermal image.
The parameter of the temperature rise of the component »τw« has to be known
to guarantee an optimal protection.
I2 - Ip2
t = τ-warm ln( )
I2 - (K*Ib)2 .
Legend:
t = Tripping delay
τ-warm = Warming-up time constant
Ib = Base current: Maximum permissible thermal continuous current.
K = Overload Factor: The maximum thermal limit is defined as k *IB, the product of the overload factor and the base current .
I = measured current (x In)
Ip = Preload Current

Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on.
Testing the trip delay
The thermal capacity should be zero before the test is started. See »Measuring
Values«.
For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
Apply the current you have based your mathematical calculation on. The timer is started as soon as the current is
applied and it is stopped when the relay trips.

The calculated tripping time and the fallback ratio comply with the measured values. For permissible
deviations/tolerances, please see Technical Data.

Protective Elements
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault

SOTF
In case a faulty line is energized (e.g.: when an earthing switch is in the ON-Position), an instantaneous trip is
required. The SOTF module is provided to generate a permissive signal for other protection functions such as
overcurrents to accelerate their trips (via adaptive parameters). The SOTF condition is recognized according to the
User’s operation mode that can be based on:
The breaker state (CB Pos);

No current flowing (I<);
Breaker state and no current flowing( CB Pos and I<);
Breaker switched on manually (CB manually On); and/or
An external trigger (Ex SOTF).
This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules.
This module issues a signal only (the module is not armed and does not
issue a trip command).
In order to influence the trip settings of the overcurrent protection in case

of switching onto a fault, the User has to assign the signal “SOTF.ENABLED “
onto an Adaptive Parameter Set. Please refer to Parameter / Adaptive
Parameter Sets sections. Within the Adaptive Parameter Set, the User has
to modify the trip characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to
the User's needs.
This Notice applies to protective devices that offer control functionality only!
This protective element requires, that a switchgear (circuit breaker is assigned
to it. It is allowed only to assign switchgears (circuit breaker) to this protective
element, whose measuring transformers provide measuring data to the
protective device.

518
SOTF
Protective Elements
name = SO TF

2 (Stage is not deactivat ed and no active blocking signals)
SOTF.I<
SOTF.CB[x].Pos OFF**
S OTF.CB[x].Manual ON**
S OTF.Mode
CB Po s
SO TF.
t-enable
MRA4
I< >1 &
t SOT F.enabled
CB Pos And I< >1
0 T
CB manual ON
E xt SOTF
SOTF.I< &
IL1 &
IL2
IL3
SOTF.Ext S OTF
AR.running* SOTF .AR Blo *
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure
**This signal is the output of the switchgear that is assigned to this protective element. This applies to protective devices that offer control functionality.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Mode Mode CB Pos, CB Pos [Protection Para
I<, /Global Prot Para
CB Pos And I<, /SOTF]
CB manual ON,
Ext SOTF
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
true. /SOTF]
Ext SOTF External Switch Onto Fault 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
Only available if: Mode = Ext SOTF
/SOTF]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

active /<1..4>
/SOTF]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /SOTF]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /SOTF]
I< The CB is in the OFF Position, if the measured current 0.01 - 1.00In 0.01In [Protection Para
is less than this parameter.
/<1..4>
/SOTF]
t-enable While this timer is running, and while the module is not 0.10 - 10.00s 2s [Protection Para
blocked, the Switch Onto Fault Module is effective
/<1..4>
(SOTF is armed).
/SOTF]

Protective Elements
Switch Onto Fault Module Input States

ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Ext SOTF-I Module input state: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States)
Signal Description
enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection
Settings.
AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
I< Signal: No Load Current.

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault
Object to be tested
Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the parameterized operating mode:
The breaker state (CB Pos);

No current flowing (I<);
Breaker state and no current flowing( CB Pos and I<);
Breaker switched on manually (CB manually On); and/or
An external trigger (Ex SOTF).
Necessary means:
Three-phase current source (If the Enable-Mode depends on current);

Ampere meters (May be needed if the Enable-Mode depends on current); and
Timer.
Test Example for Mode CB manual ON
Mode I<: In order to test the effectiveness: Initially do not feed any current.
Start the timer and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinctly
greater than the I<-threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Mode I< and Bkr state: Simultaneous switch on the breaker manually and
feed with an abrupt change current that is distinctly greater than the
I<-threshold.
Mode Bkr state: The breaker has to be in the OFF Position. The signal
„SOTF.ENABLED“=0 is untrue. If the breaker is switched on, the signal
„SOTF.ENABLED “=1 becomes true as long as the timer t-enabled is running.
The Circuit Breaker has to be in the OFF Position. There must be no load current.
The Status Display of the device shows the signal „SOTF.ENABLED“=1.
Testing
Switch the Circuit Breaker manually ON and start the timer at the same time.
After the hold time t-enable is expired the state of the signal has to change to „SOTF.ENABLED“=0.
Write down the measured time.


Protective Elements
CLPU - Cold Load Pickup
Available Elements:
CLPU
When the electric load is freshly started or restarted after a prolonged outage, the load current tends to have a
temporary surge that could be several times the normal load current in magnitude due to motor starting. This
phenomena is called cold load inrush. If the overcurrent pickup threshold is set according to the maximum possible
load inrush, the overcurrent protection may be insensitive to some faults, thus making whole protection systems
coordination difficult or even impossible. On the other hand, the overcurrent protection could trip on load inrush if it
is set based on the fault current studies. The CLPU module is provided to generate a temporary
blocking/desensitizing signal to prevent overcurrent protections from unwanted tripping. The cold load pickup
function detects a warm-to-cold load transition according to the four selectable cold load detection modes:
• CB POS (Breaker state);

• I< (Undercurrent);
• CB POS AND I< (Breaker state and undercurrent); and
• CB POS OR I< (Breaker state OR undercurrent).
After a warm-to-cold load transition has been detected, a specified load-off timer will be started. This User-settable
load-off timer is used in some cases to make sure that the load is really “cold” enough. After the load-off timer times
out, the CLPU function issues an “enable” signal »CLPU.ENABLED« that can be used to block some sensitive
protection elements like instantaneous overcurrent elements, current unbalance, or power protection elements at
User´s choice. Using this enable signal, some time inverse overcurrent elements may also be desensitized at the
User's choice by means of activating adaptive settings of the corresponding overcurrent elements.
When a cold load condition is finished (a cold-to-warm load condition is detected) due to, for example, breaker
closing or load current injection, a load inrush detector will be initiated that supervises the coming and going of the
load inrush current process. A load inrush is detected if the coming load current exceeds a User-specified inrush
current threshold. This load inrush is considered as finished if the load current is decreased to 90% of the inrush
current threshold. After the inrush current is diminished, a settle timer starts. The cold load pickup enable signal
can only be reset after the settle timer times out. Another max-Block timer, which is started parallel with the load
inrush detector after a cold load condition is finished, may also terminate the CLPU enable signal if a load inrush
condition is prolonged abnormally.
The cold load pickup function can be blocked manually by external or internal signal at the User´s choice. For the
devices with Auto-Reclosing function, the CLPU function will be blocked automatically if auto-reclosure is initiated
(AR is running).
This module issues a signal only (it is not armed).
In order to influence the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection, the

User has to assign the signal “CLPU.ENABLED “ to an adaptive parameter set.
Please refer to the Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets section. Within the
adaptive parameter set, the User has to modify the tripping characteristic of
the overcurrent protection according to the needs.

Protective Elements
Please be aware of the meaning of the two delay timers.
t load Off (Pickup Delay): After this time expires, the load is no longer
diversified.
t Max Block (Release Delay): After the starting condition is fulfilled (e.g.:
breaker switched on manually), the “CLPU.enabled” signal will be issued for
this time. That means for the duration of this time, the tripping thresholds of the
overcurrent protection can be desensitized by means of adaptive parameters
(please refer to the Parameters section). This timer will be stopped if the
current falls below 0.9 times of the threshold of the load inrush detector and
remains below 0.9 times of the threshold for the duration of the settle time.
to it. It is allowed only to assign switchgears (circuit breaker) to this protective
element, whose measuring transformers provide measuring data to the
protective device.

525
CLPU
Protective Elements
name = CLPU

CB[x].Pos OFF**
CLPU.I<
CLPU.detected
CLPU.Mode
CLP U.I<
IL1 & CB Pos
>1 Delay Timer
IL2
I< t-Load Off 0 &
IL3 S Q CLPU.enabled
& CB Pos And I<
MRA4
CB Pos Or I< R
>1 Delay Timer

Load Inrush Detector
0 t-Max Block
1.0 * Threshold
>1
& Delay Timer
1.0 * Threshold Settle Time 0
ILx max
0.9 * Threshold
Delay Timer
0 Settle Time+e
0.9 * Threshold
AR.running*
CLPU.Settle Time
CLPU.Load Inrush
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure
**This signal is the output of the switchgear that is assigned to this protective
element. This applies to protective devices that offer control functionality.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Example Mode: Breaker Position
t-Load Off
t-Max Block
name = CLPU
CLPU.detected
Cold Load
Aux ON
CLPU
1
0
1
0
1
0

Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module

use
Global Protection Parameter of the Cold Load Pickup Module

Mode Mode CB Pos, CB Pos [Protection Para
I<, /Global Prot Para
CB Pos Or I<, /CLPU]
CB Pos And I<
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
true. /CLPU]

Protective Elements
Set Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module

active /<1..4>
/CLPU]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /CLPU]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /CLPU]
t-Load Off Select the outage time required for a load to be 0.00 - 7200.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
considered cold. If the Pickup Timer (Delay) has run
/<1..4>
out, a Cold Load Signal will be issued.
/CLPU]
t-Max Block Select the amount of time for the cold load inrush. If the 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
Release Time (Delay) has run out, a Warm Load Signal
/<1..4>
will be issued.
/CLPU]
I< The CB is in the OFF Position, if the measured current 0.01 - 1.00In 0.01In [Protection Para
is less than this parameter.
/<1..4>
/CLPU]
Threshold Set the load current inrush threshold. 0.10 - 4.00In 1.2In [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/CLPU]
Settle Time Select the time for the cold load inrush 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/CLPU]

Protective Elements
States of the Inputs of the Cold Load Pickup Module

/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Signals of the Cold Load Pickup Module (States of the Outputs)
Signal Description
enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
detected Signal: Cold Load detected
AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
I< Signal: No Load Current.
Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush
Settle Time Signal: Settle Time

Protective Elements
Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Testing the Cold Load Pickup module according to the configured operating mode:
•I< (No current);

•Bkr state (Breaker position);
•I< (No Current) and Bkr state (Breaker position); and
•I< (No Current) or Bkr state (Breaker position).
Necessary means:
•Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current);

•Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and
•Timer.
Test Example for Mode Bkr State (Breaker Position)
Mode I<: In order to test the tripping delay, start the timer and feed with an
abrupt change current that is distinctly less than the I<-threshold. Measure
the tripping delay. In order to measure the drop-out ratio, feed a current
with an abrupt change that is distinctly above the I<-threshold.
Mode I< and Bkr state: Combine the abrupt change (switching the current
ON and OFF) with the manual switching ON and OFF of the breaker.
Mode I< or Bkr state: Initially carry out the test with an abrupt changing
current that is switched ON and OFF (above and below the I<-threshold).
Measure the tripping times. Finally, carry out the test by manually
switching the breaker ON and OFF.
•The breaker has to be in the OFF position. There must not be any load current.
•The Status Display of the device shows the signal "CLPU.ENABLED“=1.
•The Status Display of the device shows the signal ”CLPU.I<“=1.
•Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio:
•Switch the breaker manually ON and simultaneously start the timer.
•After the the »t Max Block (Release Delay)« timer has expired, the signal "CPLU.Enabled “=0 has to become
untrue.
•Write down the measured time.
•Manually switch the breaker OFF and simultaneously start the timer.
•After the »t load Off« timer has expired, the signal ”CPLU.ENABLED “=1 has to become true.
•Write down the measured time.
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical
Data section.

Protective Elements
AR - Automatic Reclosure [79]

AR
The autoreclosure is used to minimize outages on overhead lines. The majority 1 (>60% in medium voltage and
>85% in high voltage) of faults (arc flash over) on overhead lines are temporary and can be cleared by means of
the autoreclosure element.
Deproject the autoreclosure element within the device planning if the protective
device is used in order to protect cables, generators or transformers.
Features
The autoreclose function is designed with diverse very comprehensive yet flexible features which meet all
requirements of different utility concepts and technical applications.
The available features of the autoreclose function can be summarized as follows:
Flexible assignment of initiate functions for individual shots.

Maximum six autoreclose shots.
Dynamic adjustment of protection setting values (e.g. pickup, time delay tripping curve etc.) during autoreclose
process via adaptive set concept.
Reclose shots per hour limit.
Autorecloser wear monitor with maintenance alarm.
Programmable reclosing blocking feature.
Auto zone coordination with downstream reclosers.
Automatic manual-breaker-close blocking feature.
Manual/Auto reset lockout (panel, contact input, communications, etc)
Autoreclose with Synchron-Check (only in conjunction with internal Sync-Check and Control modules).
External AR shot counter increment is possible.
Automatic autoreclose result evaluation (successful/unsuccessful).
Separate counters to register total, successful/unsuccessful reclosing numbers.
1: VDE-Verlag: Schutztechnik in elektrischen Netzen 1, Page179, ISBN 3-8007-1753-0

Protective Elements
The following table gives a folder (structure) overview:
AR Menu Folder Purpose
AR Within this menu, external blockings, external lockings, external shot

increments and external resets can be assigned. Those external
events can only become effective, if they have been activated
Path:
(allowed) within the General Settings. Please see table row below.
[Protection Para\Global Prot Para\AR]
General Settings Within this menu several general settings can be activated: The
function itself, external blocking, zone coordination, external locking
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\General and external shot increment can be set to active. The corresponding
Settings] trigger events (e.g. digital inputs) have to be assigned within the
corresponding global protection parameters. Please see table row
above.
Furthermore, this menu contains some timers, the number of permitted

reclosure attempts, the alarm mode (trip/alarm) and the reset mode
can be set
Shot Manager In Shot-manager setting menu the control logics between individual
shots and protective functions will be specified. For each shot
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\Shot (inclusive the pre shot) the trigger (start) events can be assigned.
Manager]
For each shot, maximum 4 initiate functions (protective functions which
are dedicated to start this shot) can be selected from an available
protective function list.
When the autoreclosure process is running in the shot X stage, the

corresponding protection and control settings will be used to control the
operation during this stage.
In addition to that the dead times have to be set. For each shot, its
dead time will be set individually, except for the shot 0, for which no
dead timer setting is necessary. The shot 0 is just a virtual state to
define the time before the first shot is to issue. Each dead timer
specifies the time duration which has to be expired before the reclosure
command for this shot can be issued.
Wear Monitor This setting group contains all parameters which monitor the wear and
maintenance conditions related to the autoreclosure operations. The
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\Wear corresponding information and control can be useful for an optimal
Monitor] autoreclosure application.
Blo Fc This group of settings specifies the protection functions by which the
autoreclosure function must be blocked even if the autoreclosure
Path: [Protection Para\Global Prot function is already initiated.
Para\AR\Blo Fc]
Note the difference between the protection function which can be
blocked by auto-recloser and the function(s) here to block the auto-
recloser.

Protective Elements
AR States
The following diagram shows the state transitions between the various states of the autoreclosure function. This
diagram visualizes the run time logic and timing sequence according to the state transition direction and the events
which trigger the transitions.
State transition diagram
Initiate AR
1
Standby
& t-Blo after CB man ON=timer elapsed
t-Blo after CB man ON=timer elapsed

CB=Pos OFF
CB=Pos ON
CB=Pos OFF
t-Reset Lockout=timer elapsed

Ready
Lock=True
CB=Pos ON
Blo=False
InitiateFc=True
successful
4
AR Cycle
2 6
Start
Blo=True
t-Blo after CB man ON Lock=True Lockout

t-dead
t-Run2Ready
Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
Reset Lockout=True
Blo=True
5 7
Blocked t-Reset Lockout

Protective Elements
In general, the autoreclosure function is only active (will be initiated) when all of the following conditions are met:
Autoreclosure function is enabled (In AR General Setting: Function =active)
The breaker (CB) is configured within the “AR/General Settings“.
Autoreclosure is not blocked by the blocking inputs (ExBlo1/2).
1 Standby
The autoreclosure is in this state when the following conditions are met:
The breaker is in the open position.

The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions.
No external or internal AR blocking signals are present.
No autoreclose shot operation is possible if the autoreclose function is within Standby

state.
2 t-manual close block
Suppose that the breaker is open and the AR state is in Standby state. Then the breaker is closed manually. The
event “CB Pos On” starts a Manual-Close-Blocking timer and results in a state transition from »STANDBY« to a transit
state - »T-BLO AFTER CB MAN ON«. The autoreclosure function changes into the »READY« state only as the Manual-
Close-Blocking timer elapses and the breaker is closed. By means of the manual close blocking timer a faulty
starting of the autoreclose function in case of a Switch-OnTo-Fault condition is prevented.

Protective Elements
3 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are true:
The breaker is in closed position.
The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation.
An autoreclose start is only possible if the autoreclose function is in Ready state.
4 Run (Cylce)
The »RUN« state can only be reached if the following conditions are fulfilled:
The autoreclose was in »READY« state before.
The breaker was in closed position before.
No external or internal AR Blocking signals exist.
At least one of the assigned initiate functions is true (triggers the Autoreclosure).
A complete autoreclose process with multi-shot reclosing will be accomplished inside

the Run state.
If the autoreclose gets into the »RUN« state, the autoreclose function transfers its control to a »RUN« state control
automat with several subordinate states which will be described in detail in the next chapter (AR Cycle).
5 Blocked
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »BLOCKED« state when one of the assigned blocking function is true.
The autoreclose function exits the »BLOCKED« state if the assigned blocking signal is no longer present.

Protective Elements
6 Lockout
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »LOCKOUT« state when one of the following conditions is true:
An unsuccessful autoreclose is detected after all programmed autoreclose shots. The fault is of permanent
nature.
Reclose failure (incomplete sequence)
Autoreclose rate per hour exceeds the limit
Fault timer elapses (tripping time too long)
Breaker failure during AR starting
Manual breaker close operation during autoreclose process
At least one protective function is still tripping before reclose command is issued
The autoreclose function exits the »LOCKOUT« state if the programmed lockout reset signal asserts and programmed
Lockout Reset timer elapses.
A Service Alarm (Service Alarm 1 or Service Alarm 2) will not lead to a lockout of the
AR function.

Protective Elements
AR Cycle (Shot)
4 Run (Cylce)
The following drawing shows in detail an AR run cycle.
11
Ready
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Alarm

-----------------------------------
tF start
12
AR.Lock=True
Starting
AR.Blo=True
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip

-----------------------------------
tCB-Open start
13
AR.Lock=True
Waiting CB Open
AR.Blo=True
CB=Pos OFF
------------------
t-DP: timer started
14
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Alarm
------------------------------------
AR.Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
&&(ShotCounter<set)
t-dead
tF start
tD=OUT&
CB=OFF&
CB_READY=TRUE&
Trip
=False
---------------------------------------------
Shot=Shot+1 &
tCI start & CB_CLOSE=True
15
AR.Lock=True
Reclosing
AR.Blo=True
CB=Pos ON
-----------------------------------------
tR2R start&
CB_CLOSE=False
16
AR.Lock=True
t-Run2Ready
AR.Blo=True
tR2R=OUT&&
CB=Pos ON
--------------------------
AR.successful
11
Ready

Protective Elements
11 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are true:
The breaker is in closed position.
The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation.
12 Run
This is the first subordinate state after the autoreclosure process goes from »READY« into »RUN« state triggered from
the first AR initiate event. During the »RUNNING« state, the auto reclosure element supervises the trip signal of the
initiate function while a preset fault timer is timing. The autoreclosure element transfers to the »WAITING BKR OPEN«
state by receiving the trip signal if the fault timer does NOT time out and there are no other blocking and lockout
conditions.
13 Waiting Bkr Open
While in the »WAITING BKR OPEN« state, the autoreclosure supervises if the breaker is really tripped (open) after
receiving the trip flag of the initiate protection function within a preset breaker supervision time (200ms). If this is the
case, the autoreclosure starts the programmed dead timer and goes to the dead timing state » t-dead«.

Protective Elements
14 t-dead
While in the dead timing state »t-dead«, the preset dead timer for current AR shot is timing and cannot be
interrupted unless there are any blocking or lockout conditions coming.
After dead timer elapses, the autoreclosure issues the breaker reclosing command and goes into the next state:
»RECLOSING«, only if the following conditions are met:
The breaker is in open position,

The breaker is ready for next reclosing operation (if the CB Ready logic input is used)
No pickup from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s)
No trip from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s)
No general tipping command
Before issuing the breaker reclosing command, the current shot counter will be incremented. This is very important
for the shot-controlled initiate and blocking functions.
Before entering into the »RECLOSING« state, the preset breaker reclosing supervision timer (»t-Brk-ON-cmd«) will be
started, too.
15 Reclosing
If there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and the breaker is closed while the breaker reclosing supervision
timer is timing, the autoreclosure starts the »t-Run2Ready« timer and goes into the state:
»T-RUN2READY«.
16 t-Run2Ready
Successful Autoreclosure:
While in »T-RUN2READY« state, if there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and no more faults detected within
the »t-Run2Ready« timer, the autoreclosure logic will leave the »RUN« state and goes back to the »READY« state.
The flag “successful” is set.
Unsuccessful Autoreclose:
If a fault is detected again (the shot-controlled initiate function is triggering) while »t-Run2Ready« timer is still timing,
the autoreclosure control transfers to the »RUNNING« state again. For a permanent fault, the process described
before will be repeated until all programmed shots were operated and the autoreclose process changes into the
»LOCKOUT« state. The flag “failed” is set.

Protective Elements
Timing Diagrams
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for unsuccessful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot
Fault
Fault Inception 1
Clearance 0
t
Protection
50P[1]. AdaptSet1 50P[1].DefaultSet 51P[1]
Alarm 1
Reset 0
t
Protection
50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip 51P[1].Trip
Trip 1
Reset 0
t
CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
Reclosing
1
t-DP1 t-DP2 t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2
AR.running
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready running Lockout

Protective Elements
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for successful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot
Fault
Fault Inception 1
Clearance 0
t
Protection
50P[1]. AdaptSet1 50P[1].DefaultSet
Alarm 1
Reset 0
t
Protection
50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip
Trip 1
Reset 0
t
CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
Reclosing
1
t-DP1 t-DP2 t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2
AR.running
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready running Ready

Protective Elements
Auto Reclosing States during manual breaker closing

CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
Circuit Breaker Manual Close
1
t-Blo after CB man ON
0
t
AR - Module states
Standby t-Blo after CB man ON Ready
Protection Trip while Manual Close Blocking time is Timing
What happens if while the timer manual close block time is timing down the protective device gets a trip signal?
While the timer manual close block time is timing, any trip during this time period trips the breaker. The manual
close block timer doesn´t care about that and timing further until it times out.
After it times out, the AR-module looks at the breaker status again, and sees that the breaker is open. The AR goes
to the »STANDBY« state, no autoreclose is possible (Note: The AR doesn´t go to »LOCKOUT« state!)
CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
0
t
Protection Trip
0
t
AR - Module states
Standby t-Blo after CB man ON Standby

Protective Elements
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming before manual breaker closed
CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
1
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
Lockout Reset Time
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout t-Reset Lockout Standby t-Blo after CB man ON Ready
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming after manual breaker closed
CB Pos
Pos ON 1
Pos OFF 0
t
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
t-Lock2Ready t-Blo after CB man ON
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout t-Reset Lockout t-Blo after CB man ON Ready

Protective Elements
Zone Coordination
General Description
What does Zone Coordination mean?

Zone Coordination means, that the upstream protection device is doing a virtual autoreclosure while the
downstream protective device is doing a “real” autoreclosure. By means of the zone coordination selectivity can be
kept, even if a downstream protective device changes its tripping characteristic after a reclosure cycle. The virtual
autoreclosure of the upstream device follows the downstream autoreclosure.
What application can be realized by means of Zone Coordination?

A radial distribution system is protected by an upstream protective device (with a circuit breaker) and a downstream
protective device with a reclosure and fuse. By means of the zone coordination a “fuse saving scheme” might be
realised. In order to “save fuses” the downstream protective device might trip for the first reclosure attempt at low
tripping values (undergrade the fuse, trying to avoid a damaging of the fuse). If the reclosure attempt fails the
tripping values might be risen (overgrade the fuse) for the second reclosure attempt (using higher tripping
values/characteristics).
What is essential?
The triggering thresholds of the upstream and the downstream devices have to be the same but the tripping times
have to be selectively.
How is Zone Coordination activated?

The zone coordination function is part of the autoreclosure element and it can be enabled by setting the parameter
»Zone coordination« as »active« within the menu [Protection Para/AR/General Settings] for an upstream feeder
protection device.
How does the Zone Coordination work (within the upstream protection device)?
When the zone coordination function is enabled, it works similar to a normal autoreclose function with the same
setting parameters: maximum reclosure attempts, dead timer for each shot, initiate functions for each shot and
other timers for autoreclose process, but with the following zone coordination features to coordinate with the
downstream reclosers:
The corresponding dead timer for each shot will be started even the breaker of the upstream feeder relay is NOT
tripped from the assigned initiate protective functions.
The dead timer begins timing once the autoreclose senses a drawback of the assigned overcurrent protection
pickup signal. This exhibits that the fault current was tripped by the downstream recloser opening.
The shot counter of an enabled zone coordination will be incremented after the dead timer elapses, even there is
no breaker reclosing command issued and meanwhile the »T-RUN2READY« timer is started.
If a permanent fault exists after the downstream recloser is reclosed, the fault current makes the upstream
overcurrent protection picks up again, but with the pickup thresholds or operating curves controlled by the
incremented shot number. In this way, the upstream feeder will “follow” the protective settings of downstream
recloser shot by shot.
For a transient fault the autoreclose with zone coordination will not be initiated again because of absence of the
fault current and will be reset normally after the expiration of the reset timer » t-Run2Ready«.

Protective Elements
Shot 2
HighPROTEC (triggered by: I [2])
Shot 1
(triggered by: I [1])
I
Shot 2
Recloser
Shot 1
I
Fuse Characteristic

Protective Elements
Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module

Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR, inactive, inactive [Operation
unsuc successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
active /Reset]
Res Service Cr Reset the Service Counters inactive, inactive [Operation

active /Reset]
Reset Lock via HMI Reset the AR Lockout via the panel. inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Res Max Shots / h Resetting the Counter for the maximum allowed shots inactive, inactive [Operation
Cr per hour.
active /Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

use

Protective Elements
Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

CB Circuit Breaker Module -.-, SG[1]. [Protection Para
SG[1]. /Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
Ex Shot Inc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by this 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
external Signal. This can be used for Zone
/Global Prot Para
Coordination (of upstream Auto Reclosure devices).
/AR
/General settings]
Ex Lock The auto reclosure will locked out by this external 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
Signal (set into the lockout state).
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
DI Reset Ex Lock The Lockout State of the AR can be reset by a digital 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
input.
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
Scada Reset Ex The Lockout State of the AR can be reset by Scada. Communication -.- [Protection Para
Lock Commands
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

active /<1..4>
/AR
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /AR
/General settings]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
Zone coordination Zone coordination: Sequence coordination is to keep inactive, inactive [Protection Para
upstream reclosers in step with the downstream ones
active /<1..4>
for fast and delay curve operation, thus avoiding
overtripping. /AR
/General settings]
Ex Shot Inc Fc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by this inactive, inactive [Protection Para
external Signal. This can be used for Zone
active /<1..4>
Coordination (of upstream Auto Reclosure devices).
Note: This parameter enables the functionality only. /AR
The assignment has to be set within the global
/General settings]
parameters.
Ex Lock Fc The auto reclosure will locked out by this external inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Signal. Note: This parameter enables the functionality
active /<1..4>
only. The assignment has to be set within the global
parameters. /AR
/General settings]
Reset Mode Reset Mode auto, auto [Protection Para

HMI, /<1..4>
DI, /AR
Scada, /General settings]
HMI And Scada,
HMI And DI,
Scada And DI,
HMI And DI
Shots Maximum number of permitted reclosure attempts. 1-6 1 [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/AR
/General settings]

Protective Elements

Initiate Mode Initiate Mode Alarm, Alarm [Protection Para
TripCmd /<1..4>
/AR
/General settings]
t-start Start timer - While the start timer runs down, an AR 0.01 - 9999.00s 1s [Protection Para
attempt can be started. Only if the trip command is
/<1..4>
given within the start time/duration an AR attempt could
be started. The location and the resistance of the fault /AR
have a big influence on the tripping time. The start time
/General settings]
has an impact on whether an AR attempt should be
started when the fault is far away or high resistance.
Only available if: Initiate Mode = TripCmd

t-DP1 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt for 0.01 - 9999.00s 1s [Protection Para
phase faults.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Shots = 1-6 /AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
phase faults.
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]
phase faults.
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]
phase faults.
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
phase faults.
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]

Protective Elements

phase faults.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Shots = 6 /AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]
t-DE1 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt for earth 0.01 - 9999.00s 1s [Protection Para
faults
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
faults
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]
faults
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]
faults
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
faults
/<1..4>
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]
faults
/<1..4>
Only available if: Shots = 6 /AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]
t-Blo after CB man This timer will be started if the circuit breaker was 0.01 - 9999.00s 10.0s [Protection Para
ON switched on manually. While this timer is running, AR
/<1..4>
cannot be started.
/AR
/General settings]

Protective Elements

t-Lock2Ready This timer is started by the lockout reset signal, and 0.01 - 9999.00s 10.0s [Protection Para
before the timer expire the AR cannot go to any other
/<1..4>
state.
/AR
/General settings]
t-Run2Ready Examination Time: If the Circuit Breaker remains after 0.01 - 9999.00s 10.0s [Protection Para
an reclosure attempt for the duration of this timer in the
/<1..4>
Closed position, the AR has been successful and the
AR module returns into the ready state. /AR
/General settings]
t-Blo2Ready The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for 0.01 - 9999.00s 10.0s [Protection Para
this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore.
/<1..4>
/AR
/General settings]
t-AR Supervision AR Overall supervision time (> sum of all the timers 1.00 - 9999.00s 100.0s [Protection Para
used by AR)
/<1..4>
/AR
/General settings]
Service Alarm 1 As soon as the AR-Counter exceeds this number of 1 - 65535 1000 [Protection Para
reclosure attempts an alarm will be given out
/<1..4>
(overhauling of the CB)
/AR
/Wear Monitor]
Service Alarm 2 Too many auto reclosure attempts. If the 1 - 65535 65535 [Protection Para
parameterized number of AR cycles is reached, an
/<1..4>
alarm will be given out.
/AR
/Wear Monitor]
Max AR/h Maximum Number of permitted Auto Reclosure Cycles 1 - 20 10 [Protection Para
per hour.
/<1..4>
/AR
/Wear Monitor]
Initiate AR: Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct - [Protection Para
InitiateFc1
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Pre Shot Ctrl]
InitiateFc2
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Pre Shot Ctrl]

Protective Elements

InitiateFc3
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Pre Shot Ctrl]
InitiateFc4
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Pre Shot Ctrl]
Shot 1: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct - [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Shots = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl1]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl2]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl3]

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl4]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl5]
/<1..4>
Only available if: Shots = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]
/<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot Ctrl6]

Protective Elements
Module Automatic Reclosure Input States

/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter will be incremented by [Protection Para
this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of
/Global Prot Para
upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter
enables the functionality only. The assignment has to be set /AR
within the global parameters.
/General settings]
Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout. [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the [Protection Para
resetting via digital inputs has been selected).
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]
Scada Reset Ex Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by [Protection Para
Lock-I Communication.
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/General settings]

Protective Elements
Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Standby Signal: Standby
t-Blo after CB man ON Signal: AR blocked after circuit breaker was switched on manually. This timer will be started if
the circuit breaker was switched on manually. While this timer is running, AR cannot be
started.
Ready Signal: Ready to shoot
running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
CB ON Cmd Signal: CB switch ON Command
t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Circuit Breaker remains after a reclosure attempt for the
duration of this timer in the Closed position, the AR has been successful and the AR module
returns into the ready state.
Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the AR lockout state will be
delayed for this time, after the reset signal (e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected .
Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be
delayed for this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore.
successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
failed Signal: Auto Reclosing failure
t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision
Pre Shot Pre Shot Control
Shot 1 Shot Control
Shot 2 Shot Control
Shot 3 Shot Control
Shot 4 Shot Control
Shot 5 Shot Control
Shot 6 Shot Control
Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2 - too many switching operations
Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been exceeded.
Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR, successful and unsuccessful no of
AR.
Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and Blocking
Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has been reset.
ARRecCState Signal: AutoReclosing states defined by IEC61850:1=Ready/2=In Progress/3=Successful

Protective Elements
Automatic Reclosure Module Values

AR Shot No. Counter - Auto Reclosure Attempts 0 0-6 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Total number Cr Total number of all executed Automatic 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
Reclosures Attempts
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr successfl Total number of successfully executed Automatic 0 0 - 65536 [Operation

Reclosures
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr failed Total number of unsuccessfully executed 0 0 - 65536 [Operation

automatic reclosure attempts
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr Service Alarm1 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 1 1000 0 - 1000 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr Service Alarm2 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 2 65536 0 - 65536 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Max Shots / h Cr Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour. 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]

Protective Elements
Global Protection Parameters of the of the AR Abort Functions

abort: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be List
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
aborted.
/AR
/Block Fc]

Protective Elements
Input States of the AR Abort Functions

abort: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If [Protection Para
the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted.
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]
/Global Prot Para
/AR
/Block Fc]

Protective Elements
AR Start Functions
Name Description
- No assignment
I[1] Phase Overcurrent Stage
IG[1] Earth current protection - Stage
I2>[1] Unbalanced Load-Stage
I2>[2] Unbalanced Load-Stage
ExP[1] External Protection - Module
Scada Commands of the Auto Reclosure
Name Description
-.- No assignment
DNP3.BinaryOutput0 Virtual Digital Output (DNP). This corresponds to a virtual binary input of the protective device.

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
V - Voltage Protection [27,59]
Available stages:
V[1] ,V[2] ,V[3] ,V[4] ,V[5] ,V[6]
If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output side,
the following has to be taken into account:
When disconnecting the line is it has to be ensured that by an »External

Blocking« undervoltage tripping of the U<-elements cannot happen. This is
realized through detecting of the CB position (via digital inputs).
When the aux. voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not yet
been applied, undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an »External
Blocking«
In case of an fuse failure, it is important to block the »U<-stages« so that an

undesired operation can be prevented.
All voltage elements are identically structured and can optionally be projected
as over- or undervoltage element.
If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and field
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-neutral«, the messages issued by the
voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as
follows:
»V[1].ALARM L1« or »V[1].TRIP L1« => alarm or trip caused by phase voltage
»VL1«.
»VL2«.
»VL3«.
If, however, line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and field
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should be
interpreted as follows:
»V[1].ALARM L1« or »V[1].TRIP L1« => alarm or trip caused by line-to-line

voltage »V12«.
voltage »V23«.
voltage »V31«

Protective Elements
The following table shows the application options of the voltage protection element
Applications of the V-Protection Module Setting in Option

ANSI 27 Undervoltage protection Device Planning menu Measuring Method:
Setting: V< Fundamental/TrueRMS
Measuring Mode:
Phase to ground, Phase-to-Phase
10 minutes sliding average supervision V< Device Planning menu Measuring Method: Umit
Setting: V<
Measuring Mode:
ANSI 59 Overvoltage protection Device Planning menu Measuring Method:
Setting: V> Fundamental/TrueRMS
Measuring Mode:
Sliding average supervision V> Device Planning menu Measuring Method: Vavg
Setting: V>
Measuring Mode:
Measuring Method
or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used. In addition to that a sliding average supervision »Vavg« can be
parametrized.
The required settings for the calculation of the “average value” of the “sliding
average value supervision” have to be taken within menu
[Device Para\Statistics\Vavg].
Measuring Method
If the measuring inputs of the voltage measuring card is fed with "Phase-to-Ground" voltages, the Field Parameter
»VT con« has to be set to »Phase-to-Ground«. In this case, the user has the option, to set the »Measuring Mode«
of each phase voltage protection element to »Phase-to-Ground« or »Phase-to-Phase«. That means, he can
determine for each phase voltage protection element if »Vn=VTsec/SQRT(3)« by setting »Measuring-Mode =
phase-to-ground« or if »Vn=VTsec« by setting »Measuring-Mode = Phase-to-Phase«. CAUTION! If the measuring
inputs of the voltage measuring card is fed with »Phase-to-Phase« voltages, the Field Parameter »VT con« has to
be set to »Phase-to-Phase«. In this case the parameter »Measuring Mode« has to be set to »Phase-to-Ground«. In
this case the device works always based on »Phase-to-Phase« voltages. In this case the parameter »Measuring
mode« is internally set to »Phase-to-Phase«.
For each of the voltage protection elements it can be defined if it picks up when over- or undervoltage is detected in
one of three, two of three or in all three phases. The dropout ratio is settable.

567
V[1]...[n]
name = V[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name.Alarm L1
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings 28
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm L2
29
name.Meas Circuit
name.Alarm L3
Superv
inacti ve
30
name.Alarm
active 14
name.Trip L1
&
12a 12b >1 & 20
38a 38b
name.Trip L2
Device planning &
name.Mode 21
V>
V< name.Trip L3
name.Alarm Mode &
& name.t
MRA4
any one
22
name.Measuring Mode V<
any two
V>
Phase to Ground all t 0
name.Measuring name.Trip
method Phase to Phase 15
&
Fundamental
φ
φ
name.TripCmd
True RMS name.V &
(V<|V>)
15a
Vavg* Reset%
VL1
&
φ
VL2
VL3

*Do not use this setting (Vavg) with V(t)-elements.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

Mode Mode do not use, V[1]: V> [Device planning]
V>, V[2]: V<
V< V[3]: do not use
V[4]: do not use
V[5]: do not use
V[6]: do not use
Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /V-Prot
/V[1]]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Voltage Protection Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, V[1]: active [Protection Para
active V[2]: inactive /<1..4>
V[3]: inactive /V-Prot
V[4]: inactive /V[1]]
V[5]: inactive
V[6]: inactive
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /V-Prot
/V[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
active /<1..4>
/V[1]]
Measuring Mode Measuring/Supervision Mode: Determines if the phase- Phase to Ground, Phase to Ground [Protection Para
to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages are to be
supervised
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
Measuring method Measuring method: fundamental or rms or "sliding Fundamental, Fundamental [Protection Para
average supervision"
True RMS, /<1..4>
Vavg /V-Prot
/V[1]]
Alarm Mode Alarm criterion for the voltage protection stage. any one, any one [Protection Para
any two, /<1..4>
all /V-Prot
/V[1]]

Protective Elements

V> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element 0.01 - 1.500Vn V[1]: 1.1Vn [Protection Para
will be started. Definition of Vn: If the measuring inputs
V[2]: 1.20Vn /<1..4>
of the voltage measuring card is fed with "Phase-to-
Ground" voltages, the Field Parameter "VT con" has to V[3]: 1.20Vn /V-Prot
be set to "Phase-to-Ground". In this case, the user has
V[4]: 1.20Vn /V[1]]
the option, to set the "Measuring Mode" of each phase
voltage protection element to "Phase-to-Ground" or V[5]: 1.20Vn
"Phase-to-Phase". That means, he can determine for
V[6]: 1.20Vn
each phase voltage protection element if
"Vn=VTsec/SQRT(3)" by setting "Measuring-Mode =
phase-to-ground" or if "Vn=VTsec" by setting
"Measuring-Mode = Phase-to-Phase". CAUTION! If the
measuring inputs of the voltage measuring card is fed
with "Phase-to-Phase" voltages, the Field Parameter
"VT con" has to be set to "Phase-to-Phase". In this
case the parameter "Measuring Mode" has to be set to
"Phase-to-Ground". In this case the device works
always based on "Phase-to-Phase" Voltages. In this
case the parameter "Measuring mode" is internally set
to "Phase-to-Phase".
V> Reset% Drop Out (is in percent of setting) 80 - 99% 97% [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
V< If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element 0.01 - 1.500Vn V[1]: 0.80Vn [Protection Para
will be started. Definition of Vn: If the measuring inputs
V[2]: 0.9Vn /<1..4>
of the voltage measuring card is fed with "Phase-to-
Ground" voltages, the Field Parameter "VT con" has to V[3]: 0.80Vn /V-Prot
be set to "Phase-to-Ground". In this case, the user has
V[4]: 0.80Vn /V[1]]
the option, to set the "Measuring Mode" of each phase
voltage protection element to "Phase-to-Ground" or V[5]: 0.80Vn
"Phase-to-Phase". That means, he can determine for
V[6]: 0.80Vn
each phase voltage protection element if
"Vn=VTsec/SQRT(3)" by setting "Measuring-Mode =
phase-to-ground" or if "Vn=VTsec" by setting
"Measuring-Mode = Phase-to-Phase". CAUTION! If the
measuring inputs of the voltage measuring card is fed
with "Phase-to-Phase" voltages, the Field Parameter
"VT con" has to be set to "Phase-to-Phase". In this
case the parameter "Measuring Mode" has to be set to
"Phase-to-Ground". In this case the device works
always based on "Phase-to-Phase" Voltages. In this
case the parameter "Measuring mode" is internally set
to "Phase-to-Phase".
V< Reset% Drop Out (is in percent of setting) 101 - 110% 103% [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V[1]]

Protective Elements

t Tripping delay 0.00 - 3000.00s V[1]: 1s [Protection Para
V[2]: 1s /<1..4>
V[3]: 0.00s /V-Prot
V[4]: 0.00s /V[1]]
V[5]: 0.00s
V[6]: 0.00s
active /<1..4>
disturbed measuring circuit (e.g. caused by a fuse /V-Prot
failure).
/V[1]]

Protective Elements
Voltage Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V[1]]
Voltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
Trip Signal: Trip

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [59]
Object to be tested
Test of the overvoltage protection elements, 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase (for each element)
Through testing the overvoltage protection stages, it can also be ensured that
the wiring from the switchboard input terminals is correct. Wiring errors at the
voltage measuring inputs might result in:
False tripping of the directional current protection
Example: Device suddenly trips in reverse direction but it does
not trip in forward direction.
Wrong or no power factor indication
Errors with regard to power directions etc.
Necessary means
3-phase AC voltage source
Timer for measuring of the tripping time
Voltmeter
Procedure (3 x single-phase, 1 x three-phase, for each element)

For testing the threshold values and fallback values, the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is
activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the per-
missible tolerances.

For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than (e.g.) 97% of the trip value. The relay must only fall back at 97% of the
trip value at the earliest.

The measured threshold values, trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [27]
This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection (by using the related undervoltage values).
Please consider the following deviations:
For testing the threshold values the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated.
For detection of the fallback value, the measuring quantity has to be increased so to achieve more than
(e.g.) 103% of the trip value. At 103% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest.

Protective Elements
VG, VX - Voltage Supervision [27A, 27TN/59N, 59A]

Available elements:
VG[1] ,VG[2]
All elements of the voltage supervision of the fourth measuring input are
identically structured.
This protective element can be used to (depending on device planning and setting)
Supervison of the calculated or measured residual voltage. The residual voltage can be calculated only if the
phase voltages (star connection) are connected to the measuring inputs of the device.
Supervision of another (auxiliary) voltage against overvoltage or undervoltage.
The following table shows the application options of the voltage protection element
Applications of the VG/VX-Protection Setting in Option

Module
ANSI 59N/G Residual voltage protection Device Planning menu Criterion:
(measured or calculated) Setting: V> Fundamental/TrueRMS
VG Source:
measured/calculated
ANSI 59A Supervision of an Auxiliary Device Planning menu Criterion:
(additional) Voltage in relation to Setting: V> Fundamental/TrueRMS
Overvoltage.
Within the corresponding

Parameter-Set:
VG Source:measured
ANSI 27A Supervision of an Auxiliary Device Planning menu Criterion:
(additional) Voltage in relation to Setting: V< Fundamental/TrueRMS
Undervoltage.
Within the corresponding
Parameter-Set:
VG Source:measured
ANSI 27TN/59N “Vx meas H3” Device Planning menu Criterion:
Stator Ground Fault Protection Setting: V< VX meas H3
Note: This option is available in some VX Source:
Generator Protection Relays only. In order to Within the corresponding measured
detect 100% Stator Ground faults, a 27TN Parameter-Set:
element has to be or-connected with a 59N
VX Source:measured
element within the programmable logic.
Measuring Mode

Protective Elements
27TN/59N - 100% Stator Ground Fault Protecton »VX meas H3«*
*=only available in Generator Protection Relays
With this setting the relay can detect stator ground faults at high impedance grounded generators near the
machines stator neutral.
In order to detect 100% Stator Ground faults, a 27TN element has to be or-connected with a 59N element within the
programmable logic.
With the 27TN element the 3rd harmonic of the connected voltage is monitored at the generator neutral side. It is
able to detect ground faults, which occur between the stator neutral and up to approx. 20% of the winding towards
the stator terminals. In combination with the 59N element, that detects ground faults from the stator terminals down
to approximately 10% of the stator winding towards the neutral, a 100% stator ground fault protection can be
realized.
The following figure shows the combination of a 27TN with measuring criterion »VX meas H3« (third harmonic) and
a 59N element.
Both elements have to be or connected via Programmable logic.
In addition to that it is recommended to provide the 27TN element with a voltage release via a AND-Logic with an
59 element in order to prevent faulty tripping e.g. during generator standstill (see logic diagram next page).

Protective Elements
100% Neutral voltage (depending on

fault location)
3rd harmonic during a fault
Neutral Voltage
3rd harmonic during normal operation
Third Harmonic
27TN / VX meas H3 pickup

(undervoltage )
59N pickup (overvoltage ) Neutral voltage during normal

operation
0%
Generator Neutral Generator Terminals
59N Fundamental
10% - 100%
27TN
0%-20%
27TN 59N
100%
prevents faulty tripping during dead system / generator standstill
Logics
59
t
&
T 0
27TN
>1 Trip
59N
t
T 0

577
VG[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name = VG[1]...[n]

Device planning
name.VX Source name.Mode
measured V>
calculated V<
&
12a 12b >1
38a 38b >1 &

&
&
name.Alarm
12c >1
14 31
MRA4
38c
name.t
&
name.Meas Circuit t 0 name.Trip
Superv 15
ina ctive
active &
name.TripCmd
15a 23
name.Measuring
method
name.VX Source
Fundamental
measured True RMS
calculated VX meas H3*

name.VX>
(V<|V>)
*=* Availability dependent on device type
VX φ φ

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module

V>,
V<
Global Protection Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module

/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/VG[1]]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Residual Voltage Supervision Module.

active /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
active /<1..4>
/VG[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
active /<1..4>
/VG[1]]
VX Source Selection if VG is measured or calculated (neutral measured, measured [Protection Para

voltage or residual voltage)
calculated /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
True RMS /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
VX> If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/stage will 0.01 - 1.50Vn 1Vn [Protection Para
be started.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: VG.Mode = V> /V-Prot
/VG[1]]
VG< Undervoltage Threshold 0.01 - 1.50Vn 0.8Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: VG.Mode = V<
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
active /<1..4>
failure).
/VG[1]]
Residual Voltage Supervision Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/VG[1]]
Residual Voltage Supervision Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Residual Voltage Supervision-stage
Trip Signal: Trip

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Measured [59N]
Object to be tested
Residual voltage protection stages.
Necessary components
Voltmeter
Procedure (for each element)

For testing the threshold and fallback values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has to
be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the devi-
ation must be within the permissible tolerances.

For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay.
The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only fall back at 97% of the trip
value at the latestly.

The measured threshold values, trip delays and fallback ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Residual Voltage Protection - Calculated [59N]
Object to be tested
Test of the residual voltage protection elements
Necessary means
3-phase voltage source
Calculation of the residual voltage is only possible if phase voltages (star) were
applied to the voltage measuring inputs and if »VX Source=calculated« is set
within the corresponding parameter set.
Procedure
Feed a three-phase, symmetrical voltage system (Vn) into the voltage measuring inputs of the relay.
Set the limiting value of VX[x] to 90% Vn.
Disconnect the phase voltage at two measuring inputs (symmetrical feeding at the secondary side has to be
maintained).
Now the »VX calc« measuring value has to be about 100% of the value Vn.
Ascertain that the signal »VX.ALARM« or »VX.TRIP« is generated now.

The signal »VX.ALARM« or »VX.TRIP« is generated.

Protective Elements
f - Frequency [81O/U, 78, 81R]
Available elements:
f[1] ,f[2] ,f[3] ,f[4] ,f[5] ,f[6]
All frequency protective elements are identically structured.
Frequency - Measuring Principle
The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the three
phase frequencies. Only valid measured frequency values are taken into
account. If a phase voltage is no longer measurable, this phase will be
excluded from the calculation of the average value.
The measuring principle of the frequency supervision is based in general on the time measurement of complete
cycles, whereby a new measurement is started at each zero passage. The influence of harmonics on the measuring
result is thus minimized.
V(t) T
Frequency tripping is sometimes not desired by low measured voltages which for instance occur during alternator
acceleration. All frequency supervision functions are blocked if the voltage is lower 0.15 times Vn.

Protective Elements
Frequency Functions
Due to its various frequency functions, the device is very flexible. That makes it suitable for a wide range of
applications, where frequency supervision is an important criterion.
In the Device Planning menu, the User can decide how to use each of the six frequency elements.
f[1] to f[6] can be assigned as:
f< – Underfrequency;
f> – Overfrequency;
df/dt - Rate of Change of Frequency;
f< + df/dt – Underfrequency and Rate of Change of Frequency;
f> + df/dt - Overfrequency and Rate of Change of Frequency;
f< + DF/DT – Underfrequency and absolute frequency change per definite time interval;
f> + DF/DT - Overfrequency and absolute frequency change per definite time interval and
delta phi - Vector Surge
f< – Underfrequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency falls below the set pickup
threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains under the set pickup threshold until the
tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, consumers, or electrical operating equipment
in general against underfrequency.
f> – Overfrequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency exceeds the set pickup
threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains above the set tripping pickup until the
tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting the frequency element protects electrical generators, consumers, or electrical operating equipment
in general against overfrequency.
Working Principle f< and f>
(Please refer to the block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three voltages (depending on if the voltage transformers are wired in Star or
Delta connection »VL12«, »VL23« und »VL31« oder »VL1«, »VL2« und »VL3«). If all of the three phase voltages
are e.g. below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked (settable via parameter »V Block f«). According to the
frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (f< or f>), the evaluated phase voltages are compared to the
set pickup threshold for over- or under-frequency. If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the
set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued
instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency still exceeds or is below the set pickup
threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.

585
Protective Elements
f[1]...[n]
name = f[1]...[n]

Device planning name.Alarm f
name.Mode
name.Alarm
f>
f<
14
name.Trip f
VL1 name.f 15
(f>|f<) name.t
&
VL2 Frequency calculation t 0 name.Trip
f 15
VL3
MRA4
&
name.TripCmd
15a
Field Para
V Block f
&
name.Blo by V<

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
df/dt - Rate of Change of Frequency
Electrical generators running in parallel with the mains, (e. g. industrial internal power supply plants), should be
separated from the mains when failure in the intra-system occurs for the following reasons:
• Damage to electrical generators must be prevented when mains voltage is recovering

asynchronously, (e. g. after a short interruption).
• The industrial internal power supply must be maintained.
A reliable criterion of detecting mains failure is the measurement of the rate of change of frequency (df/dt). The
precondition for this is a load flow via the mains coupling point. At mains failure the load flow change spontaneously
leads to an increasing or decreasing frequency. At active power deficit of the internal power station, a linear drop of
the frequency occurs and a linear increase occurs at power excess. Typical frequency gradients during application
of "mains decoupling" are in the range of 0.5 Hz/s up to over 2 Hz/s.
The protective device detects the instantaneous frequency gradient (df/dt) of each mains voltage period. Through
multiple evaluations of the frequency gradient in sequence the continuity of the directional change (sign of the
frequency gradient) is determined. Because of this special measuring procedure a high safety in tripping and thus a
high stability against transient processes, (e. g. switching procedure) are achieved.
The frequency gradient (rate of change of frequency [df/dt]) may have a negative or positive sign, depending on
frequency increase (positive sign) or decrease (negative sign).
In the frequency parameter sets, the User can define the kind of df/dt mode:
Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency

Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency and
Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in frequency
This protection element provides a tripping threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency gradient df/dt exceeds or
falls below the set tripping threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency gradient remains still
above/below the set tripping threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
Working Principle df/dt
(Please refer to the block diagram on next page)
Delta connection »VL12«, »VL23« und »VL31« oder »VL1«, »VL2« und »VL3«).
If any of the three phase voltages is e.g. below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked (settable via parameter
»V Block f«). According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (df/dt), the evaluated phase
voltages are compared to the set frequency gradient (df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, the frequency gradient
exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold (acc. to the set df/dt mode) and if there are no blocking commands
for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the
frequency gradient still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a
tripping command will be issued.

587
f[1]...[n]: df/dt
Protective Elements
name = f[1]...[n]

name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT
name.Alarm
14
name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT

15
Device planning
name.t
name.Mode t 0 name.Trip
df/dt mode & 15
df/dt
positive df/dt
MRA4
negative df/dt
absolute df/dt
VL1 +df/dt df/dt
VL2
df/dt calculation -df/dt
VL3
Idf/dtI name.TripCmd
& 15a
Field Para
V Block f
&
name.Blo by V<

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
f< and df/dt – Underfrequency and Rate of Change of Frequency
With this setting the frequency element supervises if the frequency falls below a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set f[X], an underfrequency pickup threshold f<, a frequency gradient df/dt and
a tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:
f> and df/dt – Overfrequency and Rate of Change of Frequency
With this setting the frequency element supervises if the frequency exceeds a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set f[X], an overfrequency pickup threshold f>, a frequency gradient df/dt and a
tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:
Working Principle f< and df/dt | f> and df/dt
»V Block f«). According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (f< and df/dt or f> and dt/dt),
the evaluated phase voltages are compared to the set frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency gradient
(df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, both - the frequency and the frequency gradient exceed or fall below the
set thresholds and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously
and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency and the frequency gradient still exceed or are below the
set threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.

589
f[1]...[n]: f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
Protective Elements
name = f[1]...[n]
name.Alarm f
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT

Device planning name.Alarm

name.Mode 14
f> and df/dt
f< and df/dt
f> f
VL1 f<
VL2 Frequency calculation

f f
VL3 name.t
t 0 name.Trip
df/dt mode & 15
positive df/dt
MRA4
negative df/dt
absolute df/dt
+df/dt df/dt
df/dt calculation -df/dt
Idf/dtI name.TripCmd
& 15a
Field Para
V Block f
&
name.Blo by V<

3
(Tripping command deactivated or blocked. )
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
f< and DF/DT – Underfrequency and DF/DT
With this setting the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set f[X], an underfrequency pickup threshold f<, a threshold for the absolute
frequency difference (frequency decrease) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
f> and DF/DT – Overfrequency and DF/DT
With this setting the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set f[X], an overfrequency pickup threshold f>, a threshold for the absolute
frequency difference (frequency increase) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
Working principle f< and DF/DT | f> and DF/DT
(please refer to block diagram on next page)
»V Block f«). According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (f< and DF/DT or f> and
DF/DT), the evaluated phase voltages are compared to the set frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency
decrease or increase threshold DF.
If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking
commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously. At the same time the timer for the
supervision interval DT is started. When, during the supervision interval DT, the frequency still exceeds or is below
the set pickup threshold and the frequency decrease/increase reaches the set threshold DF, a tripping command
will be issued.
Working Principle of DF/DT Function
(Please refer to f(t) diagram after the block diagram)
Case 1:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold at t1, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency difference
(decrease) does not reach the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired, no trip will occur. The
frequency element remains blocked until the frequency falls below the underfrequency threshold f< again.
Case 2:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold at t4, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency difference
(decrease) reaches the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired (t5), a trip command is issued.

591
f[1]...[n]: f< and DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
Protective Elements
name = f[1]...[n]

2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm f
name.Alarm df/dt | DF/DT
Device planning
name.Alarm
name.Mode
14
f> and DF/DT
VL1
f< and DF/DT
VL2 f> f
Frequency calculation DT
f 1
VL3 f< & t name.Trip
&
15
<name>.f+DF
MRA4
name.TripCmd
& 15a
name.Blo by V<
Field Para
V Block f
&

4
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
592
Protective Elements
f[1]...[n]: f< and DF/DT

name = f[1]...[n]
Trip
f
Reset
temporarily blocking
fN
f<
DF
DF
DF
MRA4
t
DT DT
t1 t2 t3 t4 t6
t5
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Delta phi - Vector Surge
The vector surge supervision protects synchronous generators in mains parallel operation due to very fast
decoupling in case of mains failure. Very dangerous are mains auto reclosings for synchronous generators. The
mains voltage returning typically after 300 ms can hit the generator in asynchronous position. A very fast decoupling
is also necessary in case of long time mains failures.
Generally there are two different applications:
Only mains parallel operation - no single operation:

In this application the vector surge supervision protects the generator by tripping the
generator circuit breaker in case of mains failure.
Mains parallel operation and single operation:

For this application the vector surge supervision trips the mains circuit breaker. Here it is
insured that the gen.-set is not blocked when it is required as an emergency set.
A very fast decoupling in case of mains failures for synchronous generators is very difficult. Voltage supervision
units cannot be used because the synchronous alternator as well as the consumer impedance support the
decreasing voltage.
In this situation the mains voltage drops only after some 100 ms below the pickup threshold of the voltage
supervision and therefore a safe detection of mains auto reclosings is not possible with voltage supervision only.
Frequency supervision is partially unsuitable because only a highly loaded generator decreases its speed within
100 ms. Current relays detect a fault only when short-circuit type currents exist, but cannot avoid their development.
Power relays are able to pickup within 200 ms, but they also cannot prevent the power rising to short-circuit values.
Since power changes are also caused by sudden loaded alternators, the use of power relays can be problematic.
Whereas the vector surge supervision of the device detects mains failures within 60 ms without the restrictions
described above because it is specially designed for applications where very fast decoupling from the mains is
required. Adding the typical operating time of a circuit breaker or contactor, the total disconnection time remains
below 150 ms.
Basic requirement for tripping of the generator/mains monitor is a change in load of more than 15 - 20% of the rated
load. Slow changes of the system frequency, for instance at regulating processes (adjustment of speed regulator)
do not cause the relay to trip.
Trippings can also be caused by short-circuits within the grid, because a voltage vector surge higher than the preset
value can occur. The magnitude of the voltage vector surge depends on the distance between the short-circuit and
the generator. This function is also of advantage to the Power Utility Company because the mains short-circuit
capacity and, consequently, the energy feeding the short-circuit is limited.
To prevent a possible false tripping, the vector surge measuring is blocked at a low input voltage e.g. <15% Vn
(settable via parameter »V Block f«). The undervoltage lockout acts faster then the vector surge measurement.
Vector surge tripping is blocked by a phase loss so that a VT fault (e. g.: faulty VTs fuse) does not cause false
tripping.

Protective Elements
Measuring Principle of Vector Surge Supervision
Equivalent circuit at synchronous generator in parallel with the mains.
V = I 1 * j Xd I1 I2
VP V1 Grid
Voltage vectors at mains parallel operation.

V1
VP
V = I1* j Xd
Grid/Load
Generator
The rotor displacement angle between stator and rotor is dependent on the mechanical moving torque of the
generator. The mechanical shaft power is balanced with the electrical fed mains power and, therefore the
synchronous speed keeps constant.

Protective Elements
Equivalent circuit at mains failure.
V´ = I´ 1 * j Xd
I1
VP V´1 Grid
In case of mains failure or auto reclosing the generator suddenly feeds a very high consumer load. The rotor
displacement angle is decreased repeatedly and the voltage vector V1 changes its direction (V1').
Voltage vectors at mains failure.
V1 V´1
VP
V´ = I´1* j Xd
Generator Load

Protective Elements
Voltage vector surge.
Voltage Vector Surge

V(t) V(t) V(t)`
Trip
t=0 t
delta phi
As shown in the voltage/time diagram the instantaneous value of the voltage jumps to another value and the phase
position changes. This is called phase or vector surge.
The relay measures the cycle duration. A new measuring is started at each zero passage. The measured cycle
duration is internally compared with a reference time and from this the deviation of the cycle duration of the voltage
signal is ascertained. In case of a vector surge as shown in the above graphic, the zero passage occurs either
earlier or later. The established deviation of the cycle duration is in compliance with the vector surge angle.
If the vector surge angle exceeds the set value, the relay trips immediately.
Tripping of the vector surge is blocked in case of loss of one or more phases of the measuring
voltage.
Working Principle delta phi
If any of the three phase voltages is e.g. below 15% Vn, the vector surge calculation is blocked (settable via
parameter »V Block f«). According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (delta phi), the
phase voltages are compared to the set vector surge threshold. If, depending on the parameter setting, in all three,
in two or in one of the phases, the vector surge exceeds the set threshold and if there are no blocking commands
for the frequency element, an alarm and a trip command is issued instantaneously.

597
f[1]...[n]: delta phi
Protective Elements
name = f[1]...[n]

name.Alarm delta phi
name.Alarm
Field Para
delta phi - Mode name.Trip delta phi

one phase
15
two phases
Device planning
three phases
name.Trip
name.Mode &
14
delta phi
MRA4
VL1 name.delta phi
VL2 delta phi

delta phi calculation
VL3
name.TripCmd
& 15a
Field Para
V Block f
&
name.Blo by V<

3
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Mode Mode do not use, f[1]: f< [Device planning]
f<, f[2]: f>
f>, f[3]: do not use
f< and df/dt, f[4]: do not use
f> and df/dt, f[5]: do not use
f< and DF/DT, f[6]: do not use
f> and DF/DT,
df/dt,
delta phi
Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /f-Prot
/f[1]]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, f[1]: active [Protection Para
active f[2]: active /<1..4>
f[3]: inactive /f-Prot
f[4]: inactive /f[1]]
f[5]: inactive
f[6]: inactive
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /f-Prot
/f[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /f-Prot
/f[1]]
f> Pickup value for overfrequency. 40.00 - 69.95Hz 51.00Hz [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = f> Or f>
and df/dt Or f> and DF/DT /f-Prot
/f[1]]
f< Pickup value for underfrequency. 40.00 - 69.95Hz 49.00Hz [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = f< Or f<
and df/dt Or f< and DF/DT /f-Prot
/f[1]]
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = f< Or f>Or
f> and df/dt Or f< and df/dt /f-Prot
/f[1]]
df/dt Measured value (calculated): Rate-of-frequency- 0.100 - 10.000Hz/s 1.000Hz/s [Protection Para
change.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or f< /f-Prot
and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
/f[1]]

Protective Elements

t-df/dt Trip delay df/dt 0.00 - 300.00s 1.00s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
DF Frequency difference for the maximum admissible 0.0 - 10.0Hz 1.00Hz [Protection Para
variation of the mean of the rate of frequency-change.
/<1..4>
This function is inactive if DF=0.
/f-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = f< and
/f[1]]
DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
DT Time interval of the maximum admissible rate-of- 0.1 - 10.0s 1.00s [Protection Para
frequency-change.
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = f< and /f-Prot
DF/DT Or f> and DF/DT
/f[1]]
df/dt mode df/dt mode absolute df/dt, absolute df/dt [Protection Para
positive df/dt, /<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or f<
and df/dt Or f> and df/dt Only available if: Device negative df/dt /f-Prot
planning: f.Mode = df/dt Or f< and df/dt Or f> and df/dt
/f[1]]
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = df/dt
delta phi Measured value (calculated): Vector surge 1 - 30° 10° [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: f.Mode = delta phi
/f-Prot
/f[1]]

Protective Elements
Frequency Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/f-Prot
/f[1]]
Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequency-change
Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
Trip delta phi Signal: Trip Vector Surge
Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Overfrequency [f>]
Object to be tested
All configured overfrequency protection stages.
Necessary means
Three-phase voltage source with variable frequency and
Timer
Procedure

Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated;
Note the frequency value and
Disconnect the test voltage.

Set the test voltage to nominal frequency and
Now connect a frequency jump (activation value) and then start a timer. Measure the tripping time at the
relay output.

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99.95% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). The relay must only fall back at
99.95% of the trip value at the earliest (or 0.05% fn).

Commissioning: Underfrequency [f<]
For all configured underfrequency elements, this test can be carried out similar to the test for overfrequency
protection (by using the related underfrequency values).
Please consider the following deviations:
For testing the threshold values, the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is activated.
For detection of the fallback ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100.05% of the
trip value (or 0.05% fn). At 100.05% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest
(or 0.05% fn).

Protective Elements
Commissioning: df/dt - Rate of Change of Frequency
Object to be tested
All frequency protection stages that are projected as df/dt.
Necessary means
Three-phase voltage source and
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.
Procedure

Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated.
Note the value.

Set the test voltage to nominal frequency.
Now apply a step change (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: apply 3 Hz per
second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second) and
Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Compare the measured tripping time to the configured tripping
time.

Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: f< and -df/dt – underfrequency

and Rate of Change of Frequency
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and -df/dt.
Necessary means:
Procedure:

Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device
Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold and
Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is below the setting value (example apply -1 Hz per
second if the setting value is -0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to trip.


Protective Elements
Commissioning: f> and df/dt – overfrequency

and Rate of Change of Frequency
Object to be tested
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and df/dt.
Necessary means
Three-phase voltage source and.
Procedure

Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device.
Increase the frequency above the f> threshold and.
Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is above the setting value (example apply 1 Hz per
second if the setting value is 0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to trip.


Protective Elements
Commissioning: f< and DF/DT – Underfrequency and DF/DT
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
Procedure:

Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device:
Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold and
Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a frequency
change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz). The relay has to trip
immediately.

Commissioning: f> and DF/DT – Overfrequency and DF/DT
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
Three-phase voltage source and.
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
Procedure:

Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device:
Increase the frequency above the f> threshold and
Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a frequency
change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz). The relay has to trip
immediately.


Protective Elements
Commissioning: delta phi - Vector Surge
All frequency protection stages that are projected as delta phi (vector surge).
Necessary means:
Three-phase voltage source that can generate a definite step (sudden change) of the voltage pointers
(phase shift).
Procedure:

Apply a vector surge (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: if the setting value is 10°
apply 15°).

Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratio can be taken from the Technical Data.

Protective Elements
V 012 – Voltage Asymmetry [47]
Available elements:
V012[1] ,V012[2] ,V012[3] ,V012[4] ,V012[5] ,V012[6]
Within the Device planning menu this module can be projected in order to supervise the positive phase sequence
voltage for over- or undervoltage or the negative phase sequence system for overvoltage. This module is based on
the 3-phase voltages.
The module is alarmed, if the threshold is exceeded. The module will trip, if the measured values remain for the
duration of the delay timer above the threshold continuously.
In case that the negative phase sequence voltage is monitored, the threshold »V2>« can be combined with an
additional percentage criterion »%V2/V1« (AND-connected) in order to prevent faulty tripping in case of a lack of
voltage within the positive phase sequence system.
Application Options of the V 012 Module Setting in Option

ANSI 47 – Negative Sequence Overvoltage Device Planning Menu %V2/V1:
The Module trips, if the threshold
(Supervision of the Negative Phase U2> and the ratio of negative to
Sequence System) positive phase sequence voltage is
exceeded (after the delay timer has
expired).
Setting within the Device Planning (V2>)
This criterion is to be activated and

parametrized within the parameter
set.
ANSI 59U1 Overvoltage within the Positive Device Planning Menu -
Phase Sequence System
Setting within the Device Planning (V1>)

ANSI 27U1 Undervoltage within the Positive Device Planning Menu -
Phase Sequence System
Setting within the Device Planning (V1<)

608
V012[1]...[n]
name = V012[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name.Meas Circuit
Superv
Device planning
inactive
name.Mode
V1> active
V1<
V2>
12a 12b &

>1 name.Alarm
14
38a 38b

Device planning
name.Mode
V1< | V1>
V2>
MRA4
V1
PPS V1 name.V2>
filter name.t
& name.Trip
t 0
VL1 15
V2
&
VL2
VL3
name.%(V2/V1)
V2
& name.TripCmd
NPS
& 15a
filter
>1
%(V2/V1)
active
inactive

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device planning parameters of the asymmetry module

Mode Unbalance Protection: Supervision of the do not use, do not use [Device planning]
Voltage System
V1>,
V1<,
V2>
Global protection parameter of the asymmetry-module

/Global Prot Para
assigned signal is true.1
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
/Global Prot Para
assigned signal is true.2
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V012[1]]

Protective Elements
Parameter set parameters of the asymmetry module

active /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
active /<1..4>
/V012[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
active /<1..4>
/V012[1]]
V1> Positive Phase Sequence Overvoltage 0.01 - 1.50Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: V012.Mode = V1>
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
V1< Positive Phase Sequence Undervoltage 0.01 - 1.50Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: V012.Mode = V1<
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
V2> Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage 0.01 - 1.50Vn 1.00Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: V012.Mode = V2>
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
%(V2/V1) The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup inactive, inactive [Protection Para
setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence
active /<1..4>
voltage to positive sequence voltage (%
Unbalance=V2/V1). Phase sequence will be taken into /V-Prot
account automatically.
/V012[1]]

Protective Elements

%(V2/V1) The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup 2 - 40% 20% [Protection Para
setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence
/<1..4>
voltage to positive sequence voltage (%
Unbalance=V2/V1). Phase sequence will be taken into /V-Prot
account automatically.
/V012[1]]
Only available if: %(V2/V1) = use
/<1..4>
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
active /<1..4>
failure).
/V012[1]]
States of the inputs of the asymmetry module

/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/V-Prot
/V012[1]]

Protective Elements
Signals of the asymmetry module (states of the outputs)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage asymmetry
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Asymmetry Protection

Object to be tested
Test of the asymmetry protection elements.
Necessary means
Voltmeter
Testing the tripping values (Example)
Set the pickup value for the voltage in the negative phase sequence to 0.5 Vn. Set the tripping delay to 1 s.
In order to generate a negative phase sequence voltage interchange the wiring of two phases (VL2 and VL3).

Start the timer and abrupt change (switch) to 1.5 times of the set tripping value. Measure the trip delay.

The measured threshold values and trip delays comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible
deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.

Protective Elements
Sync - Synchrocheck [25]
Available Elements:
Sync
The synchrocheck function can be bypassed by external sources. In this case,

synchronization has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before
breaker closing!
The first three measuring inputs of the voltage measuring card (VL1/VL1-L2,
VL2/VL2-L3, VL3/VL3-L1) are named /labeld as bus voltages within the snyc-
check element (this applies also to generator protection devices). The fourth
measuring input of the voltage measuring card (VX) is named/labeld as line-
voltage (this applies also to generator protection devices). In the menu [Field
Para/Voltage transf/V Sync] the User has to define to which phase the fourth
measuring input is compared.
Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck function is provided for the applications where a line has two-ended power sources. The
synchrocheck function has the abilities to check voltage magnitude, angle differences, and frequency difference
(slip frequency) between the bus and the line. If enabled, the synchrocheck may supervise the closing operation
manually, automatically, or both. This function can be overridden by certain bus-line operation conditions and can
be bypassed with an external source.
Voltage Difference ΔV
The first condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their voltage phasors have the same magnitude. This
can be controlled by the generator's AVR.
Bus VL1
Line VL1
Bus VL3
Line VL2 Line VL3
Bus VL2

Protective Elements
Frequency Difference (Slip Frequency) ΔF
The second condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their frequencies are nearly equal. This can be
controlled by the generator's speed governor.
Line VL1
Bus VL1
Bus f
Line f
Bus VL3
Line VL2 Line VL3
Bus VL2

Protective Elements
If the generator frequency fBus is not equal to the mains frequency fLine, it results in a slip frequency
ΔF = |fBus -fLine| between the two system frequencies.
∆ v(t)
Voltage Curve with Enlarged Resolution.
v(t)Line
v(t)Busbar
v(t)
∆ v(t)
Angular or Phase Difference.
Even if the frequency of both systems is exactly identical, usually an angular difference of the voltage phasors is the
case.

Protective Elements
Line VL1
Bus VL1
Angle Diff
Bus f = Line f
Bus VL3
Line VL2 Line VL3
Bus VL2
At the instant of synchronization, the angular difference of the two systems should be nearly zero because,
otherwise, unwanted load inrushes occur. Theoretically, the angular difference can be regulated to zero by giving
short pulses to the speed governors. When paralleling generators with the grid, in practice, synchronization is
requested as quick as possible and so usually a slight frequency difference is accepted. In such cases, the angular
difference is not constant but changes with the slip frequency ΔF.
By taking the breaker closing time into consideration, a lead of the closing release impulse can be calculated in a
way that breaker closing takes place at exactly the time when both systems are in angular conformity.
Basically the following applies:
Where large rotating masses are concerned, the frequency difference (slip frequency) of the two systems should
possibly be nearly zero, because of the very high load inrushes at the instant of breaker closing. For smaller rotating
masses, the frequency difference of the systems can be higher.
This sync-check cannot be used for two voltages that are shifted by a fixed angle (e.g
because they are measured on the two sides of a block transformer of a generator).

Protective Elements
Synchronization Modes
The synchrocheck module is able to check the synchronization of two electrical systems (system-to-system) or
between a generator and an electrical system (generator-to-system). For paralleling two electrical systems, the
station frequency, voltage and phase angle should be exactly the same as the utility grid. Whereas the
synchronization of a generator to a system can be done with a certain slip-frequency, depending on the size of the
generator used. Therefore the maximum breaker closing time has to be taken into consideration. With the set
breaker closing time, the synchrocheck module is able to calculate the moment of synchronization and gives the
paralleling release.
When paralleling two systems, it has to be verified that the system-to-system

mode is selected. Paralleling two systems in generator-to-system mode can
cause severe damage!
Working Principle Synchrocheck (Generator-to-System)
The synchrocheck element measures the three phase-to-neutral voltages »VL1«, »VL2«, and »VL3« or the three
phase-to-phase voltages »VL1-L2«, »VL2-L3«, and »VL3-L1« of the generator busbar. The line voltage Vx is
measured by the fourth voltage input. If all synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF
[SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous.
An advanced Close Angle Evaluator function takes the breaker closing time into consideration.

618
Sync=: SyncMode= Generator2System
& Sync.SynchronRunTiming
SyncMode=
VT con Generator2System
& t-MaxSyncSuperv
CBCloseInitiate 0
Phase to Phase Bypass override
Protective Elements
Phase to Ground Bypass= active & & Sync.SynchronFailed

MinLiveBusVoltage
Bus VL1 Bypass-I CB=Open
Bus VL12 & LBDL=active &

LB >1 Sync.SyncOverridden
LBDL
Sync override
Bus VL2
Sync.LiveBus
Bus VL23 MaxDeadBusVoltage

DBLL =
active
& DB
& >1 & Sync.Ready to Close
t-VoltDead
0
Bus VL3
DBLL
Bus VL31
Ext. Blocked
& LBLL
MRA4
MinLiveLineVoltage
LL Sync.LiveLine
Line VX
MaxDeadLineVoltage DBDL
t-VoltDead DL
&
0
DBDL=active
MaxVoltageDiff & Sync.VDiffTooHigh

Voltage difference: Line to Bus
1
Sync.SlipTooHigh
1
MaxSlipFrequency & &
Frequency difference: Line to Sync.Sys-in-Sync
Bus
MaxAngleDiff & Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh

Angle difference: Line to Bus 1
t-MaxCBCloseDelay
&
Advanced Close
Angle Calculator
t CB=Open
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Working Principle Synchrocheck (System-to-System)
The synchrocheck function for two systems is very similar to the synchrocheck function for generator-to-system
except there is no need to take the breaker closing time into account. The synchrocheck element measures the
three phase-to-neutral voltages »VL1«, »VL2«, and »VL3« or the three phase-to-phase voltages »VL1-L2«, »VL2-
L3«, and »VL3-L1« of the station voltage bus bar. The line voltage Vx is measured by the fourth voltage input. If all
synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the
limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous.

620
Sync=: SyncMode= System2System

VT con
Phase to Phase Bypass override

Protective Elements
Phase to Ground Bypass= active &

MinLiveBusVoltage
Bus VL1 Bypass-I
Bus VL12 & LBDL=active

LB & >1
Sync.SyncOverridden
LBDL
Sync override
Bus VL2
Sync.LiveBus
Bus VL23 MaxDeadBusVoltage

DBLL =
active
& DB &
t-VoltDead >1 & Sync.Ready to Close
0
Bus VL3
DBLL
Bus VL31
MRA4
Ext. Blocked
& LBLL
MinLiveLineVoltage
LL Sync.LiveLine
Line VX
MaxDeadLineVoltage DBDL
t-VoltDead DL
&
0
DBDL=active
MaxVoltageDiff & Sync.VDiffTooHigh

1
Voltage difference: Line to Bus
Sync.SlipTooHigh
1
MaxSlipFrequency & &
Frequency difference: Line to Sync.Sys-in-Sync
Bus
MaxAngleDiff & Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh

Angle difference: Line to Bus 1
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Synchrocheck Override Conditions
If enabled the following conditions can override the synchrocheck function:
•LBDL = Live Bus – Dead Line

•DBLL = Dead Bus – Live Line
•DBDL = Dead Bus – Dead Line
Also the synchrocheck function can be bypassed by an external source.
When the synchrocheck function is overridden or bypassed, synchronization

has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before breaker closing!
Device Planning Parameters of the Synchrocheck Module

use

Protective Elements
Global Protection Parameters of the Synchrocheck Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
Bypass The Synchrocheck will be bypassed if the state of the 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
assigned signal (logic input) becomes true.
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
CB Pos Detect Criterion by which the Circuit Breaker Switch Position is -.-, SG[1].Pos [Protection Para
to be detected.
SG[1].Pos /Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
CBCloseInitiate Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism check from any 1..n, -.- [Protection Para
control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the state of the SyncRequestList
/Global Prot Para
assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be
initiated (Trigger Source). /Intercon-Prot
/Sync]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Synchrocheck Fault Module

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /Intercon-Prot
/Sync
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/General settings]
Bypass Fc Allowing to bypass the Synchrocheck, if the state signal inactive, inactive [Protection Para
that is assigned to the parameter with the same name
active /<1..4>
within the Global Parameters (logic input) becomes
true. /Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/General settings]
SyncMode Synchrocheck mode: GENERATOR2SYSTEM = System2System, System2System [Protection Para
Synchronizing generator to system (breaker close
Generator2System /<1..4>
initiate needed). SYSTEM2SYSTEM = SynchronCheck
between two systems (Stand-Alone, no breaker info /Intercon-Prot
needed)
/Sync
/Mode / Times]
t- Maximum circuit breaker close time delay (Only used 0.00 - 300.00s 0.05s [Protection Para
MaxCBCloseDelay for GENERATOR-SYSTEM working mode and is
/<1..4>
critical for a correct synchronized switching)
/Intercon-Prot
Only available if: SyncMode = System2System
/Sync
/Mode / Times]
t-MaxSyncSuperv Synchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0.00 - 3000.00s 30.00s [Protection Para
synchronizing process after a close initiate. Only used
/<1..4>
for GENERATOR2SYSTEM working mode.
/Intercon-Prot
Only available if: SyncMode = System2System
/Sync
/Mode / Times]
MinLiveBusVoltage Minimum Live Bus voltage (Live bus detected, when all 0.10 - 1.50Vn 0.65Vn [Protection Para
three phase bus voltages are above this limit).
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]

Protective Elements

MaxDeadBusVoltag Maximum Dead Bus voltage (Dead bus detected, when 0.01 - 1.00Vn 0.03Vn [Protection Para
e all three phase bus voltages are below this limit).
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MinLiveLineVoltage Minimum Live Line voltage (Live line detected, when 0.10 - 1.50Vn 0.65Vn [Protection Para
line voltage above this limit).
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxDeadLineVolta Maximum Dead Line voltage (Dead Line detected, 0.01 - 1.00Vn 0.03Vn [Protection Para
ge when line voltage below this limit).
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
t-VoltDead Voltage dead time (A Dead Bus/Line condition will be 0.000 - 300.000s 0.167s [Protection Para
accepted only if the voltage falls below the set dead
/<1..4>
voltage levels longer than this time setting).
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxVoltageDiff Maximum voltage difference between bus and line 0.01 - 1.00Vn 0.24Vn [Protection Para
voltage phasors (Delta V)for synchronism (Related to
/<1..4>
bus voltage secondary rating)
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Conditions]
MaxSlipFrequency Maximum frequency difference (Slip: Delta f) between 0.01 - 2.00Hz 0.20Hz [Protection Para
bus and line voltage allowed for synchronism
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Conditions]
MaxAngleDiff Maximum phase angle difference (Delta-Phi in degree) 1 - 60° 20° [Protection Para
between bus and line voltages allowed for synchronism
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Conditions]

Protective Elements

DBDL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Dead-Line synchronism inactive, inactive [Protection Para
overriding
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Override]
DBLL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Live-Line synchronism inactive, inactive [Protection Para
overriding
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Override]
LBDL Enable/disable Live-Bus AND Dead-Line synchronism inactive, inactive [Protection Para
overriding
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync
/Override]
Synchrocheck Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Sync]
CBCloseInitiate-I State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with [Protection Para
synchronism check from any control sources (e.g. HMI /
/Global Prot Para
SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a
Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger Source). /Intercon-Prot
/Sync]

Protective Elements
Signals of the Synchrocheck Module (Output States)
Signal Description
LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Voltage is below the LiveBus threshold
LiveLine Signal: Live Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Voltage is below the LiveLine threshold
SynchronRunTiming Signal: SynchronRunTiming
SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s when the circuit breaker is
still open after the Synchron-Run-timer has timed out.
SyncOverridden Signal:Synchronism Check is overridden because one of the Synchronism overriding
conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met.
VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line voltages too high.
AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too high.
Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the system synchronism criteria.
Ready to Close Signal: Ready to Close

Protective Elements
Values of the Syncrocheck

Slip Freq Slip frequency 0Hz 0 - 70.000Hz [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Volt Diff Voltage difference between bus and line. 0V 0 - 500000.0V [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Diff Angle difference between bus and line voltages. 0° -360.0 - 360.0° [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
f Bus Bus frequency 0Hz 0 - 70.000Hz [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
f Line Line frequency 0Hz 0 - 70.000Hz [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Bus Bus Voltage 0V 0 - 500000.0V [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Line Line Voltage 0V 0 - 500000.0V [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Bus Bus Angle (Reference) 0° 0 - 360° [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Line Line Angle 0° 0 - 360° [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]

Protective Elements
Signals that Trigger a Synchrocheck
Name Description
-.- No assignment
SG[1].Sync ON request Signal: Synchronous ON request

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Q->&V< Reactive-Power/Undervoltage Protection
Available Elements:
Q->&V<
The number of distributed energy resources (DER) raises continuously. At the same time the controllable power
reserve through large-scale power plants decreases.
Therefore various grid codes requirements and regulations stipulate that mains parallel distributed power plants,
consisting of one or more power generation units feeding power into the MV grid, have to support the mains voltage
in case of failures.
In case of failure the voltage close to the short circuit location drops nearly to zero. Around the fault location a
potential gradient area is built whose expansion can be restricted by feeding reactive-power into the grid. At mains
failures (voltage drop) the Q->V< protection prevents the expansion of the potential gradient area for the case that
any further reactive-power is taken from the mains.
The function of this protection module is not the protection of the power generation system itself, but more the
decoupling of the power generation system when it takes reactive current from the mains in case the voltage drops
below a certain value. This protection is an upstream system protection.
The Q->&V< protection module is implemented as an autonomous protection element according to the German
regulations 1 and 2 mentioned below (for reconnection see separate element).
The comprehensive setting and configuration possibilities of this protection element allow the adaptation of
connected energy resources to various grid conditions.
For the correct function of this protection module you have to
Configure the »General Settings«,

Select and set the decoupling method.
Configure the reconnection of the power generation units (see chapter Reconnection).
General Settings
For each parameter set [Protection Para\Set [x]\Q->&U<] the general settings »General Settings« can be
configured.
Here the entire function of this protection element can be activated or deactivated.
By activating the voltage transformer supervision a malfunction of this protection module can be prevented.
1 Technische Anschlussregeln für die Hochspannung (VDE-AR-N 4120)

2 Technische Richtlinie „Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz“, Richtlinie für Anschluss und Parallelbetrieb von
Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz, Ausgabe Juni 2008, BDEW Bundesverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V., siehe Kap.
3.2.3.2 – Blindleistungs-Unterspannungsschutz Q->&U<

Protective Elements
QV Protection Trip Direction
Definitons
Load Flow Arrow System = Consumed active and reactive are counted positive (greater than zero)
Generator Flow Arrow System = produced power is to be counted positive (greater than zero)
By means of the parameter power trip dir positve/negative a sign reversal can be applied to the reactive power
within the QV-Protection module. Protective devices that use the load flow arrow (like the MCA4 or the MRA4) are
to be set to »Power Trip dir= positive«. Protective devices that are working on the base of the generator flow arrow
system (like the MCDGV4) are to be set to »Power Trip dir= negative«. By means of that generator protection relays
like the MCDGV4 can be set to the load flow arrow system internal within the QV-Protection (only). That means that
outside of the QV-Protection no other power measurement or power protection is effected.

Protective Elements
Trip Direction of the QV-Protection
t1-QV = 0.5s
MCDGV4
Power Trip dir=
negative
Grid
G
P/Q
-P/-Q
t1-QV = 0.5s
MCA4
Power Trip dir=positive
G
t2-QV=1.5 s
P/Q
Grid
P/Q
G
P/Q

Protective Elements
Parameter Setting of Decoupling
To support dynamical the decreasing voltage (voltage drop) during faults the grid codes of the transmission system
owners (e.g. VDE AR 4120 page 57) require the following behavior during grid problems (voltage sags) by the
connected energy resources:
The QV-Protection supervises the grid compliant behavior after a grid fault. Energy sources that have a
negative impact on the restoration by consuming inductive reactive power have to be disconnected from the
grid before timers of grid protection devices expire.
Therefore the energy source will be disconnected from the grid after 0.5 seconds by the QV-protection if all
three line-to-line voltages at the point of common coupling are less than 0.85 times Vn (logical AND
connected) and if the energy resource consumes at the same time inductive reactive power from the grid
(VDE AR 4120 page 57).
The reactive-power of the positive phase sequence system (Q1) is evaluated.
The voltage supervision only monitors the phase to phase voltages.

This prevents any influence on the measurement through neutral point
displacement in resonant earthed systems.
In the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Q->&U<] the »Decoupling« parameters can be set.
The reactive-power demand from the grid can be detected by two different methods. Therefor the decoupling meth-
od »QV-Method« has to be selected first.
• Power Angle Supervision (method 1)
• Pure Reactive Power Supervision (method 2)

Protective Elements
Method 1: Power Angle Supervision

Q1
S
Grid
P Grid
P
0.5
Phi-Power Phi-Power
0.5 P1
S
I1 min QV
.

Protective Elements
Method 2: Pure Reactive Power Supervision

Q1
S
P P
Grid Grid
0.5
Q min QV: Trigger for the Reactive

Power (Positive Phase Sequence
System)
0.5 P1
S
.
A minimum current supervision (I1) in the positive phase sequence system prevents a hyperfunction of the reactive-
power supervision at lower power levels.
For the power angle supervision, the minimum current supervision is always active. For the pure reactive-power
supervision the minimum current supervision is optional.
When using the power angle supervision (method 1):
Set the power angle »Phi-Power« (Default setting 3°).

Select a suitable minimum current »I min QV« (Default setting 0.1 In) which prevents false tripping.
When using the pure reactive power supervision (method 2):
Set the reactive-power threshold »Q min QV«(Default setting 0.05 Sn).

Optionally select a suitable minimum current »I min QV« (Default setting 0.1 In) to prevent false tripping.
Two timer elements are available »t1-QV« and »t2-QV«. Both timer elements will be started at pick-up of the
Q->U< module.
First timer element (Decoupling of the power generation unit)

When several mains parallel power generation units feed one PCC, the first timer element can give a trip
command to the generator circuit breaker of the power generation unit (Default setting 0.5 s)
Second timer element (Decoupling at the PCC)

For the case, that tripping of the first timer element (decoupling of a certain power generation unit) does not
have the expected effect the second timer element can give a trip command to the circuit breaker at the PCC
(Default setting 1.5 s). This decouples the entire DER from the grid.

643
Q->&V<
2
Phi-Power
Protective Elements
Phi-Power
& Q->&V<.Power Angle

QV-Method
Po we r A ngle Supervision
P ure Reactive Power Superv

& Q->&V<.Reactive Power Thres
Q->&V<.Decoupling Distributed Generator

Power Trip dir
t1-QV 0
positive 39
negative
Q1 & Q->&V<.Alarm
Reactive Power Thres
&
-1 * Q1
>1
MRA4
&
VLL< QV
Q->&V<.Decoupling PCC
VL12 t2-QV 0
&
VL23
VL31
Q->&V<.VLL too low

I1 min QV
I1
I1 Release
&
active >1
inactive
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Q->&V< Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Q->&V< Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<]
Power Trip dir By means of this parameter the trip direction of active positive, positive [Protection Para
and reactive power can be inverted within the QV-
negative /Global Prot Para
Module (sign reversal).
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Q->&V< Module

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
/Q->&V<
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
disturbed measuring circuit (e.g. caused by a fuse /Intercon-Prot
failure).
/Q->&V<
/General settings]
QV-Method Selection of the Q(V)-Method: Power Angle or Reactive Power Angle Su- Power Angle [Protection Para
Power Threshold pervision, Supervision
/<1..4>
Pure Reactive
/Intercon-Prot
Power Superv
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]
I1 Release Activation of the "I1 Minimum Current"-Criterion. inactive, active [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
Only available if: QV-Method = Power Angle
Supervision /Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]
I1 min QV Activation of an "I1 Minimum Current" of the rated 0.01 - 0.20In 0.10In [Protection Para
current of the (distributed) energy resource can prevent
/<1..4>
faulty tripping.
/Intercon-Prot
Only available if:Activation of the "I1 Minimum Current"-
/Q->&V<
Criterion. = active
/Decoupling]
VLL< QV Undervoltage threshold (line-to-line voltage!) 0.70 - 1.00Vn 0.85Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]

Protective Elements

Phi-Power Trigger Phi-Power (Positive Phase Sequence System) 0 - 10° 3° [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: QV-Method = Power Angle
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]
Q min QV Trigger for the Reactive Power (Positive Phase 0.01 - 0.20Sn 0.05Sn [Protection Para
Sequence System)
/<1..4>
Only available if: QV-Method = Pure Reactive Power /Intercon-Prot
Superv
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]
t1-QV First timer. If this timer has elapsed, a trip signal will be 0.00 - 2.00s 0.5s [Protection Para
issued to the (local) energy resource.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]
t2-QV Second timer. If this timer is elapsed, the an trip signal 0.00 - 4.00s 1.5s [Protection Para
will be issued to the PCC (Point of Common Coupling)
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<
/Decoupling]

Protective Elements
Input States of the Q->&V< Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Q->&V<]
Q->&V< Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Fuse Fail VT Blo Signal: Blocked by Fuse Failure (VT)
Alarm Signal: Alarm Reactive Power Undervoltage Protection
Decoupling Distributed Generator Signal: Decoupling of the (local) Energy Generator/Resource
Decoupling PCC Signal: Decoupling at the Point of Common Coupling
Power Angle Signal: Admissible power angle exceeded
Reactive Power Thres Signal: Admissible Reactive Power Threshold exceeded
VLL too low Signal: Line-to-Line voltage too low

Protective Elements
Reconnection Module
Available Elements:
ReCon
The reconnection function after a mains decoupling is based on the requirements of the VDE AR-N 41201 and the
German directive „Erzeugungsanlagen am MS-Netz“ 2.
To monitor the reconnection conditions after a mains decoupling, a reconnection function has been implemented in
parallel to the decoupling functions.
Mains voltage (phase to phase) and frequency are the main criteria for reconnection. Always the mains side voltage
(line to line) at the generator circuit breaker (mains side) has to be evaluated.
The reconnection function is only one of the system functions for mains decoupling and return synchronizing.
The reconnection element is tied to decoupling functions like the Q->&U<-element and other integrated decoupling
functions like under-/overvoltage, under-/overfrequency. The reconnection can be triggered by up to 6 decoupling
elements or via digital input signals, logic functions or via scada (communication system).
After a trip of the circuit breaker at the PCC by the decoupling function, reconnection has to be done manually.
Danger of asynchronously reconnection:

The reconnection function does not substitute a synchronizing device.
Before connecting different electrical networks, synchronism has to be secured.
After decoupling by the Q->&V< module or other decoupling functions, like V</V<<, V>/>>, f</> the reconnection
release signal for reconnection the circuit breaker of the power generating unit will be blocked for a preset time
interval (default setting 10 min.). This is to wait until all switching operations are completed. The automatic
reconnection must not be executed before mains voltage and frequency are inside the acceptable bands (quasi
permanent) that means within the admissible limit values for a preset, settable time.
The purpose of the reconnection function is to reconnect a decoupled energy resource safe to the mains/grid.
Release logic for the Generator Circuit Breaker

If the PCC circuit breaker has tripped the reconnection has to be done manually. A special blocking logic is not
necessary.
If a power generating unit should be reconnected by the generator circuit breaker the
voltage transformers have to be installed at the mains side of the circuit breaker.

2 Technische Richtlinie „Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz“, Richtlinie für Anschluss und
Parallelbetrieb von Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz, Ausgabe Juni 2008, BDEW Bundesverband der
Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V., siehe Kap. 3.2.3.2 – Blindleistungs-Unterspannungsschutz Q->&U<

649
ReCon
2
ReconnectTrigger
V< >1
D ecoupling 1
V> D ecoupling 2
f<
Protective Elements
D ecoupling 3
f>
D ecoupling 4
Q->&V<.Decoupling Distributed Generator D ecoupling 5
DI.x
D ecoupling 6
VLL< Release
VL12
&
VL23
VL31
&
&
VLL> Release
VL12
&
VL23
Release logic for the Generator Circuit Breaker
VL31
Mains decoupling
restart die fall back delay timer )
Mains settle timer (each High-Signal at the input will
&
Delay Timer
V Ext Release PCC
Voltage Release
>1 >1 t-Release Blo
0
& & ReCon.Release
inactive
MRA4
active
&
V Ext Release PCC
digital input
Reconnect. Release Cond
V Internal R elease &

parallel: true/false
Frequency Release
V Ext R elease PC C
f< (50,05 Hz) PCC Fuse Fail VT

Voltage Transformer Supervision
i nactive
&
f active
f> (47,5 Hz) &
Distributed Energy Resource already mains
PCC Fuse Fail VT

digital input
ReCon.reconnected
1
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Voltage release via remote control connection from the PCC
The voltage has to be recovered at the PCC before the reconnection is done.
If the PCC is located in the HV level the distance to the PCC is in general large.
The Information that the voltage is restored is to be transmitted via a remote
control signal to the distributed energy resource.
This method has to be used, if the PCC is on the HV side.
This method can be used, if the PCC is on the MV side.
If reconnection relaese should be done via remote control signal from the PCC:
In the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\General settings] the parameter »V Ext Release

PCC Fc« has to be set to »active«. With this setting the voltage release signal from the PCC should be used
(e. g. signal via digital input)
Additionally the parameter »Reclosure Release Cond« in the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-
Prot\ReCon\Release Para\Reconnect. Release Cond] has to be set to »V Ext Release PCC«
Also the remote control release signal has to be assigned to the parameter »V Ext Release PCC« in the
menu [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\General settings]
Voltage release by (self-) measured voltage values
This method can be used, if the PCC is on the MV side.
If the PCC is on the MV side, the device can measure the phase to phase voltages on the mains side and decide if
the mains voltage has stabilized sufficiently for reconnection.
For this method the parameter »V Ext Release PCC Fk« in the menu
[Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\General settings] has to be set to »inactive«.
Additionally the parameter »Reclosure. Release Cond« in the menu

[Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\Reclosure Release] has to be set to »V internal release «

Protective Elements
PCC in HV systems
According to VDE-AR-N 4120 a reconnection of a Distributed Energy Resource to the grid is not allowed before the
following conditions are fulfilled: The frequency of the mains/grid has to be between 47.5 and 51.5 Hz and the
voltage between 93.5 and 127 kV (100 kV level). Voltage and frequency have to be within their limits for minimum 5
minutes.
Reconnection Conditions:
Before reconnection a power generation unit, it has to be secured, that mains voltage has been stabilized
sufficiently. For this a corresponding remote signal has to be available.
Set the parameter »Reclosure Release Cond« in the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-
Prot\ReCon\Release Para] to »V Ext Release PCC«. The required parameter settings are described in the
chapter »General Settings«.
Set the blocking signals in the menu

[Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon] the trigger (decoupling) signals which start the mains recovery
time
(OR logic).
Select a sufficiently long recovery time »t1-Release Blo« in the menu

[Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\Reconnection\Release Para]. Reconnection is only possible after this
timer has been elapsed. This time will be started by the trigger that have to be set in: [Global Para\Intercon-
Prot\Reconnection\Decoupling]
In the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\Reconnection\Release Para] the frequency and voltage

range to be met for reconnection can be set.
Set the paramters for the release of the voltage for the reconnection as described in section ”Voltage release
via remote control connection from the PCC”.

Protective Elements
PCC in MV systems
The German regulation „Erzeugungsanlagen am MS-Netz“ (BDEW, Issue June 2008 [2]) recommends to have a
time delay (some minutes) between mains voltage recovery and reclosure after a trip of a decoupling system as a
result of a mains failure. This is to wait until all switching operations are completed. Usually this is the case after 10
minutes. A reconnection of the DER is only permitted, when the mains voltage is >95% of Vn and the frequency is
in the range of 47.5 Hz to 50.05 Hz.
Set the trigger (decoupling) signals in the menu

[Global Prot Para\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\Decoupling] which start the mains recovery time
(OR logic).
Select a sufficiently long recovery time »t1-Release Blo« in the menu

[Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\Release Para]. Reconnection is only possible after this timer has
been elapsed (This time stage will be triggered by the signals that are assigned in menu [Global
Para\Intercon-Prot\Reconnection\Decoupling]).
In the menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\ReCon\Release Para] the frequency and voltage range to
be met for reconnection can be set.
Set the parameters for the release of the voltage as described in the corresponding sections for the voltage
release.

Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Reconnection Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Reconnection Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
V Ext Release PCC Release Signal by the Point of Common Coupling. The 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
line-to-line voltage is greater than 95% of VN. List
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
PCC Fuse Fail VT Blocking if the fuse of a voltage transformer has tripped 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Protection Para
at the PCC.
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
reconnected This signal indicates the state "reconnected" (mains 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
parallel). List
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
Decoupling1 Decoupling function, that blocks the reconnection. Decoupling -.- [Protection Para
Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]

Protective Elements

Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Functions
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Decoupling Functions of the Reconnection Module
Name Description
-.- No assignment

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description
Q->&V<.Decoupling Signal: Decoupling of the (local) Energy Generator/Resource
Distributed Generator
Q->&V<.Decoupling PCC Signal: Decoupling at the Point of Common Coupling

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Name Description

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Reconnection Module

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
/ReCon
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
failure).
/ReCon
/General settings]
V Ext Release PCC Activate the release signal of the Point of Common inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Fc Coupling. The line-to-line voltage is greater than 95%
active /<1..4>
of VN.
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
Reconnect. This signal indicates that the mains voltage is V Internal Release, V Internal [Protection Para
Release Cond recovered. Release
V Ext Release PCC /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Release Para]
PCC Fuse Fail VT Blocking if the fuse of a voltage transformer has tripped inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Fk at the PCC.
active /<1..4>
Only available if: Reconnect. Release Cond = V Ext /Intercon-Prot
Release PCC
/ReCon
/Release Para]
VLL> Release Minimum voltage (line-to-line) for reclosure 0.70 - 1.00Vn 0.95Vn [Protection Para
(Restoration Voltage)
/<1..4>
Only available if: Reconnect. Release Cond = V /Intercon-Prot
Internal Release
/ReCon
/Release Para]

Protective Elements

VLL< Release Maximum voltage (line-to-line) for reclosure 1.00 - 1.50Vn 1.10Vn [Protection Para
(Restoration Voltage)
/<1..4>
Only available if: Reconnect. Release Cond = V /Intercon-Prot
Internal Release
/ReCon
/Release Para]
f< Lower frequency limit for the reclosure (Restoration 40.00 - 69.90Hz 47.5Hz [Protection Para
Voltage)
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Release Para]
f> Upper frequency limit for the reclosure 40.00 - 69.90Hz 50.05Hz [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Release Para]
t-Release Blo Time stage (delay) for the reclosure of the energy 0.00 - 3600.00s 600s [Protection Para
resources. The Mains seddle time takes based on
/<1..4>
exirience approx. 10 - 15 minutes.
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Release Para]

Protective Elements
Input States of the Reconnection Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
V Ext Release PCC-I Module input state: Release signal is being generated by the [Protection Para
PCC (External Release)
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
PCC Fuse Fail VT-I State of the module input: Blocking if the fuse of a voltage [Protection Para
transformer has tripped at the PCC.
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
reconnected-I This signal indicates the state "reconnected" (mains parallel). [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/General settings]
Decoupling1-I Decoupling function, that blocks the reconnection. [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]

Protective Elements

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/ReCon
/Decoupling]
Reconnection Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Blo by Meas Ciruit Superv Signal: Module blocked by measuring cirucuit supervision
Release Energy Resource Signal: Release Energy Resource. Internal (local) voltage release

Protective Elements
UFLS Under Frequency Load Shedding
Available Elements:
UFLS
The number of distributed energy resources (DER) raises continuously. At the same time the controllable power
reserve through large-scale power plants decreases.
Therefore various grid codes (see also [1], [2],[3],[4],[5]) requirements and regulations stipulate that mains parallel
distributed power plants, consisting of one or more power generation units feeding power into the MV grid, have to
support the grid in case of failures.
The frequency will decrease if more active power is taken out of the grid than fed into the grid.
The main task of the Under Frequency Load Shedding is to stabilize the grid frequency by intelligent load shedding
in order to balance produced and consumed active power.
In contrast to classical load shedding the Under Frequency Load Shedding will shed only those sub-grids that
decrease the frequency (because they consume active power). A shedding of sub-grids that have a positive
influence on the frequency (because they feed active power) will be blocked.
By means of adaptive parameters a non-discriminating load shedding can be established.

2 Technische Richtlinie „Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz“, Richtlinie für Anschluss und
Parallelbetrieb von Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz, Ausgabe Juni 2008, BDEW Bundesverband der
Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V., siehe Kap. 3.2.3.2 – Blindleistungs-Unterspannungsschutz Q->&U<
3 Entso-E Operation Handbook, Policy 5, Emergency Operations, V1, August 2010
4 Distribution Code 2007. VDN, Version 1.1, August 2007
5 FNN: Technische Anforderungen an die Frequenzentlastung, Juni 2012

Protective Elements
Application Excamples
Classical centralized load shedding
Classical load shedding of a sub-grid from a central connection point. The load shedding will be initiated by under
frequency.
Grid
f<
(81U)
Protective Relay
P
Load Load Load

Protective Elements
Classical staged decentral load shedding
A classical decentralized load shedding can be done by deactivating the power flow direction detection.
By means of alternating (rotation) the the sub-grids to be shed a non-discriminating load shedding (of consumers)
can be established.
Grid
Protective Relay
f<48,8 Hz
f< 48 Hz
f<48,6
(81U)
(81U)
(81U)
P
Load Load Load

Protective Elements
Centralized Under Frequency Load Shedding within grids with temporary power supply.
The power flow direction detection (if activated) will block the shedding of sub-grids in case of an under frequency
situation of those sub-grids that stabilize the frequency. The sub-grid will be shed only if it decreases the frequency
(by consuming active power).
Grid
f<
(81U)
P
(32)
Protective Relay
P
P
Generator
Load
G
Load

Protective Elements
Decentralized Under Frequency Load Shedding within grids with temporary power supply
The power flow direction detection (if activated) will block the shedding of sub-grids in case of an under frequency
situation of those sub-grids that stabilize the frequency.
Individual consumers, that destabilize the frequency by consuming active power can be shed non-discriminating.
Grid
P
P
P/f<
P/f<
Generator
Load
G
Load

Protective Elements
Centralized use within grids with predominant power supply
There is no need to use the Under Frequency Load Shedding because on average the sub-grid feeds (produces)
more active power than it consumes. The sub-grid has over all a positive impact on the grid frequency.
Grid
P
P
G G
Load

Protective Elements
Decentralized use within grids with predominant power supply
There is no need to use the Under Frequency Load Shedding because on average the sub-grid feeds (produces)
more active power than it consumes. The sub-grid has over all a positive impact on the grid frequency.
Grid
P
P
G G
Load

Protective Elements
Trip Direction of the Under Frequency Load Shedding
Definitions
Load Flow Arrow System = Consumed active and reactive are counted positive (greater than zero)
Generator Flow Arrow System = produced power is to be counted positive (greater than zero)
By means of the parameter »P Block dir« a sign reversal can be applied to the active power within the UFLS
module. Protective devices that use the load flow arrow (like the MCA4 or the MRA4) are to be set to » Power Trip
dir= negative«. Protective devices that are working on the base of the generator flow arrow system to be set to
»Power Trip dir= positive«.
Parameter Setting of the Under Frequency Load Shedding
The active-power of the positive phase sequence system (P1) is evaluated.
General Settings
Call up menu [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\Intercon-Prot\UFLS]
Within this menu you can:
Assign signals, that activate adaptive parameters.
Assign a signal that blocks the evaluation of the active power flow direction.
Do a sign reversal on the active power. Please refer to chapter ”Trip direction of the under frequency load
shedding“.

Protective Elements
Configuration of the Load Shedding
Call up menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\UFLS]
Within menu [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\UFLS] you can define variant respectively the active power area
that will not lead to a load shedding (load shedding blocked) in case of under frequency.
The active power flow direction can be determined by two different methods. Please select the UFLS method:
• Power Angle Supervision (Method 1)
• Pure Active Power Supervision (Method 2)
• External (Method 4)
Method 1: Power Angle Supervision

A load shedding during under frequency will be blocked, if the active power is within the area limited by the power
angle.
Q1
S
Phi-Power
0.5 No Trip
0.5 P1
S
I1 min QV
.
Phi-Power
UFLS-Method = Power Angle Supervision
The diagram above is in compliance with FNN 5. This diagram shows the
blocking area within the generator arrow flow system.

Protective Elements
Method 2: Pure Active Power Supervision

A trip during under frequency will be blocked if the active power is above the set threshold.
Q1
S
No Trip
0.5
0.5 P1
S
.
UFLS-Method = Pure Active Power Superv
The diagram above is in compliance with FNN 5. This diagram shows the
blocking area within the generator arrow flow system.
Method 3 – classical load shedding without taking into account the active power flow direction
The load shedding will be initiated by under frequency only. The active power flow direction wont be taken into
account.

Protective Elements
A minimum current supervision (I1 min) in the positive phase sequence system prevents a hyper function of the
active-power supervision at lower power levels.
The release voltages determines from which voltage (line-to-line) on the UFLS will be released.
When using the power angle supervision (method 1):
Select »UFLS method = Power Angle Supervision.«

Set the angle »Power Angle« .
Select a suitable minimum current »I1 min« which prevents false tripping.
When using the pure active power supervision (method 2):
Select »UFLS method= Pure Active Power Superv.«

Set the active power threshold »P min«.
Select a suitable minimum current »I min« to prevent false tripping.
When the active power flow direction should not be taken into account (Method 3 – classical load shedding)
Set the parameter »UFLS method = No Pdir / Ex Pdir«.
When the active power flow direction should not be taken into account (Method 4)
Set the parameter »UFLS method = No Pdir / Ex Pdir«.

Assign within menu [Protection Para/Global Prot Para/Intercon-Prot/UFLS] onto parameter »Ex Pdir« a
signal that indicates the active power flow direction.
Under frequency threshold and tripping delay
The following parameters can be used as adaptive parameters in order to establish a non-discriminating load
shedding (please refer to section non-disrcriminating load shedding by means of adaptive parameters)
Set the under frequency threshold f<

Set the tripping delay »t-UFLS« . This timer will be started if the ULFS module is alarmed.

Protective Elements
Non-discriminating load shedding by means of adaptive parameters
By means of adaptive parameters a non-discriminating load shedding can be established. By means of this
commissioning and setting parameters newly is not required. Adaptive parameters offer the possibility to switch a
single parameter by an activation signal without switching to another entire parameter set.
Assign the signals that should activate the corresponding adaptive parameters within the Global Parameters
[Protection Para\Global Prot Para\Intercon-Prot\UFLS] (please refer to chapter Adpative Parameters).
Within the Protection Parameters [Protection Para\Set[x]\Intercon-Prot\UFLS\Load shedding] the adaptive

parameters itself can be set.

Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the UFLS Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the UFLS Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
Ex Pdir Ignore (block) the evaluation of the power flow 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
direction. This results in classical frequency based load List
/Global Prot Para
shedding functionallity. When this feature is set and
active, the functionallity of the module turns into /Intercon-Prot
conventional, only frequency based load shedding.
/UFLS]
P Block dir By means of this parameter the block direction of active positive, negative [Protection Para
power can be inverted within this (sign reversal).
negative /Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]

Protective Elements

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
Setting Group Parameters of the UFLS Module

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
/UFLS
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
failure).
/UFLS
/General settings]
UFLS-Method How should the active power be taken into account. No Pdir / Ex Pdir, No Pdir / Ex Pdir [Protection Para
Power Angle Su- /<1..4>
pervision,
/Intercon-Prot
Pure Active Power
/UFLS
Superv
/LoadShedding]
I1 Release "I Minimum Current" in order to prevent faulty tripping. inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Module will be released if the current exceeds this
active /<1..4>
value.
/Intercon-Prot
Only available if: UFLS-Method = Power Angle
/UFLS
Supervision
/LoadShedding]

Protective Elements

I1 min Minimum current 0.02 - 0.20In 0.05In [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: I1 Release = active
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]
VLL min Minimum Voltage 0.50 - 1.00Vn 0.70Vn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]
Power Angle Trigger Phi-Power (Positive Phase Sequence System) 0 - 10° 5° [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: UFLS-Method = Power Angle
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]
P min Minimum Value (threshold) for the Active Power 0.01 - 0.10Sn 0.05Sn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
Only available if: UFLS-Method = Pure Active Power
Superv /Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]
f< Underfrequency threshold 45.00 - 65.00Hz 49.00Hz [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]
t-UFLS Tripping delay time 0.00 - 300.00s 0.1s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS
/LoadShedding]

Protective Elements
Input States of the UFLS Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
Ex Pdir-I Ignore (block) the evaluation of the power flow direction. This [Protection Para
results in classical frequency based load shedding functionallity.
/Global Prot Para
When this feature is set and active, the functionallity of the
module turns into conventional, only frequency based load /Intercon-Prot
shedding.
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/UFLS]

Protective Elements
UFLS Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Fuse Fail VT Blo Signal: Blocked by Fuse Failure (VT)
I1 Release Signal: "I Minimum Current" in order to prevent faulty tripping. Module will be released if the
current exceeds this value.
VLL min Signal: Minimum Voltage
Power Angle Signal: Trigger Phi-Power (Positive Phase Sequence System)
P min Signal: Minimum Value (threshold) for the Active Power
P Blo Loadshedding Signal: Load shedding blocked based on evaluation of active power
f< Signal: Underfrequency threshold
Alarm Signal: Alarm P->&f<
Trip Signal: Signal: Trip

Protective Elements
LVRT – Low Voltage Ride Through [27(t)]

Available Elements:
LVRT[1] ,LVRT[2]
Why LVRT? - Motivation for LVRT

The rapid development of distributed resources (DR) based on the renewable energy such as wind, solar and
others has been changing the electric power system and concepts for its control, protection, metering and
communication rapidly, too.
One of the important challenges for the interconnection between the DR and local electric power system (EPS) is
the behaviour of the DR during disturbances within the electrical power system. Most of the disturbances within the
EPS are characterized mainly by non-permanent system voltage collapses (voltage dip/sag) with different time
durations.
According to traditional protection concepts a distributed energy resource should be tripped as fast as possible from
the grid in case of a significant low voltage condition. This is no longer acceptable because of the continuous rising
share of distributed energy resources within the energy market. Uncontrolled disconnecting significant parts of the
power generation during disturbances within the grid endangers the system stability of the electrical power system.
It was reported3 that during system fault with low voltage drops, a complete 5000 MW wind park (without LVRT
capability) was decoupled from the electrical power system. The consequence was a dangerous system voltage
and frequency instability.
Based on experiences like that, lots of electric utilities and state public utilities have issued interconnection
standards which require Low-Voltage-Ride-Through (LVRT) capability during EPS disturbances.
What does LVRT mean in detail?

It is no longer allowed to decouple/disconnect a DR from the grid just because of a non-permanent voltage dip.
Protective relays and control units have to take this into account.
Instead of that, the distributed resource has to be able to ride through such disturbances according to a LVRT
profile. The shape of this LVRT profile is very similar according to the different guidelines within different countries
or local utilities. But they could differ in details.
By means of LVRT the system stability is improved in situations, when the contribution of DRs is needed mostly.
The importance of LVRT will rise with the growing share of DRs within the electrical power system.
Based on the technical requirements mentioned above, a LVRT protection function was developed for the
HighPROTEC product line which covers the LVRT profiles (capabilities) defined by all relevant national and local
grid interconnection standards.
The following drawing shows details on the different LVRT standards in different countries. Please note, that the
standards and hence the grid codes are in some countries still under development.

Protective Elements
Voltage [%]
Short Circuit Duration [s]
Source: eBWK Bd. 60 (2008) Nr. 4
Authors: Dipl.-Ing. Thomas Smolka, Dr.-Ing. Karl-Heinz Weck, Zertifizierungstelle der FGH e.V., Mannheim, sowie Dipl.-Ing. (FH) Matthias Bartsch,
Enercon GmbH, Aurich.
Functional Principle of the LVRT
From the grid operators point of view, a LVRT profile defines a voltage profile which a distributed energy resource,
that is connected to the grid, should be able to ride through in case of a low voltage event (voltage dip). The
distributed energy resource is only allowed to disconnect from the grid if the voltage at the point of common
coupling drops below the LVRT borderline. In other words, a LVRT protection function is a time-dependent voltage
supervision according to a predefined voltage profile. The time-dependent voltage supervision will be started, as
soon as the voltage at the point of common coupling falls below the start voltage level. The LVRT will be stopped,
as soon as the voltage rises above the recover voltage level.

Protective Elements
Auto Reclosure controlled LVRT
As already mentioned, the purpose of LVRT is to keep the DR connected to the grid in case of a non-permanent
voltage dip/sag. For faults within the electrical power system by which auto-reclosing function is used to coordinate
with the short circuit protections like overcurrent or distance protections, it is to expect that more than one voltage
dips are coming one after another in a time period which is determined by the preset auto-reclosing dead times and
protection relay operating times. Voltage dips/sags caused by the dead times of auto reclosings are non-permanent.
Hence the protective device has to be able to detect voltage sags/dips in accordance with an auto reclosure and
issues a trip command in that case that the voltage drops below the profile or that all parameterized auto reclosure
shots were unsuccessful.
The following figure1 depicts the voltage excursion by an unsuccessful two-shot Auto-Reclosing. According to some
grid codes1 it is obligated for a distributed generation to ride through a series of temporary voltage dips, but can be
disconnected from the electrical power system immediately for a permanent fault. This kind of applications can be
realized easily using the feature of »AR-controlled LVRT« in LVRT protection function.
V/Vn (in pu) 1. Fault Inception

re-closing onto Fault re-closing onto Fault
Borderline 1
Borderline 2
0.3
typical tripping-times:
AR-Dead time, typical tripping-times: AR-Dead time, typical : 15s - 20 s
0.1s - 10 s
typical: 0.1s - 10 s
0.3 s - 2 s
0 0.15 0 0.15 1.00 0 1.00 t [s]
Source: Technische Richtlinie , Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz, Ausgabe Juni 2008, BDEW Bundesverband der Energie- und
Wasserwirtschaft e.V. (Page 89).
Figure: Run of voltage curve during an unsuccessful two-shot auto reclosure
Functional Description of the LVRT

The LVRT element is designed for distributed generation resources that operate in parallel with the grid. It
supervises system voltage disturbances by comparing them with a configurable voltage profile that is triggered once
the system voltage falls below a configurable start value »Vstart<«.
Once triggered, the LVRT element supervises the system voltage consecutively and determines if the voltage
excursion is above or below of the preset voltage profile. A trip signal is only issued if the voltage excursion exits the
“Ride-Through” region and goes into the “Tripping” region.

Protective Elements
1.1
1.0
Vrecover >
Ride Through Region
Vstart<
0.9
0.8
V/Vn (in pu)
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
Trip Region
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
t=0 0.500 1.000 1.500 2.000 2.500 3.000
t [s]
V[x](t[x]) = Curve Setting Points
The LVRT element will change into standby again as soon as the system voltage recovers: That means, the voltage
has risen above the preset recover voltage »Vrecover«.
Auto Reclosure controlled LVRT
In case that the LVRT should be able to ride through auto reclosures, the parameter »ARControlledLVRT« has to
be set to »active«.
In order to supervise the Low Voltage Ride Through events during reclosure, the user has to set the supervision
timer »tLVRT« at least equal or greater than the complete Multi-Shot AR-runtime. In addition to that the number of
permitted LVRTs has to be set whichis usually the number of auto reclosure attempts. The actual LVRT supervision
will be controlled to ride through the preset LVRT voltage pattern. By reaching the preset number of LVRT events
»NumberOfLVRT«, the actual LVRT supervision assumes that the detected system fault is permanent, ignores the
voltage profile and issues a tripping command instantaneously in order to disconnect the distributed resource from
the electrical power system.

693
LVRT
name = LVRT[1]...[n] name.t-LVRT is running
name.t-LVRT
name.AR controlled t
0
Protective Elements
LVRT
&
active &
inacti ve
name.Alarm L1
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings 28
2 (Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) name.Alarm L2
29
name.Meas Circuit
name.Alarm L3
Superv
inacti ve
30
name.Alarm
active 14
NumOf Vdips in t-LVRT name.Trip L1
&
12a 12b &
>1 + 20
n<N
R
38a 38b
name.Trip L2
&
Device planning
21
LVRT.Mode
MRA4
do not use name.Trip L3
name.Alarm Mode &
use LVRT Profile
& 22
any one
V
Vn Ride Through Region
name.Measuring Mode any two V st a rt<
&
Phase to Ground all
name.Measuring name.Trip
method Trip Region
Phase to Phase 15
&
Fundamental
t
φ
name.TripCmd
True RMS name.Vstart< &
15a
VL1
φ
VL2
&
VL3
name.Vrecover>

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

use
Setting Group Parameters of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
/LVRT[1]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/General settings]
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
Measuring Mode Measuring/Supervision Mode: Determines if the phase- Phase to Ground, Phase to Ground [Protection Para
to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages are to be
supervised
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]

Protective Elements

True RMS /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
Alarm Mode Alarm criterion for the voltage protection stage. any one, any one [Protection Para
any two, /<1..4>
all /Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
active /<1..4>
failure).
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
AR controlled LVRT Activates the supervision of the number of voltage dips inactive, inactive [Protection Para
during a defined time (t-LVRT).
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
Number of V dips to Number of voltage dips until the disconnection signal 1-6 1 [Protection Para
trip (trip) will be issued.
/<1..4>
Only available if:AR controlled LVRT = active /Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/General settings]
t-LVRT This timer defines the supervision interval 0.00 - 3000.00s 30.00s [Protection Para
(window/period) for counting the number of voltage dips
/<1..4>
to trip (“No of V dips to trip”). The first voltage dip will
start the timer. The counted number of voltage dips will /Intercon-Prot
be reset if the timer is expired. The timer will also be
/LVRT[1]
reset if the maximum “No of V dips to trip” is reached.
/General settings]
Only available if:AR controlled LVRT = active
Vstart< A voltage dip is detected if the measured voltage falls 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.90Vn [Protection Para
below this threshold.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]

Protective Elements

Vrecover> The voltage is recovered if the measured voltage raises 0.10 - 1.50Vn 0.93Vn [Protection Para
above this threshold.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
V(t1) Voltage value of a point V(t(n)). These points define the 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.00Vn [Protection Para
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
t1 Point in time for the corresponding voltage value 0.00 - 20.00s 0.00s [Protection Para
V(t(n)). These points define the LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]

Protective Elements

LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]

Protective Elements

/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
LVRT profile.
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]
/<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]
/LVRT Profile]

Protective Elements
General application notes on setting the LVRT
The LVRT menu comprises among other things the following parameters:
• By means of »Vstart«, the LVRT will be started (triggered).

• By menas of »Vrecover« the LVRT will detect the end of the disturbance.
• Please note, that the »Vrecover« should be greater than »Vstart«. If this is not the case, the internal
plausibility supervision will set »Vrecover« to 103% of »Vstart«.
• »Vk«, »tk« are the set points for setting the LVRT-profile.
Special application notes on setting the LVRT-profile
• In many cases not all available setpoints are needed in order to build up the LVRT-profile.
• In case that not all available setpoints are used, the unused setpoints can be set to the same values as the
last set point.
• Set points should be selected in a manner of left-to-right with time begin at t=0 (tk+1>tk).
• The voltage setpoints must be selected in a ascending manner (Vk+1>Vk).
• The voltage value for last used set point should be set greater than the starting voltage. If this is not the
case, the starting voltage will be modified internally to the value of maximum voltage set value.
In general the factory default LVRT-profile is preset based on the Type-I curve from Germany Grid Code1) (BDEW
2008) as shown in the following drawing:
Default Voltage Profile (Germany Grid Code: BDEW-T ype I)

120
110
Vrecover >
100 V(t5)=0.90
t5 =1.50
V(t6)=0.90
t6 =3.00
90 Vstart<
80 V(t3)=0.70
Voltage [%]
t3 =0.15
70
V(t4)=0.70
t4 =0.70
60
50
40
30
20
10 V(t1)=0
t1 =0
V(t2)=0
t2 =0.15
0
− 1 − 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
time [s]
LVRT-Default Profile (BDEW-TypI)

Protective Elements
Global Protection Parameters of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]
Inputs of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/LVRT[1]]

Protective Elements
Signals (Output States) of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm voltage stage
Trip Signal: Trip
t-LVRT is running Signal: t-LVRT is running
Counter Values of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

NumOf Vdips in t-LVRT Number of Voltage dips during t-LVRT [Operation
/Count and RevData
/LVRT[1]]
Cr Tot Numb of Vdips Counter Total number of voltage dips. [Operation
/Count and RevData
/LVRT[1]]
Cr Tot Numb of Vdips to Counter Total number of voltage dips that caused a Trip. [Operation
Trip
/Count and RevData
/LVRT[1]]

Protective Elements
Direct Commands of the Low-Voltage-Ride-Through

Res LVRT Cr Reset of the counter for the total number of voltage inactive, inactive [Operation
dips and reset of the counter of the total number of
active /Reset]
voltage dips that caused a trip.
References:
1
Technische Richtlinie „Erzeugungsanlagen am Mittelspannungsnetz – Richtlinie für Anschluss und Parallelbetrieb von Erzeugungsanlagen am
Mittelspannungsnetz“, Juni 2008, BDEW, Berlin
2
IEEE Std 1547™-2003, IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems.
3
Title: Can China Wind Power meet the challenge of “Low-Voltage-Ride-Through” Date: 18.05.2011 Author: Shi Feng-Lei.
http://energy.people.com.cn/GB/14667118.html.

Protective Elements
Intertripping (Remote)
Elements:
Intertripping
This module enables intertripping (executing external trip commands)
Application Example
Several Distributed Energy Resources are feeding mains parallel into the grid via one point of common coupling
(PCC).
A mains protection relay is mounted at the point of common coupling. This might be a distance protection relay that
protects the outgoing transmission line.
Let us assume that the outgoing transmission line becomes faulty ❶.

The feeding Distributed Energy Resources will be disconnected from the outgoing transmission line.
Now the produced electrical energy cannot be fed into the grid.
The element „Intertripping“ provides the option to pass the trip command from the mains protection device to the
feeding distributed energy resource.
The trip decision of the mains protection relay (at the point of common coupling) will be transmitted via Digital Inputs
to the „Intertripping“ elements of the protective devices of the distributed energy resources within the downstream
❷.
The feeding distributed energy resources will overtake the trip command and the corresponding infeeds will be
disconnected from the mains ❸. The trip decision of the mains protection device within the upstream will be
overtaken.

Protective Elements
1
Grid
2
Trip
2
2
MCA4
digital input
digital input
3 3
Trip Trip
Intertripping
Intertripping
MCDGV4
MCDGV4
G G

705
Protective Elements
name = Remote Trip
Remote Trip
*=If no signal is assigned to the alarm input
Ext Sudd Press.Trip-I
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings Ext Sudd Press.Alarm-I

2 (Stage is not deactivated
and no active blocking
signals)
MRA4
&
name.Alarm Ext Sudd Press.Alarm
14
14*
&
name.Trip Ext Sudd Press.Trip
15
&
Ext Sudd Press.TripCmd
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings 15a
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Intertripping Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Intertripping Module

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
Alarm Assignment for External Alarm 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
List
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
Trip External trip of the CB if the state of the assigned signal 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
is true. List
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Intertripping Module

active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
active /<1..4>
/Mains Decouplg
"ExBlo Fc=active".
/Intertripping]
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
active /<1..4>
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]

Protective Elements
Intertripping Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
Alarm-I Module input state: Alarm [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]
Trip-I Module input state: Trip [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Intercon-Prot
/Mains Decouplg
/Intertripping]

Protective Elements
Intertripping Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Intertripping
Test of the Intertripping (Remote) module.
Necessary means:
Dependent on the application.
Procedure:
Simulate the functionality of the Intertripping Trip (pickup, trip, blockings) by (de-)energizing of the digital inputs.

All external pickups, external trips, and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device.
PQS - Power [32, 37]
Available stages:
PQS[1] ,PQS[2] ,PQS[3] ,PQS[4] ,PQS[5] ,PQS[6]
Each of the elements can be used as P<, P>, Pr>, Q<, Q>, Qr>, S< or S> within the device planning.
P< and P> are settable and effective in positive active power range, Q< and Q> in positive reactive power range.
These modes are used for protecting against underload or overload in positive power direction.
The apparent power makes S< or S> effective like a circle in all power quadrants. Protection is against underload
and overload.
In reverse mode, Pr> is effective in negative active power range and Qr> in negative reactive power range. Both
modes protect against power direction reversing from positive into negative direction.
The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes.

Protective Elements
Setting the Thresholds
All settings/thresholds within the power module are to be set as per unit thresholds. Per definition S n is to be used
as scale basis.
Sn=√3* VoltageTransformerLine-to-Line_Rated_Voltage* CurrentTransformerRated_Current
If thresholds should base on primary side values:
Sn=√3* VoltageTransformerPri_Line-to-Line_Rated_Voltage* CurrentTransformerPri_Rated_Current
If thresholds should base on secondary side values
Sn=√3* VoltageTransformerSec_Line-to-Line_Rated_Voltage * CurrentTransformerSec_Rated_Current
Example – Field Data
CurrentTransformer CT pri =200 A; CT sec = 5 A

VoltageTransformer VT pri = 10 kV; VT sec =100 V
Generator rated power 2 MVA
Reverse power should trip at 3%.
Setting Example 1 for Pr> based on primary side values
Reverse power should trip at 3%. That means 60 kW (on primary side).
First Sn is to be calculated:
Sn=√3 * VoltageTransformerPri_Line-to-Line_Rated_Voltage* CurrentTransformerPri_Rated_Current
Sn= 1.73 * 10000 V * 200 A = 3.464 MVA
The following threshold is to be set for Pr> within the device = 60 kW / Sn
Pr> = 60 kW/ 3464 kVA = 0,0173 Sn

Protective Elements
Setting Example 1 for Pr> based on secondary side values
Reverse power should trip at 3%. That means 60 kW (on primary side).
First Sn is to be calculated:
Sn=√3* VoltageTransformerSec_Line-to-Line_Rated_Voltage * CurrentTransformerSec_Rated_Current
Sn= 1,73 * 100 V * 5 A = 866,05 VA
Convert the reverse power onto the secondary side:
Prsec> = PrPri> / (VTPri_VLL Rated/VTSSec_VLL Rated* CTPri Rated Current/CTSec Rated Current) = 60 kW / 4000 = 15 W
The following threshold is to be set for Pr> within the device = 15W /Sn
Pr> = 15 W / 866 VA= 0,0173 Sn

Protective Elements
P< P>
Q>
Q<
S>
P
S<

Protective Elements
Pr>
P
Qr>

714
Protective Elements
PQS[1]...[n]
name = PQS[1]...[n]

38a 38b & name.Alarm
name.MeasCircSv Volt
14
inactive
>1
active
name.t
40 & & &
t 0 name.Trip
name.MeasCircSv Curr
15
inactive
MRA4
active
Device planning
name.TripCmd
PQS.Mode &
P> 15a
P<
Pr>
Q> >1
Q<
Qr>
S>
S<
P name.Mode
Q
P>, P<, Pr>, Q>, Q<, Qr>, S>, S<

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device planning parameters of the Power Protection module

Mode Mode do not use, PQS[1]: P> [Device planning]
P>, PQS[2]: do not
use
P<,
PQS[3]: do not
Pr<,
use
Pr>,
PQS[4]: do not
Q>, use
Q<, PQS[5]: do not
use
Qr<,
PQS[6]: do not
Qr>,
use
S>,
S<
Global protection parameter of the Power Protection-module

/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /P-Prot
/PQS[1]]

Protective Elements
Parameter set parameters of the Power Protection module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/stage. inactive, PQS[1]: active [Protection Para
active PQS[2]: inactive /<1..4>
PQS[3]: inactive /P-Prot
PQS[4]: inactive /PQS[1]]
PQS[5]: inactive
PQS[6]: inactive
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
MeasCircSv Volt Measuring Circuit Supervision Voltage inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = P<
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Q< /P-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = S<
/PQS[1]]
MeasCircSv Curr Measuring Circuit Supervision Curent inactive, inactive [Protection Para
active /<1..4>
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Q< /P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
P> Over(load) Active Power Pickup Value. Can be used for 0.003 - 10.000Sn PQS[1]: 1.0Sn [Protection Para
monitoring the maximum allowed forward power limits
PQS[2]: 1.20Sn /<1..4>
of transformers or overhead lines. Definition for Sn is
as follows: Sn = 1.7321 * VT rating * CT rating. The PQS[3]: 1.20Sn /P-Prot
voltage is the line-to-line voltage.
PQS[4]: 1.20Sn /PQS[1]]
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = P> PQS[5]: 1.20Sn
PQS[6]: 1.20Sn

Protective Elements

P< Under(load) Active Power Pickup Value (e.g. caused by 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
idling motors). Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn =
/<1..4>
1.7321 * VT rating * CT rating. The voltage is the line-
to-line voltage. /P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
Pr> Overload Reverse Active Power Pickup Value. 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.020Sn [Protection Para
Protection against reverse feeding into the power
/<1..4>
supply network. Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn =
1.7321 * VT rating * CT rating. The voltage is the line- /P-Prot
to-line voltage.
/PQS[1]]
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Pr>
Pr< Under Reverse Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn = 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
to-line voltage.
/P-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = P
/PQS[1]]
Q> Over(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. Monitoring 0.003 - 10.000Sn 1.20Sn [Protection Para
the maximum allowed reactive power of the electrical
/<1..4>
equipment like transformers or overhead lines). If the
maximum value is exceeded a condensator bank could /P-Prot
be switched off. Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn =
/PQS[1]]
to-line voltage.
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Q>

Q< Under(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. Monitoring 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
the minimum value of the reactive power. If it falls
/<1..4>
below the set value a condensator bank could be
switched on. Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn = 1.7321 /P-Prot
* VT rating * CT rating. The voltage is the line-to-line
/PQS[1]]
voltage.
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Q<

Qr> Overload Reverse Reactive Power Pickup Value 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.020Sn [Protection Para
Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn = 1.7321 * VT rating *
/<1..4>
CT rating. The voltage is the line-to-line voltage.
/P-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Qr>
/PQS[1]]
Qr< Under Reverse Definition for Sn is as follows: Sn = 0.003 - 10.000Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
/<1..4>
to-line voltage.
/P-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = Q
/PQS[1]]
S> Over(load) Apparent Power Pickup Value Definition for 0.02 - 10.00Sn 1.20Sn [Protection Para
Sn is as follows: Sn = 1.7321 * VT rating * CT rating.
/<1..4>
The voltage is the line-to-line voltage.
/P-Prot
Only available if: Device planning: PQS.Mode = S>
/PQS[1]]

Protective Elements

S< Under(load) Apparent Power Pickup Value Definition 0.02 - 10.00Sn 0.80Sn [Protection Para
for Sn is as follows: Sn = 1.7321 * VT rating * CT rating.
/<1..4>
The voltage is the line-to-line voltage.
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
t Tripping delay 0.00 - 1100.00s PQS[1]: 1.00s [Protection Para
PQS[2]: 0.01s /<1..4>
PQS[3]: 0.01s /P-Prot
PQS[4]: 0.01s /PQS[1]]
PQS[5]: 0.01s
PQS[6]: 0.01s
PowMeasMethod Determines if the active power, reactive power and Fundamental, Fundamental [Protection Para
apparent power are calculated on the basis of RMS or
True RMS /<1..4>
DFT.
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
States of the inputs of the Power Protection module

/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/P-Prot
/PQS[1]]

Protective Elements
Signals of the Power Protection module (states of the outputs)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection

Protective Elements
Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module

Object to be tested
• Testing the projected Power Protection Modules.
• P>
• P<
• Pr
• Q>
• Q<
• Qr
• S>
• S<
Necessary means
3-phase AC current source
Timer
Procedure – Testing the wiring
• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.
• The following measuring values have to be shown:

P=0.86 Pn
Q=0.5 Qn
S=1 Sn
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign check the
wiring.
The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the
tripping values and tripping delays that apply to your switchboard.
If you are testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g. P>) start by 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
In case that you are testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g. P<) start by 120% of
the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks
up.
If you are testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g. P>) start a
timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from
80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value.
If you are testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g. P<) start a
timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from
120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value.

Protective Elements
P>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring
inputs of the relay (PF=1).
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic
sign.
Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Pn).
In order to test the tripping thresholds feed 0.9 times rated current to the
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks
up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant.
Compare the tripping value to the parameterized.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=1).
sign.
In order to test the tripping delay feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring
inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In.
Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure
the tripping delay at the output of the relay.

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values
and fallback ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.

Protective Elements
Q>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1,1 Qn)
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90° phase shift) to the
measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0).
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic
sign.
Set the tripping threshold (e.g. 1.1 Qn).
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)
Feed rated voltage and rated current (90° phase shift) to the measuring inputs
of the relay (PF=0).
sign.


Protective Elements
P<
relay (PF=1).
sign.
measuring inputs of the relay. Reduce the current slowly until the relay picks
relay (PF=1).
sign.


Protective Elements
Q<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
sign.
measuring inputs of the relay. Reduce the current slowly until the relay picks
sign.


Protective Elements
Pr
Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift between
voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic
sign.
Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Pn).
Feed rated voltage and rated current with 180 degree phase shift between
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic
sign.


Protective Elements
Qr
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.2 Qn)
Feed rated voltage and rated current with -90 degree phase shift between
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic
sign.
Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Qn).
inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure
that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the
tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Feed rated voltage and rated current with -90 degree phase shift between
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic
sign.
Set the tripping threshold (e. g. 0.2 Qn).
measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to
0.3 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant.


Protective Elements
S>
Feed 80% of the S> threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the fed power slowly until the relay picks up. Compare the measured
value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting.
Testing the tripping delay
Feed 80% of the S> threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the fed power with an abrupt change to 120% of the

S> threshold. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.


Protective Elements
S<
Feed 120% of the S< threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Reduce the fed power slowly until the relay picks up. Compare the measured
value at the time of tripping to the parameterized setting.
Testing the tripping delay
Feed 120% of the S< threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Reduce the fed power with an abrupt change to 80% of the

S< threshold. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.


Protective Elements
PF - Power Factor [55]
Available stages:
PF[1] ,PF[2]
These Element supervises the Power Factor within a defined area (limits).
The area is defined by four parameters.
The Trigger quadrant (lead or lag).
The Threshold (Power Factor value)
The Reset quadrant (lead or lag).
The Reset Value (Power Factor value)
"Reverse" current lags voltage current leads voltage
Quadrant2 Quadrant1
Reactive Power flows into the
-P (Watts) +P (Watts)
-Q (Vars) -Q (Vars)
-PF +PF
source
Active Power flows into the source Active Power flows into the load
Reactive Power flows into the load
-P (Watts) +P (Watts)
+Q (Vars) +Q (Vars)
-PF +PF
Quadrant3 Quadrant4
"Reverse" current leads voltage current lags voltage

730
PF[1]...[n]
Protective Elements
name = PF[1]...[n]

name.Alarm
Trig Mode 14
I leads V
I lags V
Pickup Delay And Release Delay
name.Pre-trig Comp name.Post-trig Comp

name.Measuring name.Trigger-PF
method name.Compensator
Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time
Fundamental
True RMS
MRA4
& name. t
φ t 0 name.Trip
PF Res Mode
S Q 15
I leads V
I lags V R
name.TripCmd
&
name.Reset-PF
15a
V
<20%Vn
>1 name.Impossible
>1
ILx max
<0.5%In

DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device planning parameters of the Power Factor module

use
Global protection parameter of the Power Factor-module

/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /PF-Prot
/PF[1]]

Protective Elements
Parameter set parameters of the Power Factor module

active /<1..4>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
True RMS /<1..4>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Trig Mode Trigger Mode. Should the Module be triggered if the I leads V, I lags V [Protection Para
Current Phasor is leading to the Voltage Phasor =
I lags V /<1..4>
Lead? Or should the Module be triggered if the Current
Phasor is lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag? /PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Trigger-PF This is the power factor where the relay will pick-up. 0.5 - 0.99 0.8 [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Res Mode Trigger Mode. Should the Module be triggered if the I leads V, I leads V [Protection Para
Current Phasor is leading to the Voltage Phasor =
I lags V /<1..4>
Lead? Or should the Module be triggered if the Current
Phasor is lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag? /PF-Prot
/PF[1]]

Protective Elements

Reset-PF This setting is the power factor, at which the relay will 0.5 - 0.99 0.99 [Protection Para
reset the power factor trip. It is like setting a hysteresis
/<1..4>
for the Trigger setting.
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
/<1..4>
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Pre-trig Comp Pickup (Pre-trigger) time for the Compensation Signal. 0.00 - 300.00s 5.00s [Protection Para
When this timer is elapsed the compensation signal will
/<1..4>
be activated.
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
Post-trig Comp Post-trigger time of the Compensation Signal. When 0.00 - 300.00s 5.00s [Protection Para
this timer is elapsed the compensation signal will be
/<1..4>
deactivated.
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
States of the inputs of the Power Factor module

/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/PF-Prot
/PF[1]]

Protective Elements
Signals of the Power Factor module (states of the outputs)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible

Protective Elements
Commissioning: Power Factor [55]
Object to be tested
Testing the projected Power Factor Modules
Necessary means
3-phase AC current source
Timer
Procedure – Testing the wiring
• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.
• The following measuring values have to be shown:

P=0.86 Pn
Q=0.5 Qn
S=1 Sn
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign check the
wiring.
In this example PF-Trigger is set to 0.86 = 30° (lagging) and PF-Reset is set
to 0.86 = 30° leading.
Carry out the test with the settings (trigger and reset) that fit to your
switchboard.
Testing the threshold values (Trigger) (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging)
• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) until the relay picks up.
• Write down the pickup value.
Testing the Reset (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading)
• Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF = 1 (current pointer leading) until the alarm
drops off.
• Write down the reset value.

Protective Elements
Testing the trip delay (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging)
• Feed rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) with an abrupt change to
PF = 0.707 (45°) lagging.
• Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the
parameterized.

The measured total tripping delays, threshold and reset values correspond with those values, specified in the ad-
justment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data.
ExP - External Protection
Available stages:
ExP[1] ,ExP[2] ,ExP[3] ,ExP[4]
All 4 stages of the external protection ExP[1]...[4] are identically structured.
By using the module External Protection the following can be incorporated into the device function: trip commands,
alarms and blockades of external protection facilities. Devices which are not provided with a communication
interface can be connected to the control system as well.

737
Protective Elements
ExP[1]...[n]
name = ExP[1]...[n]
*=If no signal is assigned to the alarm input
name.Trip-I
Please Refer To Diagram: Blockings name.Alarm-I

2 (Stage is not deactivated
and no active blocking
signals)
MRA4
&
name.Alarm name.Alarm
14
14*
&
name.Trip name.Trip
15
&
name.TripCmd
Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings 15a
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Protective Elements
Device Planning Parameters of the Module External Protection

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Module External Protection

/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/Global Prot Para
signal is true. /ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm Assignment for External Alarm 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
List
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip External trip of the CB if the state of the assigned signal 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
is true. List
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]

Protective Elements
Setting Group Parameters of the Module External Protection

active /<1..4>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /ExP
/ExP[1]]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
module/stage.
active /<1..4>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /ExP
/ExP[1]]

Protective Elements
Module External Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm-I Module input state: Alarm [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip-I Module input state: Trip [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Module External Protection Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm
Trip Signal: Trip

Protective Elements
Commissioning: External Protection

Object to be tested
Test of the module External Protection
Necessary means
Depending on the application
Procedure
Simulate the functionality of the External Protection (Alarm, Trip, Blockings...) by (de-)energizing of the digital
inputs.

All external alarms, external trips and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device.

Supervision
Supervision
CBF- Circuit Breaker Failure [50BF*/62BF]
*=only available in protective relays that offer current measurement.
Available elements:
CBF
The breaker failure (BF) protection is used to provide backup protection in the event that a breaker fails to operate
properly during fault clearing. This signal is to be used to trip the upstream breaker (e.g. infeed of a busbar) either
via an output relay or via Communication (SCADA). Depending on the ordered device and type there are
different/multiple schemes available to detect a breaker failure.
Start/Trigger of the CBF Timer

A supervision timer »t-CBF« will be started, once the CBF module is triggered. Even if the Trigger signal drops
again, this timer will continue to run. If the timer runs down/elapses (is not stopped), the module will issue a trip
afterwards. This trip signal is to be used to trip the upstream breaker (backup).
Stopping the CBF

The timer will be stopped if the opening of the breaker is detected. Depending on the supervision scheme the timer
will be stopped if the current falls below the current threshold or if the position signals indicate the open position of
the breaker or a combination of both. The CBF module will remain within the state rejected until the trigger signal
drops (falls back).
Detecting a Breaker Failure

Depending on the supervision scheme, the Circuit Breaker Failure signal (Trip) will be set if either:
the current doesn´t fall below the threshold or

the position signals indicate that the breaker is in the closed position or
both.
Reject state of the CBFmodule

The CBF module will switch into the rejected state if the circuit breaker failure triggers are still active while the open
position of the breaker has been detected successfully.
Readiness for Operation

The CBF module will switch back into the Stand-by if the trigger signals drop (fall back).
Locking
A locking signal will be issued simultaneously with the CBF-Signal (Trip). The locking signal is permanent. This
signal has to be acknowledged at the HMI.

Supervision
Note on devices that offer Wide Frequency Range measurement:
The supervision scheme 50BF will be blocked as soon as the frequency

differs more than 5% from the nominal frequency. As long as the frequency
differs more than 5% from the nominal frequency the supervision scheme
“50BF and CB Pos” will work according to the “CB Pos” scheme.
Supervision Schemes
Up to three supvervision schemes are available depending on the ordered device type and variant in order to detect
a circuit breaker failure.
50BF*
A supervision timer will be started as soon as the CBFmodule is triggered by a trip signal. A breaker failure will be
detected and a signal will be issued if the measured current does not fall below a set threshold while this timer runs
down.
This supervision scheme is available within protective relays that offer current measurement.
CB Pos
A supervision timer will be started as soon as the CBF module is triggered by a trip signal. A breaker failure will be
detected and a signal will be issued if the evaluation of the position indicators of the circuit breaker does not indicate
that the breaker has been switched off sucessfully while this timer runs down.
This supervision scheme is available within all protective relays. This scheme is recommended if breaker failures
have to be detected while there is no or not much load flow (small currents). This might e.g. be the case if overvolta-
ge or overfrequency is supervisioned for a Gen-Set that is running in Stand-by.
50 BF and CB Pos*
A supervision timer will be started as soon as the CBF module is triggered by a trip signal. A breaker failure will be
detected and a signal will be issued if the measured current does not fall below a set threshold and if simultaneously
the evaluation of the position indicators of the circuit breaker does not indicate that the breaker has been switched
off sucessfully while this timer runs down.
This scheme is recommended if breaker failures have to be double checked. This scheme will issue a trip command
to the upstream breaker even if position indicators indicate misleadingly (faulty) that the breaker has been opened
or if the current measurement indicates misleadingly (faulty) that the breaker is now in the open position.
*=only available in protective relays that offer current measurement.

Supervision
Trigger Modes
There are three trigger modes for the CBF module available. In addition to that, there are three assignable trigger
inputs available that might trigger the CBF module even if they are not assigned within the breaker manager onto
the breaker that is to be monitored.
•All Trips: All trip signals that are assigned to this breaker (within the trip manager) will start the CBF module (please
refer also to section „Trigger signals of the Circuit Breaker Failure“).
•Current Trips: All current trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the trip manager) will start the CBF module
(please refer also to section „Trigger signals of the Circuit Breaker Failure“).
•External Trips: All external trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the trip manager) will start the CBF module
(please refer also to section „Trigger signals of the Circuit Breaker Failure“).
•In addition, the User can also select none (e.g.: if the User intends to use one of the three additional assignable
trigger inputs).
Those trips can exclusively start the breaker failures that are assigned
within the trip manager to the breaker that is to be supervised. In contrast
to that the additional three triggers 1-3 will trigger the CBFmodule even if
they are not assigned onto the breaker within the corresponding breaker
manager.
Select the winding side (Breaker, Winding) from which the measured
currents should be taken in case this protective device provides more than
one current measurement card.
This Notice applies to protective devices that offer control functionality

only! This protective element requires, that a switchgear (circuit breaker) is
assigned to it. It is allowed only to assign switchgears (circuit breaker) to
this protective element, whose measuring transformers provide measuring
data to the protective device.
Breaker Failure Lockout
The signal of the Circuit Breaker Failure is latched. This signal can be used to block the breaker against a switching
on attempt.

Supervision
Tabular Summary
Supervision Schemes
Where? Within [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\Supervision\CBF]
CB Pos2) 50BF3) CBPos und 50BF4)
Which breaker is to be Selection of the breaker Selection of the breaker Selection ot the breaker
monitored? that is to be monitored. that is to be monitored. that is to be monitored.
Where to select? (In case that more than one (In case that more than one (In case that more than one
Within [Protection Para\Global Prot breaker is available) breaker is available) breaker is available)
Para\Supervision\CBF]
Trigger Modi All Trips5) All Trips5) All Trips5)

(Who starts the CBF-timer?) or or or
All Current Trips5) All Current Trips5) All Current Trips5)
Where to set?
Within [Protection Para\Global Prot or or or
Para\Supervision\CBF]
External Trips5) External Trips5) External Trips5)
…and the breaker is in the ...and the CBF module is within …and the breaker is in the
closed position and the CBF the stand-by state. closed position and the CBF
module is within the stand-by module is within the stand-by
state. state.
Who stops the CBF-Timer? Position indicators Current is fallen below the Position indicators
Once the timer has been stopped the indicate that the I<-threshold1). indicate that the
CBF module will switch into the state switchgear (breaker) is in switchgear (breaker) is in
„Rejected“. The module will switch the open position. the open position and
back into the state „Stand-by“ if the current is fallen below the
trigger signals are dropped.
I<-threshold1).
A Breaker Failure will be When the CBF-Timer has When the CBF-Timer has When the CBF-Timer has
detected run down (elapsed). run down (elapsed). run down (elapsed).
...and a trip signal to the upstream
breaker will be issued?
When does the trip signal to If the position indicators If the current is fallen If the position indicators
the upstream breaker drops indicate that the below the I< and if the indicate that the
(falls back)? switchgear (breaker) is in trigger signals are switchgear (breaker) is in
the open position and if dropped (fallen back) the open position and if
the trigger signals are the current is fallen below
dropped (fallen back) the I< and if the trigger
signals are dropped
(fallen back)

Supervision
1)
It is recommended to set the I< threshold to a value that is slightly below the fault current that is expectable.
By means of that it is possible to shorten the CBF supervision timer and hence reduce thermal and mechanical da-
mage of the electrical equipment in case of a breaker failure. The lower the threshold, the longer the time that is
needed to detect, that the breaker is in the open position, especially if there are transients/harmonics.
Note: Tripping delay of the CBF module = Minimum delay time (tripping time) of the backup protection!
2), 3), 4)
Available in all devices with the Availalble in all devices that Availalble in all devices that
corresponding software offer current measurement offer current measurement
5)
Only if the signals are assigned onto the breaker within the breaker manager.

747
Supervision
CBF
name = CBF

(Stage is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
2 CB
Scheme
Trigger *
CBF.I-CBF >
SG[x].TripCmd*
11 All Trips
CBF.t-CBF
Current.TripCmd*
15 Current Trips
ExtTrip[x].TripCmd*
15 External Trips
CBF.Trigger1
MRA4
1..n, Assignment List φ CBF.Waiting for Trigger
>=1
CBF.Trigger2 CBF.running
CBF.Alarm
CBF.Trigger3
14
1..n, 1..n, Assignment IL1
List CBF.Lockout
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection for devices that offer current measurement
IL2 S 1
IL3
R1 1
Reset Res Lockout
Res Lockout
CBF.Trigger1-I
CBF.Trigger2-I
CBF.Trigger3-I
*
The Breaker Failure will be triggered only by those trip signals that are assigned onto the the breaker within theTrip Manager.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
748
CBF
Supervision
name = CBF

2
Trigger *
CB
SG[x].TripCmd*
11 All Trips
CBF.t-CBF
ExtTrip[x].TripCmd*
15 External Trips
CBF.Trigger1
1..n, Assignment List φ CBF.Waiting for Trigger

>=1
MRA4
CBF.Trigger2 CBF.running
CBF.Alarm
CBF.Trigger3
14
1..n, 1..n, Assignment
List CBF.Lockout
S 1
R1 1
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection for devices that offer voltage measurement only
Reset Res Lockout
Res Lockout
CBF.Trigger1-I
CBF.Trigger2-I
CBF.Trigger3-I
*
The Breaker Failure will be triggered only by those trip signals that are assigned onto the the breaker within theTrip Manager.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Supervision
Device Planning Parameters of the CBF

use
Global Protection Parameters of the CBF

Scheme Scheme 50BF, 50BF [Protection Para
CB Pos, /Global Prot Para
50BF and CB Pos /Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
Trigger Determining the trigger mode for the Breaker Failure. - . -, All Trips [Protection Para
All Trips, /Global Prot Para
External Trips, /Supervision
Current Trips /CBF]
Trigger1 Trigger that will start the CBF Trigger -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]

Supervision
Direct Commands of the CBF

Res Lockout Reset Lockout inactive, inactive [Operation
active /Reset]
Setting Group Parameters of the CBF
In order to prevent a faulty activation of the BF Module, the pickup (alarm) time
must be greater than the sum of:
Operating time of the protective relay

+The close-open time of the breaker (please refer to the technical data of
the manufacturer of the breaker);
+Drop off time (current- or position indicators)
+Security margin.

active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/CBF]
active /<1..4>
protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those /Supervision
/CBF]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
I-CBF > Breaker Failure Alarm will be initiated if this threshold is 0.02 - 4.00In 0.02In [Protection Para
still exceeded after the timer has expired (50 BF).
/<1..4>
Only available if: Scheme50BF = Or Scheme = 50BF /Supervision
and CB Pos
/CBF]
t-CBF If the delay time is expired, an CBF alarm is given out. 0.00 - 10.00s 0.20s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Supervision
/CBF]

Supervision
CBF Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
Trigger1-I Module Input: Trigger that will start the CBF [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CBF]
CBF Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Waiting for Trigger Waiting for Trigger
running Signal: CBF-Module started
Alarm Signal: Circuit Breaker Failure
Lockout Signal: Lockout
Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout

Supervision
Trigger signals of the Circuit Breaker Failure
These trips will start the CBFmodule if »All trips« have been selected as the trigger event.
Name Description
-.- No assignment

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
Name Description

Supervision
These trips will start the BF module if »All current« functions have been selected as the trigger event.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
These trips will start the BF module if »External trips« have been selected as the trigger event.
Name Description
-.- No assignment

Supervision
Commissioning Example: Supervision Scheme 50BF
Object to Be Tested:
Test of the breaker failure protection (Supervision Scheme 50BF).
Necessary Means:
Current source;
Ammeter; and
Timer.
When testing, the applied test current must always be higher than the tripping
threshold »I-CBF«. If the test current falls below the threshold while the breaker
is in the “Off” position, no pickup will be generated.
Procedure (Single-Phase):
For testing the tripping time of the CBF protection, a test current has to be higher than the threshold value of one of
the current protection modules that are assigned to trigger the CBF protection. The CBF trip delay can be measured
from the time when one of the triggering inputs becomes active to the time when the CBF protection trip is asserted.
To avoid wiring errors, checked to make sure the breaker in the upstream system switches off.
The time, measured by the timer, should be in line with the specified tolerances.
Successful Test Result:

The actual times measured comply with the setpoint times. The breaker in the higher-level section switches off.
Re-connect the control cable to the breaker!

Supervision
TCS - Trip Circuit Supervision [74TC]
Available elements:
TCS
The trip circuit monitoring is used for monitoring if the trip circuit is ready for operations. The monitoring can be
fulfilled in two ways. The first assumes only »Aux On (52a)« is used in the trip circuit. The second assumes that, in
addition to »Aux On (52a), »Aux Off(52b)« is also used for the circuit monitoring.
With »Aux On (52a), only in the trip circuit, the monitoring is only effective when the breaker is closed while if both
»Aux On (52a), and »Aux Off(52b)« are used, the trip circuit will be monitored all time as long as the control power
is on.
Note that the digital inputs used for this purpose must be configured properly based on the trip circuit control
voltage. If the trip circuit is detected broken, an alarm will be issued with a specified delay, which must be longer
than the time when a trip contact is closed to the time when the breaker status is clearly recognized by the relay.
In Slot 1 has 2 digital inputs, each of which has a separate root (contact
separation) for the trip circuit supervision.
to it.
In this case, the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply
voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly.
In order to identify a conductor failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil, the off-coil has to be
looped-in to the supervision circuit.
The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module.

765
Supervision
TCS
L+
Device
Trip CB digital input
X &
t-TCS
>1 t 0 TCS.Alarm
digital input
MRA4
* X &
CB.Mode
Closed
52a 52b
Either LS position indicator

position indicator normal closed
normal open
Connection example: Trip circuit supervision with two CB auxiliary contacts.
trip coil
L-
*This signal is the output of the switchgear that is assigned to this

protective element. This applies to protective devices that offer
control functionality.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
766
Supervision
TCS
Device
L+
Trip CB digital input
t-TCS
& t 0 TCS.Alarm
MRA4
digital input
* position indicator normal X

open
CB.Mode CB
Closed LS
52a
Either
trip coil
L-
*CB.Pos ON
Connection example: Trip circuit supervision with one CB auxiliary contact (Aux On (52a)) only.
*This signal is the output of the switchgear that is assigned to this

protective element. This applies to protective devices that offer
control functionality.
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Supervision
Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision

use
Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision

Mode Select if trip circuit is going to be monitored when the Closed, Closed [Protection Para
breaker is closed or when the breaker is either open or
Either /Global Prot Para
close.
/Supervision
/TCS]
Input 1 Select the input configured to monitor the trip coil when 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Protection Para
the breaker is closed.
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
Input 2 Select the input configured to monitor the trip coil when 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Protection Para
the breaker is open. Only available if Mode set to
/Global Prot Para
“Either”.
/Supervision
Only available if: Mode = Either
/TCS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]

Supervision
Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Supervision

active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/TCS]
active /<1..4>
/TCS]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
t-TCS Tripping delay time of the Trip Circuit Supervision 0.10 - 10.00s 0.2s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Supervision
/TCS]

Supervision
Trip Circuit Supervision Input States

Aux ON-I Module Input State: Position indicator/check-back signal of the [Protection Para
CB (52a)
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position indicator/check-back signal of the [Protection Para
CB (52b)
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCS]
Trip Circuit Supervision Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision
Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.

Supervision
Commissioning: Trip Circuit Supervision [74TC]
For CBs that trip by means of little energy (e.g. via an optocoupler), it has to be
ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not cause false tripping
of the CB.
Object to be tested
Test of the trip circuit supervision.
Procedure, part 1
Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits.
Successful test result, part 1

After expiry of »t-TCS« the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm.
Procedure, part 2
Simulate a broken cable in the CB control circuit.

After expiry of »t-TCS« the trip circuit supervision TCS of the device should signal an alarm.

Supervision
CTS - Current Transformer Supervision [60L]
Available elements:
CTS
Wire breaks and failures within measuring circuits cause current transformer failures.
The module »CTS« can detect a failure of the CT if the calculated earth current does not match the measured one.
If an adjustable threshold value (Difference of measured and calculated earth current) is exceeded, a CT failure can
be assumed. This is signaled through a message/alarm.
The precondition is that the conductor currents are measured by the device and the earth current, for instance, by a
ring core type current transformer.
The measuring principles of the circuit supervision are based on comparing the measured and the calculated
residual currents:
In an ideal case these are:
 IL2
 IL1  IL3KI∗
 
IG=3∗I 
0KI∗ IG=0
KI represents a correction factor which takes the different transformation ratio of the phase- and earth current
transformers into account. The device automatically calculates this factor from the rated field parameters, i.e. the
relation between the rated primary and secondary current values of the phase- and earth current transformers.
For compensating the current proportional ratio error of the measuring circuits, the dynamic correction factor Kd can
be used. As a function of the measured max. current this factor is considering the linear rising measuring error.
The limiting value of the CT supervision is calculated as follows:
∆I = deviation I (rated value)

Kd = correction factor
Imax = current maximum
Limiting value = ∆I + Kd x Imax
Precondition for identifying an error
3∗ I0KI∗IGDelta
 IKd∗Imax
The evaluation method of the circuit supervision by using factor Kd can be graphically represented as follows:
limit value
Kd*Imax
Imax

Supervision
If the current is measured in two phases only (for instant only IL1/IL3) or if there
is no separate earth current measuring (e.g. normally via a cable-type CT), the
supervision function should be deactivated.
40
CTS.Alarm
Phase or Earth Current Transformer Failure

0
CTS.t
t
&
CTS.
Kd
ΔI
-
Σ
calculated
IG
CTS
IL1
IL2
IL3
IG
2

Supervision
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

use
Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]

Supervision
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/CTS]
active /<1..4>
/CTS]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
ΔI In order to prevent faulty tripping of phase selective 0.10 - 1.00In 0.50In [Protection Para
protection functions that use the current as tripping
/<1..4>
criterion. If the difference of the measured earth current
and the calculated value I0 is higher than the pick up /Supervision
value ΔI, an alarm event is generated after expiring of
/CTS]
the excitation time. In such a case, a fuse failure, a
broken wire or a faulty measuring circuit can be
assumed.
Alarm delay Alarm delay 0.1 - 9999.0s 1.0s [Protection Para

/<1..4>
/Supervision
/CTS]
Kd Dynamic correction factor for the evaluation of the 0.00 - 0.99 0.00 [Protection Para
difference between calculated and measured earth
/<1..4>
current. This correction factor allows transformer faults,
caused by higher currents, to be compensated. /Supervision
/CTS]

Supervision
Current Transformer Supervision Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision

Supervision
Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision
Precondition:
1. Measurement of all three phase currents (are applied to the
measuring inputs of the device).
2. The earth current is detected via a cable-type transformer (not in
Holmgreen connection).
Object to be tested
Check of the CT supervision (by comparing the calculated with the measured earth current) .
Necessary means
Procedure, part 1
Set the limiting value of the CTS to »delta I=0.1*In«.
Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs (the symmetrical feeding at
secondary side has to be maintained).
Make sure that the signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated now.

The signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated.
Procedure, part 2
Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the earth
current measuring input.
Ascertain that the signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated now.

The signal »CTS.ALARM« is generated.

Supervision
LOP - Loss of Potential
Available elements:
LOP
Loss of Potential - Evaluating Measured Quantities
Ensure that the LOP has enough time to block faulty tripping of modules that use LOP.
That means, the delay time of the LOP should to be shorter than the tripping delay of
modules that use LOP.
In case of transformer protection relays the LOP element uses current and
voltage measured at the winding side determined by paramter:
[Field Para / VT / VT Winding Side ].
The LOP function detects the loss of voltage in any of the voltage input measuring circuits. Faulty tripping of
protective elements that take voltage into account can be prevented by means of this supervision element. The
following measured values and information to detect an Phase VT Failure condition:
• Three-phase voltages;
• Ratio of negative-to-positive sequence voltages;
• Zero sequence voltage;
• Three-phase currents;
• Residual current (I0);
• Pickup flags from all overcurrent elements; and
• Breaker status (option)
After a set time delay time an Alarm »LOP.LOP BLO« will be issued.

Supervision
How to set up the Loss of Potential (Evaluating Measured Quantities)
Set the Alarm Time Delay »t-Alarm«.
To prevent a malfunction of the VT supervision for a system fault assign Alarms of overcurrent elements that
should block the Loss of Potential element.
It is necessary to set the parameter »LOP.LOP Blo Enable« to »active«. Otherwise the Measuring circuit
supervision cannot block elements in case of a loss of potential.
How to make the Loss of Potential (Evaluating Measured Quantities) effective
The Loss of Potential respectively measuring circuit supervision can be used to block protective elements like
undervoltage protection in order to prevent faulty tripping.
Set the parameter »Measuring Circuit Supervision=active« within those protective elements that should be
blocked by the Loss of Potential supervision.

Supervision
Loss of Potential - Fuse Failure

VT Supervision via digital inputs (Fuse Failure)
The module »LOP« is capable of detecting a fuse failure at the secondary side of the VTs as long as the automatic
circuit breakers of the VTs are connected with the device via a digital input and if this input is assigned to the
module »LOP«.
Setting the Parameters for detecting a fuse failure (FF) of a phase voltage transformer
In order to detect a fuse failure of a phase voltage transformer via digital input, please proceed as follows:
Assign a digital input onto the parameter »LOP.Ex FF VT« that represents the state of the automatic circuit
breaker of the phase voltage transformer.
Set the parameter »Measuring Crcuit Supervison=active« within all those protective elements, that should be
blocked by a fuse failure.
Setting the Parameters for detecting a fuse failure (FF) of a earth phase voltage transformer
In order to detect a fuse failure of a phase voltage transformer via digital input, please proceed as follows:
Assign a digital input onto the parameter »LOP.Ex FF EVT« that represents the state of the automatic circuit
breaker of the phase voltage transformer.
Set the parameter »Measuring Crcuit Supervison=active« within all those protective elements, that should be
blocked by a fuse failure.

780
LOP name = LOP
Supervision

LOPB Enable
VL12∠Φ =VL23∠Φ =0.5*VL31∠Φ+180°
ina ctive
VL12∠Φ =VL31∠Φ =0.5*VL23∠Φ+180°
**
active
VL23∠Φ =VL31∠Φ =0.5*VL12∠Φ+180°
V < 0.01xVn
VL1/VL12 >1
VL2/VL23
VL3/VL31
LOP. Alarm
%(V2/V1) > 40%
%(V2/V1)
>1 & 0.0 9999s 50 ms 100 ms & LOP. LOP Blo
0 t-ResetDelay
38a
t-Alarm 0 t-Min Hold
V0 < 0.01xVn 1
Time
calculated
V0
Phase Voltage Transformer Failure

I<
IL1 &
IL2
IL3
*=The breaker position wont be taken into account if no breaker is selected/assigned.
MRA4
3*I0 < 0.1 x In
calculated
3*I0
CB Pos Detect* = closed **=Only if VT con = Phase-to-Phase
V1<0.01*Vn Blo Trigger

&
1..n, I [x] >1
I1<0.01*In
…..
Dead Bus Detection
& Blo Trigger
>1 1..n, I [x]
active
inactive
LOP.Ex FF VT
&
LOP.Ex FF VT

38b
LOP.Ex FF EVT
& LOP.Ex FF EVT

38c
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Supervision
Device Planning Parameters of the LOP Module

use
Global Protection Parameters of the LOP Module

CB Pos Detect If there is a circuit breaker assigned, LOP will be -.-, -.- [Protection Para
inhibited if the circuit breaker is open. The position of
SG[1].Pos /Global Prot Para
the breaker will not be taken into account by LOP if no
breaker is assigned. /Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Blo Trigger1 An Alarm of this protective element will block the Loss Blo Trigger -.- [Protection Para
of Potential Detection.
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]

Supervision

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Ex FF VT Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
List
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Ex FF EVT Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers 1..n, Assignment -.- [Protection Para
List
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]

Supervision
Setting Group Parameters of the LOP Module

active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]
active /<1..4>
/LOP]
"ExBlo Fc=active".
LOPB Enable Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking by the inactive, inactive [Protection Para
module LOP.
active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]
I< To prevent unintended operation during faults, this 0.5 - 4.0In 2.0In [Protection Para
threshold should be used to distinguish between load
/<1..4>
current and overcurrent. A current above this threshold
will be seen as overcurrent and LOP will be inhibited. If /Supervision
the current detector identifies load current as
/LOP]
overcurrent (threshold to low), a LOP situation will not
be detected and if the threshold is too high, a fault
situation will be identified as LOP which results in
blocking of protection functions.
t-Alarm Pickup Delay 0 - 9999.0s 0.1s [Protection Para

/<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]
Dead Bus If this detection is active, LOP will be inhibited if there is inactive, inactive [Protection Para
Detection no current and voltage applied.
active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]

Supervision
LOP Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Ex FF VT-I State of the module input: Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage [Protection Para
Transformers
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Ex FF EVT-I State of the module input: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage [Protection Para
Transformers
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Blo Trigger1-I State of the module input: An Alarm of this protective element will [Protection Para
block the Loss of Potential Detection.
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]

Supervision
LOP Module Signals (Output States)
Signal Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm Loss of Potential
LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements.
Ex FF VT Signal: Ex FF VT
Ex FF EVT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers
Blocking Trigger
Name Description
-.- No assignment
I[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm
IG[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm IG

Supervision
Commissioning: Loss of Potential
Test of the module LOP.
Necessary means:
Three-phase voltage source.
Procedure
Test part 1:
Examine if the output signal »LOP BLO « becomes true if:
•Any of the three-phase voltages becomes less 0.01*Vn Volt
•The residual voltage is less than 0.01*Vn Volt or the %V2/V1 ratio is greater 40%
•All three-phase currents are less than the load current / overcurrent detection (I<) threshold.
•The residual current is less than 0.1 Ipu (rated current)
•No pickup of an OC element which should blocks VT Supervision
•The breaker is closed (option, if a breaker is assigned).
•The offline detection has not detected a dead busbar (No current, no voltage measured).

Supervision
Successful test result part 1:
The output signals only become true if all the above mentioned conditions are fulfilled.
Test part 2:
Set the parameter »Measuring Circuit Supervision=active« within those protective elements that should be blocked
by the Loss of Potential supervision (like undervoltage protection.,voltage controlled overcurrent protection...).
Check those protective elements if they are blocked if the Loss of Potential supervision has generated a block
command.
Successful test result part 2:
All protective elements that should be blocked in case of Loss of Potential supervision are blocked if the conditions
(Procedure part 1) are fulfilled.
Commissioning: Loss of Potential (FF via DI)
Check if the auto fuse failure is correctly identified by the device.
Procedure
• Turn off the automatic circuit breaker of the VTs (all poles to be dead)
• The state of the respective digital input changes.
• All protective elements are blocked which should not have an unwanted operation caused by a fuse failure
»Measuring Circuit Supervision=active«.

Supervision
Self Supervision
SSV
The protection devices are supervised by various check routines during normal operation and during the start-up
phase on faulty operation.
The protection devices are carrying out various self supervision tests.
Self Supervision within the devices
Supervision of... Supervised by... Action on detected issue...

Start phase The duration (permitted time) of the The device will be rebooted.
boot phase is monitored. => The device will be taken out of
service after three unsuccessful start
attempts.
Supervision of the duration of a The maximum permitted time for a The self-supervision contact will be
protection cycle (Software cycle) protection cycle is monitored by a deenergized if the permitted time for
timing analysis. a protection cycle is exceeded (first
threshold).
The protection device will be

rebooted, if the protection cycle
exceeds the second threshold.
Monitoring of the communication The cyclic measured value The device will be rebooted, if a
between Main and Digital Signal processing of the DSP is monitored failure is detected.
Processor (DSP) by the main processor. The self-supervision contact will be
deenergized.
Analog-Digital-Converter The DSP does a plausibility check on Protection will be blocked, if a failure
the digitalized data. is detected, in order to prevent faulty
tripping.
Supervision of data consistency after An internal logic detects fragmentary If the new data is incomplete or
an outage of the power supply. saved data after an outage of the corrupt, it will be deleted during the
(e.g. outage of the power supply power supply. reboot phase of the device. The
while changing the parameter device will continue to work with the
settings). last valid data set.
Data consistency in general Generation of check-sums. The device will be taken out of
service in case that inconsistent data
is detected that is not caused by an
outage of the power supply.
(fatal internal error).

Supervision
Self Supervision within the devices
Parameter Setting (Device) Protecting the parameter setting by Implausibilities within the parameter
plausibility checks. configuration can be detected by
means of plausibility checks.
Detected implausibilities are

highlighted by a question mark
symbol. Please refer to chapter
parameter setting for detailed
information.
Quality of the power supply A hardware circuit ensures that the If the supply voltage is too low, the
device can only be used, if the power device will not start up or it will be set
supply is in the range specified by out of service respectively.
the technical data.
Sags of the supply voltage Short-term sags of the supply The module for the supervision of the
voltage are detected and can be system utilization will detect
bridged in most of the cases by repetitive short-term sags of the
means of the integrated buffer within supply voltage.
the power supply hardware.
This buffer also allows the

termination of ongoing data writing
procedures.
Internal data of the device An internal module monitors the The module for the supervision of the
(memory load, internal system utilization. system utilization initiates in case of
ressources, ...) a fatal error a reboot of the device. In
case of minor faults the system led
will flash alternating red and green
(please refer to the trouble shooting
guide). The issue will be recorded
within an integrated fault memory.
Status of the device communication The projected and activated SCADA You can check if there is active
(SCADA) module supervises its connection to communication with the master
the master communication system. system within menu <Operation/
Status display/ Communication>.
In order to monitor this state you can
assign this status onto an LED
and/or an output relay.
For details on the status of the
GOOSE communication please refer
to chapter IEC61850.

Supervision
Device Start (Reboot)
The device starts up if:

• it is connected to the supply voltage,
• the User initiates (intentionally) a restart of the device,
• the device is set back to factory defaults,
• the internal self-supervision of the device detects a fatal error.
The reason for a device start/reboot is shown numerically within menu <Operation/ Status display/ Sys/ Restart>
(please refer to the table below). The reason will also be logged within the event recorder (Event: Sys.Restart).
The table below explains the numbers indicating the reason of the restart.
Device Start-up Codes
1. Normal Start-up
Start-up after clean disconnection of the supply voltage.
2. Reboot by the Operator
Device reboot triggered by the operator via HMI or Smart view.
3. Reboot by means of Super Reset
Automatic reboot when setting the device back to factory defaults.
4. -- (outdated)
5. -- (outdated)
6. Unknown Error Source
Reboot due to unknown error source.
7. Forced Reboot (initiated by the main processor)
The main processor identified invalid conditions or data.
8. Exceeded Time Limit of the Protection Cycle
Unexpected interruption of the Protection Cycle.
9. Forced Reboot (initiated by the digital signal processor)
The digital signal processor identified invalid conditions or data.
10. Exceeded Time Limit of the Measured Value Processing
Unexpected interruption of the cyclic measured value processing.
11. Sags of the Supply Voltage
Reboot after short-term sag or outage of the supply voltage.
12. Illegal Memory Access
Reboot after illegal memory access.

Supervision
Device taken out of Service „Device Stopped“
The protection device will be taken out of service, if there is an undefined state that cannot be escaped after three
reboots.
In this state the system LED will be illuminated red or red flashing. The display will show the message „Device
Stopped“ followed by a 6-digit error code, e.g. E01487.
In addition to the recorders, messages and display information that can be accessed by the user, there may exist
additional error information accessible by the Service Staff. These offer further failure analysis and diagnosis
opportunities to the Service Staff.
In such a case please contact the Woodward Service Staff and provide them
the error code.
For further information on trouble shooting please refer to the separately

provided „Trouble Shooting Guide“.

Supervision
Direct Commands of the Self Supvervision

Ack System LED Ack System LED (red/green flashing LED) False, False [Operation
True /Acknowledge]
Signals (Output States) of the Self Supvervision
Signal Description
System Error Signal: Device Failure
SelfSuperVision Contact Signal: SelfSuperVision Contact
Values of the Self Supvervision

Last Failure Last Failure [Operation
/Self Supervision
/System Error]
Counter Values of the Self Supvervision

Resets by Device Resets initiated by the device [Operation
/Self Supervision
/System Error]
Cr No of free sockets Counter for network diagnosis. Number of free sockets. [Operation
/Self Supervision
/System State]

Programmable Logic
Programmable Logic
Available Elements (Equations):
Logics
General Description
The Protective Relay includes programmable Logic Equations for programming output relays, blocking of protective
functions and custom logic functions in the relay.
The logic provides control of the output relays based on the state of the inputs that can be choosen from the
assignment list (protective function pickups, protective function states, breaker states, system alarms, and module
inputs). The user can use the outputs signals of a Logic Equation as inputs in higher equations (e.g. the output
signal of Logic Equation 10 might be used as an input of Logic Equation 11).
Principle Overview
Type of logic gate selectable Gate Out
Input1 Inverting settable Timer Out
Input2 Inverting settable AND
OR Delay Timer Set Out

t-On Delay t-Off Delay Inverting settable S Q
NAND
Input3 Inverting settable NOR

Reset Out inverted
R1 Q
Input4 Inverting settable
Reset Latched Inverting settable

794
LE[1]...[n]
name = LE[1]...[n]
LE[x].Input1
Programmable Logic

=1 name.Gate Out
Inverting1
active Gate
name.Timer Out
inactive
AND
LE[x].Input2
OR
=1
Detailed Overview – Overall Logic diagram
NAND
Inverting2
active
NOR
inactive
LE[x].Input3 φ
1..n, Assignment List Delay Timer

=1
AND t-On Delay t-Off Delay
=1 name.Out
Inverting3 OR
MRA4
NAND S Q
active NOR name.Out inverted
inactive R1 Q
LE[x].Input4

=1
Inverting Set
Inverting4
active
active
inactive
inactive
LE[x].Reset Latched

=1
Inverting Reset
active
inactive
DOK-HB-MRA4-2E
Programmable Logic
Available Gates (Operators)
Within the Logic Equation, the following Gates can be used:
Gate
& & >1 >1
AND NAND OR NOR
Input Signals
The user can assign up to 4 Input signals (from the assignment list) to the inputs of the gate.
As an option, each of the 4 input signals can be inverted (negated)
Timer Gate (On Delay and Off Delay)
The output of the gate can be delayed. The user has the option to set an On and an Off delay.
Latching
The logic equations issues two signals. An unlatched and a latched signal. The latched output is also available as
an inverted output.
In order to reset the latched signal the user has to assign a reset signal from the assignment list. The reset signal
can also optionally be inverted. The latching works based on reset priority. That means, the reset input is dominant.

Programmable Logic
Cascading Logical Outputs
The device will evaluate output states of the Logic Equations starting from Logic Equation 1 up to the Logic
Equation with the highest number. This evaluation (device) cycle will be continuously repeated.
Cascading Logic Equations in an ascending sequence

Cascading in an ascending sequence means that the user uses the output signal of “Logic Equation n” as input of
“Logic Equation n+1”. If the state of “Logic Equation n” changes, the state of the output of “Logic Equation n+1” will
be updated within the same cycle.
Cascading Logic Equations in a descending sequence

Cascading in a descending sequence means that the user uses the output signal of “Logic Equation n+1” as input of
“Logic Equation n”. If the output of “Logic Equation n+1” changes, this change of the feed back signal at the input of
“Logic Equation n” will be delayed for one cycle.
Cascading in Ascending Order

LE1.Input1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycle

LE1.Input2
Output of Logic Equation 1

Logic Equation1
LE1.Input3
LE2.Input2
LE1.Input4
Logic Equation2
LE2.Input3
LE2.Input4
LE1.Input1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycl e

LE1.Input2

Logic Equation1
LE1.Input3
LE2.Input2
LE1.Input4
Logic Equation2
LE2.Input3
LE3.Input2
LE2.Input4
Logic Equation3
LE3.Input3
LE3.Input4
Cascading in Descending Order
LE2.Input1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycle
U pdate within the next eval uation cycl e (1 cycle delay )

LE2.Input2

Logic Equation2
LE2.Input3
LE1.Input2
LE2.Input4
Output of Logic Equation1
Logic Equation1
LE1.Input3
LE1.Input4
LE3.Input1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycl e

LE3.Input2
U pdate wi thin the next evaluation cycle (1 cycl e delay )

Logic Equation3
LE3.Input3
LE2.Input2 U pdate within the next but one evaluation cycle (2 cycles
delay )
LE3.Input4
Logic Equation2
LE2.Input3
LE1.Input2
LE2.Input4
Logic Equation1
LE1.Input3
LE1.Input4

Programmable Logic
Programmable Logic at the Panel
WARNING improper use of Logic Equations might result in personal injury or

damage the electrical equipment.
Don´t use Logic Equations unless that you can ensure the safe functionality.
How to configure a Logic Equation?

Call up menu [Logics/LE [x]]:
Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them).
If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«).
If the latched output signal is used assign a reset signal to the reset input.
Within the »status display«, the user can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the Logic Equation.
In case that Logic Equations should be cascaded the user has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of
descending sequences (Please refer to section: Cascading Logical Outputs).
By means the Status Display [Operation/Status Display] the logical states can be verified.]
Device Planning Parameters of the Programmable Logic

No of Equations: Number of required Logic Equations: 0, 20 [Device planning]
5,
10,
20,
40,
80

Programmable Logic
Global Protection Parameter of the Programmable Logic

LE1.Gate Logic gate AND, AND [Logics
OR, /LE 1]
NAND,
NOR
LE1.Input1 Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, Assignment -.- [Logics
List
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting1 Inverting the input signals. inactive, inactive [Logics

active /LE 1]
Only available if an input signal has been assigned.

List
/LE 1]

active /LE 1]

List
/LE 1]

active /LE 1]

List
/LE 1]

active /LE 1]
LE1.t-On Delay Switch On Delay 0.00 - 36000.00s 0.00s [Logics

/LE 1]

Programmable Logic

LE1.t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 - 36000.00s 0.00s [Logics
/LE 1]
LE1.Reset Latched Reset Signal for the Latching 1..n, Assignment -.- [Logics
List
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting Reset Inverting Reset Signal for the Latching inactive, inactive [Logics
active /LE 1]
LE1.Inverting Set Inverting the Setting Signal for the Latching inactive, inactive [Logics
active /LE 1]
Programmable Logic Inputs

LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal [Logics
/LE 1]
/LE 1]
/LE 1]
/LE 1]
LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching [Logics
/LE 1]
Programmable Logic Outputs
Signal Description
LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate
LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output
LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q)
LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)

Commissioning
Commissioning
Before starting work on an opened switchboard it is imperative that the complete switchboard is dead and the
following 5 safety regulations are always met: ,
Safety precautions:
Disconnect from the power supply
Secure against reconnection
Verify if the equipment is dead
Connect to ground and short-circuit all phases
Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts
The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened during

operation. The prevailing high voltages are dangerous to life.
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off, it is likely that there are still
hazardous voltages at the component connections.
All locally applicable national and international installation and safety
regulations for working at electrical power installations must always to be
followed (e.g. VDE, EN, DIN, IEC).
Prior to the initial voltage connection, the following must be guaranteed:
Correct grounding of the device

That all signal circuits are tested
That all control circuits are tested
Transformer wiring is checked
Correct rating of the CTs
Correct burden of the CTs
That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data
Correct rating of the transformer protection
Function of the transformer fuses
Correct wiring of all digital inputs
Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage
Correct wiring of the analogue inputs and outputs
The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are

dependent on the technical data/tolerances.

Commissioning
Commissioning/Protection Test
Putting into operation/Protection test must be carried out by authorized and

qualified personnel. Before the device is put into operation the related
documentation has to be read and understood.
With any test of the protection functions the following has to be checked:
Is activation/tripping saved in the event recorder?

Is tripping saved in the fault recorder?
Is tripping saved in the disturbance recorder?
Are all signals/messages correctly generated?
Do all general parameterized blocking functions work properly?
Do all temporary parameterized (via DI) blocking functions work
properly?
To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions, these have to be
provided with the relevant alarm and tripping functions of the
respective protection functions/elements. This has to be tested in
practical operation.
Check of all temporary blockings (via digital inputs):
In order to avoid malfunctions, all blockings related to tripping/non-

tripping of protection function have to be tested. The test can be very
complex and should therefore be performed by the same people who
set up the protection concept.
Check of all general trip blockings:
All general trip blockings have to be tested.
Prior to the initial operation of the protection device all tripping times and values
shown in the adjustment list have to be confirmed by a secondary test
Any description of functions, parameters, inputs or outputs that does not match
the device in hand, can be ignored.

Commissioning
Putting out of Operation – Plug out the Relay
Warning! Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection functionality.
Ensure that there is a back-up protection. If you are not aware of the
consequences of dismounting the device – stop! Don´t start.
Inform SCADA before you start.
Switch-off the power supply.
Ensure, that the cabinet is dead and that there are no voltages that could lead
to personal injury.
Plug-out the terminals at the rear-side of the device. Do not pull any cable – pull
on the plugs! If it is stuck use for example a screw driver.
Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to
ensure that no accidental electrical connections are caused.
Hold the device at the front-side while opening the mounting nuts.
Remove the device carefully out of the cabinet.
In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced cover/close the cut-out in

the front-door.
Close the cabinet.

Service and Commissioning Support

Within the service menu various functions support maintenance and commissioning of the device.
General
Within the menu [Service/General], the user can initiate a reboot of the device.

Forcing the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults and setting ranges have to be taken from Relay
Output Contacts section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts operate normally after
the maintenance is completed. If the relay output contacts do not operate
normally, the protective device WILL NOT provide protection.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, relay output contacts can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode/Force OR/BO Slot X(2/5)], relay output contacts can be set by force:
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will only keep their “Force Position” as long as this timer runs. If the timer expires,
the relay will operate normally. If they are set as Permanent, they will keep the “Force Position” continuously.
There are two options available:
Forcing a single relay »Force ORx«; and

Forcing an entire group of relay output contacts »Force all Outs«.
Forcing an entire group takes precedence over forcing a single relay output contact!
A relay output contact will NOT follow a force command as long as it is

disarmed at the same time.
A relay output contact will follow a force command:
• If it is not disarmed; and

• If the Direct Command is applied to the relay(s).
Keep in mind, that the forcing of all relay output contacts (of the same
assembly group) takes precedence over the force command of a single relay
output contact.

Disarming the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from the
Relay Output Contacts section.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode/DISARMED], entire groups of relay output contacts can be disabled. By
means of this test mode, contact outputs switching actions of the relay output contacts are prevented. If the relay
output contacts are disarmed, maintenance actions can be carried out without the risk of taking entire processes off-
line.
The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts are ARMED AGAIN
after the maintenance is complete. If they are not armed, the protective device
WILL NOT provide protection.
Zone Interlocking Output and the Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode/DISARMED] entire groups of relay output contacts can be disarmed:
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will only keep their “Disarm Position” as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the relay output contacts will operate normally. If they are set Permanent, they will keep the “Disarm State”
continuously.
A relay output contact will NOT be disarmed as long as:
It´s latched (and not yet reset).

As long as a running t-OFF-delay timer is not yet expired (hold time of a
relay output contact).
The Disarm Control is not set to active.
The Direct Command is not applied.
A relay output contact will be disarmed if it´s not latched and
There is no running t-OFF-delay timer (hold time of a relay output contact)

and
The DISARM Control is set to active and
The Direct Command Disarm is applied.

Forcing RTDs*
* = Availability depends on ordered device.
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from
RTD/UTRD section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the RTDs operate normally after the
maintenance is completed. If the RTDs do not operate normally, the protective
device WILL NOT provide protection.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, RTD temperatures can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode/URTD], RTD temperatures can be set by force:
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Forced Temperature” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the RTD will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced Temperature”
continuously. This menu will show the measured values of the RTDs until the User activates the force mode by
calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown values will be frozen as long as this
mode is active. Now the User can force RTD values. As soon as the force mode is deactivated, measured values
will be shown again.

Forcing Analog Outputs*

Analog Output section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the Analog Outputs operate normally after
maintenance is completed. Do not use this mode if forced Analog Outputs
cause issues in external processes.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, Analog Outputs can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode/Analog Output(x)], Analog Outputs can be set by force:
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will only keep their “Forced Value” as long as this timer runs. If the timer expires,
the Analog Output will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced Value”
continuously. This menu will show the current value that is assigned onto the Analog Output until the User activates
the force mode by calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown values will be
frozen as long as this mode is active. Now the User can force Analog Output values. As soon as the force mode is
deactivated, measured values will be shown again.

Forcing Analog Inputs*

Analog Inputs section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the Analog Inputs operate normally after
maintenance is completed.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, Analog Inputs can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Analog Inputs], Analog Inputs can be set by
force:
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will only keep their “Forced Value” as long as this timer runs. If the timer expires,
the Analog Input will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced Value”
continuously. This menu will show the current value that is fed to the Analog Input until the User activates the force
mode by calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown value will be frozen as long
as this mode is active. Now the User can force the Analog Input value. As soon as the force mode is deactivated,
measured value will be shown again.

Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*
Available Elements:
Sgen
For commissioning support and in order to analyze failures, the protective device offers the option to simulate
measuring quantities. The simulation menu can be found within the [Service/Test Mode/Sgen] menu.
The simulation cycle consists of three states:
Pre-failure;
Failure; and
Post-failure State (Phase).
Within the [Service/Test Mode/Sgen/Configuration/Times] sub-menu, the duration of each phase can be set. In
addition; the measuring quantities to be simulated can be determined (e.g.: voltages, currents, and the
corresponding angles) for each phase (and ground).The simulation will be terminated, if a phase current exceeds
0.1 times In. A simulation can be restarted, five seconds after the current has fallen below 0.1 times In.
Setting the device into the simulation mode means taking the protective device
out of operation for the duration of the simulation. Do not use this feature during
operation of the device if the User cannot guarantee that there is a running and
properly working backup protection.
Sgen
pre Failure Simulation post
PreFault FaultSimulation PostFault
The energy counters will be stopped while the failure simulator is running.

The simulation voltages are always phase to neutral voltages, irrespectively of

the mains voltage transformers' connection method (Phase-to-phase / Wey /
Open Delta).

Application Options of the Fault Simulator**:
Stop Options Cold Simulation (Option 1) Hot Simulation (Option 2)
Do not stop Simulation without tripping the Simulation is authorized to trip

breaker: the breaker:
Blocking protective Trips to the How To?:
Run complete: Breaker. That means verifying if Call up [Service/Test
Pre Failure, Failure, Post Failure. the protective device generates a Mode/Sgen /Process]
trip without energizing the trip coil
of the breaker (similar to disarm TripCmd Mode = With TripCmd
the output relay).
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode/Sgen
/Process]
Ex Force Post = no assignment How To?:
Call up [Service/Test
Mode/Sgen /Process]
Press/Call up Start Simulation.
TripCmd Mode = No TripCmd
Stop by external signal
Force Post: As soon as this signal

becomes true, the Fault Simulation will be
forced to switch into the Post Failure mode.
/Process]
Ex Force Post = Assigned Signal
Manual stop
As soon as this signal becomes true, the

Fault Simulation will be terminated and the
device changes back to normal operation.
/Process]
Press/Call up Stop Simulation.
**Please note: Due to internal dependencies, the frequency of the simulation module is 0.16% greater than the rated one.

Device Planning Parameters of the Failure Simulator

Mode Mode do not use, use [Device planning]
use
Global Protection Parameter of the Failure Simulator

PreFault Pre Fault Duration 0.00 - 300.00s 0.0s [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
FaultSimulation Duration of Fault Simulation 0.00 - 10800.00s 0.0s [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
PostFault PostFault 0.00 - 300.00s 0.0s [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
TripCmd Mode Trip Command Mode No TripCmd, No TripCmd [Service
With TripCmd /Test (Prot inhibit)
/Sgen
/Process]
Ex Start Simulation External Start of Fault Simulation (Using the test 1..n, Assignment -.- [Service
parameters) List
/Sgen
/Process]
ExBlo External blocking of the module, if blocking is activated 1..n, Assignment SG[1].Pos ON [Service
/Sgen
/Process]


Ex ForcePost Force Post state. Abort simulation. 1..n, Assignment -.- [Service
List
/Sgen
/Process]
Voltage Parameter of the Failure Simulator

VL1 Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: phase L1 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.57Vn [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
VX Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: VX 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.0Vn [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
phi VL1 Start Position respectively Start Angle of the Voltage -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Phasor during Pre-Phase:phase L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]


/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
phi VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the Voltage -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Phasor during Pre-Phase: VX
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
VL1 Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: phase 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.29Vn [Service
L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
L2
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
L3
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]


VX Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: phase 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.29Vn [Service
VX
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Phasor during Fault-Phase:phase L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Phasor during Fault-Phase: VX
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
VL1 Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.57Vn [Service
phase L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]


phase L2
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
phase L3
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
VX Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: 0.00 - 1.50Vn 0.0Vn [Service
phase VX
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Phasor during Post phase: phase L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]


Phasor during Post phase: phase VX
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Current Parameter of the Failure Simulator

IL1 Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: phase L1 0.00 - 40.00In 0.0In [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IG meas Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: IG 0.00 - 25.00In 0.0In [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]


phi IL1 Start Position respectively Start Angle of the Current -360 - 360° 0° [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
phi IG meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the Current -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Phasor during Pre-Phase: IG
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IL1 Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: phase 0.00 - 40.00In 0.0In [Service
L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
L2
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]


L3
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
IG meas Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: IG 0.00 - 25.00In 0.0In [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
Phasor during Fault-Phase: IG
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]


IL1 Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: 0.00 - 40.00In 0.0In [Service
phase L1
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
phase L2
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
phase L3
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
IG meas Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: IG 0.00 - 25.00In 0.0In [Service
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]


/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
Phasor during Post phase: IG
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
States of the Inputs of the Failure Simulator

Ex Start Simulation-I State of the module input:External Start of Fault Simulation [Service
(Using the test parameters)
/Sgen
/Process]
ExBlo Module input state: External blocking [Service
/Sgen
/Process]
Ex ForcePost-I State of the module input:Force Post state. Abort simulation. [Service
/Sgen
/Process]
Signals of the Failure Simulator (States of the Outputs)
Signal Description
Running Signal; Measuring value simulation is running
State Signal: Wave generation states: 0=Off, 1=PreFault, 2=Fault, 3=PostFault, 4=InitReset

Direct Commands of the Failure Simulator

Start Simulation Start Fault Simulation (Using the test parameters) inactive, inactive [Service
/Sgen
/Process]
Stop Simulation Stopp Fault Simulation (Using the test parameters) inactive, inactive [Service
/Sgen
/Process]
Failure Simulator Values

State Wave generation states: 0=Off, 1=PreFault, Off Off, [Service
2=Fault, 3=PostFault, 4=InitReset
PreFault, /Test (Prot inhibit)
FaultSimulation, /Sgen
PostFault, /State]
Init Res

Technical Data
Technical Data
Use Copper conductors only, 75°C.
Conductor size AWG 14 [2.5 mm 2].
Climatic Environmental Conditions
Storage Temperature: Operating Temperature:

-30°C up to +70°C (-22°F to 158°F) -20°C up to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Permissible Humidity at Ann. Average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Permissible Installation Altitude: <2000 m (6561.67 ft) above sea level
If 4000 m (13123.35 ft) altitude apply a changed classification of
the operating and test voltages may be necessary.
Degree of Protection EN 60529
HMI front panel with seal IP54

HMI front panel without seal IP50
Rear side terminals IP20
Routine Test
Insulation test acc. to IEC60255-5: All tests to be carried out against earth and other input- and
output circuits
Aux. voltage supply, digital inputs, 2.5 kV (eff) / 50 Hz
current measuring inputs, signal relay
outputs:
Voltage measuring inputs: 3.0 kV (eff) / 50 Hz
All wire-bound communication interfaces: 1.5 kV DC

Technical Data
Housing
Housing B2: height/-width 173 mm (6.811”)/ 212.7 mm (8.374”)

(7 Pushbottons/Door Mounting)
Housing B2: height/-width 183 mm (7.205”)/ 212.7 mm (8.374”)

(8 Pushbottons/Door Mounting)
Housing B2: height/-width 173 mm (6.811” / 4U)/ 212.7 mm (8.374” / 42 HP)

(7 and 8 Pushbottons/19”)
Housing depth (incl. terminals): 208 mm (8.189”)

Material, housing: Aluminum extruded section
Material, front panel: Aluminum/Foil front
Mounting position: Horizontal (±45° around the X-axis are allowed)
Weight: approx. 4.7 kg (10.36 lb)

Technical Data
Current and Earth Current Measurement
Plug-in Connectors with Integrated Short-Circuiter

(Conventional Current Inputs)
Nominal currents: 1A/5A

Max. measuring range: up to 40 x In (phase currents) up to 2.5 x In (earth current sensitive)1)
up to 25 x In (earth current
standard)
Continuous loading capacity: Phase current/Earth current Earth current sensitive1)

4 x In/continuously 2 x In/continuously
Overcurrent proof: Phase current/Earth current Earth current sensitive1)

30 x In/10 s 10 x In/10 s
100 x In/1 s 25 x In/1 s
250 x In/10 ms (1 half-wave) 100 x In/10 ms (1 half-wave)
Power consumption: Phase current inputs:

at In = 1 A S = 25 mVA
at In = 5 A S = 90 mVA
Earth current input: Sensitive earth1) current input:

at In = 1 A S = 25 mVA at 0,1 A (1A) S = 7 mVA (550 mVA)
at In = 5 A S = 90 mVA at 0,5 A (5A) S = 10 mVA (870 mVA)
Frequency range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10%
Terminals: Screw-type terminals with integrated short-circuiters (contacts)
Screws: M4, captive type acc. to VDEW
Connection Cross Sections: 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x AWG 14) with wire end ferrule
1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x AWG 12) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG 10) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
Only
The current measuring board´s terminal blocks may be used as with 2 (double)
conductors AWG 10,12,14 otherwise with single conductors only.
1)
only in completion with sensitive earth measuring (see ordering information)

Technical Data
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement
The following Technical Data are valid for 8-pole (large) voltage measurement terminals.
Nominal voltages: 60 - 520 V (can be configured)
Max. measuring range: 800 V AC
Continuous loading capacity: 800 V AC
Power consumption: at Vn = 100 V S = 22 mVA

at Vn = 110 V S = 25 mVA
at Vn = 230 V S = 110 mVA
at Vn = 400 V S = 330 mVA
Frequency range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Terminals: Screw-type terminals
Frequency Measurement
Nominal frequencies: 50 Hz / 60 Hz

Technical Data
Voltage Supply
Aux. Voltage:
24V - 270 V DC/48 - 230 V AC (-20/+10%) ≂
Buffer time in case of supply failure: >= 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage. The device will shut down if
the buffer time is expired.
Note: communication could be interrupted
Max. permissible making current: 18 A peak value for <0.25 ms

12 A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:

2,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5x20 mm (approx. 1/5” x 0.8”) according to IEC 60127
3,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6,3x32 mm (approx. 1/4” x 1 1/4”) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption
Power supply range: Power consumption Max. power consumption

in idle mode
24-270 V DC: 8W 13 W
48-230 V AC 8W / 16 VA 13 W / 21 VA
(for frequencies of 50-60 Hz):

Technical Data
Display
Display type: LCD with LED background illumination

Resolution graphics display: 128 x 64 pixel
LED-Type: Two colored: red/green

Number of LEDs, Housing B2: 15
Front Interface RS232
Baud rates: 115200 Baud

Handshake: RTS and CTS
Connection: 9-pole D-Sub plug
Real Time Clock

Running reserve of the real time clock: 1 year min.

Technical Data
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: 300 V DC/259 V AC

Input current: DC <4 mA
AC <16 mA
Reaction time: <20 ms
Fallback Time:
Shorted inputs <30 ms
Open inputs <90 ms
Open inputs Shorted inputs

L+ L+
L- L-
DI1 DI2 DI8 COM DI1 DI2 DI8 COM
(Safe state of the digital inputs)
4 Switching thresholds: Un = 24 V DC, 48 V DC, 60 V DC,

110 V AC/DC, 230 V AC/DC
Un = 24 V DC:
Switching threshold 1 ON: min. 19.2 V DC
Switching threshold 1 OFF: max. 9.6 V DC
Un = 48 V/60V DC:
Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 V DC
Switching threshold 2 OFF: max. 21.3 V DC
Un = 110 V AC/DC:
Switching threshold 3 ON: min. 88.0 V DC/88.0 V AC
Switching threshold 3 OFF: max. 44.0 V DC/44.0 V AC
Un = 230 V AC/DC:
Switching threshold 4 ON: min. 184 V DC/184 V AC
Switching threshold 4 OFF max. 92 V DC/92 V AC

Technical Data
Binary Output Relays
Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC

Max. Switch-on current: 25 A AC/DC for 4 s
48W (VA) at L/R = 40ms
30 A / 230 Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
30 A / 250 Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 240 V AC
4 A AC at 230V and cos φ = 0,4
5 A DC up to 30 V (resistive)
0.3 A DC at 250 V (resistive)
0,1 A DC at 220 V and L/R = 40ms
Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC/250 V DC
Switching capacity: 3000 VA
Contact type: 1 changeover contact or normally open or normally closed
Supervision Contact (SC)
Continuous current:: 5 A AC/DC

Max. Switch-on current: 15 A AC/DC for 4 s
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 250 V AC
5 A DC up to 30 V (resistive)
0.25 A DC at 250 V (resistive)
Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC/250 V DC
Switching capacity: 1250 VA
Contact type: 1 changeover contact

Technical Data
Time Synchronization IRIG
Nominal input voltage: 5V

Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
RS485*
Master/Slave: Slave
Connection: 9-pole D-Sub socket
(external terminating resistors/in D-Sub)
or 6 screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
In case that the RS485 interface is realized via terminals, the communication
cable has to be shielded.
Fibre Optic*
Master/Slave: Slave
Connection: ST-Plug
Wavelength 820 nm
Optical Fast Ethernet*
Connection: LC-Plug
Wavelength: 1300 nm
Fiber: 62.5/125 or 50/125 µm multimode
URTD-Interface*
Connection: Versatile Link
*availability depends on device
Boot phase
After switching on the power supply the protection will be available in approximately 11 seconds. After
approximately 150 seconds the boot phase is completed (HMI and Communication initialized).

Servicing and Maintenance
Within the scope of servicing and maintenance following checks of the unit hardware have to be conducted:
Component Step Interval/How often?
Output Relays Please check the Output Relays via Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
Test menu Force/Disarm conditions.
(please see chapter Service)
Digital Inputs Please supply a voltage to the Digital Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
Inputs and control if the appropriate conditions.
status signal appears.
Current plugs and Current Please supply testing current to the Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
measurements Current measurement inputs and conditions.
control the displayed measure values
from the unit.
Voltage plugs and Voltage Please supply testing current to the Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
measurements Voltage measurement inputs and conditions.
control the displayed measure values
from the unit.
Analog Inputs Please feed analog signals into the Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
measurement inputs and check if the conditions.
displayed measure values match.
Analog Outputs Please check the Analog Outputs via Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
Test menu Force/Disarm conditions.
(please see chapter Service)
Battery Readout the clock of the unit. Generally after 10 years at the earliest.
Switch of the unit de-energized for a Exchange by manufacturer.
short moment (>20s). Advice, the battery serves as buffering of the clock
(real time clock).
Reset the unit.
There's no impact of the functionality of the unit if
Please check if the clock ran onwards the battery breaks down in addition to the buffering
of the clock while the unit is in de-energized
correctly.
condition.
Self-monitoring contact Switch of the auxiliary supply of the Each 1-4 years, according to ambience
unit. conditions.
The Selt-monitoring contact has to
dropout now.
Please switch on the auxiliary supply
again.
Mechanical mounting of the Check the torque related to the With each maintenance or yearly.
unit of the cabinet door specification of the Installation chapter.
Torque of all cable Check the torque related to the With each maintenance or yearly.
connections specification of the Installation chapter
which describes the hardware
modules.

We recommend to excecute an protection test after each 4 years period. This period can be extended to 6 years if a
function test is excecuted latest each 3 years.

Standards
Standards
Approvals
UL- File No.: E217753

CSA File No.: 251990**
CEI 0-16* (Tested by EuroTest Laboratori S.r.I, Italy)*
BDEW Certified ( FGW TR3/ FGW TR8/ Q-U-Schutz)**
KEMA***
EAC
* = applies to MRU4
** = applies to MCA4
*** = applies to (MRDT4, MCA4, MRA4, MRI4, MRU4)
Design Standards
Generic standard EN 61000-6-2 , 2005

EN 61000-6-3 , 2006
Product standard IEC 60255-1; 2009
IEC 60255-27, 2013
EN 50178, 1998
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment), 2005
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment),1995
ANSI C37.90, 2005

Standards
High Voltage Tests
High frequency interference test

IEC 60255-22-1 Within one circuit 1 kV , 2 s
IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-18
Circuit to earth 2.5 kV , 2 s
class 3
Circuit to circuit 2.5 kV , 2 s
Insulation voltage test

IEC 60255-27 (10.5.3.2) All circuits to other circuits and exposed 2.5 kV (eff.)/50Hz , 1 min.
IEC 60255-5 conductive parts
EN 50178
Except interfaces 1,5 kV DC , 1 min.
and Voltage measuring input 3 kV (eff.)/50 Hz , 1 min.
Impulse voltage test

IEC 60255-27 (10.5.3.1) 5 kV/0.5J, 1.2/50 µs
IEC 60255-5
Insulation resistance test

IEC 60255-27 (10.5.3.3) Within one circuit 500V DC , 5s
EN 50178
Circuit to circuit 500V DC , 5s

Standards
EMC Immunity Tests
Fast transient disturbance immunity test (Burst)

IEC 60255-22-4 Power supply, mains inputs ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4
class 4
Other in- and outputs ±2 kV, 5 kHz
Surge immunity test (Surge)

IEC 60255-22-5 Within one circuit 2 kV
IEC 61000-4-5
class 4
Circuit to earth 4 kV
class 3 Communication cables to earth 2 kV
Electrical discharge immunity test (ESD)

IEC 60255-22-2 Air discharge 8 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
class 3
Contact discharge 6 kV
Radiated radio-frequency electromagnetic field immunity test

IEC 60255-22-3 26 MHz – 80 MHz 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz – 1 GHz 35 V/m
1 GHz – 3 GHz 10 V/m
Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields

IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - 80MHz 10 V
class 3
Power frequency magnetic field immunity test

IEC 61000-4-8 continues 30 A/m
class 4
3 sec 300 A/m

Standards
EMC Emission Tests
Radio interference suppression test

IEC/CISPR22 150kHz - 30MHz Limit value class B
IEC60255-26
DIN EN 55022
Radio interference radiation test

IEC/CISPR22 30MHz - 1GHz Limit value class B
IEC60255-25
DIN EN 55022

Standards
Environmental Tests
Classification:
IEC 60068-1 Climatic 20/060/56
classification
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of ambient conditions 1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2

(Storage) but min. -30°C
IEC 60721-3-2 Classification of ambient conditions 2K2/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2
(Transportation) but min. -30°C
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of ambient conditions 3K6/3B1/3C1/3S1/3M2
(Stationary use at weather protected but min. -20°C/max +60°C
locations)
Test Ad: Cold

IEC 60068-2-1 Temperature -20°C
test duration 16 h
Test Bd: Dry Heat

IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature 60°C
Relative humidity <50%
test duration 72 h
Test Db: Damp Heat (cyclic)

IEC 60068-2-30 Temperature 60°C
Relative humidity 95%
Cycles (12 + 12-hour) 2

Standards
Environmental Tests
Test Cab: Damp Heat (permanent)

IEC 60255 (6.12.3.6) Temperature 60°C
IEC 60068-2-78 Relative humidity 95%
test duration 56 days
Test Nb:Temperature Change

IEC 60255 (6.12.3.5) Temperature 60°C/-20°C
IEC 60068-2-14 cycle 5
test duration 1°C/5min
Test BD: Dry Heat Transport and storage test

IEC 60255 (6.12.3.3) Temperature 70°C
IEC 60068-2-2 test duration 16 h
Test AB: Cold Transport and storage test

IEC 60255-1 (6.12.3.4) Temperature -30°C
IEC 60068-2-1 test duration 16 h

Standards
Mechanical Tests
Test Fc: Vibration response test

IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 59 Hz) 0.035 mm
IEC 60255-21-1 Displacement
class 1
(59Hz – 150Hz) 0,5 gn
Acceleration
Number of cycles in each axis 1
Test Fc: Vibration endurance test

IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 150 Hz) 1.0 gn
IEC 60255-21-1 Acceleration
class 1
Number of cycles in each axis 20
Test Ea: Shock tests

IEC 60068-2-27 Shock response test 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
IEC 60255-21-2 direction
class 1
Shock resistance test 15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
direction
Test Eb: Shockendurance test

IEC 60068-2-29 Shock endurance test 10 gn, 16 ms, 1000 impulses in each
IEC 60255-21-2 direction
class 1
Test Fe: Earthquake test

IEC 60068-3-3 Single axis earthquake vibration test 1 – 9 Hz horizontal: 7.5 mm,
IEC 60255-21-3 1 – 9 Hz vertical :3.5 mm,
1 sweep per axis
class 2 9 – 35 Hz horizontal: 2 gn,

9 – 35 Hz vertical : 1 gn,
1 sweep per axis

General Lists
General Lists
Assignment List
The »ASSIGNMENT LIST« below summarizes all module outputs (signals) and inputs (e.g. states of the assignments).
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.available Signal: Protection is available
Prot.active Signal: active
Prot.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Prot.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Prot.Alarm L1 Signal: General-Alarm L1
Prot.Alarm G Signal: General-Alarm - Earth fault
Prot.Alarm Signal: General Alarm
Prot.Trip L1 Signal: General Trip L1
Prot.Trip G Signal: General Trip Ground fault
Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip
Prot.Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.IG calc dir fwd Signal: Ground fault (calculated) forward
Prot.IG calc rev dir Signal: Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
Prot.IG calc dir n poss Signal: Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
Prot.IG meas dir fwd Signal: Ground fault (measured) forward
Prot.IG meas rev dir Signal: Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
Prot.IG meas dir n poss Signal: Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Prot.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
Prot.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
Prot.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Ctrl.Local Switching Authority: Local
Ctrl.Remote Switching Authority: Remote
Ctrl.NonInterl Non-Interlocking is active
Ctrl.SG Indeterm Minimum one Switchgear is moving (Position cannot be determined).
Ctrl.SG Disturb Minimum one Switchgear is disturbed.

General Lists
Name Description
Ctrl.NonInterl-I Non-Interlocking
SG[1].SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate
and disturbed Positions cannot be detected.
SG[1].Pos not ON Signal: Pos not ON
SG[1].Pos ON Signal: Circuit Breaker is in ON-Position
SG[1].Pos OFF Signal: Circuit Breaker is in OFF-Position
SG[1].Pos Indeterm Signal: Circuit Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
SG[1].Pos Disturb Signal: Circuit Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The Position Indicators contradict
themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
SG[1].Ready Signal: Circuit breaker is ready for operation.
SG[1].t-Dwell Signal: Dwell time
SG[1].Removed Signal: The withdrawable circuit breaker is Removed
SG[1].Interl ON Signal: One or more IL_On inputs are active.
SG[1].Interl OFF Signal: One or more IL_Off inputs are active.
SG[1].CES succesf Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed successfully.
SG[1].CES Disturbed Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed
position.
SG[1].CES Fail TripCmd Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Command execution failed because trip command is pending.
SG[1].CES SwitchDir Signal: Command Execution Supervision respectively Switching Direction Control: This signal becomes
true, if a switch command is issued even though the switchgear is already in the requested position.
Example: A switchgear that is already OFF should be switched OFF again (doubly). The same applies to
CLOSE commands.
SG[1].CES ON d OFF Signal: Command Execution Supervision: On Command during a pending OFF Command.
SG[1].CES SG not ready Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
SG[1].CES Fiel Interl Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of field interlocking.
SG[1].CES SyncTimeout Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed. No Synchronization signal
while t-sync was running.
SG[1].CES SG removed Signal: Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful, Switchgear removed.
SG[1].Prot ON Signal: ON Command issued by the Prot module
SG[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
SG[1].Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
SG[1].ON incl Prot ON Signal: The ON Command includes the ON Command issued by the Protection module.
SG[1].OFF incl TripCmd Signal: The OFF Command includes the OFF Command issued by the Protection module.
SG[1].Position Ind manipul Signal: Position Indicators faked
SG[1].SGwear Slow SG Signal: Alarm, the circuit breaker (load-break switch) becomes slower
SG[1].Res SGwear Sl SG Signal: Resetting the slow Switchgear Alarm
SG[1].ON Cmd Signal: ON Command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the ON
command of the Prot module.
SG[1].OFF Cmd Signal: OFF Command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the OFF
command of the Prot module.
SG[1].ON Cmd manual Signal: ON Cmd manual
SG[1].OFF Cmd manual Signal: OFF Cmd manual
SG[1].Sync ON request Signal: Synchronous ON request

General Lists
Name Description
SG[1].Aux ON-I Module Input State: Position indicator/check-back signal of the CB (52a)
SG[1].Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position indicator/check-back signal of the CB (52b)
SG[1].Ready-I Module input state: CB ready
SG[1].Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has to become true within the synchronization time. If not, switching
is unsuccessful.
SG[1].Removed-I State of the module input: The withdrawable circuit breaker is Removed
SG[1].Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgement Signal (only for automatic acknowledgement) Module input
signal
SG[1].Interl ON1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the ON command
SG[1].Interl OFF1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OFF command
SG[1].SCmd ON-I State of the module input: Switching ON Command, e.g. the state of the Logics or the state of the digital
input
SG[1].SCmd OFF-I State of the module input: Switching OFF Command, e.g. the state of the Logics or the state of the digital
input
SG[1].Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
SG[1].Isum Intr trip: IL1 Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IL1
SG[1].Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded in at least one
phase.
SG[1].Res TripCmd Cr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands
SG[1].Res Sum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
SG[1].WearLevel Alarm Signal: Threshold for the Alarm
SG[1].WearLevel Lockout Signal: Threshold for the Lockout Level
SG[1].Res SGwear Curve Signal: Reset of the Circuit Breaker (load-break switch) Wear maintenance curve.
SG[1].Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been exceeded.
SG[1].Res Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Reset of the Alarm, "the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been exceeded".
I[1].active Signal: active
I[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I[1].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
I[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[1].IH2 Blo Signal: Blocking the trip command by an inrush
I[1].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1

General Lists
Name Description
I[1].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip Phase L1
I[1].Trip Signal: Trip
I[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
I[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
I[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I[1].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
I[1].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
IG[1].active Signal: active
IG[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking

General Lists
Name Description
IG[1].Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
IG[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
IG[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[1].Trip Signal: Trip
IG[1].IGH2 Blo Signal: blocked by an inrush
IG[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
IG[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
IG[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IG[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IG[1].Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
IG[1].AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
ThR.active Signal: active
ThR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ThR.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ThR.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ThR.Alarm Signal: Alarm Thermal Overload
ThR.Trip Signal: Trip
ThR.Res Thermal Cap Signal: Resetting Thermal Replica
ThR.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ThR.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ThR.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[1].active Signal: active
I2>[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I2>[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I2>[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
I2>[1].Trip Signal: Trip
I2>[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
I2>[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[2].active Signal: active
I2>[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
I2>[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
I2>[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
I2>[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Negative Sequence
I2>[2].Trip Signal: Trip
I2>[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
IH2.active Signal: active
IH2.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking

General Lists
Name Description
IH2.Blo IG meas Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (measured ground current)
IH2.Blo IG calc Signal: Blocking of the ground (earth) protection module (calculated ground current)
IH2.3-ph Blo Signal: Inrush was detected in at least one phase - trip command blocked.
IH2.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
IH2.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
V[1].active Signal: active
V[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V[1].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
V[1].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip Phase L1
V[1].Trip Signal: Trip
V[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
df/dt.active Signal: active
df/dt.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
df/dt.Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
df/dt.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
df/dt.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
df/dt.Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)
df/dt.Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
df/dt.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
df/dt.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
df/dt.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
delta phi.active Signal: active
delta phi.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
delta phi.Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
delta phi.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
delta phi.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
delta phi.Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)

General Lists
Name Description
delta phi.Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
delta phi.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
delta phi.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
delta phi.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Intertripping.active Signal: active
Intertripping.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Intertripping.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
Intertripping.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Intertripping.Alarm Signal: Alarm
Intertripping.Trip Signal: Trip
Intertripping.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
Intertripping.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
Intertripping.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Intertripping.Alarm-I Module input state: Alarm
Intertripping.Trip-I Module input state: Trip
P.active Signal: active
P.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
P.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
P.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
P.Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
P.Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
P.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
P.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
P.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Q.active Signal: active
Q.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Q.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
Q.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Q.Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
Q.Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
Q.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
Q.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
Q.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
LVRT[1].active Signal: active
LVRT[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
LVRT[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked

General Lists
Name Description
LVRT[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
LVRT[1].Alarm L1 Signal: Alarm L1
LVRT[1].Trip L1 Signal: General Trip Phase L1
LVRT[1].Trip Signal: Trip
LVRT[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
LVRT[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
LVRT[2].active Signal: active
LVRT[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
LVRT[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
LVRT[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
LVRT[2].Trip Signal: Trip
LVRT[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VG[1].active Signal: active
VG[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
VG[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
VG[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VG[1].Trip Signal: Trip
VG[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1

General Lists
Name Description
VG[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VG[2].active Signal: active
VG[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
VG[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
VG[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
VG[2].Trip Signal: Trip
VG[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V012[1].active Signal: active
V012[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
V012[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
V012[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
V012[1].Trip Signal: Trip
V012[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
V012[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command

General Lists
Name Description
f[1].active Signal: active
f[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
f[1].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
f[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
f[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
f[1].Alarm f Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection
f[1].Alarm df/dt | DF/DT Alarm instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequency-change
f[1].Alarm delta phi Signal: Alarm Vector Surge
f[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Frequency Protection (collective signal)

General Lists
Name Description
f[1].Trip f Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
f[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
f[1].Trip delta phi Signal: Trip Vector Surge
f[1].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
f[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
f[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
PQS[1].active Signal: active
PQS[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PQS[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PQS[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PQS[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Protection
PQS[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PQS[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PQS[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command

General Lists
Name Description
PF[1].active Signal: active
PF[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
PF[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor

General Lists
Name Description
PF[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF[1].Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible
PF[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
PF[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF[2].active Signal: active
PF[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm Power Factor
PF[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF[2].Impossible Signal: Alarm Power Factor Impossible
PF[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Q->&V<.active Signal: active
Q->&V<.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Q->&V<.Fuse Fail VT Blo Signal: Blocked by Fuse Failure (VT)
Q->&V<.Alarm Signal: Alarm Reactive Power Undervoltage Protection
Q->&V<.Power Angle Signal: Admissible power angle exceeded
Q->&V<.Reactive Power Thres Signal: Admissible Reactive Power Threshold exceeded
Q->&V<.VLL too low Signal: Line-to-Line voltage too low
Q->&V<.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
Q->&V<.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ReCon.active Signal: active
ReCon.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ReCon.Blo by Meas Ciruit Signal: Module blocked by measuring cirucuit supervision
Superv
ReCon.Release Energy Signal: Release Energy Resource. Internal (local) voltage release
Resource
ReCon.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ReCon.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
ReCon.V Ext Release PCC-I Module input state: Release signal is being generated by the PCC (External Release)
ReCon.PCC Fuse Fail VT-I State of the module input: Blocking if the fuse of a voltage transformer has tripped at the PCC.
ReCon.reconnected-I This signal indicates the state "reconnected" (mains parallel).
ReCon.Decoupling1-I Decoupling function, that blocks the reconnection.

General Lists
Name Description
UFLS.active Signal: active
UFLS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
UFLS.Fuse Fail VT Blo Signal: Blocked by Fuse Failure (VT)
UFLS.I1 Release Signal: "I Minimum Current" in order to prevent faulty tripping. Module will be released if the current
exceeds this value.
UFLS.VLL min Signal: Minimum Voltage
UFLS.Power Angle Signal: Trigger Phi-Power (Positive Phase Sequence System)
UFLS.P min Signal: Minimum Value (threshold) for the Active Power
UFLS.P Blo Loadshedding Signal: Load shedding blocked based on evaluation of active power
UFLS.f< Signal: Underfrequency threshold
UFLS.Alarm Signal: Alarm P->&f<
UFLS.DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
UFLS.AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
UFLS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
UFLS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
UFLS.Ex Pdir-I Ignore (block) the evaluation of the power flow direction. This results in classical frequency based load
shedding functionallity. When this feature is set and active, the functionallity of the module turns into
conventional, only frequency based load shedding.
UFLS.AdaptSet1-I Module input state: Adaptive Parameter1
AR.active Signal: active
AR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
AR.Standby Signal: Standby
AR.t-Blo after CB man ON Signal: AR blocked after circuit breaker was switched on manually. This timer will be started if the circuit
breaker was switched on manually. While this timer is running, AR cannot be started.
AR.Ready Signal: Ready to shoot
AR.running Signal: Auto Reclosing running
AR.t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt

General Lists
Name Description
AR.CB ON Cmd Signal: CB switch ON Command
AR.t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Circuit Breaker remains after a reclosure attempt for the duration of this
timer in the Closed position, the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the ready state.
AR.Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
AR.t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the AR lockout state will be delayed for this
time, after the reset signal (e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected .
AR.Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
AR.t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for
this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore.
AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing failure
AR.t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision
AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control
AR.Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
AR.Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2 - too many switching operations
AR.Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been exceeded.
AR.Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
AR.Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for Alarm and Blocking
AR.Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
AR.Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has been reset.
AR.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
AR.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
AR.Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter will be incremented by this external Signal. This can be used for
Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables the functionality
only. The assignment has to be set within the global parameters.
AR.Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout.
AR.DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the resetting via digital inputs has been
selected).
AR.Scada Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by Communication.
AR.abort: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will
be aborted.
be aborted.
be aborted.
be aborted.

General Lists
Name Description
be aborted.
be aborted.
Sync.active Signal: active
Sync.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Sync.LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Voltage is below the LiveBus threshold
Sync.LiveLine Signal: Live Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Voltage is below the LiveLine threshold
Sync.SynchronRunTiming Signal: SynchronRunTiming
Sync.SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s when the circuit breaker is still open
after the Synchron-Run-timer has timed out.
Sync.SyncOverridden Signal:Synchronism Check is overridden because one of the Synchronism overriding conditions (DB/DL or
ExtBypass) is met.
Sync.VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
Sync.SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line voltages too high.
Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too high.
Sync.Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the system synchronism criteria.
Sync.Ready to Close Signal: Ready to Close
Sync.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
Sync.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
Sync.Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass
Sync.CBCloseInitiate-I State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism check from any control sources (e.g.
HMI / SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger
Source).
SOTF.active Signal: active
SOTF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
SOTF.Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
SOTF.AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current.
SOTF.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
SOTF.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
SOTF.Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
SOTF.Ext SOTF-I Module input state: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm
CLPU.active Signal: active
CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.Ex rev Interl Signal: External reverse Interlocking
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush

General Lists
Name Description
CLPU.Settle Time Signal: Settle Time
CLPU.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking
CLPU.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking
CLPU.Ex rev Interl-I Module input state: External reverse interlocking
ExP[1].active Signal: active
ExP[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Trip Signal: Trip
ExP[1].ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module input state: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Alarm-I Module input state: Alarm
ExP[1].Trip-I Module input state: Trip

General Lists
Name Description
CBF.active Signal: active
CBF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CBF.Waiting for Trigger Waiting for Trigger
CBF.running Signal: CBF-Module started
CBF.Alarm Signal: Circuit Breaker Failure
CBF.Lockout Signal: Lockout
CBF.Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout
CBF.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
CBF.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
CBF.Trigger1-I Module Input: Trigger that will start the CBF
TCS.active Signal: active
TCS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
TCS.Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Circuit Supervision
TCS.Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
TCS.Aux ON-I Module Input State: Position indicator/check-back signal of the CB (52a)
TCS.Aux OFF-I Module input state: Position indicator/check-back signal of the CB (52b)
TCS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
TCS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
CTS.active Signal: active
CTS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CTS.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
CTS.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
LOP.active Signal: active
LOP.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking

General Lists
Name Description
LOP.LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements.
LOP.Ex FF VT Signal: Ex FF VT
LOP.Ex FF EVT Signal: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers
LOP.ExBlo1-I Module input state: External blocking1
LOP.ExBlo2-I Module input state: External blocking2
LOP.Ex FF VT-I State of the module input: Alarm Fuse Failure Voltage Transformers
LOP.Ex FF EVT-I State of the module input: Alarm Fuse Failure Earth Voltage Transformers
LOP.Blo Trigger1-I State of the module input: An Alarm of this protective element will block the Loss of Potential Detection.
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Ws Net Signal: Counter Overflow Ws Net
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wp Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wp Net
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wp+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wp+
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wp- Signal: Counter Overflow Wp-
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wq Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wq Net
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wq+ Signal: Counter Overflow Wq+
PQSCr.Cr Oflw Wq- Signal: Counter Overflow Wq-
PQSCr.Ws Net Res Cr Signal: Ws Net Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wp Net Res Cr Signal: Wp Net Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wp+ Res Cr Signal: Wp+ Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wp- Res Cr Signal: Wp- Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wq Net Res Cr Signal: Wq Net Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wq+ Res Cr Signal: Wq+ Reset Counter
PQSCr.Wq- Res Cr Signal: Wq- Reset Counter
PQSCr.Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Ws Net Signal: Counter Ws Net will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wp Net Signal: Counter Wp Net will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wp+ Signal: Counter Wp+ will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wp- Signal: Counter Wp- will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wq Net Signal: Counter Wq Net will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wq+ Signal: Counter Wq+ will overflow soon
PQSCr.Cr OflwW Wq- Signal: Counter Wq- will overflow soon
SysA.active Signal: active
SysA.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
SysA.Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm permitted Active Power exceeded
SysA.Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm permitted Reactive Power exceeded
SysA.Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm permitted Apparent Power exceeded
SysA.Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Active Power exceeded

General Lists
Name Description
SysA.Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Reactive Power exceeded
SysA.Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm averaged Apparent Power exceeded
SysA.Alm Current Demd Signal: Alarm averaged demand current
SysA.Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip permitted Active Power exceeded
SysA.Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip permitted Reactive Power exceeded
SysA.Trip VA Power Signal: Trip permitted Apparent Power exceeded
SysA.Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip averaged Active Power exceeded
SysA.Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip averaged Reactive Power exceeded
SysA.Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip averaged Apparent Power exceeded
SysA.Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip averaged demand current
SysA.Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.ExBlo-I Module input state: External blocking
BO Slot X2.BO 1 Signal: Binary Output Relay
BO Slot X2.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk
of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: The Self Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). YOU MUST
ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance

General Lists
Name Description
BO Slot X2.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least
one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
BO Slot X5.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk
of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: The Self Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). YOU MUST
ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance
BO Slot X5.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least
one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
Event rec.Res all records Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.recording Signal: Recording
Disturb rec.memory full Signal: Memory full
Disturb rec.Clear fail Signal: Clear failure in memory
Disturb rec.Res all records Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.Res rec Signal: Delete record
Disturb rec.Man Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Disturb rec.Start1-I State of the module input:: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Res rec Signal: Delete record
Trend rec.Hand Reset Hand Reset
SSV.System Error Signal: Device Failure
SSV.SelfSuperVision Contact Signal: SelfSuperVision Contact
Scada.SCADA connected At least one SCADA System is connected to the device.
Scada.SCADA not connected No SCADA System is connected to the device
DNP3.busy This message is set if the protocol is started. It will be reset if the protocol is shut down.
DNP3.ready The message will be set if the protocol is successfully started and ready for data exchange.
DNP3.active The communication with the Master (Scada) is active.

General Lists
Name Description
DNP3.BinaryInput0-I Virtual Digital Input (DNP). This corresponds to a virtual binary output of the protective device.

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
Modbus.Transmission Signal: SCADA active
Modbus.Config Bin Inp1-I State of the module input: Config Bin Inp

General Lists
Name Description
IEC61850.MMS Client At least one MMS client is connected to the device
connected
IEC61850.All Goose All Goose subscriber in the device are working
Subscriber active

General Lists
Name Description
IEC61850.Quality of GGIO In1 Self-Supervision of the GGIO Input
IEC61850.Quality of GGIO Self-Supervision of the GGIO Input
In10
In11
In12
In13
In14
In15
In16
In17

General Lists
Name Description
In18
In19
In20
In21
In22
In23
In24
In25
In26
In27
In28
In29
In30
In31
In32

General Lists
Name Description
IEC61850.VirtOut1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)

General Lists
Name Description
IEC 103.Transmission Signal: SCADA active
IEC 103.Failure Event lost Failure event lost
Profibus.Data OK Data within the Input field are OK (Yes=1)
Profibus.SubModul Err Assignable Signal, Failure in Sub-Module, Communication Failure.
Profibus.Connection active Connection active

General Lists
Name Description
IRIG-B.IRIG-B active Signal: If there is no valid IRIG-B signal for 60 sec, IRIG-B is regarded as inactive.
IRIG-B.High-Low Invert Signal: The High and Low signals of the IRIG-B are inverted. This does NOT mean that the wiring is faulty.
If the wiring is faulty no IRIG-B signal will be detected.
IRIG-B.Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal. The external IRIG-B generator can set these signals. They can be used for
further control procedures inside the device (e.g. logic funtions).
SNTP.SNTP active Signal: If there is no valid SNTP signal for 120 sec, SNTP is regarded as inactive.
Statistics.ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max)
Statistics.ResFc Vavg Signal: Resetting of the sliding average calculation.
Statistics.ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
Statistics.ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values

General Lists
Name Description
Statistics.StartFc Vavg-I State of the module input: (StartFunc3_h)
Statistics.StartFc I Demand-I State of the module input: Start of the Statistics of the Current Demand
Statistics.StartFc P Demand-I State of the module input: Start of the Statistics of the Active Power Demand
Logics.LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logics.LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description
Sgen.Running Signal; Measuring value simulation is running
Sgen.Ex Start Simulation-I State of the module input:External Start of Fault Simulation (Using the test parameters)
Sgen.ExBlo Module input state: External blocking
Sgen.Ex ForcePost-I State of the module input:Force Post state. Abort simulation.
Sys.PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
Sys.PSS manual Signal: Manual Switch over of a Parameter Set
Sys.PSS via Scada Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Scada. Write into this output byte the integer of the parameter set that
should become acitve (e.g. 4 => Switch onto parameter set 4).
Sys.PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via input function
Sys.min 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Sys.Setting Lock Bypass Signal: Short-period unlock of the Setting Lock
Sys.Ack LED Signal: LEDs acknowledgement
Sys.Ack BO Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs
Sys.Ack Scada Signal: Acknowledge Scada
Sys.Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Sys.Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs acknowledgement :HMI
Sys.Ack BO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs :HMI
Sys.Ack Scada-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Scada :HMI
Sys.Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Sys.Ack LED-Sca Signal: LEDs acknowledgement :SCADA
Sys.Ack BO-Sca Signal: Acknowledgement of the Binary Outputs :SCADA
Sys.Ack Counter-Sca Signal: Reset of all Counters :SCADA
Sys.Ack Scada-Sca Signal: Acknowledge Scada :SCADA
Sys.Ack TripCmd-Sca Signal: Reset Trip Command :SCADA
Sys.Res OperationsCr Signal:: Res OperationsCr
Sys.Res AlarmCr Signal:: Res AlarmCr
Sys.Res TripCmdCr Signal:: Res TripCmdCr
Sys.Res TotalCr Signal:: Res TotalCr
Sys.Ack LED-I Module input state: LEDs acknowledgement by digital input
Sys.Ack BO-I Module input state: Acknowledgement of the binary Output Relays
Sys.Ack Scada-I Module input state: Acknowledge Scada via digital input. The replica that SCADA has got from the device
is to be reset.
Sys.PS1-I State of the module input respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group.

General Lists
Name Description
Sys.Lock Settings-I State of the module input: No parameters can be changed as long as this input is true. The parameter
settings are locked.
List of the Digital Inputs

The following list comprises all Digital Inputs. This list is used in various Protective Elements (e.g. TCS, Q->&V<...).
The availability and the number of entries depends on the type of device.
Name Description
-.- No assignment

General Lists
Signals of the Digital Inputs and Logic

The following list comprises the signals of the Digital Inputs and the Logic. This list is used in various protective
elements.
Name Description
-.- No assignment

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

General Lists
Name Description

Abbreviations, and Acronyms

The following abbreviations and acronyms are used in this manual.
°C Degrees Celsius
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
A Ampere(s), Amp(s)
AC Alternating current
Ack. Acknowledge
AND Logical gate (The output becomes true if all Input signals are true.)
ANSI American National Standards Institute
avg. Average
AWG American wire gauge
BF Circuit breaker failure
Bkr Breaker
Blo Blocking(s)
BO Binary output relay
BO1 1st binary output relay
BO2 2nd binary output relay
BO3 3rd binary output relay
calc Calculated
CB Circuit breaker
CBF Module Circuit Breaker Failure protection
CD Compact disk
Char Curve shape
CLPU Cold Load Pickup Module
Cmd. Command
CMN Common input
COM Common input
Comm Communication
Cr. Counter(s)
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CT Control transformer
Ctrl. Control
CTS Current Transformer Supervision
CTS Current transformer supervision
d Day
D-Sub-Plug Communication interface
DC Direct current
DEFT Definite time characteristic (Tripping time does not depend on the height of the current.)
delta phi Vector surge
df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change
DI Digital Input
Diagn Cr Diagnosis counter(s)
Diagn. Diagnosis

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm

dir Directional
EINV Extremely inverse tripping characteristic
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN Europäische Norm
err. / Err. Error
EVTcon Parameter determines if the residual voltage is measured or calculated.
Ex External
Ex Oil Temp External Oil Temperature
ExBlo External blocking(s)
ExP External Protection - Module
ExP External protection
Ext Sudd Press Sudden Pressure
Ext Temp Superv External Temperature Supervision
f Frequency Protection Module
Fc Function (Enable or disable functionality = allow or disallow.)
FIFO First in first out
FIFO Principal First in first out
fund Fundamental (ground wave)
gn Acceleration of the earth in vertical direction (9.81 m/s2)
GND Ground
h Hour
HMI Human machine interface (Front of the protective relay)
HTL Manufacturer internal product designation
Hz Hertz
I Phase Overcurrent Stage
I Fault current
I Current
I-BF Tripping threshold
I0 Zero current (symmetrical components)
I1 Positive sequence current (symmetrical components)
I2 Negative sequence current (symmetrical components)
I2> Unbalanced Load-Stage
I2T Thermal Characteristic
I4T Thermal Characteristic
IA Phase A current
IB Phase B current
IC Phase C current
IC's Manufacturer internal product designation
Id Differential Protection Module
IdG Restricted Ground Fault Differential Protection Module
IdGH Restricted Ground Fault Highset Protection Module
IdH High-Set Differential Protection Module
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC61850 IEC61850

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IG Earth current protection - Stage
IG Ground current
IG Fault current
IGnom Nominal ground current
IH1 1st harmonic
IH2 Module Inrush
IH2 2nd harmonic
in. Inch
incl. Include, including
InEn Inadvertent Energization
Info. Information
Interl. Interlocking
Intertripping Intertripping
INV Inverse characteristic (The tripping time will be calculated depending on the height of the
current)
IR Calculated ground current
IRIG Input for time synchronization (Clock)
IRIG-B IRIG-B-Module
IT Thermal Characteristic
IX 4th measuring input of the current measuring assembly group (either ground or neutral
current)
J Joule
kg Kilogram
kHz Kilohertz
kV Kilovolt(s)
kVdc or kVDC Kilovolt(s) direct current
l/ln Ratio of current to nominal current.
L1 Phase A
L2 Phase B
L3 Phase C
lb-in Pound-inch
LED Light emitting diode
LINV Long time inverse tripping characteristic
LoE-Z1 Loss of Excitation
LoE-Z2 Loss of Excitation
Logics Logic
LOP Loss of Potential
LV Low voltage
LVRT Low Voltage Ride Through
m Meter
mA Milliampere(s), Milliamp(s)
man. Manual
max. Maximum
meas Measured
min. Minimum

min. Minute
MINV Moderately Inverse Tripping Characteristic
MK Manufacturer Internal Product Designation Code
mm Millimeter
MMU Memory mapping unit
ms Milli-second(s)
MV Medium voltage
mVA Milli volt amperes (Power)
N.C. Not connected
N.O. Normal open (Contact)
NINV Normal inverse tripping characteristic
Nm Newton-meter
No Number
Nom. Nominal
NT Manufacturer internal product designation code
P Reverse Active Power
Para. Parameter
PC Personal computer
PCB Printed circuit board
PE Protected Earth
PF Power Factor - Module
Ph Phase
PQS Power Protection - Module
pri Primary
PROT or Prot Protection Module (Master Module)
PS1 Parameter set 1
PS2 Parameter set 2
PS3 Parameter set 3
PS4 Parameter set 4
PSet Parameter set
PSS Parameter set switch (Switching from one parameter set to another)
Q Reverse Reactive Power
Q->&V< Undervoltage and Reactive Power Direction Protection
R Reset
rec. Record
rel Relative
res Reset
ResetFct Reset function
RevData Review data
RMS Root mean square
Rst Reset
RTD Temperature Protection Module
s Second
SC Supervision contact
Sca SCADA

SCADA Communication module

sec Second(s)
sec Secondary
Sgen Sine wave generator
Sig. Signal
SNTP SNTP-Module
SOTF Switch Onto Fault - Module
StartFct Start function
Sum Summation
SW Software
Sync Synchrocheck
Sys. System
t Tripping delay
t or t. Time
Tcmd Trip command
TCP/IP Communication protocol
TCS Trip circuit supervision
ThR Thermal replica module
TI Manufacturer internal product designation code
TripCmd Trip command
txt Text
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UMZ DEFT (definite time tripping characteristic)
USB Universal serial bus
V Voltage-stage
V Volts
V/f> Overexcitation
V012 Symmetrical Components: Supervision of the Positive Phase Sequence or Negative Phase
Sequence
Vac / V ac Volts alternating current
Vdc / V dc Volts direct current
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnik
VDEW Verband der Elektrizitätswirtschaft
VE Residual voltage
VG Residual voltage-Stage
VINV Very inverse tripping characteristic
VTS Voltage transformer supervision
W Watt(s)
WDC Watch dog contact (supervision contact)
www World wide web
XCT 4th current measuring input (ground or neutral current)
XInv Inverse characteristic

List of ANSI Codes
List of ANSI Codes

EEE C 37.2:2008
ANSI Functions
14 Underspeed
23 Temperature Protection
24 Overexcitation Protection (Volts per Hertz)
25 Synchronizing or Synchronism-check via 4th measuring channel of voltage measurement card
27 Undervoltage Protection
27(t) Undervoltage (time dependent) Protection
27A Undervoltage Protection (Auxiliar) via 4th measuring channel of voltage measurement card
27N Neutral Undervoltage via 4th measuring channel of voltage measurement card
27TN Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage via 4th measuring channel of voltage measurement card
32 Directional Power Protection
32F Forward Power Protection
32R Reverse Power Protection
37 Undercurrent / Under Power
38 Temperature Protection (optional via Interface/external Box)
40 Loss of Excitation / Loss of Field
46 Unbalanced Current Protection
46G Unbalanced Generator Current Protection
47 Unbalanced Voltage Protection
48 Incomplete Sequence (Start-up time Supervison)
49 Thermal Protection
49M Thermal Motor Protection
49R Thermal Rotor Protection
49S Thermal Stator Protection
50BF Breaker Failure
50 Overcurrent (instantaneous)
50P Phase Overcurrent (instantaneous)
50N Neutral Overcurrent (instantaneous)
50Ns Sensitive Neutral Overcurrent (instantaneous)
51 Overcurrent
51P Phase Overcurrent
51N Neutral Overcurrent
51Ns Sensitive Neutral Overcurrent
51LR Locked Rotor
51LRS Locked Rotor Start (during start sequence)
51C Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (via adaptive Parameters)
51Q Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (multiple trip characteristics)
51V Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
55 Power Factor Protection
56 Field Application Relay
59 Overvoltage Protection
59TN Third Harmonic Neutral Overvoltage via 4th measuring channel of voltage measurement card
59A Overvoltage Protection via 4th (Auxiliar) measuring channel of voltage measurement card
59N Neutral Overvoltage Protection
60FL Voltage Transformer Supervision
60L Current Transformer Supervision
64R Rotor Earth Fault Protection
64REF Restricted Ground Fault Protection
66 Starts per h (Start Inhibit)
67 Directional Overcurrent

List of ANSI Codes
ANSI Functions
67N Directional Neutral Overcurrent
67Ns Sensitive Directional Neutral Overcurrent
74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
78V Vector Surge Protection
79 Auto Reclosure
81 Frequency Protection
81U Underfrequency Protection
81O Overfrequency Protection
81R ROCOF (df/dt)
86 Lock Out
87B Busbar Differential Protection
87G Generator Differential Protection
87GP Generator Phase Differential Protection
87GN Generator Ground Differential Protection
87M Motor Differential Protection
87T Transformer Differential Protection
87TP Transformer Phase Differential Protection
87TN Transformer Ground Differential Protection
87U Unit Differential Protection (protected zone includes generator and step-up transformer)
87UP Unit Phase Differential Protection (protected zone includes generator and step-up transformer)

Specifications
Specifications
Specifications of the Real Time Clock
Resolution: 1 ms
Tolerance: <1 minute / month (+20°C [68°F])
<±1ms if synchronized via IRIG-B
Time Synchronisation Tolerances
The different protocols for time synchronisation vary in their accuracy:
Used Protocol Time drift over one month Deviation to time generator
Without time synchronization <1 min (+20°C) Time drifts
IRIG-B Dependent on the time drift of <±1 ms
the time generator
SNTP Dependent on the time drift of <±1 ms
the time generator
IEC60870-5-103 Dependent on the time drift of <±1 ms
the time generator
Modbus TCP Dependent on the time drift of Dependent on the network load
the time generator
Modbus RTU Dependent on the time drift of <±1 ms
the time generator
DNP3 Dependent on the time drift of <±1 ms
the time generator
Specifications
Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition

Phase and Ground Current Measuring
Frequency Range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ± 10%

Accuracy: Class 0.5
*3)
Amplitude Error if I < In: ±0.5% of the rated current
*3)
Amplitude Error if I > In: ±0.5% of the measured current
*3)
Amplitude Error if I > 2 In: ±1.0% of the measured current
Harmonics: Up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±2%
Up to 20% 5th harmonic ±2%
Frequency Influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature Influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
*3) For earth current sensitive the precision does not depend on the nominal value but is referenced to 100 mA (with In =1 A) respectively. 500
mA (with In = 5 A)
Phase-to-ground and Residual Voltage Measurement
Frequency Range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ± 10%

Accuracy for measured values: Class 0.5
Amplitude error for V<Vn: ±0.5% of rated voltage or ±0.5 V
Amplitude error for V>Vn: ±0.5% of measured voltage or ±0.5 V
Accuracy for calculated values: Class 1.0

Amplitude error for V<Vn: ±1.0% of rated voltage or ±1.0 V
Amplitude error for V>Vn: ±1.0% of calculated voltage or ±1.0 V
Harmonics: Up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%

Up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1%
Frequency influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C up to +60°C
Specifications
Frequency measurement
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Precision: ±0.05% of fn within the range of 40-70 Hz at voltages >50 V
Voltage dependency: frequency acquisition of 5 V – 800 V
Energy measurement*
Energy counter error 1.5% of measured energy or 1.5% Sn*1h
Power Measurement*
S, P, Q: <±1% of the measured value or 0.1% Sn (for fundamental)

<±2% of the measured value or 0.1% Sn (for RMS)
Power Factor Measurement*
PF: ±0.01 of measured power factor or 1°

I > 30% In and S >2% Sn
*)Tolerance at 0.8 … 1.2 x Vn (with Vn=100V), |PF|>0.5, at fn, symmetrically feeded

Sn=1.73 * VT rating * CT rating
Specifications
Protection Elements Accuracy
The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip.
The accuracy of the operating time relates to the time between fault entry and
the time when the protection element is picked-up.
Reference conditions for all Protection Elements: sine wave, at rated frequency, THD < 1%
Measuring method: Fundamental
*2)
Overcurrent Protection Elements: Accuracy
I[x]
I> ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% In
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% In

t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Operating Time <36ms
At testing current >= 2 times pickup value (directional elements: <40ms)
Disengaging Time <55ms
t-char ±5% (according to selected curve)
t-reset (Reset Mode = t-delay) ±1% or ±10 ms
Overcurrent Protection Elements: Accuracy

I[x]
with selected Measuring method = I2
(Negative phase sequence current)
I> ±2% of the setting value or ±1% In
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Operating Time <60ms
At testing current >= 2 times pickup value
*2) For directional elements, accuracy of MTA: ±3° at I >20% In.
Ground Current Elements: Accuracy *2) *3)
IG[x]
IG> ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% In
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time
Starting from IG higher than 1.2 x IG> <45ms
t-char ±5% (according to selected curve)
t-reset (Reset Mode = t-delay) ±1% or ±10 ms
VE> ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% Vn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% Vn
*2) For directional elements, accuracy of MTA: ±3° at IG >20% In.

*3) For earth current sensitive the precision does not depend on the nominal value but is referenced to 100 mA (with In =1 A) respectively 500
mA (with In = 5 A)
Specifications
Because detection of direction is based on DFT values, direction elements

works only in nominal range (fN ± 5Hz).
Phase Directional Sensitivity: Value Release Level Blocking Level

I[x]
I - V (3-phases) I 10 mA 5 mA
V 0.35 V 0.25 V
Ground Directional Sensitivity: Value Release Level Blocking Level

IG[x]
IG meas - 3V0 IG meas 10 mA 5 mA
IG (sensitive) 1 mA 0.5 mA
3V0 0.35 V 0.25 V
IG calc - 3V0 IG calc 18 mA 11 mA
3V0 1V 0.8 V
IG calc - Ipol (IG meas ) IG calc 18 mA 11 mA
IG meas 10 mA 5 mA
IG (sensitive) 1 mA 0.5 mA
IG meas - Neg, IG calc - Neg I2 10 mA 5 mA
V2 0.35 V 0.25 V
Thermal Replica: Accuracy

ThR
Ib ±2% of the setting value or 1% In
Alarm ThR ±1.5 % of the setting value
Inrush Supervision: Accuracy

IH2
IH2/IH1 ±1% In
Dropout Ratio 5% IH2 or 1% In
Operating Time <30 ms *1)
*1) Inrush supervision is possible, if the fundamental Harmonic (IH1) > 0.1 In and 2 nd Harmonic (IH2) > 0.01 In.
Current unbalance: Accuracy *1)

I2>[x]
I2> ±2% of the setting value or 1% In
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
%(I2/I1) ±1%
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Operating Time <70 ms
Disengaging Time <50 ms
K ±5% INV
τ-cool ±5% INV
*1) Negative-sequence current I2 must be ≥ 0.01 x In, I1 must be ≥ 0.1 x In.
Specifications
Voltage Protection: Accuracy

V[x]
Pickup ±1.5% of the setting value or 1% Vn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% Vn for V>
103% or 0.5% Vn for V<
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Starting from 35 ms typically
V higher than 1.2 x pickup value for V> or
V lower than 0.8 x pickup value for V<
Residual Voltage Protection: Accuracy

VG[x]
Pickup ±1.5% of the setting value or 1% Vn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% Vn for VG>
103% or 0.5% Vn for VG<
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
Starting from 35 ms typically
V higher than 1.2 x pickup value for VG> or
V lower than 0.8 x pickup value for VG<
Low Voltage Ride Through Protection: Accuracy

LVRT
Voltage Pickup (Start) ±1.5% of the setting value or 1% Vn
Voltage Dropout Ratio (Recover) Adjustable, at least 0.5% Vn
Tripping time delay ±1% from settings or ±10 ms
Starting from
V lower than 0.9 x pickup value
Voltage unbalance: Accuracy *1)

V012[x]
Threshold ±2% of the setting value or 1% Vn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x Vn for V1> or V2>
103% or 0.5% x Vn for V1<
%(V2/V1) ±1%
t DEFT
±1% or ±10 ms
*1) Negative-sequence voltage V2 must be ≥ 0.01 x Vn, V1 must be ≥ 0.1 x Vn.
Specifications
Over Frequency Protection: Accuracy *1)

f>[x]
f> ±10 mHz at fn
Dropout < 0.05% fn
t ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time
Starting from f higher than f> + 0.02 Hz <100 ms
+ 0.1 Hz typically 70 ms
+ 2.0 Hz typically 50 ms
Disengaging time <120 ms
Under Frequency Protection: Accuracy *1)

f<[x]
f< ±10 mHz at fn
Dropout < 0.05% fn
t ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time
Starting from f lower than f< - 0.02 Hz <100 ms
- 0.1 Hz typically 70 ms
V Block f ±1.5% of the setting value or 1% Vn
Dropout ratio 103% or 0.5% Vn
*1) Accurracy is given for rated frequency fn±10%.
Rate of Change of Frequency: Accuracy *1)

df/dt
df/dt ±0.1 Hz/s 2)
t ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time
Starting from fn and df/dt > pickup + 0.1 Hz/s <200 ms
At df/dt > 2 times pickup typically <100 ms
At df/dt > 5 times pickup typically < 70 ms
*1) Accurracy is given for rated frequency fn±10%.

*2) 10% additional tolerance per Hz deviation from nominal frequency fn (e.g. at 45Hz, tolerance is 0.15Hz/s ).
Rate of Change of Frequency: Accuracy

DF/DT
DF ±20 mHz at fn
DT ±1% or ±10 ms
Vector surge: Accuracy

delta phi
delta phi ±0.5° [1-30°] at Vn and fn
Operating time <40 ms
Power Factor: Accuracy

PF[x]
Trigger-PF ± 0.01 (absolute) or ±1°
Reset-PF ± 0.01 (absolute) or ±1°
t-trip ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time *1)
Measuring Method = Fundamental <130 ms

Measuring Method = True RMS <200 ms
*1) The calculation of the Power Factor will be available 300 ms after the required measuring values (I > 2.5% In and V > 20% Vn) have
Specifications
energized the measuring inputs.
Directional Power Protection: Accuracy *1)

PQS[x] with Mode = S> or S<
Threshold ±3% or ±0.1% Sn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 1 VA for S>
103% or 1 VA for S<
t ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time 75 ms
Disengaging time 100 ms
Directional Power Protection: Accuracy *1)

PQS[x] with Mode = P> P< or Pr>/Pr<
Dropout Ratio 97% or 1 VA for P> and Pr>
103% or 1 VA for P< and Pr<
for setting values ≤ 0.1 Sn:

58% or 0.5 VA for P> and Pr>
142% or 0.5 VA for P< and Pr<
for setting values ≤ 0.01 Sn

58% or 0.2 VA for P> and Pr>
142% or 0.2 VA for P< and Pr<
t ±1% or ±10 ms
Directional Power Protection: Accuracy*1)

PQS[x] with Mode = Q>/Q< or Qr>/Qr<
Dropout Ratio 97% or 1 VA for Q> and Qr>
103% or 1 VA for Q< and Qr<
for setting values ≤ 0.1 Sn:

58% or 0.5 VA for Q> and Qr>
142% or 0.5 VA for Q< and Qr<
for setting values ≤ 0.01 Sn

58% or 0.2 VA for Q> and Qr>
142% or 0.2 VA for Q< and Qr<
t ±1% or ±10 ms
*1) Common reference conditions: at |PF|>0.5, symmetrically fed, at fn and 0.8 - 1.3 x Vn (Vn=100V)
Auto Reclosing: Accuracy

AR
t (all timers) ±1% or ±20 ms
Specifications
Q->&V< / Decoupling Tolerance

I min QV ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% In
VLL< QV ±1,5% of the setting value or ±1% Vn

Phi-Power ±1°
Q min QV ±3% of the setting value or ±0.1% Sn

Dropout Ratio 95%
t1-QV ±1% or ±10 ms

t2-QV ±1% or ±10 ms
ReCon / Reconnection Tolerance

VLL-Release ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% Vn
Dropout Ratio 98% or 0.5% Vn for VLL>
102% or 0.5% Vn for VLL<
f ±20 mHz at fn
Dropout < 0.05% fn
t-Release ±1% or ±10 ms

UFLS Tolerance
I min ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% In
V min ±1.5% of the setting value or ±1% Vn

Phi-Power ±2°
P min ±5% of the setting value or ±0.1% Sn

Dropout Ratio 95% or 0.5 W
f< ±10 mHz at fn

Dropout < 0.05% fn
t-UFLS ±1% or ±10 ms
Operating time
Starting from f lower than f< - 0.02 Hz <100 ms
Switch onto Fault: Accuracy

SOTF
I< ±1.5% of the setting value or1% In
t-enable ±1% or ±10 ms
Specifications
Cold Load Pickup: Accuracy

CLPU
Threshold ±1.5% of the setting value or1% In
I< ±1.5% of the setting value or1% In
t-Load OFF ±1% or ±15 ms
t-Max Block ±1% or ±15 ms
Settle Time ±1% or ±15 ms
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection: Accuracy

CBF
I-CBF> ±1.5% of the setting value or1% In
t-CBF ±1% or ±10 ms
Starting from I Higher than 1.3 x I-CBF>
Trip Circuit Supervision: Accuracy

TCS
t-TCS ±1% or ±10 ms
Current Transformer Supervision: Accuracy

CTS
ΔI ±2% of the setting value or 1.5% In
Dropout Ratio 94%
Alarm delay ±1% or ± 10 ms
Loss of Potential: Accuracy

LOP
t-Pickup ±1% or ±10 ms
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Please send comments to: kemp.doc@woodward.com
Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.
Woodward Kempen GmbH reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at
any time. Information provided by Woodward Kempen GmbH is believed to be correct
and reliable. However, Woodward Kempen GmbH assumes no responsibility unless
otherwise expressly undertaken.
This is the original manual (source).
© Woodward Kempen GmbH , all rights reserved
Woodward Kempen GmbH
Krefelder Weg 47 ⋅ D – 47906 Kempen (Germany)

Postfach 10 07 55 (P.O.Box) ⋅ D – 47884 Kempen (Germany)
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 1
Internet
www.woodward.com
Sales
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 331 or +49 (0) 711 789 54 510
Fax: +49 (0) 21 52 145 354 or +49 (0) 711 789 54 101
e-mail: SalesPGD_EUROPE@woodward.com
Service
Phone: +49 (0) 21 52 145 600 ⋅ Telefax: +49 (0) 21 52 145 455
e-mail: SupportPGD_Europe@woodward.com

MRA4-2 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MRA4-2 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MRA4-2 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Directional Feeder Protection

MRA4 Functional Overview

IRIG-B00X Control Programmable Logic Trend recorder

SNTP Switchgear Wear Intertripping * = Via Adaptive Parameters

Directional Feeder Protection

* Within every communication option only one communication protocol is usable.

Direct Commands................................................................................................................................................ 156

Date and Time..................................................................................................................................................... 357

Q->&V< Reactive-Power/Undervoltage Protection.............................................................................................. 637

High Voltage Tests ............................................................................................................................................. 835

Comments on the Manual

The manual serves as working basis for:

Engineers in the protection field,

Information Concerning Liability and Warranty

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury.

Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its

The programmable devices subject to this manual are designed for

The self-supervision contact has to be wired with the master

Transformer Differential Protection

If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service

Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is electro static-sensitive, some components more

1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the

Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.

Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper

© Woodward 2015 All Rights Reserved

The delivery scope includes:

Please check the consignment for completeness on arrival (delivery note).

Setting value: Option/features to be realised in the future CB.Latched

Device planning: <name>

internal message <name>.*int Alm L1

Parameter of a Module-Input (with <name>

Limit value monitoring with three I/ In

Time stage: A "1" at the Delay Timer Delay Timer

Negated output by "0" at the input. Thus the

[Paths are indicated by brackets.]

Software and Device names are written in italic.

1 2 3 Image References (Squares)

Please Refer To Diagram: Prot

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Please Refer To Diagram: Trip blockings will lead to a general trip.

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

name.Trip 23 name.Alarm 27d

Please Refer To Diagram: LOP.Ex FF VT

Please Refer To Diagram: LOP.Ex FF EVT

Please Refer To Diagram: SG.ON Cmd

Read Only-Lv0 Parameters can only be read within this level.

Prot-Lv1 This level enables execution of Resets and Acknowledgements

Prot-Lv2 This level enables modification of protection settings

Control-Lv1 This level enables control functions

Control-Lv2 This level enables modification of switchgear settings

Load Reference Arrow System